The URL can be used to link to this page

38A-107 ��. '' �.x:.,i`��'"'�ts��L�`v }gip„�� r�,�'., `'"` -'� .?�` � �, � � : r� � x �� std � v�zda ��'�� t .� �� 4 t E Eck, g3 � � � H" +y i 5'i M� ��r P } i �� ..y�� ,`� a �� " � n� � °� s � � � '�y �` �� ,��»t�� > � r �� .., x 4 FF Y � � a ., es `?, w Fil � �� x�;� � �� ?r �-„�aa F td2�„ ' � �k �� 2 ��Nc i hey � � � � '"�g �� e� � � �� ` tt�� s "'" t� � � � �� . � �� s.., .� � �. � � a"��,.` x ='+ �. .�� ti° �� s _ � � , S�xw w „ � a � �" �£� �� Awe '4'�� ' J m�'�� i +rr� : �. r � � � s - �.�. k�,,,,r= ,s,. r w ��;r'�,,•*• �� '� sk'3' ',�..�•� ��:Y'v ��,s „p=ct �`` '• ; �`"�- �t,. �,�- � ��r � fix` :. * '", � �� kya. .-. x � i gam* x, Y WON fp out L , a MOM NO d'. x � 'WiAz �a�ar ��k�� g �� ' fir � � � �` Wit.,• -t�� a r�' `eta �� x �1* 'tea a ;4_64U�" . - ft ddddddd it C MA�r �` t•'"rw``' �`�r -��.�a`��, � ��.,*, �.. ,$ g��,�`. ray, ,� a,NE Sol Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors,which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor and be included in his bid. 3.8 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL 16100-24 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for raceways, cable, and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.5 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and ductwork is in place. Lighting fixtures layout shown on the Drawings is typical layout, but may be modified to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to final construction conditions. Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of all lighting fixture locations. Provide support for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall confer with Ceiling Subcontractor and Heating and Ventilating Subcontractor to co- ordinate lighting system with other trades. D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover. E. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-plated brass screws and gasketed. F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height from the floor and shall hang plumb. G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment,they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances. 3.6 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18"above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations,receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. ELECTRICAL 16100-23 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 100%� required, conforming with the latest National Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors,recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 90" bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including,but not limited to the following: 1. Fire sating at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms,electrical rooms,vaults,storage rooms,kitchen,machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms,and receiving rooms. 5. Retain fire rating where back-to-back outlets occur in any rated wall. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.or Architect-Engineer approved equal,4"minimum thickness by the required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation ELECTRICAL 16100-22 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc A. The Multi-Meter Center shall be square D type EZ Meter-Pak, Meter Center, or approved equal. Multi-Meter Center shall be configured as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall verify meter socket type with Holyoke Gas and Electric prior to ordering equipment. B. 1. Mounting Location: Indoors 2. Utility Company: Mass Electric Company 3. Maximum SCR:42,000 AIC 4. Utility Power Feed 208/120V,30,4W. 5. Branch Circuits:Owner Panels a. 70-225A,208/120V 30,3W,7th jaw with bypass. 6. Branch Circuits: Residential Apartment a. 70-225A,208/120V 10,3W,5th jaw with bypass PART 3-INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If,in laying out his work,the Electrical Subcontractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his,the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders,mains,and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the National Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment,such as junction and pull boxes,control,and apparatus,shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces,except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise,all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where ELECTRICAL 16100-21 Village at Hospital Hill -Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc B. EQUIPMENT 1. Apartment panels shall be Jeron 2002 cameo-white device plates, equipped with Talk-Listen-Door and one extra pushbutton. Top of wall opening should be sixty inches or less from finished floor. Panel dimensions are 5'/2 x 5'/z x 8/16 in.deep. 2. Entrance two way speaker and push button panel shall be Jeron 3001 series, modular aluminum; flush mounted within a Jeron 3150 frame. Finish by Architect. Top of wail opening should be sixty inches or less from finished floor. Modular doors are extruded aluminum not less than .07 inches thick, and swing on concealed hinges. Two retaining screws keep door secure. 3. Panel assemblies are available with solid metal pushbuttons, Cat No. 3310; and recessed name lines. One push button and name line per apartment. Directory name strip by others. 4. Transformer shall be Jeron Cat No.8011, Class 2,UL listed and shall operate from 115 VAC power source. 5. Control shall be suited for independent dual door option entrances serve the same apartment, specify option 5020 Control and Jeron 8011 Heavy Duty Transformer. 6. Door release mechanism shall be Jeron Cat. No. 8109 narrow mortise type. Dimensions are 5-7/8 h.x 1-%w.x 1-11/16 in.deep. 7. ADA apartments will be equipped with ADA strobe modular. 8. Intercom system must be equipped to open the door at the location the person is pressing the button. 9. The Nursing building will be equipped with three locations. Each location will be able to buzz and talk to each apartment. The two location at the building will be equipped with the ability to open the door at the location of the person. 2.17 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet) A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed (including cabling)by the Electrical Contractor. B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with a stainless steel plate marked"Emergency' and a call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series. C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate marked"Emergency'. The unit shall include a six foot(6')long nylon pull cord. D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required transformers. E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation must be made at the point of origin. 2.18 MULTI-METER CENTER ELECTRICAL 16100-20 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 2.13 ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Electric service shall be size as shown on the Drawings, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase,4 wire,60 Hz,underground. B. New Electric Services shall be sized as shown on Drawings, 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, underground from existing pad mounted transformer. C. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electric Code. Ground cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp;bond water pipe sections as required by Section 250-81 MEC. Also install a concrete encased electrode as required by that section. D. Coordinate all service requirement with Mass Electrical Company, Inc. E. Service feed for utility work will be paid by Owner. 2.14 TELEPHONE SYSTEM A. Furnish and install raceway system with pull wire for telephone system service from telephone pole to backboard in lower level electrical room. Provide cabling up to outlets as indicated on plans. B. Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings outlets and wiring to make a complete system ready for connection to Telephone Company equipment to be installed. C. Each telephone outlet shall be a RJ45 modular jack, ivory, 4 conductor. D. Each outlet shall be wired with Cat 5e cable to telephone equipment backboard. E. Furnish and install terminal blocks at equipment backboard and in exterior terminal cabinets. 2.15 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM A. Furnish and install raceway system with pull wire for cable television system service from telephone pole to backboard in lower level electrical room. Provide cabling up to first apartment outlets as located on drawings and interconnect cabling to other integral apartment outlets as shown on drawings. B. Cable to be RG 6 cable. 2.16 APARTMENT INTERCOM/SECURITY SYSTEM REHAB A. GENERAL 1. Furnish and install a complete Jeron HP-101 Apartment Intercom/Security System, as manufactured by Jeron Electronic Systems, Inc., Chicago, Illinois 60657. (Telephone @ Wel-Design 413-596-2406.) Locate all equipment as shown on plans and wire in accordance with M.E.C. local codes and manufactures wiring diagram ELECTRICAL 16100-19 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc E. Installation 1. Installation shall be performed b Licensed installers in a workmanlike manner. The work shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers,all of whom are properly trained and qualified. 2. Wiring a. All wiring for the system shall be in accordance with Articles 760,725,and 800 of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local electrical codes. b. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be mounted upon and splices made in UL listed boxes.Wiring splices and transposing or changing of colors will not be permitted. C. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as'Fire Alarm System'with decal or approved markings d. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled'FIRE ALARM'. 3. Final Tests/Warranty a. The system shall be fully tested by the contractor and NICET certified technicians in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested. b. A copy of the final test report shall be submitted indicating proper functioning of the system and conformance to the specifications.The test shall be performed by factory-trained qualified technicians. Each and every device shall be tested,and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified.Final testing shall be performed by the same company that will hold and execute the Test and Inspection contract. C. The manufacturer shall guarantee all system equipment for a period of one (1)year from the date of final acceptance. d. The contractor shall guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1)year from the date of final acceptance of the system. 4. Training a. The contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a period of 4 hours,during normal business hours,to instruct the owner's designated personnel and fire department response teams on the operation of the system. ELECTRICAL 16100-18 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc mount applications. d. Detector Base—Standard Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North American 1-gang,3'/z or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box,or European BESA or 1-gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types. e. Manual Station—Double Action Single Stage Provide analog/addressable double action, single stage fire alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2'/2 (64mm)deep 1-gang boxes and 1 '/2(38mm)deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers. Manual station shall be keyed alike with Control Panel. f. Notification Appliances Provide low profile wall mount horn/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile horn/strobe shall produce a high level db output an offer a full line of A.D.A.compliant strobes. The horn/strobe shall mount to a standard one-gang electrical box and with an optional trim plate accommodate two-gang, octagonal or four inch square electrical boxes. (EST Genesis G1R-HOV110). Strobe only shall be EST Genesis G1 R-V110. g. Initiation&Control Modules 1. Relay Module Provide addressable control relay circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one(1)form C dry relay contacts rated at 24Vdc @ 2 amps (pilot duty)to control external appliances or equipment. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. 2. Monitor Module Provide addressable single input monitor modules as shown on plans for monitoring of all waterflow,tamper and supervisory devices. Addressable modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. h. Local 120V smoke shall be a Gentrax Type suitable for the application. ADA type shall have appropriate integral strobe, and located in all handicap apartments. ELECTRICAL 16100-17 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc 2. Fire Initiating Devices Intelligent System Devices: Provide intelligent analog devices where shown and required. Each device shall retain operating characteristics in non-volatile memory and conduct algorithms to distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms.All analog devices shall provide dual LED indicators, a green LED shall flash to denote active communication,and a red LED shall flash to denote an alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases which will provide a supervised remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry,or an auxiliary relay contact. In the event of an addressable loop communications failure,devices shall remain capable of initiating an alarm sequence. a. Duct Detector Housing Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an analog/ addressable detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided. b. SmokeDetector—Photoelectric Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/ addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal,trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five(5)sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100%of the allowable environmental compensation value. C. Heat Detectors—Fixed Temperature—ROR Heat Detector Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature/rate-of- rise detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F(57°C)and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C)per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft(21.3m)centers and be suitable for wall ELECTRICAL 16100-16 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. 7. Circuiting Guidelines.Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be electronically supervised and individually addressable.All wiring shall be as follows: a. Individual addressable modules shall be used to monitor waterflow,tamper, and status conditions from any related systems or conventional devices. b. Addressable control modules or relays shall provide auxiliary control functions. C. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a minimum of 25% spare capacity and be wired in a Class B,Style 4 fashion. d. As a minimum, power supplies and notification appliance circuits shall operate all devices shown plus 25%spare capacity,and be wired in a Class B,Style Y fashion. e. Audible and visual signals shall be circuited separately to allow continued operation of the visual signal in the event of a silencing of the audible signal. D. Field Mounted System Components 1. Power Supply System power supply(s)shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel Upon failure of normal (AC)power,the effected portion(s)of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries,from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section,in 48 hours maximum. All AC power connections shall be to the building's designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72—The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently mow► inside the each control panel the disconnect serves. ELECTRICAL 16100-15 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc C. Flash all visual signals throughout the building in a synchronized manner. d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence.Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence. e. Upon alarm initiation by an elevator lobby smoke detectororother designated recall device,recall all elevators that serve the floor of initialization to the main egress level.If the alarm initiates on the main egress level,return the elevator to the alternate floor as directed by the local authority having jurisdiction. Provide for shunt tripping of elevator power as shown and required by applicable codes. f. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location via the LCD display located at the FACP and at all remote annunciators g. Automatically shut down or control HVAC equipmentto initiate smoke control functions as required. Manual override controls and programmable relays shall be serve as an interface to the Building Automation System,if available. h. Operate prioritized outputs to release all magnetically held smoke doors and magnetically locked doors throughout the building. i. Activate the exterior weatherproof beacon. C. General Requirements 1. The fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications.The system operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory,shall be field programmable and capable of being edited with no factory involvement. 2. The system shall utilize broadcast polling techniques and microprocessor-based detectors to minimize the required response time and possible false alarms.Individual initiating and control devices shall retain pre-programmed response characteristics, history logging, and support electronic addressing.A system-wide response (alarm sequence)to an alarm condition shall take place within 3 seconds. 3. The system shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enables the user to set sensitivity parameters. All inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification.The system shall be capable of reporting the status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this information to a printer.The system shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty(maintenance alert),prior to false alarming. 4. The system shall be supported by standby batteries.In the event of a loss of primary power, batteries shall support 60 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. 5. The system shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization,and allow control by event, and may include cross zoning, stepping,and/or logic statement inputs. 6. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty.All equipment,materials and accessories covered by ELECTRICAL 16100-14 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc e. The Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). f. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Submit 12 complete sets of shop drawings to include: a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size,type and number of all conductors and devices. b. Large scale drawings of each panel showing module placement and spare capacity allowances. C. Address listing of all field devices shown on floor plans for coordination of LCD message text assignments. d. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these specifications.This equipment shall be subject to approval,and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. e. Provide calculations to support the size of standby batteries notification circuits and power supplies submitted.Calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw, voltage drop, wire size considerations, and spare capacity allowances. f. Confirmation that the equipment supplier will provide on-site project management and supervision during system installation,and perform system testing and instruction. 11. Conform to all UL standards for testing and provide certification of the completed installation. Provide the services of a factory trained technician for proper testing and operation of the inter-connect to monitoring system. 12. The equipment supplier shall conduct the initial programming of the system and a complete rack/test of hardware panels prior to delivery to the installing contractor. 13. Provide copies of Operating & Maintenance manuals with the request for final inspection.O&M Manuals shall include the following: a. All of the information submitted in the shop drawings. b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to the system, whether made as a field change or by a change order. C. Include a copy of the final test report, UL certificate and test contract. B. Sequence of Operation 1. The operation of a manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (system smoke, heat,water flow)shall automatically: a. Initiate the transmission of the alarm to Northampton Fire Department via data transmission to monitoring system. b. Sound a code 3 temporal evacuation signal over all audio circuits. ELECTRICAL 16100-13 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc .0"k, 4. Provide typewritten directories in all load centers. Hand written directories will not be acceptable. 5. Load centers shall be square-D type QO or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse, or Siemens. 2.12 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS FOR REHAB A. Scope 1. New analog/addressable fire detection,alarm and control system in compliancewith the specifications and drawings.The system shall interface to other building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as described herein. 2. A new fire alarm control panel is a microprocessor based fire alarm system shall be installed, with digital communicator. New system shall be Notifier, Edwards, or equal. 3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; will maintain operating characteristics stored in dedicated EEPROM memory, identify its' exact location, and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications. 4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the related contract documents. 5. All exceptions, variances and substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these specifications shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer at the time of bid. 6. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit,multiplex fire alarm communications according to the contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition. 7. Final connections,testing,and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct supervision of the system supplier. Provide NICET certified and factory trained technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative. a. Provide a NICET certified technician factory trained on the systems for proper operation and interconnect to monitoring system. 8. Provide equipment manufactured by Edwards Systems Technology/EST. This constitutes the quality and performance of the equipment and matches existing system. 9. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards: a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose. b. NFPA standards 70,72,90A,92A, and 101. C. BOCA Basic Building Code-Latest Edition. 1000%, d. Current State Building Code. ELECTRICAL 16100-12 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. G. Panelboard shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D [-LINE,or equal by General Electric or Siemens-ITE. 2.10 PANELBOARDS REHAB A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as indicated on the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the"distributed phase" or"phase sequence"type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratings shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring,both breaker and neutral,shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. Hand written directories will not be acceptable. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D,Type NQOD for 120/208 volts,or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse,or ITE. 2.11 UNIT LOAD CENTERS 1. Furnish and install deadfront load centers incorporating circuit breakers of the number, rating, and type as noted on Drawings. Load centers shall have NEMA 1 general-purpose enclosures and shall be surface or recessed as shown on Drawings. 2. Load centers shall be listed as suitable for use as service equipment. 3. Interiors,with exception of branch breakers, shall be factory assembled. 'A"` ELECTRICAL 16100-11 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable,with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection,with"Hand-Off-Auto"selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure,Square D,Class 8502. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter,fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. 4. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as required for the service. E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered. 2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboard shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as required. B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and"OFF". D. Each panelboard,as a complete unit,shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps. E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over 48"long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. ELECTRICAL 16100-10 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type,complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size;T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers to match existing fixtures are listed. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect. These fixtures must match existing. 2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting,and controlling devices for motors where shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that,during normal operation of the switch,the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover,with positive pad-locking provisions in the"OFF" position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R(rainproof)is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel,electro- deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 or 600 volts AC,as shown. 5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures,or equal. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the plans. 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. ELECTRICAL 16100-9 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 1. Switches shall be flush mounted,specification Grade,20 amp.,120/277 volt AC with side connection screw terminals and toggle handle. 2. Switches shall be single pole, double pole, 3-way, 4-way, or key operated as indicated by the symbol. Where more than one switch is shown at one outlet,they shall be installed under one plate in an order appropriate to the location of the outlets being controlled. 3. Receptacles shall be flush mounted rated for 20 amp at 125 volts., composition base suitable for side wiring having polarized slots and U-shaped grounding slot, and break-off lug for two circuit installation. 4. Heavy duty receptacles shall be polarized with composition base and pressure type terminals,three or four-pole as required for service as indicated by symbol. 5. Wall plates throughout living areas shall be impact resistant thermoplastic in Ivory and stainless steel satin finish in kitchens and laundry. Plates over grouped devices shall be suitably ganged. Telephone plate shall have an insulated bushed hole. 6. Devices shall be furnished by Hubbell, Leviton,or equal to the following Arrow-Hart numbers: a. Light Switches,single pole—No. 19911, 20 amp, 120/277 volts, Ivory. b. Light Switches,3-way—No. 19931,20 amp. 120/277 volts, Ivory. C. Light Switches,4-way—No. 19941, 20 amp. 120/277 volts, Ivory, d. Single Receptacles, No.53611,20 amp.3 wire, 125 volts, Ivory. e. Duplex Receptacles, No. 53621,20 amp.,3 wire, 125 volts, Ivory. f. GFI Receptacles, No. 53421, Ivory, Satin finish stainless steel plate. g. Exterior weatherproof GFI Receptacles No.GF5362,provide gasketed lock type covers No. 5205WO. h. Single pole switch with clear lighted handle(to indicate when switch is"on") ,Arrow-Hart No. 1991 PLC. i. Laundry dryer outlet to be single flush Type 30A, 125/250 volts with stainless steel wall plate. j. Electric range outlets to be single flush Type 50A, 125/250 volts with stainless steel wall plate. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced, at no expense to the owner. ELECTRICAL 16100-8 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC and schedule 80 PVC under traffic areas,with solvent welded fittings,or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3"and larger. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98%conductivity copper,with 600 volt insulation,and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN,solid. C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN,stranded. D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger,Type XHHW,stranded. 00W E. Branch circuit wiring and feeders to apartment unit load centers, may be Type MC cable. F. Type NM cable may be used within apartment units only, as approved by the local authority having jurisdiction. G. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. H. Wire and Cable to be by Rome,Carol,American, AFC,or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum,threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. B. Other outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel as manufactured by Steel City Electrical Co., General Electric Co.,Raco,or approved equal. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. ELECTRICAL 16100-7 Village at Hospital Hill - Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc aft%, 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All cable and raceway (except surface metal raceway) shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,except that in rooms without ceilings, horizontal runs only may be exposed at ceilings. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance, Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of complete instructions for the repair, maintenance, and operation of all systems installed under his Contract. These instructions shall be typed or printed, and each set bound separately with durable covers. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person or persons as the Architect and/or Owner may designate,regarding the care and use of all systems and all apparatus pertaining thereto. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one(1)year after date of substantial completion,and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. `` B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Section 01700. PART 2-MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed vertically in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor,and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type. ELECTRICAL 16100-6 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Section 01500. The cost of the service and the cost of power consumed shall be borne by the General Contractor. Service shall be metered, 120/240 volt, single phase, sized as required. Branch circuit wiring and duplex receptacles shall be as directed by the General Contractor. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,plans, elevations,and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,furnishing such fittings,traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools,machinery,scaffolding,and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,60 cycle,single phase electric energyfrom the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs,sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. ELECTRICAL 16100-5 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc H. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until substantial completion of the project by the Owner. I. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. All materials used shall be U.S. made, with the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, new,full weight,and first class in every respect,without defects,and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. ...�, 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job,the Electrical Subcontractor shall submitto the Architect eight(8) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'data sheets,and Shop Drawings, giving all details,dimensions,capacities, etc.of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review,making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Subcontractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. ELECTRICAL 16100-4 A Village at Hospital Hill-Phase l August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code,Electrical Code,Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations,the latter shall govem. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors'work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever;and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports,inserts,etc.,hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Subcontractor to give proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends,offsets,etc. The Electrical Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. ELECTRICAL 16100-3 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc SECTION 16100- ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 INTENT A. The Subcontractor under this Section shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances and equipment necessary for completion of the electrical system,in accordance with this Section of the Specifications and applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings,including,but not limited to, the following: 1. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. 2. Multi-Meter Center 3. Feeders. 4. Panelboards. 5. Circuit Breaker Load Centers. '"w 6. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. 7. Call for Aid System. 8. Fire Alarm System. 9. Apartment Intercom/Entry System. 10. Cable Television System. 11. Telephone System. 12. Wiring Devices and Plates. 13. Motor Starters and Disconnect. 14. Electric service. 15. Power Wiring to Motors and Equipment Furnished by Other Trades or Owner including Final Connections to Equipment. 16. Arrange for Inspections and Perform Tests. 17. Guarantee and Instructions. ELECTRICAL 16100-2 Village at Hospital Hill- Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc INDEX SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION 1.1 INTENT 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING 1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 FIRE SAFING 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.8 ALTERNATES 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.14 WORK CONCEALED 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1.16 GUARANTEE 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 2-MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS 2.2 WIREWAYS 2.3 CONDUCTORS 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 2.5 NAMEPLATES 2.6 WIRING DEVICES 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 2.10 PANEL BOARDS 2.11 UNIT LOAD CENTERS 2.12 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 2.13 ELECTRIC SERVICE 2.14 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 2.15 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM 2.16 APARTMENT INTERCOM/SECURITY SYSTEM REHAB 2.17 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM (Handicap Toilet) 2.18 MULTI-METER CENTER ELECTRICAL 16100-1 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.13 ALTERNATES A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all plumbing work specified and shown on the Drawings less the cost of all extra work described in the alternates. END OF SECTION HVAC 15600-38 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. B. Cabinet Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate. 3.12 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: '* 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for raceways, cable, and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. HVAC 15600-37 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -AW% over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass"S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved HVAC 15600-36 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the HVAC Contractor. 3.7 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an ►+ 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes HVAC 15600-35 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE"value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or HVAC 15600-34 #poll Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 3-INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. '► D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum HVAC 15600-33 Village at Hospital Hill Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Direct expansion coil shall have copper tubes with aluminum plate fins and galvanized steel casing. Fins with belled collars shall be bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion. Coil shall have supply and discharge connections at the same end. 4. Refrigerant distributors complete with nozzles shall be installed on the cooling coil. Distributor nozzles shall be sized for use with R22. Asilk HVAC 15600-32 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. the heating plant shall be started and operationally tested in the presence of a representative of the heating plant manufacturer. 2.30 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Furnish and install stationary extruded aluminum wall louvers with drainable blades, as manufactured by Greenheck Model ESD-403 or equal by Airolite Co.or Ruskin B. Louvers shall be installed straight and plumb and caulked (or sealed) around perimeter to assure adequate sealing to adjacent surfaces. C. Louvers shall be AMCA certified, 4" deep. Heavy gauge extended aluminum drainable blades positioned at 37°and 45° angles 4" on center. The louvers shall be provided with a 1"flange and expanded aluminum bird screen internally mounted. D. Louvers shall be factory painted with a Kynar finish to a color selected by Architect. 2.31 GAS FIRED MAKE UP AIR UNITS A. Gas Fired condensing furnaces shall be direct-vent, natural gas fired with single stage fan assisted combustion system. Furnaces shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, York, or approved equal. B. Furnace designs shall be certified by the American Gas Association for both natural and L.P. gas. Limit setting and rating data shall be established and approved under standard rating conditions using American National Standards Institute standards. The Integrated System Control shall have solid state devices, which continuously monitor for presence of flame, when the system is in the heating mode of operation. Dual solenoid combination gas valve and regulator provide extra safety. C. Furnace Shall have a durable, cycle tested, heavy gauge aluminized steel heat exchanger, and shall have a low energy power vent blower to increase efficiency and provide a positive discharge of gas fumes to the outside. Burners shall have multiport in shot burners. D. The integrated system control shall provide total control of furnace limit sensors, blowers, gas valve, flame control and shall include self diagnostics for ease of service. The Blower shall have a four speed, direct drive blower motor. The blower door safety switch shall prevent or terminate furnace operation when the blower door is removed. E. Heavy gauge steel and "wrap-around" cabinet construction shall be used in the cabinet with baked-on enamel finish for strength and beauty. The heat exchanger section of the cabinet shall be completely lined with foil faced fiberglass insulation. Gas Furnaces shall have an Adaptive Heat Up Silicon Nitride Hot Surface Ignition system. The integrated system control shall light the main burners upon a demand for heat from the room thermostat. F. DX Coil Section: (Mounted at unit discharge) 1. The upflow or horizontal cooling coil section shall consist of a condensate pan, metering device, and a fully insulated casing. 2. Condensate drain pan shall be fully insulated and shall extend under the entire coil area. Condensate drain connection shall be threaded with size as shown on Drawings. HVAC 15600-31 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -Mft� mounting clips and bands. Base assembly shall be fire-tested and dielectric tested. F. Each module's gas controls shall be factory-wired and tested, and suitable for individual step firing without reducing module's thermal efficiency. Heating plant control system may be provided by the manufacturer with factory-supplied wiring diagram. The heating plant shall be controlled by Hydrotherm Level III control system. G. Manufacturer shall provide an approved engineering drawing of the modular heating plant installation including piping, wiring and controls. After completion of installation, the heating plant shall be started and operationally tested in the presence of a representative of the heating plant manufacturer. 2.29 HOT WATER MODULAR HEATING UNIT—SOUTH HOME A. Furnish and install, where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Gas-fired cast iron modular hot water boilers, with vent dampers, complete with one or more batteries of boiler modules and accessories. B. Heating plant shall be A.G.A. design certified for an input of 750,000 BTUH and a heating capacity of 618,000 BTUH and an 1=B=R net output rating of 537,000 BTUH for automatic operation with natural gas. Heating plant shall by HYDROTHERM MULTI- TEMP MODEL MR750C. C. Each module shall be ASME coded for 100 psi working pressure(Section IV)and completely factory-assembled to include automatic combination gas valve with intermittent pilot, transformer, atmospheric-type lanced aluminized-steel burners, base, absorption unit, and hi-limit aquastat. Modules shall be pre-wired with plug-in type connections for vent dampers. Manufacturer shall provide an ASME pressure relief valve with a capacity to the module's gross output, a temperature/pressure indicator, a drain valve, a vent damper, as applicable, and a draft hood for each module. Units shall come complete with Massachusetts stamp and approval. D. Each battery of modules shall be equipped with a manual reset hi-limit and low water cut-off. Manufacturer shall provide insulated factory-finished steel jackets for assembly into one complete extended jacket for each battery of modules. Headers, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall be included for each battery of modules with self-aligning couplings, pipe nipples and unions for connection to modules. E. Each module's cast iron absorption unit construction shall be of horizontal section design to provide zig-zag water flow through base, intermediate and top sections, with maximum heat transfer from deep-ribbed iron surfaces, assembled with cast iron push nipples. Cope seal shall be employed between sections to provide permanent gas-tight seal between sections. Sections shall be held together with draw rods. Flue collector shall be of same quality cast iron as absorption unit. Absorption unit shall be held to cast iron side plates and lined with high-temperature, mineral fibre insulating panels by mounting clips and bands. Base assembly shall be fire-tested and dielectric tested. F. Each module's gas controls shall be factory-wired and tested, and suitable for individual step firing without reducing module's thermal efficiency. Heating plant control system may be provided by the manufacturer with factory-supplied wiring diagram. The heating plant shall be controlled by Hydrotherm Level III control system. G. Manufacturer shall provide an approved engineering drawing of the modular heating plant installation including piping, wiring and controls. After completion of installation, HVAC 15600-30 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Horizontal units shall be equipped with horizontal and vertical adjustable discharge louvers. G. Unit heaters shall be Modine,Trane, AAF, or equal, as shown on Drawings. H. Vertical unit shall be equipped with anemostat (4)cone diffusers 2.25 KICK SPACE HEATERS A. Furnish and install kick space heaters as shown on drawings. Kick space heaters shall be equal to Beacon—Morris Twin-Flo III Model K-42 complete with Aquastat fan control. 2.26 WALL HEATER A. Furnish and install wall heaters as shown on drawings. Wall heaters shall be equal to Beacon-Morris Twin-Flo III recessed kit Model W42,with built in controls. 2.27 WIND INDUCED VENTILATORS A. Furnish and install wind inducted ventilators equal to Penn-Ventilator"Turbine"Series. 2.28 HOT WATER MODULAR HEATING UNIT—NURSES HOME A. Furnish and install, where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Gas-fired cast iron modular hot water boilers, with vent dampers, complete with one or more batteries of boiler modules and accessories. B. Heating plant shall be A.G.A. design certified for an input of 1,800,000 BTUH and a heating capacity of 1,440,000 BTUH and an 1=B=R net output rating of 1,252,000 BTUH for automatic operation with natural gas. Heating plant shall by HYDROTHERM MULTI-TEMP MODEL MR1800B. C. Each module shall be ASME coded for 100 psi working pressure(Section IV) and completely factory-assembled to include automatic combination gas valve with intermittent pilot, transformer, atmospheric-type lanced aluminized-steel burners, base, absorption unit, and hi-limit aquastat. Modules shall be pre-wired with plug-in type connections for vent dampers. Manufacturer shall provide an ASME pressure relief valve with a capacity to the module's gross output, a temperature/pressure indicator, a drain valve, a vent damper, as applicable, and a draft hood for each module. Units shall come complete with Massachusetts stamp and approval. D. Each battery of modules shall be equipped with a manual reset hi-limit and low water cut-off. Manufacturer shall provide insulated factory-finished steel jackets for assembly into one complete extended jacket for each battery of modules. Headers, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall be included for each battery of modules with self-aligning couplings, pipe nipples and unions for connection to modules. E. Each module's cast iron absorption unit construction shall be of horizontal section design to provide zig-zag water flow through base, intermediate and top sections,with maximum heat transfer from deep-ribbed iron surfaces, assembled with cast iron push nipples. Cope seal shall be employed between sections to provide permanent gas-tight seal between sections. Sections shall be held together with draw rods. Flue collector shall be of same quality cast iron as absorption unit. Absorption unit shall be held to cast iron side plates and lined with high-temperature, mineral fibre insulating panels by HVAC 15600-29 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. oft*, G. Pumps shall be Bell & Gossett Series 1510 Universal, or equal by Taco, Armstrong, Weinmann. 2.23 CABINET TYPE UNIT HEATER A. The unit heater shall be of the blow-through cabinet type with hot water heating coil. The capacity of the unit heater shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gage furniture grade steel. All exposed corners and edges shall be rounded. The front panel shall be fastened by quick-acting alien head cam locks for easy access. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, prime coated, and all exposed surfaces shall be finished in a baked enamel, color to be selected by the Architect. Units shall be floor, ceiling, or wall mounted, as scheduled. C. Fan shall be all steel, multi-blade, forward curved, centrifugal type fan which has been statically and dynamically balanced to eliminate vibration. Fans shall be assembled to a fan board and mounted below the coil in the unit casing. D. The motor shall be of the PSC open type, sleeve bearing with resilient mount in the unit. The motor shall be suitable for electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings. E. The heating coil shall be serpentine connected and shall be of the finned copper tubing type and shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the working pressure. F. Provide four(4) sets of throw-away filters located in a frame in the return air stream. The filters shall be easily removable by removing the front access panel. One(1)set shall be installed during construction phase. Immediately following substantial completion and/or beneficial occupancy, the HVAC Subcontractor shall install the second, clean set and deliver the two(2) remaining sets to the Owner. G. Provide units with fresh air capability, including damper with seals and wall box, as scheduled. H. Units shall be Sterling, or equal by American Air Filter, Trane, Modine, and shall be complete with motor starters, tamperproof access doors and front panels, recessing flanges, and extended motor oilers. 2.24 UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heaters shall be of the vertical and horizontal blow-through propeller fan type with hot water heating coil. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge furniture steel. It shall be phosphatized and completely dip painted with a heavy duty baked enamel. C. Coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine copper tube. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically attached to the coil by expansion. All connections and U-bends shall be electrically induction-brazed to the tube. The coil shall be tested for 100 psi. D. Fan shall be selected for quiet operation and shall be factory balanced. E. Motor shall have electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings. Motor shall be equipped with permanent lubricated bearings. *" HVAC 15600-28 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Type "B" shall be Sterling "Senior" SR %-55, 2 '/< x 2 1/2 . with aluminum fins ..11" thick, 55 fins per foot, '/W tube size, single tier element, and with water rate of 4 gpm. See schedule on drawings,for Btuh's foot @ average temperate. D. Furnish and install wall to wall cover with inside and outside corner trim, hinged access cover at each valve, slice pieces, pipe hangers, dampers, and all necessary accessories required. All radiator trim pieces shall be secured to cover with #10 sheet metal screws in all area's. 2.21 CIRCULATING PUMPS (in Line Type) A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be cast iron, bronze fitted. B. Pumps shall be of the vertically split case type making possible complete servicing without breaking piping connections. The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a ceramic seat. C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. D. Pumps shall be Bell &Gossett Series 80, or equal by Armstrong or Taco. 2.22 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS (Base Mounted Type) A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal base mounted type,especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be cast iron, bronze fitted. B. Pump shall be of the vertically split case, end suction design, making possible complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. Motor to pump connection shall be of the flexible coupler type. The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a Tungsten Carbide insert. The pump shall be equipped with oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings for smooth and quiet operation. C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. All pump motors shall be premium efficiency. The electrical characteristics of the motor shall be as shown on the Drawings. The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. D. Base shall be of a size suitable for the pump, motor, and shaft, and shall be constructed of cast iron or welded steel. A concrete base 6" higher than the surrounding floor shall be provided. Construct base and install as shown by the detail on the Drawings. E. After completion of the system and before start-up of the pump, the pump shall be lubricated in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A metal instruction plate shall be attached to the pump in a location where it is clearly visible. These instructions shall indicate the recommended lubricant, the points of lubrication, and the recommended frequency of lubrication. F. The HVAC Subcontractor shall check,test, and start each base mounted pump and shall align the pump with a dial indicator within 0.002". Discharge and suction readings shall be recorded and forwarded for record purposes. HVAC 15600-27 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. F. Service and Guarantee: 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. 2.20 FINNED RADIATION A. Furnish and install finned tube radiators as shown on Drawings. Radiator assemblies shall be 1=B=R rated, Ted Reed Thermal, Sterling, Vulcan, or equal. B. Type "A" shall be Sterling "Virsa Line" Style "S" Low Profile, slope top enclosure with C 1/4-35, 3 '/4" sq. with aluminum fins .20" thick, 50 fins per foot, 3/4" tube size, single tier element, average water temperature as indicated on drawings, and with ball bearing cradle brackets. HVAC 15600-26 !�* Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz &Company Architects, Inc. b. The temperature control system shall optimize the hot water reset in the following manner: (1) Sensors located in the hot water supply and hot water return of each system shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from outdoor temperature by modulating the boiler thru the three way control valve. Hot Water System: 0 degrees= 200 degrees HWS 65 degrees=90 degrees HWS C. Occupied Pump Control: 1. In the occupied mode, the lead pump shall run continuously unless the outdoor temperature is above 65 degrees F. 2. The lead lag control shall alternate the lead pump. d. Unoccupied Pump Control: 1. The hot water pumps shall remain off(both pumps)when outside temperature is above 58 degrees. When outside temperature AV*^ falls below 58 degrees, one pump shall cycle on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to maintain higher setting. 9. Pressure Differential Control a. Furnish and install pressure differential controls for each building. Sensors located on the forth floor loop shall modulate the pressure differential control valve located in the boiler room of each building in a manor to control system pressure at 20 psi. 10. Unit Heater, Kick Space Heater, Floor, and Wall Heaters a. Furnish and install strap on aquastat for each unit heater and kick space heater. Aquastat shall be wired to control fan operation such that fan shall run when water temperature reaches setpoint. E. Adjustment and Calibration: 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal HVAC 15600-25 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 00% D. Sequences: 1. Unit Heaters a. Room thermostat, , shall cycle fan to satisfy space demands for heat. On lower demand, the fan shall be de-activated. 2. Toilet Exhaust Fans: a. All toilet exhaust fans shall be light switch controlled. 3. Guards a. Furnish and install heavy duty guards on all thermostats located in the following areas: 1. Public, Halls, Corridors, Lobbies, and Entries. 4. Fan Coil Control: a. Winter Occupied Cycle: 1. Room thermostat through unit mount controller shall modulate the three way coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating requirement for room. b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle: 1. Same as occupied mode above. 5. Radiators a. Each radiator and heater shall be subject to a 2 way electric activated control valve. On a call for heat as sensed through the living unit thermostat the control valve shall open and when temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close. 6. Boiler and Water Heater Combustion Air a. ATC contractor shall furnish and install wiring, relays, actuators, dampers as required to interlock inlet and discharge air dampers with the boiler/water heater start circuit. 7. Boiler Optimization a. Boilers shall cycle on and off to maintain loop water temperature. b. Provide and install a Texmar Boiler/Water temperature controller to perform this operation and incorporate domestick hot water priority controls, combustion air controls, and water reset controls. 8. Each building shall be divided into one master zone area for heat distribution: a. Each master zone area above shall be supplied by two pumped hot water or heating only distribution systems. HVAC 15600-24 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the Owner's before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the"as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings, and one(1) CADD disk of these Drawings. D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. HVAC 15600-23 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low%" B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.18 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12"x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal" (12"x 12"). 2.19 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Scope of Work 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by this Contractor. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 5. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will HVAC 15600-22 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI 816.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.16 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.17 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends. HVAC 15600-21 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,.% 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI 816.9, except ANSI 816.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets"or"Threadolets", or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM 8306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM 8280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI 816.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 816.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 616.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with HVAC 15600-20 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: 1. Hot Water supply and Return: a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in. C. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. 2. Condensate Drain. a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in. C. Runouts 2'/2 in. to 4 in.: 1 in. 3. Refrigerant Piping. a. Runouts up to 2 in: 1-1/2 in. 2.15 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME 831.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1. Hot Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type"L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. Oil piping shall be schedule 40 steel or type K copper 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. HVAC 15600-19 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AWW, flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. All exhaust air ducts in attic shall be insulated. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be fiberglass insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal with all service contract. 7. All hot water, condensate return, and make up water piping shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover,thickness to be as listed below. HVAC 15600-18 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet valves combination diffuser- strainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 in. diameter openings for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed after system start-up. The orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand a pressure differential equal to pump shut-off head and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross section area of the pump suction opening.Valve length shall be no less than 2- 1/2 times the pump connection diameter. The units shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry the weight of the suction piping. I. Triple Duty Valves 1. Fumish and install as shown on Drawings a triple duty valve of the size and type required. The triple duty valve shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or approved equal. Triple-duty valve shall be of the same manufacturer as the pumps. 2. Valves shall be a non-slam check valve with a spring-loaded weighted contoured disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and positive shut-off. Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure. Units shall be installed on the discharge side of the pump in a horizontal or vertical position with steam up. This unit shall be cast iron body construction suitable for maximum working pressure of 175 psig and maximum operating temperature of 300 degrees F. 2.13 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter& Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger-Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10'intervals. C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.14 INSULATION A. All air supply, return and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure HVAC 15600-17 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 10% strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current,which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.11 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.12 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions. Expansion tanks shall be equal to Bell & Gossett PTA series capacity as shown on Drawings. B. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in. steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return to side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. C. Expansion tank fitting shall Taco"Taco—Trot" No.438. D. Tank drainer shall have drain body with air vent tube, Taco No. 440, with hose end drain valve. Pipe with auxiliary drain to within 6 ft. 0 in. of finish floor. E. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. Air separators shall be Spirovent "Air Separator' line size, with drain valve and strainer with automatic air vent. F. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. G. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. H. Pump Suction Diffusers 1. Furnish and install at each pump a suction diffuser of the size and type required. Suction diffusers shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or approved equal. Suction diffusers shall be of the same manufacturer as the pumps. HVAC 15600-16 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco,Williams&Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. 2.8 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2oF subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: *. 1. Hot water heating system: 25-240oF 2.9 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #11068) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1. Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.10 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile HVAC 15600-15 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Furnish back draft damper and spring vibration isolators with each exhaust fan. E. Fans shall be Greenheck Model SP, or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air. 2.7 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type. C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves-Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller-Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger- Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931. 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes-Tour&Anderson Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or HVAC 15600-14 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Top Exhaust Register(TER) -Titus Model 271 FL/AG-15 aluminum construction, double deflection,white finish, with opposed blade damper. D. Top Supply Registers (TSR)-Titus Model CT-980 Fixed Aluminum Bar with '/4" spacing and type-11 border. E. Bottom Return Register (BRR) - Titus Model 33 RFL 300 reflection register with opposed blade damper. 2.4 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1. Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird screen, and Kynar 500 finish. 2.05 ROOF VENTILATORS (CENTRIFUGAL ROOF TOP) A. Roof ventilators shall be of the belt or direct drive centrifugal type, as shown on the Drawings, with spun aluminum housing for roof mounting, and shall be completely weatherized. Capacity shall be AMCA certified. Direct drive ventilators shall be fur- nished with manufacturer's standard solid state speed controller. B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. C. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed weatherproof housing outside of the air stream. Furnish with single or 3 pole disconnect switch mounted in motor compartment, with factory wiring from disconnect to motor. Provide wiring raceway from motor compartment to curb cap. D. The fan shall be installed on an acoustic lined aluminum roof curb as detailed on the Drawings. Motor operated low leakage backdraft dampers with edge and end seals shall be installed in the curb of the unit. Curb to be 12" high, without cant. Furnish wiring pigtail on damper motor. Curbs shall be constructed to keep fans level to less than 1/16" per foot. E. The entire air outlet of the fan shall be protected by 1/2" x 1/2" aluminum mesh securely installed in place. F. Fan and curb shall be Greenheck Model G and GB with Type GPF curb or approved equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air. 2.6 IN-LINE EXHAUST FANS A. Exhaust fans shall be of the direct drive centrifugal type, as shown on the Drawings, with galvanized housing for in-line or ceiling mounting, and shall be completely weatherized. Capacity shall be AMCA certified. B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. AM C. The motor shall be fully enclosed. Motor shall be heavy duty TEFC type. HVAC 15600-13 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"Ok P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. S. All exhaust ducts serving shower/bathrooms shall be aluminum. T. All elevator shaft ventilation ducts shall be 14 gauge. U. All boiler and water heater flue and chimney shall be metalbestos type IPS double wall insulated flue listed for 1"clearance. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings, 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anernostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. AVWA B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish, with opposed blade damper. HVAC 15600-12 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1" x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6"centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch duct and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings or as required by Code, fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. HVAC 15600-11 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,K E. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. If equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show acceptable equipment and be resubmitted. F. The approval of equipment does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of Shop Drawing errors in details, sizes, quantities, wiring diagram, arrangement, and dimensions which deviate from the Specifications, Contract Drawings, and/or job conditions as they exist. Unless the Contractor specifically requests in writing, changes, substitutions, or deletions of specific Contract Document requirements with respect to any submissions, approval of the Shop Drawing by the Architect does not constitute acceptance. Approval of shop drawings containing errors does not relieve the Contractor from making corrections at his expense. PART 2-MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co- ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections V-6"wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". HVAC 15600-10 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. 1.20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall prepare a complete set of mylar background Drawings at minimum 1/4 in. equals 1 ft. 0 in. showing architectural and structural features and other information as needed for coordination layout. Background Drawings shall be prepared under this Section. B. Circulate mylars among trades as necessary to show all information outlined below. Each trade shall sign and date each coordination Drawing. Co-ordinate all conflicts between trades prior to submitting drawing to the Architect. C. The information to be contained on the Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Insert and sleeve locations if required by the Architect. 2. Structural, partition/room layout, ceiling grid, and other information needed for co-ordination including bottom of steel elevations. 3. All fire walls and smoke partitions. 4. Equipment layouts and egress routes for equipment removal. 5. Sheet metal work layout including bottom of duct elevations. 6. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Fire Protection pipe routing including center line of pipe elevations. 7. Valves including valve tag numbers. 8. Access panels. 9. Electrical light fixtures, cable trays, panelboards, etc. Each trade shall show his work on the background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Drawing shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services. D. Fabrication shall not begin until the final mylar transparencies of all co-ordination drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Architect. Review of coordination Drawings shall not diminish the responsibility under this Contract for final co-ordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with the architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and other work. HVAC 15600-9 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. Awk 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co- ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS HVAC 15600-8 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site, which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. HVAC 15600-7 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. equipment must be co-ordinated with the Owner, and is limited to areas designated by the Owners. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1.13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three(3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the HVAC 15600-6 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ! ' A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and Alm fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and HVAC 15600-5 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,,,* F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one(1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Owners Maintenance Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and HVAC 15600-4 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 15. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be ow responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. HVAC 15600-3 Village at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,.w„ SECTION 15600-HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1. Fan coil units. 2. Unit heaters and radiators. 3. Boilers, burners, and related equipment. 4. Piping systems for hot water, supply and return. 5. Duct systems for make up air and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, boilers and water heater flues. 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 8. Make up air unit. 9. Temperature Control System. 10. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. 11. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by an Independent Balancing Contractor 12. Guarantee. 13. Instructions. Awk. 14. Record Drawings. HVAC 15600-2 1 at Hospital Hill Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SFCTICN 15600-HVAC PART 1 -GENFRAL PART 3-INSTALLATION 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING 1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS 1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 INSULATION 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 IDENTIFICATION 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 SPARE PARTS 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 FIRE SAFING 1.13 WORK CONCEALED 3.13 ALTERNATES 1.14 GUARANTEE 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 PROTECTION 1.17 CLEANING 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS 1.20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS PART -MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES,AND REGISTERS 2.4 LOUVERS 2.5 ROOF VENTILATORS (CENTRIFUGAL ROOF 2.6 TOP) 2.7 IN-LINE EXHAUST FANS 2.8 VALVES 2.9 THERMOMETERS 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.11 UNIONS 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES 2.13 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES 2.14 HANGERS 2.15 INSULATION 2.16 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.17 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS 2.18 STRAINERS 2.19 ACCESS PANELS 2.20 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 2.21 FINNED RADIATION 2.22 CIRCULATING PUMPS(In Line Type) 2.23 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS(Base Mounted Type) 2.24 CABINET TYPE UNIT HEATER 2.25 UNIT HEATERS 2.26 KICK SPACE HEATERS 2.27 WALL HEATER 2.28 WIND INDUCED VENTILATORS 2.29 HOT WATER MODULE HEATING UNIT- 2.30 HVMSES HOME 15600 1 2.31 HOT WATER MODULE HEATING UNIT-SOUTH HOME EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LOUVERS GAS FIRED MAKE UP AIR UNITS Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At"poke-through" openings, apply"Firecode"seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION PLUMBING 15400-39 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four(24) hours,test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three(3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. 3.11 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for access to valves, shock arrestors, trap primers, etc., Panels shall be installed by the General Contractor. 3.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow preventers shall be installed as per regulation 310 CMR 22.22, with pressure gauges on inlet and outlet of backflow preventer. Furnish Watts TK-9 Model A test kit and one (1)repair kit for each type of device. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall act as the Owner's Agent in seeking approval from the Department of Environmental Protection. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall submit all Plans, Specifications and permits required for approval and pay all fees. Approvals shall be secured prior to purchase and installation. 3.13 ISOLATION VALVES A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install isolation valves on the entire domestic water distribution system, on mains, branches, and at each fixture. 3.14 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation PLUMBING 15400- 38 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. PLUMBING 15400- 37 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil,with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra- fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support,with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade,with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6"of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 112" between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. PLUMBING 15400- 36 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. O. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1. Piping: a. All piping less than 2-112 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 in. 1.D. d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in, in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. P. Suspended Equipment: 1. Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. And Supported with a minimum if 4 hanger rods. Q. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and/or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection Pumps—Base Mounted 1, 4, 18, 23 Pumps—In-Line 23 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 114" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil,waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45o wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1116 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and PLUMBING 15400- 35 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. AN%k 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to 6 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1-1/4 in. I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1/2 in. diameter and larger. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20-ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacing of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. PLUMBING 15400-34 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non-isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and,wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in.or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. #004, 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement, which results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal thrust restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: 1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11. Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1- 1/2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1/2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification PLUMBING 15400-33 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. owk 27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. K. Execution -General: 1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. PLUMBING 15400- 32 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples 3x14 10x261/2x9 1-1/2x13 4x15 12x283/4x10 2x14 5x19 14x301xll 2-112x18 6x20 16x321/4xl2 Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height if the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of 6 1-5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density low fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. PLUMBING 15400-31 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,* evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in.The base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 21. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 1908 F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 2508 F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 1908 F and 135 psi at 2508 F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the PLUMBING 15400-30 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z- 1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 118 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an PLUMBING 15400- 29 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,41W three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR- MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 308 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 308 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage PLUMBING 15400-28 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc, 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 114 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring ;ate'► configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of PLUMBING 15400- 27 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ..v,, a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1. The following force levels will be used on this project. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceedina Buildin Q Code Listed in E. Building "G" Force "G"Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either Equipment Equipment Rigidity or Flexibilitv Mounted Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. UBC BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 SBCCI I. Product Intent: 1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in PLUMBING 15400-26 iow Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards-most recent or enforced code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: 1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1. Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: PLUMBING 15400-25 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw„ (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. (2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 458 to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the PLUMBING 15400-24 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. • Air Separators • Battery Racks • Compressors • Comp. Room Units • Conduit • Electrical Panels • Piping • Pumps (All types) • Tanks(All types) C. Definitions: 1. Life Safety Systems a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: "* a. Descriptive Data: PLUMBING 15400-23 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.20 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: 1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. All fire protection vibration and seismic control shall meet NFPA requirements. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, , national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). PLUMBING 15400- 22 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Co.,or equal. 2.18 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Furnish and install the following backflow preventers, as manufactured by Watts Regulator: 1. On cold water feed to Boilers: No. 909-SQT-3/4"complete with bronze strainer; full port, bronze ball valve shut-offs, and No. 909-AG-C, V air gap and drain piping. B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve. C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc., or equal. E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental Protection, and pay all fees and oow charges. F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. 2.19 GAS SERVICE A. Apply for,and pay all fees and charges in connection with, and co-ordinate the installation of the new natural gas service. B. All labor and materials required for a complete installation which are not furnished by the utility company shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor at no extra cost to the Owner. C. The natural gas service will be furnished by Bay State Gas Company. D. One(1)gas meter required for Nurses'Horne and one(1)gas meter required for the South Home. PLUMBING 15400-21 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Meters to read in cubic feet and shall be Neptune, Hersey Products, Inc., Badger Meter Company, Trident Meter or equal and are to be approved by the local water department. 2.16 RE-CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Hot water recirculating pumps shall be all bronze construction, in-line type, maximum working temperature of 225 deg. F, maximum working pressure of 125 psi, Bell and Gossett, or Taco series, or equal. The pump sizes shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Hot water generator circulating pumps shall be as follows: 1. CPA shall be Bell & Gossett Series PR (bronze body) to deliver 5 gpm at 10 ft. head with 1,725 rpm, 1/6 hp, 120 volt, single phase motor. C. Each pump shall be controlled by an immersion aquastat installed in 1-1/4" oversize tee, aquastat provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor,wired by the Electrical Subcontractor. D. Circulating pumps shall be ITT Bell & Gossett Co., Taco, Inc., Grundfos, Inc., or approved equal. 2.17 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY A. Nurses'Home 1. Furnish and install,where indicated on the Drawings,one(1)Leonard Valve Co. Model TM-820-RF High Low Themostatic Mixing Valve System, 1"inlets and 1 114" outlet, 1.0 gpm minimum flow capacity,with large type TM Water Mixer,small Type TM Water Mixer,locking temperature regulator handle, adjustable high temperature limit stop, inlet check stops,outlet ball valve shutoff. Complete system with inlet piping manifold shall be rough bronze finish. System may be installed at any location in the domestic hot water system and will provide full time standby service should one mixing valve require maintenance. 2. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested. 3. Valves shall be Leonard Valve Company, ITT Lawler Model 66-50, Bradley Valve Co.,or equal. B. South Home 1. Fumish and install,where indicated on the Drawings,one(1)Leonard Valve Co. Model TM-520-RF High Low Themostatic Mixing Valve System, 1W inlets and 1" outlet, 1.0 gpm minimum flow capacity,with large type TM Water Mixer,small Type TM Water Mixer,locking temperature regulator handle, adjustable high temperature limit stop,inlet check stops, outlet ball valve shutoff. Complete system with inlet piping manifold shall be rough bronze finish. System may be installed at any location in the domestic hot water system and will provide full time standby service should one mixing valve require maintenance. 2. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested. 3. Valves shall be Leonard Valve Company, ITT Lawler Model 66-50, Bradley Valve PLUMBING 15400-20 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.12 TRAP PRIMER A. Furnish and install automatic trap primer as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products Prime Rate Model P1-500, with vacuum breaker and adjustment screw. Provide trap primer distribution unit when serving more than on drain. B. Install trap primers to serve all floor drains and indirect waste in boiler room, mechanical rooms, and indirect waste piping for A/C condensate drains, or where indicated. 2.13 HOT WATER GENERATOR—NURSES HOME A. Furnish and install one (2) vertical domestic hot water storage tank 36" diameter x 60" high, 250-gallon capacity as shown on Contract Drawings, equal to AO Smith HD36-250 or equal. B. The carbon steel storage tank shall be lined with cement. Tube sheet and nozzle shall be copper lined. Vendor shall guarantee lining for a period of ten (10)years. C. Tank shall be vertical design and provided with four angle iron legs. D. Each storage tank shall be furnished with a tank heater AO Smith Model No. DW8-30, 3/." OD 20 gauge copper "U" tubes. Heater to have 19.0 SF of heating surface to heat 209 gallons per hour from 40 deg. F to 140 deg. F. with heating media of 180 deg. F. boiler water. The element shall be constructed so that the entire section can be removed from the tank for cleaning and inspection. E. Entire tank shall be covered with heavy fiberglass, enclosed by a zinc anodic coated steel insulation jacket and finished in blue hammerton vinyl enamel. 2.14 HOT WATER GENERATOR—SOUTH HOME A. Furnish and install one (2) vertical domestic hot water storage tank 30" diameter x 71" high, 200-gallon capacity as shown on Contract Drawings, equal to AO Smith HD30-200 or equal. B. The carbon steel storage tank shall be lined with cement. Tube sheet and nozzle shall be copper lined. Vendor shall guarantee lining for a period of ten (10) years. C. Tank shall be vertical design and provided with four angle iron legs. D. Each storage tank shall be furnished with a tank heater AO Smith Model No. DW8-24, 3/4" OD 20 gauge copper "U" tubes. Heater to have 15.0 SF of heating surface to heat 165 gallons per hour from 40 deg. F to 140 deg. F. with heating media of 180 deg. F. boiler water. The element shall be constructed so that the entire section can be removed from the tank for cleaning and inspection. E. Entire tank shall be covered with heavy fiberglass, enclosed by a zinc anodic coated steel insulation jacket and finished in blue hammerton vinyl enamel. 2.15 WATER METER A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install (1) one turbine water meter with remote Awk meter readouts, Neptune, Model TM — 1 Yi' where shown on the drawings. Meter to be complete with dry contacts for interlock with energy management system. PLUMBING 15400- 19 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. and No. 1239BB bumperguard. PLUMBING 15400- 18 .,, Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Basin- Elkay "Lustertone" Model LRAD-2521-55-4 , 5 '/z " deep double compartment, 18 gauge 25" x 21 1/4" O.D. stainless steel, self-rimming sink with 4 hole punched ledge, sound deadened bottom and cup strainer, back punch drain. 2. Faucet — Symmons Symmetrix Single Handle Kitchen Faucet Model S-23-3, with hose and spray mounted on escutcheon, ceramic control components, handle limit stop, red/blue indicators on handle, 8 3/4" swing spout with aerator, 318"supplies, metal construction and polished chrome finish. 3. Fittings Provide "P" trap and angle stops, insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard"molded vinyl insulation. K. Washing Machine Connection (P-5) 1. Symmons Laundry Mate Model W-600-X, supply and drain unit with 1 '/2" drain and water control valve, service stops, and recessed wall plate. L. Washing Machine Drain Pan (P-5A) 1. Symmons Laundry Mate Model W-600-X, supply and drain unit with 1 '/z" drain and water control valve, service stops, and recessed wall plate. 2. Fiat Model No. WMP-3230, rigid thermoform construction, drain and strainer included, 30"x 32" x2 W. M. Floor Drain (P-6) 1. Wade Model 1203TD, heavy duty cast iron shallow floor drain with flange, integral clamping collar and ductile iron loose set tractor grate, and 1/2'plugged primer tap. N. Hose Bibb(P-7) 1. Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key. O. Wall Hydrant(P-8) 1. Woodford Model RB67 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti- siphon vacuum breaker, %" hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to control both flow and drain functions, loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant. P. Mop Sink Mop Receptor(P-6) 1. Basin -Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24"x 10" high mop basin. 2. Faucet- Fiat No. 830 AA supply fitting with vacuum breaker, pail hook, hose end and wall bracket. / 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, PLUMBING 15400- 17 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"k, handle, 4" centers, metal construction, polished chrome finish, offset grid strainer, and an aerator. 3. Support — Zurn ZR-1231 dura coated cast iron "Rigid System" carrier with rectangular steel uprights, concealed arms and sleeves mounted on adjustable headers, complete with cast iron feet, alignment truss and mounting fasteners. 4. Fittings—Provide chrome plated offset"P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav- Guard"molded vinyl insulation. G. Tub/Shower Unit(P-3) 1. Sterling Advantage Model 61030110/61030120, OC-AP-TS, 60" x 31 'A" x 73 1/4 " high, four-piece molded Vikrell swirl gloss material tub unit and slip-resistant bottom, with pop-up drain and overflow Gerber Model No. 41-610. Drain location shall be left or right as required. Refer to Architectural drawings. 2. Supply fittings — Symmons Model S-96-2X-L with lever handle, pressure balancing mixing valve, with integral angle stops, diverter spout, temperature limit stop, chrome plated handle operator, with tub spout, shower head with arm and flange. H. Tub/Shower Unit(P-3A)Accessible 1. Sterling Advantage, Model 61030110/61030120, OC-AP-TS, 60" x 31 1/4" x 731/4 " high, four-piece molded Vikrell swirl gloss material tub unit and slip-resistant bottom, with pop-up drain and overflow Gerber Model No. 41-610. Drain location shall be left or right as required. Refer to Architectural drawings. 2. Supply fittings- Symmons Temptrol Tub and shower System Model S-96-400- B30-L-V-X, pressure balancing mixing valve with lever handle, combination integral diverter and volume control, integral service, stops, tub spout, wall/hand shower with inline vacuum breaker, flexible 5' metal hose, wall connection and flange, and 30"slide bar for hand shower mounting. I. Kitchen Sink(P-4) 1. Basin- Elkay"Lustertone" Model LR-2521 , 8"deep bowl, 18 gauge 25" x 21 1/4" O.D. stainless steel, self-rimming sink with 4 hole punched ledge, sound deadened bottom and cup strainer. 2. Faucet — Symmons Symmetrix Single Handle Kitchen Faucet Model S-23-2, with hose and spray, ceramic control components, handle limit stop, red/blue indicators on handle, 8 3/4" swing spout with aerator, 3/8" supplies, metal construction and polished chrome finish. 3. Fittings—Provide"P" trap and angle stops. J. Kitchen Sink(P-4A)Accessible PLUMBING 15400- 16 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet (P-1), Residents 1. Closet— Eljer"Aqua Saver" Pressure Assist, Model 091-7020, 12"rough-in, vitreous china, siphon jet action 1.6 gallons per flush. Tank type, close coupled, two piece toilet,floor mounted,complete with trim and angle stop with riser. 2. Seat—Church Model 295-C, solid plastic round, open front seat with cover, color white. Sperzel, Olsonite, or equal. D. Water Closet(P-1 A),Accessible 1. Closet— Eljer"Aqua Saver', 16 '/1' high bowl, Model 091-7045. Elongated pressure assisted toilet, vitreous china, siphon, pressure assist tank, elongated bowl, 1.6 gallons per flush,trip lever tank type,floor mounted. 2. Seat- Church Model 295-C, solid plastic round, open front seat cover,color white. Sperzel, Olsonite, or equal. E. Lavatory Trim (P-2) 1. Basin — Furnish and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Faucet — Symmons Symmetrix single lever lavatory faucet Model No. S-20-2, with ceramic control components, handle limit stop, red/blue indicators, with metal pop-up drain with lift rod, 4 inch centers, metal construction, polished chrome finish, and an aerator. 3. Fittings—Provide chrome plated angle stops with riser tubing and cleanout plug. 4. Trap—Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated with cleanout plug. F. Lavatory(P-2A) Handicapped 1. Basin — Eljer "Signature" Lavatory Model 051-2101, vitreous china wall hung lavatory, 20" x 18", faucet holes for 4" centers. 2. Faucet - Symmons Symmetrix single lever faucet Model No. S-20-2-W-OFG, with ceramic control components, handle limit stop, red/blue indicators on 6" PLUMBING 15400- 15 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro"Nandi Lav-Guard", Model 102 w/105 offset or equal, molded insulation kit. 2.7 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2"diameter, 2oF subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water: 30 degrees F — 180 degrees F. 2. Cold water: 0 degrees F- 100 degrees F. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1/2" dial, double spring with soft copper tubing loop and petcock. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. 2.10 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings,or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.) with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. 2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS PLUMBING 15400- 14 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Traps at fixtures shall be listed in the Fixture Schedule. Exposed traps shall be chrome plated, B. Traps shall be service weight cast-iron where buried in floors or serving floor drains. Where traps are not connected directly under the drain they serve in the floor, they shall be fitted with top cleanouts and extensions to the floor with access covers and plates. C. Furnish and install traps as required for all items of equipment furnished under other Sections of these Specifications, and/or the Owner 2.5 CLEANOUTS/ACCESS PANELS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. B. Wall cleanouts shall be brass, recessed head plugs with Zurn ZN-1440-1 access frame and cover. C. Access covers shall be flush with finished floors and walls. Where floor cleanouts occur above finish floors above grade, they shall be provided with flange, clamping collar and 24" x 24", 16 oz. copper flashing. Copper flashing shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. D. Provide access panels for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, cleanouts, shock absorbers, and trap primers in masonry walls, plastered walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard ceilings. Access panels shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plaster shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls shall be Karp Type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"). For drywall ceilings shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12"min.). E. Cleanouts shall be Zurn Industries, Inc., Wade Division, Josam Mfg. Co., Jay R. Smith Co., or equal. F. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. 2.6 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self- sealing lap, 1„ thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2” thick for cold water. Insula- tion shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. PLUMBING 15400- 13 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Spence Model D34, size 1 '/2", manufacturer shall determine proper valve size prior to ordering. Valve shall be rated for minimum working pressure of 200psi. 2. Install in parallel with the main valve a Spence Model E, 1/4" pressure reducing valve with inlet and outlet ball valves. Pressure reducing valve shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 200psi. Flow rate shall be 10gpm or less. I. Plug Valves: Furnish and install cast iron plug valves on all gas piping 2" and larger, with flanged ends, Model 133 as manufactured by Serek Audco, with 100%free area, rated at 125 psi working pressure, or approved equal by Serek. 2.3 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, or Fee & Mason. B. For cast iron and galvanized steel piping - Grinnell Company's Figure No. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe, at 12 ft. intervals for threaded piping; for copper tubing - Grinnell Co.'s figure CT-65 at 8 ft. intervals for tubing up to 2"; 10 ft. intervals for tubing 2- 1/2" and above. C. Gas piping shall be supported by steel clevis pipe hangers, one to each 8'-0" of pipe. Amok D. For hot, hot water circulating, and cold water piping-Grinnell Company's figure No. CT-99 heavily copper plated at 6 ft. intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10 ft. intervals for piping 1-1/2" and larger. Provision shall be made to allow for expansion and contraction of all piping. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1 ft. of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5 ft. in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. All vertical piping shall be supported at each story height, with a support at the base of vertical cast iron pipe. G. Perforated strap iron hanger or Milford type copper plated steel hangers are not acceptable. H. Where piping is supported from ceiling beams, support parallel pipes from different beams. I. Support pipes sufficiently clear of all part of structure to allow for full thickness of insulation. J. Hangers to be adequate size to include insulation. Furnish and install galvanized steel insulation protection shields outside of insulation on pipe sizes 2" and larger to prevent crushing or indenting of insulation of hangers. K. Provide plastic coated steel hangers to support vent piping at 6 ft. intervals. Aw 2.4 TRAPS PLUMBING 15400- 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Bell &Gossett. E. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. F. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4". G. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or IB-440. H. Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0lb. to 100 lbs. pressure gauges, complete with petcocks and brass connections. 2. Pressure reducing valves shall be as manufactured by Spence, Watts Regulator Co., A.W. Cash Valve Mfg. Co., Mueller Co., or equal. 3. Furnish and install on water service entrance Spence pressure reducing valve. The valve body shall be bronze with FDA approved fused epoxy coating, internal and external. Provide with factory inlet strainer. a. For Nurses' Home 1. Valve shall be rated to reduce the 100psi inlet pressure to 55psi outlet pressure, with a maximum flow of 80gpm. Valve to be Spence Model D34, size 2", manufacturer shall determine proper valve size prior to ordering. Valve shall be rated for minimum working pressure of 200psi. 2. Install in parallel with the main valve a Spence Model E, 3/<" pressure reducing valve with inlet and outlet ball valves. Pressure reducing valve shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 200psi. Flow rate shall be 10gpm or less. b. For South Home 1. Valve shall be rated to reduce the 100psi inlet pressure to 55psi outlet pressure, with a maximum flow of 62gpm. Valve to be PLUMBING 15400- 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings, installed in strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code, (248 CMR 5.00). All piping 2" and below shall be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings; 2-1/2" and above shall be welded. Provide necessary ball type gas shut-off valves or square head cocks on piping 2" and smaller and drips as required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40, all welded with flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure. 1. All gas piping, including gas valve and final connections to HVAC equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor. 2. All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the work who has not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so certified as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 3. Gas piping to gas-fired boilers shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor. Gas train vents from boiler header shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor. Gas vents from water heater gas train shall be by the Plumbing Subcontractor. All high pressure side gas mains on regulator vents shall be all welded. 2.2 VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Gate Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1 R1138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1R1 138, or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. D. Balancing Valves: 'Omsk PLUMBING 15400- 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. All soil, waste and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. Minimum size below slab shall be 2". B. In lieu of cast iron piping, Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings or ABS plastic pipe with glued fittings may be used for all sanitary,waste, and vent piping above ground. C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type "L" copper, or DWV, except minimum size below ground shall be 2". Minimum vent terminal through the roof shall be 4". Vent flashing at the roof shall be by Roofing Contractor. D. All hot and cold water and hot water re-circulating piping within the building shall be hard copper Type L seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. All below slab trap primer peed piping shall be type "K" soft rolled with silver solder joint. E. All water service piping on site and fittings into the building, and where noted otherwise, shall be Class 52 ductile iron pipe, cement lined and seal coated with a bituminous outside coating per AWWA Specifications, with mechanical joints up to the backflow preventer. All ductile iron pipe shall be from a single manufacturer and shall be manufactured in the United States. The pipe shall be manufactured by U.S. Pipe & Foundry Company or Griffin Manufacturing. PLUMBING 15400-9 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW*,, 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the contract Drawings whether by Change Order or by filed conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work and for piping installation. Valve numbers shall be added as soon as established. 1.19 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall cooperate with the other sub trades in preparing a complete set of co- ordination drawings. B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect,this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches, at a suitable scale, not less than �/<"=V, clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first co-ordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes by the other trades. D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials,this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract, Architectural, or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS Amok PLUMBING 15400-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three(3)copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall "K be considered as being defective. PLUMBING 15400-7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 14"Ik, A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. 1.13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. AMW PLUMBING 15400-6 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or ek reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS PLUMBING 15400- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS PLUMBING 15400-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. PLUMBING 15400- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 15400-PLUMBING PART 1 -GFNFRAI 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. New sanitary, waste and vent systems piping inside the building and connection to existing and/or new sanitary sewer 10'-0" outside of the foundation wall, or as specifically called out on the Drawings. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 2. New hot and cold water distribution and hot water recirculation systems, and storage tanks. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports, valves, and pumps, as well as storage tanks with tube bundles. 3. Natural Gas piping systems per Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code, including connections to gas service, and HVAC equipment provided by others. 4. Provide and install water meter and pressure reducing station at domestic water service entrance. 5. Provide back water preventers (point-of-use types) where shown on Drawings, specified, or required. 6. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 7. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 8. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections. 9. Furnish access panels. 10. Guarantee and instructions. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. PLUMBING 15400-2 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. INDEX SECTION 15400-PLUMBING PART 1-GFNF_RAI PART 3-INSTALLATION 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 SOIL,WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 BASIC IDENTIFICATION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 INSULATION 1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.8 INSPECTION AND TESTS 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.9 CLEANING UP 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 DISINFECTION 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 3.11 ACCESS PANELS 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1.13 PROTECTION 3.13 ISOLATION VALVES 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14 FIRE SAFING 1.15 WORK CONCEALED 1.16 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 1.17 GUARANTEE 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS 1.19 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES PART 2-MATFR_ IAA 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS 2.2 VALVES 2.3 HANGERS 2.4 TRAPS 2.5 CLEANOUTS/ACCESS PANELS 2.6 INSULATION 2.7 THERMOMETERS 2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS 2.10 ACCESS PANELS 2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS 2.12 TRAP PRIMER 2.13 HOT WATER GENERATOR-NURSES HOME 2.14 HOT WATER GENERATOR-SOUTH HOME 2.15 WATER METER 2.16 RE-CIRCULATING PUMPS 2.17 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY 2.18 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 2.19 GAS SERVICE 2.20 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 00 PLUMBING 15400- 1 Village at Hospital Hill -Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc ARK, D. Patching of all holes after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All piping, cutting, and threading shall be done in a location approved by the Arch itecttEngineer. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 3.8 SERVICES A. Water Service 1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing the new water service to within 10'-0"of the building, including all site work, fire hydrants,piping, and valves thereto. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall extend piping into building. 2. A blank 6"or 8"flanged outlet shall be provided,by others,within the building for the Fire Protection Subcontractor's use. All piping and fittings from flanged outlet to inlet of the backflow preventer shall be ductile iron,cement lined. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION 15300-22 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves,fittings,and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 R and 14,and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. D. Hose Cabinets: Install cabinet with 2-1/2"hose outlet valves with quick disconnect 2-1/2"to 1-1/2"reducing coupling hose and flow restriction device at each standpipe outlet. 3.5 HOSE VALVE A. Install fire hose valve in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. B. Securely fasten fire hose,valve,and cabinets to structure,square and plumb,to comply with manufacturer's instructions. C. Identify equipment n cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE". Provide lettering style,color, size and location. 3.6 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control,drain,test,and alarm valves identifying their purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or patching of all openings and holes 4 " diameter, or 4 " square or smaller, required for the installation of fire protection in the building, shall be performed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for openings shall be checked by the Fire Protection Subcontractor and error, due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions,shall be the responsibility of the Fire Protection Subcontractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4"diameter,or 4"square,shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built,or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed,or where incorrectly located. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-21 Village at Hospital Hill -Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc , C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire sating. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire sating insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13 R. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves,apparatus,and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 R and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. F. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 R complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. G. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. H. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1,tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe,fittings, and valves as follows. I. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemblejoints bysequencing bolttightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. J. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. K. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS " FIRE PROTECTION 15300-20 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 2.7 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves,in masonry walls,plastered walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard ceilings, shall be furnished by the Fire Protection Subcontractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plaster shall be Karp type DSC-214 PL(12"by 12"). For dry wall ceilings,shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches,Type KSTDW/CAD(12" by 12" minimum.) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains,lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service,flush entire sprinkler system,as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13 R. Continue flushing until water is clear,and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system,test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically,for period of two (2)hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions,test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi,for period of two (2)hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals,stop-leak compounds,mastics,or other temporary repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including,but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms,electrical rooms,vaults,storage rooms,kitchen,machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.or Architect-Engineer approved equal,4"minimum thickness by the required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. FIRE PROTECTION 15300- 19 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 18. Dry-pipe alarm check valve shall be equal to Reliable Model"D"system complete with alarm valve,solenoid valve and air maintenance device,accelerator,compressor and trim. 19. Wet-pipe alarm check valve shall be equal to Reliable Model "E"with conventional trim kit,retarder,and excess pressure pump. 20. Alarm Test Modules:Furnish and install AGF Manufacturing,Inc.'s UL listed and FM approved"Test and Drain"for the alarm test loops,where indicated on the drawings, complete with combination sight glass/orifice. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-18 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc the insurance underwriter. Boiler Room and heads adjacent to unit heaters to have 212oF rating. 2. Semi recessed pendent sprinkler heads shall be equal to Central Model GBR, or equal. 3. Concealed heads shall be Central Model"Optima",or equal. 4. Side wall heads shall be Central Model GBR, or equal. 5. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company,Model OSYS-B, small case,and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. 6. Automatic ball drips,as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig.5982,size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only. 7. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80"with tapping for automatic ball drip,size as required. 8. Hose valves shall be equal to Potter-Roemer Co.Fig.4065 size 2-1/2"with red iron handle and cast brass body, Fig. 2810 female to male pin lug reducer size 2-1/2" female x 1-1/2" male, and Fig. 4615 cap with chain size 1-1/2". All threads shall conform with the local Fire Department. 9. Hose valves shall be mounted in a Potter Roemer,Cabinet 1800 Series,or equal. 10 Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Reliable,Model A- 1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. Provide one cabinet at each alarm valve riser. 11. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems,Co., Inc.,Viking Corporation,or equal. 12. Valves with Built-in Tamper Switches: Furnish and install, and each flow control station, Milwaukee Valve Co.'s Model BB-VSCS02 grooved ends, 175 psi., slow closing 'Butterball" butterfly valves, complete with built-in tamper switch for 2-1/2" pipe size; Model BB-SCS02 for threaded pipe 2" and smaller. Valves shall be FM approved and UL listed. 13. Main water flow initiating device shall be equal to Potter Model PS10-2A attached to alarm check valve in non-interruptible position. 14. Water flow switches shall be equal to Potter VSF-D with two sets of SPDT contacts and time delay. 15. Fire Department pumper connection shall be a wall mounted 4"Storz connector,with cap. Furnish and install 4" check valve with automatic ball drip equal to Potter- Roemer Model 5982 16. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model"80"with tapping for automatic ball drip, size as required. 17. Double check detector valve assembly as noted on plans, shall be furnished and installed by this contractor, DEP approved for backflow prevention, Ames Model CoIt300,with gate valves. Provide test kits and repair kits. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-17 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc A. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated;provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe,tube,and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. 2. Provide handwheels,fastened to valve stem,for valves other than quarter-turn. B. Gate Valves 1. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 2. Flanged End,2-1/2"and Larger: FM,UL listed, 175 psi,iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IR1154 Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F C. Check Valves 1. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi,iron body bronze mounted,renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover,flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT D. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. E. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. 2.6 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES A. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed,in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. 1. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Star Sprinkler Corp., Model"LD-2"standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass,or equal. Temperature rating 165oF or as required by FIRE PROTECTION 15300-16 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc 3. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. 4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. C. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed,selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions,in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. 1. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. 2. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. 3. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. 4. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. 5. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner&Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee&Mason Mfg.Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. E. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves,flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. F. Install hangers, supports,clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure;comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping,and do not support piping from other piping. G. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops,expansion bends and similar units. I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. J. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. 2.5 VALVES FIRE PROTECTION 15300- 15 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface;except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1l4"above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 5. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, calk with lead,on both sides. M. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension,if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. 1. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. 3. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors,walls,partitions,and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole,and is flush with adjoining surface. 2.4 SUPPORTS,ANCHORS,AND SEALS A. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58,of one of the following MSS types listed,selected by Installer to suit piping systems,in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1,for piping larger than 4". 2. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7,for piping 4"and less. 3. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. B. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58,of one of the following MSS types listed,selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. 1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 2. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. Aft*, FIRE PROTECTION 15300-14 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes(where indicated)by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs,except as otherwise indicated,vertically and horizontally(pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams,details and notations or,if not otherwise indicated,run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces,conceal piping from view,by locating in column enclosures,in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings;do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults,Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1;cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound,or pipe joint tape(Teflon)where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer,on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Install ductile cast-iron water mains and appurtenances in accordance with AWWA C600. J. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials,and prepare for application of specified coatings(if any). K. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. L. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe;remove burrs. 2. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. 3. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade,or in exterior walls,caulked between sleeve and pipe. 4. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work,except as detailed on drawings,or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will FIRE PROTECTION 15300- 13 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. h. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. i. Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. j. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 R and shall be as follows: 1. Piping and fittings from water entrance to inlet of backflow preventer shall be Class 52 ductile iron,cement lined with mechanical joints. 2. All concealed standpipes for stair valve cabinets and all exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas),shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe,welded,suitable for 175 psi.working water pressure. 3. All concealed sprinkler piping (above acoustical ceiling tiles and plaster ceilings; in pipe chases)and exposed sprinkle piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Shops, and Boiler Room,downstream of alarm check valves,shall be Schedule 10 seamless light wall,steel pipe with rolled grooved ends,for piping 2"and larger,complete with suitable couplings and fittings for rolled grooved end steel pipe. In lieu of schedule 10 steel pipe schedule 40 blaze master PVC pipe may be used where allowed by code. 4. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms,Shops,and Boiler Room,1-1/2"and smaller,shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor,either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 5. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, outside of Mechanical Equipment Rooms,Shops,and Boiler Room shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 6. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 7. Type"L"seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder-joint pressure fittings,where noted on the drawings. C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems,capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate FIRE PROTECTION 15300-12 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc mounted at the main entrance. Floor plan shall show all items listed in the City of Northampton Fire Department regulations. 7. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approxmately 12" below finished ceiling. In addition to the above a 6"x9"red phenolic plate with 2"high letters shall be mounted on the door of the Mechanical Room to indicate a sprinkler alarm valve. 2.3 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,A 106 or A 120:except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125,cast-iron threaded,ANSI 816.4,orflanged,ANSI 816.1. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings;cut-groove type for piping 2-1/2"and larger only. 2. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe:ASTM A 135. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5"and smaller;0.134"wall thickness for 6". b. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. 3. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-112"and larger) a. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. b. Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. C. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type,which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts,secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. d. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design,pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. e. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi. f. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe,encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. g. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. FIRE PROTECTION 15300- 11 Village at Hospital Hill -Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc ,o, Allen Systems, Inc. Brady(W.H.)Co.,Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. B. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed,semi-rigid,snap-on,color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 1. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers,extending 3600 around pipe at each location,fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance,as selected by Architect. 3. Locate pipe markers as follows: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. C. Branch piping need not be marked. C. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16"high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. 1. Provide 1-1/8"sq. brass tags with black lettering. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 3. Submit valve schedule for piping system,typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2"x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number,piping system,system abbreviation(as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1. 4. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum,with SSB-grade sheet glass. 5. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect. 6. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled,and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Mechanical Equip- ment Room where directed. Furnish two(2)extra copies of the chart to the Architect. In addition to the above, furnish a color coded floor plan of the entire building FIRE PROTECTION 15300-10 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations,floor plans,roof plans,and details. G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.19 CUTTING &PATCHING A. Cutting and patching of all openings and holes 4"diameter,or4"square or smaller,required for the installation of fire protection in the building, shall be performed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.Location for openings shall be checked by the Fire Protection Subcontractor and error,due to failure to coordinate work with other divisions,shall be the responsibility of the fire Protection Subcontractor failing to coordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4"diameter,or 4"square, shall be provided by the General contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new wall are built,or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed,or where incorrectly located. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesman. E. All piping, cutting, and threading shall be done in a location approved by the Architect- Engineer. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,temperature ratings,and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated,selection is Installer's option. 2.2 BASIC IDENTIFICATION A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: FIRE PROTECTION 15300-9 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc Mk 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps,etc. 10. List of all names,addresses,and phone numbers of all Subcontractors aswell as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work, which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster,wood,and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work,fire protection lines,valves,and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a .+ bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. 1.18 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare coordination drawings on background provided by the HVAC Subcontractor. Co-ordination Drawings shall be minimum of %"=1"-0" and shall show all piping, heads,and equipment. B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4"=V-0",clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first co-ordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor,at his own expense,shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment,ductwork,piping,hung ceilings,and other structural finishes installed by other trades. D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping,ductwork and other materials,this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of FIRE PROTECTION 15300-8 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required,to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall at all times,fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the owner. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery,scaffolding,and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs,sockets,etc. C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,except that in rooms without ceilings,horizontal runs only may be exposed. low B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls,ceiling,or floor spaces having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed,fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall videotape the instruction procedures and deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Fumish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual",the name and location of the equipment or the building,the name of the Subcontractor,and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up,operation,and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-7 Village at Hospital Hill -Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc ,,.W C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review,making any and all changes,which may be required. D. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor. E. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications,the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. F. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 R, and also that system is operational, complete,and has no defects. 1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regard- ing the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied,in the Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa,shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings,it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,furnishing such fittings,traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING FIRE PROTECTION 15300-6 poll- Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping,ductwork,conduit,wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only,and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. G. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected bysuitable means. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.7 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise,all materials used shall be U.S.made, new,full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job,the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submitto the Architect and local Fire Department six (6)sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers'data sheets and hydraulic calculations,giving all details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including,but not necessarily limited to,pipe and tube sizes,locations,elevations and slopes of horizontal runs,wall and floor penetrations,and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1. Shop drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and the local Fire Department before submitting to the Architect for approval. POW FIRE PROTECTION 15300-5 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc Awk F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code,Electrical Code,Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations,the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations,the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors'work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever;and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor,it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves,frames,beams, supports,inserts,etc.,hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper FIRE PROTECTION 15300-4 401W Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc C. Related work, to be performed under other sections of this Specification shall include the following: 1. Power wiring of flow switches,tamper switches, electric bell, etc. back to the panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, co-ordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Excavation and backfill. 1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test,and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13 R. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing,zoning,and sprinkler head location,and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 R, the local Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter. Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceilings and walls and spacing of the heads,shall not exceed that permitted by NFPA 13 R of the light hazard occupancy(ordinary hazard occupancies in Boiler Room,Storage Room,etc.) The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 R and shall obtain local Fire Department and Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads,provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M.approved and meet NFPA 13 R, local Fire Department, and Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally,all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 R recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products,of types,materials,and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13 R,"Installation of Sprinkler System", 2002. C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-3 Village at Hospital Hill -Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc ,.W SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions,applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting,or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to,the complete installation of all fire protection work for both buildings specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Fire protection service piping from water service stub in basement. 2. Complete dry pipe and wet pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces including the attic, unless otherwise noted,with Fire Department con- nection and system test and drain connections and inspectors test connections. Furnish and install all required seismic hangers and supports required by code. 3. Wet pipe alarm valve station complete with,but not limited to,line size valve,control, excess pressure pump,and supervisory controls. 4. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with,but not necessarily limited to,line size valve,retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms,full indicating, control, drain trim,and accelerator,air compressor,etc. 5. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging,and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 6. Wet pipe standpipe system installed in all stair towers complete with hose connections,cabinet,chain,and cap. 7. Provide and install double check backflow preventer per D.E.P.requirements. B. Refer to appropriate Division 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with fire protection piping;not work of this Section. Alk FIRE PROTECTION 15300-2 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc INDEX SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 FIRE SAFING 1.3 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 1.4 QUALITYASSURANCE 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION 1.5 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.5 HOSE VALVE 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.6 FINAL CLOSEOUT 1.7 PRODUCTS 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.8 SUBMITTALS 3.8 SERVICES 1.9 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.14 WORK CONCEALED 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 GUARANTEE 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS 1.18 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES PART 2-MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 2.2 BASIC IDENTIFICATION 2.3 PIPE,TUBE AND FITTINGS 2.4 SUPPORTS,ANCHORS,AND SEALS 2.5 VALVES 2.6 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 2.7 ACCESS PANELS FIRE PROTECTION 15300- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. , Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. END OF SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. F. Install piping above the floor. G. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. H. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe,workable dimension at each landing. I. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. J. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent)of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage. 1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and other procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 'Aft, g. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling. h. Handrails: Satin stainless steel, at side and rear walls. i. Floor prepared to receive resilient the(specified in Division 9 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring"). 6. Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Width: 42 inches b. Height: 84 inches C. Type:Two-speed side sliding. d. Frames: Enameled steel. e. Doors: Enameled steel. f. Sills: Aluminum. 7. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. 8. Additional Requirements: As follows: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with satin stainless-steel frame. b. Provide protective blanket hooks in all four cars and two complete sets of full- height blankets. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions, and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in each elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinders; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." B. Install cylinders in protective casings within well casing. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well hole or casing and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of well casing. Fill void space between protective casing and cylinder with corrosion- protective filler. C. Install cylinders plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. D. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Provide manufacturer's steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, suspended ceiling, trim, accessories, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), lighting, and ventilation. 1. Floor finish is specified in another Section. 2. Metal Wall Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction, fabricated from metal indicated. 3. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 112-inch fire- retardant-treated particleboard with plastic-laminate panel backing complying with NEMA LD 3,Type BKV and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. 4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 5. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 6. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 7. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 8. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of metal indicated. 2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with ek reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following: 1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed steel sheet. 2. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 3. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. 2.8 PASSENGER ELEVATORS A. New Elevator: 1. Type: Under-the-car single cylinder. 2. Rated Speed: 125 fpm. 3. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation. 4. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. b. Fire emergency service C. Medical emergency service 5. Car Enclosures: As follows: a. Front Walls: Satin stainless steel with integral car door frames. b. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. C. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. d. Reveals: Satin stainless steel. e. Door Faces (Interior): Enameled steel. f. Door Sills: Aluminum. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. N, that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. Provide Talk-A-Phone model ETP-100 EBV or approved equal, hands-free audio and visual 2-way emergency communication. D. Car Position Indicator. For passenger elevator cars, provide illuminated-signal type, digital- display type, or segmented type, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing 1. Provide units with direction-indicating buttons; two buttons at intermediate landings; one button at terminal landings. F. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings. 1. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise indicated. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 2. Place lanterns in both jambs of entrance frame for each elevator. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 3. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. a. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car. G. Signs: Provide signs with text and graphics according to ASME A17.1, Appendix H, and ADA and "Code" compliant engraved signs and graphics at the following locations. Signs shall be vandal resistant metal or plastic, permanently adhesive attached with no exposed fasteners. Letters and graphics shall be in contrasting color to background, as approved: 1. Mounted over every hall button station: 3Y.inch by 2Y.inch sign reading"In Case of Fire In This Building Use Exit Stairways. Do Not Use This Elevator." 2. At each side of elevator door frame at Ground (Entry) level: national medical symbol, star of life, approximately 2'/2 inches high, mounted at 72 inch height. 3. At each side of elevator door frames at all levels: floor designation label with single raised character, 2 inches high on background plate, at 60 inch height. 2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with a uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. Provide Janus Pana40 Plus or approved equal. 2.6 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Passenger Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. 1. Single Elevator: Provide "selective collective automatic operation" as defined in ASME A17.1. B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated. 1. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered to first floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are below the first floor are lowered to the basement, open their doors, and shut down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system. C. FIRE EMERGENCY SERVICE 1. Provide Firefighters' Emergency Service operation as described in the"Code." Phase I emergency recall elevator operation controlled by a single three-position key operated switch located on the Ground (Entry) floor. Phase t{ emergency in-car operation controlled by a three-position key operated switch located in the car operating panel. 2. Car operation:when activated,car shall remain under control of firefighter as specified by the"Code." D. MEDICAL EMERGENCY SERVICE how 1. Provide Massachusetts Medical Emergency Service operation as described in the "Code." Elevator operation controlled by two position key switch located on the Ground (Entry)floor and by a similar key switch in the car operating panel. 2. Car operation: when activated, car shall remain under control of EMT as specified by the "Code." 2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators with hall-call and car- call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic. B. Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations fully recessed in hinged return panel adjacent to car door. 1. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for specified car operation. 2. Mark buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A17.1. 3. Mount controls at heights complying with Massachusetts Architectural Access Board requirements and with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's"Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG)." C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,w B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following: 1. Pump, with fan-cooled squirrel-cage induction motor, mounted on top of oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with f- inch-thick, glass-fiber insulation board. 2. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with wye-delta or solid-state starting. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit. D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. 1. Provide dielectric couplings at plunger/cylinder units. 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785 joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section. F. Protective Cylinder Casings: PVC pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch clearance from cylinder, and extending above pit floor. G. Corrosion Protective Filler: A solventless, petroleum-based gel formulated for filling the space between hydraulic cylinders and protective casings. Filler is heavier than water, electrically nonconductive, and liquefies at approximately 150 deg F. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diversified Enterprises; No-Ox-Id R-R#6110A. b. Pacific Standard Chemical Co.; Union-Gard 160. H. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. I. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated: 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4, directional satin finish. 2. Enameled-Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M may be used for door frames. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGP for postformed applications and Type HGS for flat applications; color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of products. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights,and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of wom or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. a. Response Time: Four hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hydraulic elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bay State Elevator 2. Dover Elevator Systems. 3. KONE Inc. 4. Otis Elevator Co. 5. Schindler Elevator Corp. 6. ThyssenKrupp Elevator. 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"k 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. D. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. E. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable provisions in ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators" as modified by Massachusetts Board of Elevator Regulations, 524 CMR, referred herein together as the "Code" and elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7. 2. Seismic Risk Zone: Project is located in Zone 2 B. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Regulations and Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG)" C. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 14240-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation to accommodate plunger-cylinder assembly. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry. 4. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Divider beams. C. Structural-steel shapes for subsills and entrance frames. d. Pit ladders. 5. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring"for finish flooring in elevator cars. 6. Division 16 Section 'Fire Alarm„ for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and for connection to elevator controllers and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 7. Division 16 Section"Premises Telephone Wiring”for telephone service to elevators. 8. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including fused disconnect switches at machine room door and standby power source, transfer switch, and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller. C. Additional costs incurred for drilling through unanticipated physical obstructions below the ground surface including rock, boulders, metal, or other foreign material will be paid for, where approved, as a change order on a time and material basis. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. W HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1 a. 310 CMR 40 Massachusetts Contingency Plan b. 310 CMR 30 Hazardous Waste Regulations 3. Local Town, City or County bylaws, rules and regulations 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to removal of hazardous materials, submit a Hazardous Waste Handling Plan, including identification of the proposed waste hauler and disposal facility with copies of all applicable licenses, registrations and approvals. B. After completion of hazardous materials removal, provide a final report documenting removal, transportation and disposal activities. This shall include copies of manifests, shipping slips, permits and licenses for this project. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT A. Provide health and safety equipment required to protect workers and to comply with the Health and Safety Plan. 2.2 DRUMS A. Provide DOT approved drums or containers for the disposal of specified materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHT BALLASTS A. Light ballasts requiring removal were observed throughout the facility. B. Remove, characterize and Iawfully dispose to an appropriate off-site PCB disposal facility all PCB and non-PCB light ballasts throughout the facility. C. Document all disposal activities to insure compliance with regulations. 3.2 MERCURY LAMPS A. Under current federal regulations, lamps containing mercury may be classified as hazardous waste. The following shall be followed for disposal of mercury lamps: 1. Collection, characterization and proper disposal of all fluorescent tubes and mercury lamps found throughout the facility. 2. Care must be taken to not break the lamps, as that may cause mercury exposure to individuals handling lamps. 3. Provide all waste shipment records or recycling records and incorporate in the final report. END OF SECTION FAPROrECTS\`N\w-3577 CBI,NORTHAMPTON\13283 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.DOC 6/28/2004 13283-2 Hazardous Waste and Materials Abatement SECTION 13283 HAZARDOUS WASTE AND MATERIALS ABATEMENT PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Perform all work as described including but not limited to the following: 1. Removal, characterization and disposal of fluorescent light tubes, ballasts and capacitors. 2. File all necessary notices, obtain all permits and licenses, and pay all governmental taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with the work. Obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. B. Comply with Health and Safety Plan. 1.2 LOCATION OF WORK A. Building 16, Nurses Home contains light fixtures throughout all floors of the structure. Contractor responsible for locating, removing and disposing of the following materials: (300) 4' and 2' round fluorescent light tubes; 140 ballasts associated with light systems and (15) 4' fluorescent light tubes stored in the northeast basement closet. If additional hazardous materials are encountered, CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER immediately and be prepared to abate the material. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The CONTRACTOR is advised to thoroughly review the documents referenced in this Section. Strict adherence to the hazardous materials, noise, air and water pollution regulations and requirements is required. 1. Code of Federal Regulations a. 29 CFR 1910, "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" (General Industry Standards) b. 29 CFR 1910.20, "Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records" C. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" d. 29 CFR 1910.146, "Permit Required Confined Space" e. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" f. 40 CFR 122, "EPA Administered Permit Program: The National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System" g. 40 CFR 172, "Hazardous Waste Transportation" h. 40 CFR 261, "Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste" i. 40 CFR 262, "Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste" ** j. 40 CFR 263, "Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste" 2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Environunental Protection 6/28/2004 13283-1 Hazardous Waste and Materials Abatement LEAD BASED PAINT INSPECTION TABLE Building 16,Nurses Nome Location Surface Result(mg/ctn2) Building 16-East and North stairwells railing caps 0.0 Building 16-East and North stairwells middle stringer 7.3 Building 16-East and North stairwells ballasters 5.3 Building 16-East and North stairwells newel post 7.2 Building 16-East and North stairwells riser 5.0 Building 16-East and North stairwells bullnose 0.0 Building 16-East and North stairwells wall stringer 4.7 Building 16-East and North stairwells handrail(against wail) 0.0 Building 16-East and North stairwells metal ceilings of stairwells 7.2 Building 16-East and North stairwells door frame 0.5 Building 16-East and North stairwells door frame 0.6 Building 16-East and North stairwells doors 1.9 Building 16-East and North stairwells masonry walls 10.2 Building 16-Second floor fireplace compouenrs 12.0 Building 16-Second floor mantel 12.0 Building 16-Second floor bookcase 12.0 Building 16-Throughout stained room doors 0.0 Building 16-Throughout hallway masonry walls 10.0 Building 16-Hall and room windows sash(interior) 9.0 Building 16-Hall and room windows sash(exterior) 13.2 Building 16-Hall and room windows steps 0.0 Building 16-Hall and room windows casing 0.0 Building 16-Hall and room windows parting beads 0.0 Building 16-Hall and room windows blind stop 10.0 Building 16-Hall and room windows window well 10.0 IBuilding 16-Hall and room windows outside casing 10.0 Building 16-Exterior soffit/cornice 10.0 Building 16-Exterior overhang 10.0 LEGEND 1.0 ug/cm2 is considered as containing dangerous levels of lead in exceedance of OSHA and CLPPP regulations ILI , 6/28/2004 Page 1 of 1 MMMMMMMqMMW LEAD BASED PAINT INSPECTION TABLE Building 15,South Employees Home Location Surface Result(mg/cm2) Building 15-South and North stairwells masonry stringer 5.2 Building 15-South and North stairwells masonry tread 5.6 Building 15-South and North stairwells masonry riser 10.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells walls 15.0 Building 15-Saudi and North stairwells metal handrails,outer wall 1.3 Building 15-South and North stairwells inner handrails 20.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells door frame(metal) 50.0 uilding 15-South and North stairwells door jamb 29.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells door(metal) 30.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells wood window casing 35.0 IBuilding 15-South and North stairwells extension jambs 37.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells interior sash 27.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells steps 28.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells sill 25.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells apron 10.0 hook Building 15-South and North stairwells muttons/mullions 18.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells ext. side 22.5 uilding 15-South and North stairwells parting beads 0.0 Building 15-South and North stairwells blind stops 10.5 IBuilding 15-South and North stairwells ext.casing 10.5 IBuilding 15 room windows 29.0 IBuilding 15 all components of windows 20.0 uilding 15 stained wood floors 0.0 Building 15 wood doors 0.2 LEGEND 1.0 ug 1cm2 is considered as containing dangerous levels of lead in exceedance of OSHA and CLPPP regulations 6/28/2064 Pag_ °I 8.) Any evidence of improper storage shall be cause for immediate shutdown of the project until corrective action is taken. 9.) The CONTRACTOR shall provide legal transportation of the waste to the disposal landfill, and complete or obtain all required licenses, manifests, dump slips, or other forms. Copies of all forms or licenses, and the signed original of the Waste Manifest for each waste load, shall be given to the OWNER. NOTE: It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to determine current waste transportation and disposal regulations for the project site and proposed disposal site. CONTRACTOR must comply fully with these regulations, and all U.S. Department of Transportation, state, local and EPA requirements. END OF SECTION 7:\W\W-3577 CBI, NORTHATAMM13282 LEAD PAINT.DOC -low 6/28/2004 13282-12 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT Appendix II of 40 CFR 261 to a Massachusetts Certified Laboratory. The CONTRACTOR shall collect samples from each media (i.e. water, paint, etc.). In the case of wet methods of preparation, the use of chemical strippers, or containerized hygiene water, all liquids and sludge shall be tested, for pH to determine corrosivity, if appropriate. The Laboratory Analysis shall be submitted to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall handle, label, transport, and dispose of waste material as follows: a. Handling Non-Hazardous Waste 1.) Place all waste and debris in 6-mil thick polyethylene bags and seal the bags. . 2.) Wrap large pieces of debris that would not fit in bags with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting and seal. 3.) Dispose of at an appropriate solid waste facility. b. Handling Hazardous Waste 1.) CONTRACTOR shall place waste in DOT approved containers and label the containers for transport to a licensed disposal site. 2.) CONTRACTOR must use an authorized hazardous waste transporter to haul waste to a hazardous waste facility. 3.) CONTRACTOR must follow all record keeping, chain-of-custody and reporting requirements including a copy of the hazardous waste manifest. 4.) The CONTRACTOR shall accurately measure and weigh the volume of each container or load of waste removed from the site. CONTRACTOR shall submit records of waste volumes to OWNER. 5.) Special attention shall be given to the tone of storage, amount of material stored at any one time, use of proper containers and personnel training. 6.) Paint debris shall not be placed on the unprotected ground and shall be shielded to prevent dispersion of the debris by wind or rain water. 7.) The CONTRACTOR shall provide preparedness, prevention, and contingency plans (PPCP) in accordance with 40 CFR 265 Subpart C and Subpart D for the steps to be taken in the event of an unplanned release or emergency. The CONTRACTOR shall provide appropriate notifications to regulatory agencies if there is a release to the environment exceeding the CERCLA reporting requirements (e.g. lead - 1 pound). 6/28/2004 13282-11 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT 3. All entrances to the building just below the removal area shall be blocked and appropriate signage shall be used to prohibit entry or exit. L. REMOVAL METHOD 1. The CONTRACTOR shall collect all waste materials including wipes, paint chips, personal protective equipment (PPE) and water either by a HEPA filtered vacuum or into 6 mil polyethylene bags. 2. The CONTRACTOR'S workers shall fully decontaminate themselves before leaving the work area. M. CLEAN-UP 1. Maintain surfaces of lead control area free of accumulations of paint chips and dust. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed over the work area. When the paint removal operation has been completed, clean the area of visible lead paint by vacuuming with HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner, sweeping, etc. and washing all surfaces and equipment used in the lead removal operations with a cleaning solution. 2. Final inspection shall be performed only after all waste is packaged and removed, but before dismantling any barrier, decontamination facility, or protective covering. CIeaning shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be based on a visual inspection. At a minimum, the clean up shall be to a level of no visual debris. To facilitate scheduling of inspections, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER of the anticipated completion of the site cleaning 48 hours in advance. 3. If the inspection is unacceptable, the CONTRACTOR shall perform additional cleaning and decontamination, and the above inspection and tests shall be repeated. 4. If the inspection is acceptable, the OWNER shall give approval for the CONTRACTOR to remove all protective coverings which comprise part of the work area seal, protective cover, or decontamination facility. 5. Workers shall wear approved respiratory and personal protective equipment throughout the cleaning and waste disposal activities. N. DISPOSAL OF LEAD CONTAMINATED MATERIAL 1. The CONTRACTOR must comply fully with SSPC - Guide 71 (DIS) as well as all current regulations concerning the testing, handling, hauling, labeling and disposal of all waste generated during this project. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain an EPA generators ID number for the project. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall collect and submit samples for Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure (TCLP) Method 1311 in accordance with Awk 6/28/2004 13282-10 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT OOW medical surveillance program must be made available which consists of both the blood analysis per paragraph 0)(2) "Biological Monitoring" and medical examinations per paragraph 0)(3) "Medical Examinations and Consultations" of the standard. All medical examinations and procedures are to be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician and are to be provided without cost to employees at a reasonable time and place. 9. Medical Removal Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead at or above the action level on each occasion that a periodic and a follow-up blood test indicate that the employee's blood lead level is at or above 50 ig/dl (50 micrograms of lead per deciliter of blood). 10. Employee Information and Training: The CONTRACTOR shall provide training to all employees exposed to lead. The program must apprise the employee of specific hazardous associated with the work environment, protective measures which can be taken, and his or her rights under the standard and must be provided prior to the initial job assignment and be repeated annually for covered employees. 11. Recordkeeping: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain records of exposure monitoring and other data used in exposure assessment; medical surveillance and temporary medical removals. Records are to be made available to employees and their designated representatives and to die National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) and OSHA. 12. Signs: Prior to the commencement of work, the CONTRACTOR shall post caution signs at all approaches to the work area: WARNING LEAD PAINT REMOVAL HAZARD NO SMOKING, EATING, OR DRINKING ENTRY AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED Lettering shall not be smaller than two inches tall and shall be posted at a sufficient distance from the work area to permit a person to read the sign and take precautionary measures to avoid exposure to lead. K. WORK AREA PREPARATION 1. A waterproof surface consisting of 6 mil polyethylene or equivalent shall be placed around the surface impacted and for 12 feet away from the surface. These coverings shall be taped to secure them and pitched so that water runoff does not occur. 2. Any objects in the removal area that cannot be decontaminated shall be sealed with 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. 6/28/2004 13282-9 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT -low. • Description of activities and methods to control exposure. • Work practice program to include removal protection equipment, housekeeping hygiene facilities, etc. • Administrative control schedule. • Communication system for informing all employees of the contractor on-site of lead exposure. • Schedule of regular inspections by the competent person. 4. Respiratory Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall use respirators whenever the concentration of lead is at or above the PEL, in work situations in which engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures below the PEL, and whenever an employee requests a respirator. The CONTRACTOR shall provide respirators at no cost to the employees and at least 2 additional sets for the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a written program that governs proper selection, use, cleaning, and maintenance or respirators, as well as changing filters and fit-testing in accordance with 29CFR1910.134. 5. Protective Clothing and Equipment: The contractor shall provide, at no cost to the employee and owner, protective clothing and equipment that are appropriate for the hazard. The CONTRACTOR is required to provide for the cleaning, laundering, or disposal of protective clothing and equipment and must repair or replace it as needed to maintain effectiveness. 6. Housekeeping: All surfaces must be maintained as free as practicable of accumulation of lead dust. This is to be accomplished primarily by vacuuming floors and other surfaces or by methods equally effective in preventing the dispersal of lead into the workplace. 7. Hygiene Facilities: The CONTRACTOR shall provide hygiene facilities and ensure employee compliance with basic hygiene practices in order to minimize additional sources of lead absorption from inhalation or ingestion of lead that accumulates on a worker's clothes or body. This shall include full body showering during blasting operations and hand/face washing during other activities. The CONRACTOR shall prohibit smoking, eating, applying cosmetics and the presence of tobacco products and food stuffs in all work areas where employees are exposed to lead above the PEL, to prevent contamination. The CONTRACTOR shall provide employees working in lead areas where airborne exposures exceed the PEL with lunchroom facilities or eating areas which are as free as practicable from lead contamination and are readily accessible. All employees shall wash their face and hands before eating or smoking and not enter the eating area wearing uncleaned protective clothing. 8. Medical Surveillance: When employees are or may be exposed to lead at or above the action level for more than 30 days in any consecutive 12 months, a 6/28/2004 13282-8 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT selection, fitting, and maintenance of respirators are met, and if the time of use, when averaged with the time the respirator is not worn, will result in a TWA exposure at or below the PEL. 2. Exposure Assessment: The CONTRACTOR shall determine if any employee is exposed to lead at or above the action level of 30 ig/m3 as an eight-hour TWA. Historical measurements of airborne lead may be used to satisfy the initial exposure assessment requirement if they meet certain requirements. (i.e. exactly the same conditions). In addition, certain lead tasks/operations are presumed to expose employees to levels greater than the PEL unless otherwise demonstrated by the exposure assessment. In those tasks or operations as shown in Table 02090-1, interim protective measures have to be implemented by the CONTRACTOR until there is a demonstration that exposure levels are lower than presumed. Table 02090-1 Presumed Exposures Respiratory Level Protection Factor Task 0-500 lox Manual demolition of structures containing lead- lg/m' coatings or paint(e.g., dry wall), manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun applications, power tool cleaning with dust collection systems, and spray painting with lead paint. 500-2500 50X Using lead-containing mortar, lead burning, or ig/m' conducting the following activities where lead- containing coatings or paint are present: rivet busting, power tool cleaning without dust collection systems, clean-up activities where dry expendable abrasives are used, and the movement and removal of abrasive blasting enclosures. >2500 >50X Activities involving lead-containing coatings or paint on ig/m' structures disturbed by abrasive blasting, welding, cutting, and torch burning. In each of the above categories, the CONTRACTOR shall provide respirators capable of providing protection factors as shown. 3 Methods of Compliance: To the extent feasible, the CONTRACTOR shall institute engineering and work practice controls, including administrative controls, to reduce exposures to or below the PEL. Where feasible engineering controls and work practice controls are not sufficient, appropriate respiratory protection is required to be provided as a supplement. The CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement a written compliance plan prior to commencement of a job where employee exposure to lead, without respect to respiratory protection, will be in excess of the PEL. The plan must be reviewed and updated at least every six months and shall include the following: 6/28/2004 13282-7 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT Sampling equipment shall be calibrated before and after each use. At a minimum, baseline personnel monitoring shall include at least 25% of workers at each different job operation or as required by OSHA.regulations. 2. Results - The CONTRACTOR shall provide the Owner copies of all personal exposure monitoring results, and shall post at the work site, immediately after obtaining the results, but not later than 48 hours after monitoring the results. F. Electrical Hazards - The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for using safe procedures to avoid electrical hazards. This shall include the use of Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters on all equipment and protection of electrical components with polyethylene, particularly in wet environments and any other requirements necessary to protect workers. Any temporary electrical connections shall be performed by a licensed electrician in accordance with applicable codes or regulations. G. Emergency Equipment - CONTRACTOR shall maintain appropriate fire extinguishers on site as well as first aid equipment. Exits shall be checked daily against blockages or impediments to exiting. H. Temporary Services - If necessary, provide temporary power and lighting to work areas, and ensure safe installation of temporary power sources and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements and OSHA requirements. I. Start-up Inspection - After the work area has been prepared as specified above, the CONTRACTOR shall request a formal site inspection by the OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. No disturbance of paint shall occur until the OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE has accepted the site preparation work. J. Lead Hazards - The CONTRACTOR shall insure full compliance with OSHA "Lead in Construction" Standard 29 CFR 1926.62 as summarized below. 1. Worker Lead Exposure: The action level is employee exposure, without regard to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air (30 ig/m3) calculated as an eight-hour time weighted average (TWA). The CONTRACTOR shall implement several provisions of the standard such as periodic exposure monitoring, biologic monitoring, and certain employee training whenever exposure measurements are at or exceed the action level. If employees are exposed above the action level for more than 30 days per year, the employer must provide a periodic medical surveillance program described herein to affected employees. Further, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that no employee is exposed to concentrations of lead in excess of the permissible exposure limit(PEL), which is an eight-hour TWA of 50 ig/m'. Respiratory protection can be used to supplement feasible engineering controls where necessary to comply with this limit if all the requirements relating to 6/28/2004 13282-6 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT C. Local Ventilation - All mechanical tools for working lead paint shall have HEPA equipped ventilation shrouds to collect dust PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Controlled Area - A regulated area around the lead paint impact work area shall be established using warning signs and caution tape. Remove any non-fixed items to storage areas. Once work commences, access to the work area shall be strictly limited to CONTRACTOR and OWNER authorized personnel B. A segregated area shall be determined within the controlled area for the proper decontamination and removal of protective clothing and equipment. All tools shall be decontaminated in this area prior to removal from the controlled area. A decontamination unit constructed of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting shall be erected if worker exposure is above the PEL. C. Environmental Emissions Control 1. Ambient Air Quality - Lead Emissions: Any visible emissions of dust or particulate levels above background shall be cause for immediate strut down of the project until corrections to the containment are made to comply with this criteria. Further, the CONTRACTOR shall periodically monitor the ambient particulate levels in various parts of the facility with a direct reading aerosol O' monitor, such as MIE Model PDM-3, capable of reading 0.1-10.0 micron size particles (PM-10). Air monitoring shall be performed immediately outside the controlled area, at ground level at the closest point to the removal work and at key locations inside the facility. Any increase in respirable particulate of 150 micrograms per cubic meter above background shall immediately shut down the project until the problems are identified and rectified. 2. Water Quality - Any liquid wastes generated must be contained. It shall be disposed of in a lawful manner in full compliance with hazardous waste disposal regulations. It is unlawful for any individual or corporation to discharge water or wastes to the sanitary sewer. D. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ any person not skilled in the work assigned to him, nor anyone who has not received documented notice of the hazards of lead abatement, formal training in the use of respirators, safety procedures, equipment, clothing and work procedures. E. Air Monitoring for Worker Protection 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for conducting their own personnel exposure monitoring to determine compliance with Federal and State regulations. All air samples collected by the CONTRACTOR shall be analyzed by a laboratory accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene Association. 6/28/2004 13282-5 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT Sampling shall be conducted to ensure representative numbers of samples of the wastestream are collected and analyzed. A minimum of 4 samples is required for waste characterization of each media (i.e. soil, water). The name of the testing laboratory to be utilized shall be included. The laboratory shall be certified by the State of Massachusetts for all analyses. The Contractor shall confirm that an EPA identification number will be obtained and that proper manifesting of the waste will be addressed. All on-site storage, handling and disposal shall comply with SSPC - Guide 71 (DIS), State, Federal and local hazardous waste regulations, including but not limited to the time of storage, container requirements, contingency plan, and personnel training. 5. Transportation: Written confirmation that proper transportation of the debris will be accomplished in accordance with the requirements of State, Federal and local regulations (i.e. 40 CFR 263). The name of the transporter shall be included. 6. Disposal: Written confirmation that the debris will be treated and disposed of in accordance with the requirements of State, Federal and local regulations (i.e. 40 CFR 264 and 40 CFR 268). The program shall provide proper assurance that the debris is handled properly from cradle to grave; include the necessary notification and certifications on shipments; provide the name of the disposal facility and include a schedule for the submittal of the completed manifests to the owner. 7. List of all equipment and pertinent specifications (i.e. HEPA filter tools, ventilation systems, etc.) B. Within 30 days of completion of the project. Aaw Certificate of Completion including a final closeout report. This shall include all air sampling data, waste disposal manifests, on-site logs, tests, etc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods required for proper performance of work in this Section. At a minimum, workers shall be trained in accordance with the OSHA lead standard 29 CFR 1910.62. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a competent person who is capable of identifying existing and predictable lead hazards and has authorization to take prompt corrective actions to eliminate them. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Tools - The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all equipment and tools to perform the work in a safe manner. Noise from power equipment shall conform to OSHA Standard 1910.95 Occupational Noise Exposure. B. HEPA Units - All vacuum and exhaust equipment shall have HEPA filtering in conformance with ANSI 29.2. No bypass devices are permitted. All used filters and other contaminated materials shall be disposed of as lead contaminated waste. *e'er. 6/28/2004 13282-4 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT ASTM D3335, "Test Method for Low Concentration for Lead, Cadmium, and Cobalt in Paint by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy" 5. EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) Publications SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste-Physical/Chemical Methods EPA Method 3050, "Acid Digestion of Sediments, Sludges, and Soils" 6. Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC Guide 61 (CON) Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations SSPC Guide 71 (DIS) Guide for the Disposal of Lead Contaminated Surface Preparation Debris 7. State of Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection 310 CMR 30 Hazardous Waste Regulations 310 CMR 1-7 Clean Water Act 310 CMR 16, 19 Solid Waste Regulations 314 CMR 7-8 Clean Air Act 8. Local Town, City or County bylaws, rules and regulations 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to the start of the lead impact work, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to ENGINEER, the following listed items_ No work activities shall commence until these items have been reviewed and approved in writing. Submittal data shall be sufficient in detail to allow identification of the particular product, action or equipment, and to form an opinion so as to its conformity to the specification and/or regulations: 1. Written Removal/Containment Plan (Compliance Plan): The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written plan for the methods to be employed for lead paint impact work to include but not be limited to surface preparation, containment construction, if necessary, interface of trades, sequencing of lead related work/repainting, respirator usage and protective equipment. 2. Written Health and Safety Plan (Compliance Plan): Develop a health and safety plan for all work. Material Safety Data Sheets shall be submitted for all products containing hazardous materials used in the paint abatement work, including coatings. Prepare a plan for air monitoring of workers and a contingency plan for emergencies in the event of containment failure. If available, submit historical air sampling data for OSHA regulations. 3. Certifications: Worker certifications, training and medical records for each person involved in the work performed under 29 CFR 1926.62. If available, provide contractor certifications in accordance with SSPC Painting Contractor Certification Program. 4. Waste Handling, Site Storage Disposal and Testing of Debris: The CONTRACTOR shall submit written procedures to be followed for waste handling to include the sampling and testing of debris to determine its characteristics. 6/2812004 13282-3 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" 29 CFR 1910.1025,."Lead" 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" 29 CFR 1926, "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" (Construction Industry Standards) 29 CFR 1926.62 "Lead-Construction" 40 CFR 50, "National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards 40 CFR 60, "Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources," Appendix A, "Test Methods" 40 CFR 117, "Determination of Reportable Quantities for Hazardous Substances" 40 CFR 122, "EPA Administered Permit Program: The National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System" 40 CFR 172, "Hazardous Waste Transportation" 40 CFR 261, "Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste" Aftk 40 CFR 262, "Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste" 40 CFR 263, "Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste" 40 CFR 264, "Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities" 40 CFR 265, "Interim Status Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities" 40 CFR 268, "Land Disposal Restrictions" 40 CFR 300, "National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan" 40 CFR 302, "Designation, Reportable Quantities, and Notification" 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA Booklet 3126 "Working with Lead in the Construction Industry". 3. National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety NIOSH Method 7082, "Lead" 4. American Society for Testing and Materials 6/28/2004 13282-2 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT SECTION 13282 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to perform all lead paint abatement work as specified herein, including but not limited to worker protection, environmental protection and the handling/disposal of debris generated from the lead paint removal. B. Fumish all necessary permits, licenses, and certifications required by this Section, as well as all applicable regulations. C. Provide containment and filtration system to collect all fugitive emissions and to provide total contairunent of all debris if dust is generated during activities that impact paint. D. The removal, repair and/or replacement of various painted surfaces has potential for disturbing lead based paint. The work practices, removal and disposal techniques described in the following sections are designed to adequately protect workers, the general public and the environment from the hazards encountered in the removal of such materials. The CONTRACTOR shall follow these procedures when there is the potential for impact of lead based paint. E. Assume that all painted components associated with the structures contain lead. Refer to the "Lead Based Paint Inspection Table" appended hereto for a list of painted surfaces and items that contain lead. F. CONTRACTOR shall perform all paint scraping activities via wet methods coupled with a paint chip/debris collection system. All component removal shall be performed within a regulated area consisting of polyethylene sheeting or tarps protecting the ground and any other surfaces, entry ways, shrubs, etc. that are located within the regulated area. All generated leaded waste is subject to testing and hazardous waste disposal requirements. Any trade whose activities impact a leaded surface are subject to the requirements of this specification and applicable state and federal regulations. G. Other hazardous materials may be present in the paint to include chromium, cadmium, etc. 1.2 REFERENCES A. All applicable Federal, State, and local regulations including but not limited to: 1. Code of Federal Regulations 29 CFR 1910, "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" (General Industry Standards) 29 CFR 1910.20, "Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records" 6/28/2004 13282-1 LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT C14 t A 04 & I \ r : � \ \ / ( § 0 $ 2 � LLI ui _ -took. m � ) 0 \ Z / 0 § S } ) \% k / 2 § ) E — § - / / \ ) \ to 55 » wr : m K^ \ ® \ \ \ \ [ / ) CQ �. Mar,�f t f'�"`} t'T e la fi"``�"i�'F' 3� �• m,r_ 1 W 4 L.. s'• � 7-�t�.� +�rj .T"l 2��E..1 SVVV�„'tf'` =r ' 6—IMS_Jam}- (�fi�i'.i'- t � rF 'k � Y}4YLr ' fMcC Y'.,s.� �� b��Sy�v✓.�� rn �N 4 ,�;��,� r ,��,� s her fr s k�.[��r��•;tf?�� • 1'�° 'iri.4�'�?�•�.�,`_,-lu.y.4.1-i:ittiSi�?•:l:•(P:L -tea' ��L•r'��F L f?17l" ri��Nr / Y L� q�:. 46 r•41��'`'i--- t�e,Z,bS. N 4� r�` n r rti 1(��{¢y�' �v - ° tit } �-`'=u-��3�'i� �n��x�.z�k��4,-;k� T' �tz,�,�r., ..t .t •.t 11rk..ImS.RS..,,_ - ,zF-u4%.'t i e'iv�...�:!r`•r r �W i..>_ <i LtiJ_°v �Vtl�y{�i'�S� i�ty n ' 1 S i' U AOftk / : r / § \ & , \ 9 § B }S ` ) \ / � • : � ) � , / LU : ± 2 _ K \ \ � � r § Ea � \ $ ƒ � z ± = k \ \ } \ « § . / kj � ) kk § } f S \ k ) 'k £ [ �\ � � ) ; ■ . - \ \ / 2 d �< \ 4 w � 5ƒ � �? Ourk� !y_i_.l•rC t' ,��r j �i `�r..i ley 1 � �� Ic jF�S � _'a 5,� •a �, � i ��° dj� 'I, t 3 ,�� -,mac_.. �-r •55t F-'r. r � '•tip.G�y�' �i {�?�� ' 4 rf` r i• >is � e t '��° &'�� ia��l ilr �� 13fr, s Cr ��; �':�`;Sk.,}a,• • � t Y}� � r�� f :sat �, 41 aL �Ewo•� N". '><`t�cr.�,�� `�a-lf r R•� 1y;�1 s �+-S�'n •J ��{C4�'�� `'-"f��1'x �?.l.etu� ��ify�3--:i °A't•3a1 S.,iLirl�l LJ� T y�J =�" er r �c �2,. ; `e x �•�,.r dt�e a MA 3f-�[tin , F pub 5r ✓� U 04 �f aA�� n�Y+ JO'l �'"r ' u^� '�•r 3.13` f ^y�. sea ,s tr�H ,f'�'�,...��i�•rK ° r' i 0 O r c p) co o a 96 om 3 i rida •� = �3 � "d � Y1 � � yj � � v p a II 0 0 `o 0 3 w Q 4 b �.. 4- w 4. .0 cJ V U ,NC C Q C C C F J C d L b ,b ti G C no :7 w C •G � � � ��, � � N Pr W y 3 A F F FL. H F G FLU z z 0 °° Z" z z z z z z z z z z � E z 0 uj U r w °� (n SO w -- C a W w ag = CD a ai r ° 50 0 o r o r� fn ° C O N aT-e G 94 N $ S W Z b c o o a E 5 O E m 0 a x x aq N u O O o O �y •� L t2 ° o b � go 3 c o o o y a ' r v .5 u s v o T 3 v Z 3 3 3 ° 3 d a S no LM mo S '.yuC U N ,1 L a 3 �i n 10 ry O U U U U U 00 4 Ill :7 N rd N N � � Vy W M 07 'L,` �p \) h f-- N ^' N 7 v� �p t� dJ G� ¢' ^i �•} r•1 ry r•f r� f 4. Waste Packaging - All waste shall be thoroughly wetted when packaged and CONTRACTOR shall inspect each bag to observe that water condensation is visible. Insufficiently wetted bags shall be opened, rewetted, and resealed. When a waste bag is full, it shall be securely sealed with tape, and then placed in the designated temporary storage area inside of the work area. D. Waste Container Removal and Disposal Documentation 1. To comply with the requirement that waste disposal of an approved landfill be documented, CONTRACTOR shall remove waste containers from work areas only under the direction of ENGINEER, and shall complete appropriate documentation for each load of waste removed froin the site. 2. Accurately measure the volume of each container or load of waste removed from the site. 3. Provide legal transportation of the waste to the disposal landfill, and complete or obtain all required licenses, manifests, dump slips, or other forms. Copies of all forms or licenses, and the signed original of the Waste Disposal Form for each waste load, shall be given to ENGINEER. 4. Waste may be transported to and temporarily stored at a pre-approved off-site storage area owned by CONTRACTOR, but it must ultimately be disposed of at the specified landfill before final payments are approved. END OF SECTION F:\PROTECTS\W•3577 CBI,NORTHAMPTON\13281ASSESTOS.DOC 6/28/2004 13281-11 ASBESTOS ABATEME IT subject to the approval of ENGINEER based on a visual inspection, surface dust wipe tests, and air testing. B. Cleaning Methods and Approval 1. All waste containers and removal equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned with a HEPA-filtered vacuum, decontaminated with the use of amended water, and then removed from the work area. 2. All surfaces in the work area shall be thoroughly wiped clean and, after drying, thoroughly decontaminated with a HEPA-filtered vacuuming device and encapsulated. 3. After cleaning, ENGINEER shall inspect the site. To facilitate scheduling of air tests, CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER of the anticipated completion of the site cleaning at least 48 hours in advance. 4. If any waste or fibers are observed within the work area during the inspection, CONTRACTOR shall perform additional cleanup and decontamination. 5. If the air sample results are above the Air Quality Standard, CONTRACTOR shall perform additional cleaning and decontamination, and the inspection and air tests shall be repeated. 6. If the air sample results are below the Air Quality Standard, ENGINEER shall give approval for CONTRACTOR to remove all protective coverings which do not comprise part of the work area seal, containment barrier, or decontamination , facility. 7. Once these items have been properly packaged and removed from the work area as contaminated waste, package and properly dispose of all remaining plastic sheeting, disassemble and remove the Decontamination Facility and HEPA exhausts, and perform a final HEPA vacuuming of all surfaces_ 8. Upon completion of the cleaning, all temporary access openings shall be repaired. C. Waste Disposal 1. Definition - Asbestos wastes are defined as all building materials and debris, insulation, disposable clothing and protective equipment, plastic sheeting and tape, exhaust systems or vacuum filters, or any abatement equipment that has been contaminated with asbestos and cannot be completely cleaned by vacuuming and by washing in the Decontamination Facility. 2. General Requirements - All asbestos wastes (e.g., pipe lagging, floor tile, tramite siding, etc.) must be handled, packaged, stored, transported, and disposed of as specified in this subsection, and in compliance with all federal, state, and local regulations and codes. 3. Waste Labeling - If waste containers are not already so preprinted, warning labels having waterproof print and permanent adhesive shall be affixed to the lid and/or sides of the containers, whether or not these containers are further packaged. Warning labels shall be conspicuous and legible, and conform to the latest OSHA, EPA and DOT labeling requirements. '^'' 6/28/2004 13281-10 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 1. An asbestos designated HEPA vacuum cleaner shall be used with the hose attachment positioned with the abrasive tool in such a manner to ensure that all dust will be captured by the vacuum. 2. Depending on air velocity in the area (e.g., wind, building ventilation, ...), a shield may be required to ensure that the vacuum is able to capture all dust created. E. Asphalt-based and Non-friable Asbestos Abatement: 1. Work Procedure a. Perform whatever procedures are necessary including the application of wet methods and covering materials to ensure that release of asbestos materials is reduced to no visible emissions. Work using any cutting or abrading equipment must be performed in a negative pressure enclosure. b. Remove materials using tools and equipment specified in regulatory guidance documents. C. Continuously mist the work area as materials are being removed from the structure. d. All materials must be removed intact. e. All loose debris shall be immediately collected via HEPA vacuum or wet wipe methods. The vacuum debris and wipe materials shall be segregated and disposed as asbestos contaminated waste. f. Wet methods shall be used whenever operations call for the scraping of resilient materials or mastic. g. Where cutting and abrading is prohibited, a negative pressure enclosure is not required. Waste must be lowered by a crane, hoist or dust-tight chute, in accordance with applicable regulations. F. Encapsulation 1. After all asbestos-containing material is removed, seal the surface with an encapsulation material. CONTRACTOR shall inform ENGINEER whenever any asbestos-containing materials cannot be removed, whether in total or in part. If required, alternative corrective actions will be determined by ENGINEER. 2. The encapsulant shall be prepared according to the manufacturer's specifications, and then applied to the surfaces. All workers shall be provided a Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) on the encapsulant. Workers shall wear appropriate personal protective equipment as designated on the MSDS during encapsulant application. 3.7 FINAL WORK AREA CLEANUP, DECONTAMINATION, AND WASTE DISPOSAL A. General Requirements 1. After all asbestos-containing or contaminated materials have been removed, remove all wastes and perform a final cleanup and decontamination of each work area. Final cleaning shall be performed only after all waste is packaged and removed, but before reinstalling, demolishing any equipment, or dismantling any barrier, Decontamination Facility, or protective covering. Cleaning shall be 6/28/2004 13281-9 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT E. Exhaust system shall be operated constantly from the time that preparation is completed, until "clean air" certification is obtained. 3.5 APPROVAL OF CONTAINMENT AREAS A. After the work area has been prepared as specified, CONTRACTOR shall request an inspection by ENGINEER. No removal or disturbance of asbestos-contaminated materials or systems is to occur until ENGINEER, has inspected and approved each separate prepared work area. B. Any deficiencies in the preparation work shall be promptly corrected in a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER. 3.6 ASBESTOS REMOVAL PROCEDURES A. Friable Asbestos (Without GIovebag Removal) 1. All asbestos-containing materials shall be contained within a negative pressure enclosure system, wetted with amended water and carefully removed to prevent droppage and creation of airborne dust. 2. Once the removal of all asbestos-containing material is complete, all surfaces and walls within the area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wet mopping, followed by thorough drying, and then HEPA vacuumed. A satisfactory encapsulant (lockdown material) shall be applied to all surfaces from which friable asbestos has been removed. 3. The exterior of disposal bags shall be vacuumed and washed free of all visible `m" asbestos fibers before their removal from the work area. B. Friable Asbestos (With Glovebag Removal): 1. All glovebag removal operations shall be conducted in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and applicable state regulations. Glovebags cannot be slid on pipes or reused. 2. Partial containment is required for removal of more than 3 linear feet of pipe insulation. This shall include critical barriers and performance of work under a HEPA filtered negative air pressure. C. Nonfriable Asbestos: 1. If CONTRACTOR determines that the nonfriable material can be removed without creating any airborne loose friable asbestos, the specific practices listed in this Section and Sections D, E and F shall be followed. Otherwise, the nonfriable asbestos must be removed under the conditions of a frill negative- pressure enclosure. 2. All removal areas shall be properly segregated by posting caution signs meeting the specifications of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 at any location and approaches to a location where airborne concentrations of asbestos may exceed ambient background levels. Workers shall don all protective equipment. The material shall be removed very carefully to minimize any breakage which may release airborne fibers. D. Abrasive Cutting/sawing/drilling: 6/28/2004 13281-8 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT nonfriable asbestos which was packaged in a clean enviromnent does not require decontamination in a shower. B. Construction - Decontamination Facilities shall be constructed and maintained as specified in applicable regulations and shall be located in areas approved by ENGINEER. C. Manner of Operation - All personnel shall enter the Clean Room, remove and store street clothes, and put on clean protective clothing and respirators; then enter the Equipment Room, put on any additional equipment, and enter the work areas. All personnel exiting the work areas shall enter the Equipment Room, remove and store or dispose of all contaminated clothing and shoes, shower, and then put on street clothing in the Clean Room. Respirators shall be worn into and cleaned in the shower, and dried and stored in the Clean Room. D. Wastewater Disposal - All water from the shower and cleaning hose shall be collected, pumped through a 5.0 micron filter, and then legally drained to points approved by ENGINEER. E. Cleaning - Decontamination Facility shall be cleaned using a HEPA-filtered vacuum at least once every shift, or more frequently, if needed, to prevent dust accumulation. F. Prohibitions - Smoking, drinking, or eating shall not be permitted in the work area or Decontamination Facility. 3.3 WORK AREA ISOLATION A. Preclean any fixed objects or equipment within the work areas by using HEPA vacuum equipment and wet washing except where air samples indicate concentrations of airborne fibers less than 0.01 f/cc and there is no contamination of any surfaces; then enclose with minimum 6-mil plastic sheeting scaled airtight. B. Large areas, such as open elevator shafts, doorways, and stairwells, shall be sealed with two layers of 6-mil poly over plywood on 2" x 4" framing. C. Protect and isolate the work area for the duration of work by completely sealing off all openings and fixtures (including, but not limited to, floors, walls, heating and ventilation ducts, doorways, corridors, windows, and lighting) using plastic sheeting sealed securely in place. The work area shall be sealed airtight to the extent possible. D. Seal airtight all holes or other openings in the ceiling or the floor below in each work area with poly sheeting. 3.4 WORK AREA EXHAUST A. Install one or more portable HEPA-filtered exhausts to maintain each work area, including the Decontamination Facility, under negative pressure, and to reduce airborne asbestos fiber concentrations. B. The exhaust(s) must be capable of providing at least an inward velocity through any unsealed openings, including the Decontamination Facility, of at least 100 fpm, and four full air changes per hour throughout the work area. C. All exhaust air shall pass through a HEPA filter before being discharged to the exterior of the building. D. Deficient air flows shall be immediately reported and work ceased until the situation is corrected. 6/28/2004 13281-7 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT B. To comply with applicable regulations, notify appropriate regulatory agencies of abatement activities. I. Provide the required written notification at least 10 days before the start of the asbestos abatement activity to the United States Environmental Protection Agency and all required state agencies. 2. Provide the required written notification by registered mail to local authorities as required. 3. Obtain and process all applicable forms and permits required. C. Prepare the work areas according to the following general sequence of procedures to ensure that proper fiber containment and protection systems are installed before any work which could generate airborne asbestos fibers. I. Erect barricades, post access restriction signs, seal all openings into the work area airtight(including doors, chases, shafts, and other vertical penetrations), and erect or install Decontamination Facilities and HEPA exhaust systems. 2. Isolate and seal airtight with plastic and tape all HVAC system openings in the work area. All HVAC or exhaust systems within, or ductwork passing through, a fully contained removal air shall be inactivated (this does not refer to glove bag removal areas). 3. Obtain formal approval from ENGINEER of all preparation work and containment areas before commencing asbestos removal. ENGINEER shall be given at least 48 hours notification of the intent to start removal work in any work area. D. Isolation of Electrical Systems I. The scope of the electrical isolation work covers the protection of electrical equipment that is in areas where asbestos removal work is performed and where the water used for wetting the material before or during removal could possibly contact the equipment and create a hazard. 2. Provide portable electrical panels with ground fault protection for all nonbattery power requirements. These panels shall have sufficient capacity for all HEPA exhaust and vacuums, power tools, portable lighting, and all other electrical needs. 3. Provide a licensed electrician to wire the electrical panels in each work area, and to be on call to handle any electrical problem which may arise during the course of the work. 4. All materials and workmanship shall conform with the latest editions of applicable codes, standards, and specifications. 5. Once a work area becomes isolated by containment, only weatherproof lighting and washable tools will be allowed in the area. 3.2 DECONTAMINATION FACILITY A. Description - Any person or thing exiting from the work areas must pass through a ,k Decontamination Facility consisting of three separate, adjacent rooms separated by curtained entrances, constricted in accordance with applicable regulations. Packaged 6/28/2004 13281-6 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT C. Wetting Agent or Surfactant- shall be 50 percent polyoxyethylene ester and 50 percent polyoxyethylene ether, or equivalent, mixed in the proportion of one ounce surfactant per five gallons of water. The material shall be odorless, nontoxic, nonirritating, and noncarcinogenic. It shall be applied as a mist using a low pressure sprayer recommended by the surfactant manufacturer. D. Tape and Glue -shall be capable of sealing plastic joints and attaching plastic to finished surfaces. The bonding strength and resulting seal integrity shall not be affected by mist or water, wetting or encapsulating agent, or any other materials to be used in the work area. E. Warning Signs and Labels - shall comply with all federal, state, or local codes and regulations. F. Waste Containers and Transportation - shall be suitable for loading, temporary storage, transport, and unloading of contaminated waste without risk of ripping, rupture, or exposure to persons, or emissions to the atmosphere. Transportation methods shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and with any state or Iocal hazardous or special waste regulations for temporary storage, transport, and disposal if such codes are enforced in states in which the waste will be stored, transported, or disposed of. G. Asphalt-based roofing or non friable material removal and protection equipment shall be equipped with an exhaust ventilation system incorporating a High Efficiency Particulate Air(HEPA)filter. 2.3 SAFETY SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT A. Respirator Types - Provide all workers with a full or half facepiece respirator which is approved by NIOSH/MSHA for protection against airborne asbestos, and meets the requirements of the OSHA Asbestos Standard. Provide respirators for each worker and at least two extra respirators for use by approved visitors. B. Protective Clothing - Provide all workers and approved visitors with disposable coveralls, head and foot coverings, gloves, and eye protection(i.e., safety glasses with half-face respirators). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PREPARATION PROCEDURES A. Upon receipt of a Notice to Proceed, CONTRACTOR shall meet at the site with ENGINEER to reach agreement on: 1. Scope and manner of work performance and all schedules. 2. CONTRACTOR and supporting vendor vehicle access and parking. 3. CONTRACTOR access to the work areas, including approved doors, stairways, and corridors. 4. Location of water supply and wastewater drain connection points, if available. 5. Determination of all equipment and other items to be removed from the work areas, and the location of temporary storage space, if applicable. 6. Any other logistical factors to minimize interference with public safety and health, and other CONTRACTORS' activities. 6/28/2004 13281-5 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 40%� B. Medical Examinations and Recordkeeping Pursuant to OSHA requirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide a replacement and annual medical examination for each worker who enters a removal work area. At a minimum, the medical examination shall comply with 29 CFR 1926.58(in). 1.8 WORKER QUALIFICATIONS, TRAINING, AND EDUCATION A. CONTRACTOR is required to have a Supervisor or Foreman in each work area at all tunes work is in progress. B. The Supervisor shall be thoroughly familiar and experienced with asbestos abatement and related work, and shall enforce the use of all safety procedures and equipment. He/she shall be knowledgeable of EPA, OSHA, and NIOSH requirements and guidelines. The Supervisor shall be licensed in accordance with applicable state regulations. C. CONTRACTOR shall at all tunes enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees, and shall not employ any person not skilled in the work assigned, nor anyone who has not received documented notice of the hazards of asbestos abatement, formal training in the use of respirators, safety procedures, equipment, clothing, and work procedures. All workers shall be licensed in accordance with applicable state regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials or equipment delivered to the site shall be unloaded, temporarily stored, and transferred to the work area in a manner which shall not interfere with operation of others at the facility, or employee's access and safety. B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall not be used and shall be promptly removed from the premises. Materials that become contaminated with asbestos-containing material shall be thoroughly cleaned, or sealed in plastic bags or sheeting, labeled, and legally disposed of in an approved, secure landfill. C. All materials and equipment shall comply, at a minimum, with all sections of this specification, relevant federal, state, and applicable local codes, and industry standards. 2.2 ABATEMENT EQUIPMENT&SUPPLIES A. HEPA-Filtered Exhausts - Air inside each work area shall be exhausted through a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter. Commercially manufactured HEPA-filtered exhaust units, with specification plates intact, must be provided for each work area to attain, at a minimum, four air volume changes per hour and an inward flow of clean air into each work area at the Decontamination Facility of at least 100 feet per minute. The HEPA filter shall be preceded by replaceable prefilters and the unit must be designed so that it camiot be operated unless all filters are in place. The units must also be designed with a gauge to indicate the pressure drop across filters, and lights or audible alarms to indicate that the filters are properly installed, functional, and when they must be changed. Flexible ducting shall be required to allow exhausting to the exterior of the building. No exhaust with any other type of particulate cleaning system (such as electrostatic precipitators)shall be allowed without prior-written approval. B. Plastic Sheeting ("Poly") and Bags - shall be polyethylene or equivalent with a thickness of at least 6 rnil for all applications. 6/28/2004 13281-4 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR will be analyzed by a laboratory accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene Association. Sampling equipment shall be calibrated before and after each use_ B. Air Quality Standard - All air tests made in proximity to any removal area, and to document "clean air," shall be compared to an air quality standard of 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) as required by applicable regulations. If any air sample exceeds the air quality standard, CONTRACTOR shall immediately stop all work until the cause is identified and corrected_ C. Air Monitoring Methods - NIOSH Method 7400 shall be used for measuring levels of airborne asbestos fibers. All monitoring methods shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 and applicable state regulations. D. Results - CONTRACTOR shall provide ENGINEER copies of all personal exposure monitoring results, and shall post results at the work site after obtaining the results, but not later than 48 hours. E. Upon completion of all work in any defined work area, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall conduct a final inspection for the purpose of certifying work completion. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be immediately corrected in a manner specified by CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER. Final payments shall be approved by ENGINEER only after CONTRACTOR provides a certificate of completion and all properly completed Waste Disposal Documentation Forms as required by law. F. ENGINEER, hired by the OWNER will perform post abatement visual inspection and clearance air sampling prior to removal of any containment areas or before CONTRACTOR demobilizes from work area. If visual inspection or clearance air sample results fail to meet applicable standards, CONTRACTOR shall perform additional cleaning and shall pay for additional inspection, clearance air sample collection and analysis. 1.6 NOTIFICATION OF HAZARD A. CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify ENGINEER by telephone, followed by written notice, of any risks of adverse health and safety impacts on the environment, exposure of workers or the general public, or failure to comply with the specifications. CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify ENGINEER of the reason and required resolution of all observed deficiencies, and record them in ink in a hardbound notebook. 1.7 WORKER PROTECTION AND SAFETY A. General CONTRACTOR shall comply in all respects with regulatory requirements pertaining to worker health and safety protection, asbestos fiber containment, and exposure control. The requirements shall be closely monitored and strictly enforced throughout all work. Any deficiencies shall be promptly corrected or CONTRACTOR shall stop work. B. Respiratory Protection Provide respirators to all workers in accordance with applicable regulations and in accordance with CONTRACTOR's Respiratory Protection Program. Respirators need not be used during asphalt-based roofing removal if a negative exposure assessment can be made. Respirators must be worn initially and continuously until an assessment can be made and worker exposure is below the PEL. A negative exposure assessment can be made initially if historical air monitoring data during similar projects shows no exposure above the PEL. 6/28/2004 13281-3 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT AVW E. Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Regulations 310 CMR 7.00, 310 CMB 18.00, and 310 CMR 19.00. F. Massachusetts Division of Labor and Workforce Development Regulation 453 CMR 6.00. G. All applicable local ordinances, regulations, or rules pertaining to asbestos, including its storage, transportation, and disposal. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to the start of the removal work, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to ENGINEER, the following listed items. No work activities shall commence until these items are reviewed and approved in writing. Submittal data shall be sufficient in detail to allow identification of the particular product or equipment, and to form an opinion as to its conformity to the specification and/or regulations. 1. Detailed work plan showing the proposed methods of abating each identified asbestos-containing material and for sealing each work area airtight (if required by regulatory standard); protecting floors, walls, and other fixed equipment; exact locations and manners of construction of the Decontamination Facility; and number, capacity, and installation and operation details for the portable HEPA- filtered exhaust units. 2. Documentation of certification of all workers pursuant to applicable state regulations and OSHA-specified medical examinations (with examinator approval). 3. Proposed waste hauler with copies of all applicable licenses, registrations, and approvals. 4. A detailed work schedule for each area listing the proposed number, dates, and hours of each work shift. Schedule shall encompass the entire project, including notifications, inspections, abatement clearance inspection/ monitor-ing and final clean-up. 5. Copies of all permits, licenses, or waste shipment records generated or used for this project. 6. A copy of the OSHA-required written Respiratory Protection Program, including a fit testing methodology for respirators, worker medical approvals, maintenance and decontamination details. 7. Documentation of CONTRACTOR's license issued pursuant to applicable state regulations. B. At the completion of the abatement work, CONTRACTOR shall submit a final report that includes all disposal records, data, inspection/monitoring activities and air sampling results. 1.5 MONITORING AND FINAL CLEARANCE A. Responsibilities - CONTRACTOR shall conduct appropriate continuous air monitoring for the purpose of determining the effectiveness of containment systems and work procedures. CONTRACTOR shall conduct appropriate personnel exposure monitoring to determine compliance with OSHA requirements. All air samples collected by 6/28/2004 13281-2 ASBESTOS ABATE1vIENT SECTION 13281 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section addresses the abatement of asbestos-containing materials only. CONTRACTOR responsible for asbestos removal shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment and shall perform all work required to safely remove and legally dispose of all asbestos-containing materials. CONTRACTOR shall provide all insurance, certifications and licenses necessary for the work. B. This Section pertains to the removal and legal disposal of asbestos containing materials in accordance with these Specifications and all applicable federal, state, and local government laws, statutes, regulations, ordinances, standards and guidelines. Whenever there is a conflict between applicable requirements and these Specifications, the more stringent provisions apply to the work to be performed hereunder as determined by ENGINEER. C. CONTRACTOR shall file all necessary notices, obtain all permits and licenses, and pay all governmental taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with the work. Obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. 1.2 LOCATION OF WORK A. Location of work areas, descriptions, estimated types and quantities of asbestos- containing materials (ACM) are shown on the plans and described in the two ABATEMENT Schedules appended hereto. If additional ACM's are encountered, CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER immediately and have an asbestos removal team prepared to abate the material. B. The two ABATEMENT Schedules identify all suspect ACM materials encountered and bulk sampled during the survey. The quantities are provided for general guidance and may not correspond exactly to the quantity to be removed. CONTRACTOR shall determine quantities and identify all areas of asbestos for bidding purposes. 1.3 REFERENCES CONTRACTOR is responsible to determine the most recent asbestos removal and disposal requirements established by all applicable federal, state, and applicable local government laws, statues, regulations, ordinances, standards, and guidelines. A. USEPA Regulations for Asbestos, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants(NESHAPS). B. USEPA Regulations for Asbestos, Asbestos Abatement Projects, 40 CFR 763, Subpart G. C. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Asbestos Regulations, 29 CFR 1926.1101. D. All NIOSH air sampling and evaluation standards. 6/28/2004 13281-1 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,ow 2. Blind Units Installed outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. E. Color-Coated Finish: 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 2. Wood: Apply manufacturer's standard opaque transparent factory-applied finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, application, and minimum dry film thickness. F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal,wood, and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch 2 inches Insert dimension to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. B. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Bottom Rail: Manufacturers standard Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends Hardwood matching slats and trapezoid-shaped bottom angled for minimizing light gaps; with enclosed and protected ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. E. Ladders: Braided string Manufacturer's standard-width cloth tapes Insert description. Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 1. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, and pattern matching Architect's samples Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod,for the following operation: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand wood-tone wand to match slats cord- operated titter. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind Length required to make operation convenient from floor level As indicated on Drawings. 3. Tilt: Full Insert limited tilt description. G. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. H. Lift Operation: Manual, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches long. I. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: As indicated on Drawings in a window treatment schedule. J. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right and left side of headrail, respectively Right side of headrail Left side of headrail, unless otherwise indicated. K. Mounting: Wall mounting Ceiling mounting End mounting Wall extension brackets As indicated, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. L. Colors,Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: Match Architect's samples As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range As indicated in a window treatment schedule. 2.4 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Blind Units Installed between (inside)Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each � "'' blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. -Iwk 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats, matching Architect's samples Color texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. M. Cornice: Insert description. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats, matching Architect's samples Color texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. N. Tassels: Hardwood, manufacturer's standard Insert style finished to match slats. O. Mounting: Wall mounting Ceiling mounting End mounting Wall extension brackets As indicated, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. P. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated. Q. Colors,Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: Match Architect's samples Match Architect's samples for custom color and other characteristics As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range As indicated in a window treatment schedule. 2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, POLYMER SLATS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Comfortex Window Fashions; Insert product name or designation. 2. Hunter Douglas; Insert product name or designation. 3. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; Insert product name or designation. 4. Mark Window Products; Insert product name or designation. 5. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Insert product name or designation. B. Slats: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded PVC polymer/wood alloy that will not crack or yellow; antistatic, dust-repellent treated; with crowned manufacturer's standard profile. 1. Width: 2 inches 2-1/2 inches. a. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish: Wood-tone Painted color as indicated. 3. Finish: Two colors textures patterns as indicated, one per side of slat. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends; capacity for one two Insert number blind(s) per headrail, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings in a window treatment schedule. ,00k HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Width: 1 inch. a. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard Every 0.79 inch Insert dimension. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Insert number colors as indicated, for striped blind with pattern as indicated on Drawings. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends; capacity for one two Insert number blind(s)per headrail, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings in a window treatment schedule. D. Bottom Rail: Hardwood matching slats and trapezoid-shaped bottom angled for minimizing light gaps;with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color,texture, pattern, and gloss of slats Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of valance Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats, matching Architect's samples Color texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Maximum Light-Blocking Blinds: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps if slats are tilted closed; with tight tape spacing indicated and slats with minimal-sized rout holes for ladders hidden and placed near back edge for maximum slat overlap; with headrail and bottom rail extended and formed for light-tight joints between rail and adjacent slats or construction. F. Ladders: Braided string Manufacturer's standard-width cloth tapes Insert description. Evenly spaced to prevent long-term louver sag. 1. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, and pattern matching Architect's samples Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing overrotation, and linkage rod,for the following operation: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand hardwood wand finished to match slats cord-operated tilter. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind Length required to make operation convenient from floor level As indicated on Drawings. 3. Tilt: Full Insert limited tilt description. H. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. I. Lift Operation: Manual, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches long. J. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: As indicated on Drawings in a window treatment schedule. K. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right side of headrail Left side of headrail Center blind and left side of headrail, respectively Center blind and right side of headrail, respectively, unless otherwise indicated. L. Valance: Manufacturer's standard Insert description. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -awk 3. Tilt: Full. 4. Tilt: One Two-direction, positive stop or lock-out limited at an angle of 40 60 70 75 Insert number degrees from zero-degree horizontal, both directions. I. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. J. Lift Operation: Manual, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches long. K. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right and left side of headrail, respectively Right side of headrail Left side of headrail Center blind and left side of headrail, respectively Center blind and right side of headrail, respectively, unless otherwise indicated. L. Valance: Two slats PVC strip Manufacturer's standard Insert description. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats, matching Architect's samples Color texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. M. Mounting: Wall mounting Ceiling mounting End mounting Wall extension brackets As indicated, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes;with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. N. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. O. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard. P. Colors,Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: Match Architect's samples Match Architect's samples for custom color and other characteristics As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range As indicated in a window treatment schedule. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, WOOD SLATS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas; Insert product name or designation. 2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; Insert product name or designation. 3. Mark Window Products; Insert product name or designation. 4. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Insert product name or designation. 5. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. B. Slats: Hardwood, North American basswood poplar ramin Insert species species,flame- retardant treated; with flat profile and radiused corners and beaded edges and double beaded edges. 1. Width: 1-3/8 inch 2 inches 2-3/8-inchlnsert dimension. a. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. a. Spacing: Not less than every Every 0.71 inch 0.77 inch 0.79 inch 0.85 inch 0.87 inch. 3. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard Not less than 0.006 inch Not less than 0.008 inch Insert dimension. 4. Finish: One color One color each side As indicated. a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. b. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing the reflection of solar energy on the outside-facing slat surface. 5. Perforated Slats: Openness factor of 6 to 7 Insert number percent. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following: 1. Capacity: One blind per headrail Two blinds per headrail As indicated. 2. Integrated Head rail/Valance: Curved face Insert description. 3. Light-blocking lower back lip. 4. Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings. D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured to match crowned shape of slat bottom contoured for minimizing light gaps Insert type; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. E. Maximum Light-Blocking Blinds: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps if slats are tilted closed; with tight tape spacing indicated and slats with minimal-sized rout holes for ladders hidden and placed near back edge for maximum slat overlap; with headrail and bottom rail extended and formed for light-tight joints between rail and adjacent slats or construction. 1. Finish: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats, matching Architect's samples Color texture, pattern, and gloss differing from slats as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string. 2. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch 2 Inches or More: Braided string Manufacturer's standard-width reinforced vinyl tapes Manufacturer's standard-width cloth tapes Insert description. a. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations Color, texture, and pattern matching Architect's samples Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard. H. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing overrotation, and linkage rod, and the following: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand cord-operated tilter. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Manufacturer's standard Full length of blind Length required to make operation convenient from floor level As indicated on Drawings. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Aft C. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, lead-free designation, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins,for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than Insert number units. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas; Insert product name or designation. 2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; Insert product name or designation. 3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Insert product name or designation. 4. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners. 1. Width: 2 inches. a. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard 1.74 inch Insert dimension. 2. Width: 1 inch 1/2 to 5/8 inch. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 12491 -HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Window Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. 2. Insert fire-test-response characteristic: Insert fire-test-response requirements and test method. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. „ak F. Fasten solid-surfacing-material countertops by screwing through comer blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Provide bead of caulk at backside of top of back and sidesplashes prior to setting countertop. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356-6 Village at Hospital Hill— Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Provide selection made by Architect from full range of standard finishes available, including pickled white. 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 314 inch thick. 1. For countertops at sinks and lavatories, use phenolic-resin particleboard or exterior-grade plywood. 2. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of particleboard laminated to top. 3. Provide countertops in configurations indicated on the Drawings. Provide sidesplashes in all locations. B. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate. 2.8 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. 2. Provide countertops in configurations indicated on the Drawings. Provide sidesplashes in all locations. 2.9 PLASTIC LAMINATE WALL BACKSPLASH A. Provide, where indicated on the drawings back and side splashes in kitchens between contertop and wall cabinets. Material shall be plastic laminate glued to plywood. At fire rated partitions, apply plywood over gypsum wallboard or plaster wall surface. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through comer blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. Provide bead of caulk at backside of top of back and sidesplashes prior to setting countertop. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -tow B. Hinges: Semiconcealed (wraparound)butt hinges for overlay doors. C. Pulls: 3'/2'brass wirepulls at all doors and drawers. D. Drawer Guides: Twin track, side mounted, epoxy-coated-metal, heavy duty self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA Al 56.9, Type 805091. Guides shall be designed with a minimum capacity of 75 Ibs each. 2.6 CABINET CONSTRUCTION A. Face Style: Reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet body members or face frames with only enough space between faces for operating clearance. B. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-3/4-inchsolid wood rails and 3/4-by-1-1/2-inch solid wood stiles with glued mortise and tenon or doweled joints. Stiles and top and bottom rails shall be dadoed to receive ends, bottoms and tops. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch thick, with routed raised panel effect. D. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Veneer-faced plywood. E. For basic-quality cabinets, delete paragraphs below describing cabinet construction. F. Cabinet Ends: 1/2-inch-thick 5-ply hardwood plywood. G. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 1/2-inch-thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back rail. H. Base Unit and Wall-Hung Unit Back Panels: 1/4-inch-thick 2-2 Grade exterior hardwood plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails, 3-112 inch cleats and shelves. I. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame. J. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or with glued dovetail joints. 2. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 3/4-inch-thick solid wood. 3. Bottoms: 1/4-inch-thick plywood. K. Shelves: 1/2-inch-thick plywood. L. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels. M. Factory Finishing: To greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356-4 oop"" Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. d. Swan Corporation (The). e. Wilson: Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cabinets that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Coronet Style Standard Reveal HUD Severe Use, Triangle Pacific/IXL Cabinets. 2.2 COLORS,TEXTURES, AND PATTERNS A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. 2.3 CABINET MATERIALS A. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following: 1. Exposed Wood Species: As follows. Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain,figure, or natural character markings. a. Plantation Hardwood. 2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- thick, solid-wood edging of same species as face veneer. B. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent moisture content, respectively. 2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 1. Grade: HGP. 2. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. D. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3,Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA Al 56.9, of type, material, size, and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A%k 1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's"Certified Cabinet"seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. 2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install kitchen casework until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of kitchen casework. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cabinets: a. Triangle Pacific Corporation/IXL Cabinets b. Evans Cabinet Corporation C. Southeast Millwork and Casework d. Wellborn Cabinets 2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: a. Formica Corp. b. Laminart. C. Nevamar Corp. d. Pioneer Plastics Corp. e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. f. Wilson: Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 3. Solid-Surfacing Material for Countertops: a. Avonite, Inc. b. Formica Corp. C. Nevamar Corp. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 12356- KITCHEN CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood-faced kitchen cabinets. 2. Wood-faced vanity cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 5. Plastic laminate wall backsplash. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 11 Section"Residential Appliances" for appliances mounted in kitchen casework. 2. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops. C. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for work under this Section affected by Alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed." C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as"concealed." 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." AVW- C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -O% 2) Ice storage bin. 3) Two ice cube trays. 8. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel. a. Color: White. 9. Standard features include the following: a. Interior light in fresh food compartment. b. Adjustable rollers. C. Adjustable compartment shelves. END OF SECTION 11451 AMW RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1) Gallon container size door storage shelves. 2) Vegetable crisper. 3) Utility bin. b. Freezer Compartment: 1) Door shelves. 2) Ice storage bin. 3) Two ice cube trays. 8. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel. a. Color: White 9. Standard features include the following: a. Interior light in fresh food compartment. b. Adjustable rollers. C. Adjustable compartment shelves, four shelves minimum in each door. H. Top-Mount Refrigerator: Where indicated, provide refrigerator/freezers complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. General Electric Top Freezer refrigerator. 2. Type: Freestanding, frost-free, two-door, top-mount freezer refrigerator/freezer with baked-enamel-on-steel interior cabinet liners. 3. Refrigerator Storage Capacity: 16.4 cu ft total interior refrigerator volume measured according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by ARAM. a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 12.58 cu ft b. Freezer Compartment Volume: 3.86 cu ft 4. Refrigerator Shelf Area: 17.5 sq ft total interior refrigerator shelf area measured according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by AHAM. 5. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified at not more than 650 kilowatt/hr per year under average conditions. 6. Temperature Controls: Separate temperature controls for each compartment and a switch for condensation-control heating element at freezer opening. 7. Standard storage features include the following: a. Fresh Food Compartment: 1) Door storage shelves. 2) Vegetable crisper. 3) Meat compartment. 4) Utility bin. 5) Dairy compartment. 6) Removable egg trays. b. Freezer Compartment: 1) Door shelves. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,wk a. Controls: Solid-state, electronic, touch type. b. Clock Type: Electronic Digital . 5. Standard features include the following: a. Interior oven light. b. Two removable,tilt-proof, chrome-plated, self-locking oven racks. C. Two-piece, porcelain-enamel broiler pan. F. Range Hood: Where indicated, provide exhaust hoods complying with the following: 1. Products: a. Broan Vented Range Hood 2. Type: 30 inch or 36-inch as indicated above, wall-mounted undercabinet, ventilating (convertible) range hood. 3. Exhaust Fan: Variable-speed 200 cfm rated fan exhausts vertically or horizontally 4. Sones: 5.5 maximum at vertical discharge. 5. Fan Control: Variable-speed rotary-dial switch . 6. Duct Type: 3-1/4-by-10-inch rectangular. 7. Finish: Baked enamel. a. Color: White. 8. Standard features include the following: Amok a. Permanent washable filter. b. Built-in lighting. G. Side-by-Side Refrigerator: Where indicated, provide refrigerator/freezers complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. General Electric Side by side refrigerator/freezer 2. Type: Freestanding, frost-free, two-door, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer with baked- enamel-on-steel interior cabinet liners, nominal 32 inch overall width. 3. Refrigerator Storage Capacity: 19.7 cu. ft. total interior refrigerator volume measured according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by ARAM. a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 12.9 cu.ft. b. Freezer Compartment Volume: 6.8 cu. ft. 4. Refrigerator Shelf Area: 20.4 sq ft total interior refrigerator shelf area measured according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by AHAM. 5. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified at not more than 780 kilowatt/hr per year under average conditions. 6. Temperature Controls: Separate temperature controls for each compartment and a switch for condensation-control heating element at freezer opening. 7. Standard storage features include the following: a. Fresh Food Compartment: RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Oven Door: Counterbalanced, removable, porcelain-enamel oven door.. Provide towel-bar-type handle. 5. Control Panel: Porcelain-enamel combination surface-bumer/oven control panel mounted at front of cooking surface above oven door. Include burner"ON" indicator light. a. Controls: Push-to-turn type with removable knobs. 6. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel. a. Color: White. 7. Standard features include the following: a. Rimmed cooktop deck. b. Interior oven light. C. Two-piece, porcelain-enamel broiler pan. d. Four adjustable legs. D. Electric Cooktop: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric cooktops complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. General Electric Built In Electric Cooktop 2. Type: 30-inch or 36-inch as indicated above, hinged, tilt-up built-in, porcelain-enamel, countertop-mounted, electric cooking surface with four surface-burner elements, infinitely adjustable controls,and burner"ON" indicator lights. a. Burner Types: Two 8-inch (2100-W maximum) and two 6-inch (1500-W maximum), plug-in, coil-burner elements. 1) Burner Trim: Provide each burner with a removable chrome-plated or porcelain-enamel drip pan and chrome-plated trim ring. b. Burner Controls: Rotary-dial type with removable knobs. 3. Color: White . E. Electric Wall Oven: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric wall ovens complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. General Electric self cleaning single oven electric built in wall ovens 2. Type: Built-in, single, self-cleaning, electric,wall oven/broiler unit with porcelain-enamel interior, for installation in a 24-inch- or 27-inch-wide cabinet as indicated above. 3. Oven Door: Counterbalanced, removable, white-glass oven door, with observation window . Provide towel-bar-type handle. a. Color: White. 4. Control Panel: Porcelain-enamel oven control panel located above oven door, containing automatic oven controls , oven timer, and clock. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW* B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 3.4 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Barrier Free Apartment Units: 1. (1)30 inch vented Range Hood—Broan 76000 , 2. (1)GE JP326WV 30 inch electric Cook Top 3. (1)GE TFX20SA-side by side Frost Free Refrigerator 4. (1)GE JRP15WW 24 inch self cleaning Electric Wall Oven B. Standard Apartment Units: 1. (1)30 inch vented Range Hood—Broan 76000 2. (1) GE JSS16PDWH electric Range 3. (1)GE TBX16SY-top freezer Frost Free Refrigerator C. Electric Range: Where indicated, provide electric ranges complying with the following: 1. Products:Available products include the following: a. General Electric Electric Range 2. Type: 30-inch-wide, freestanding electric range. 3. Cooktop: Recessed, hinged, tilt-up, porcelain-enamel cooktop with four surface burners and porcelain-enamel backsplash. a. Burner Types: Two 8-inch (2600-W maximum) and two 6-inch (1500-W maximum), plug-in, coil-burner elements. 1) Burner Trim: Provide each burner with a removable chrome-plated drip pan and chrome-plated trim ring. 4. Oven: Standard cleaning oven with porcelain-enamel interior with two tilt-proof, 1000k, chrome-plated, self-locking oven racks. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, appliances that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Residential Appliance Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Electric Range: Freestanding electric range with four-burner cooktop and oven with broiler, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. B. Electric Cooktop: Built-in, countertop-mounted, electric cooktop with four burner elements, listed by UL and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. C. Electric Wall Oven: Built-in, electric wall oven with broiler unit, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. D. Exhaust Hood: Wall-mounted, undercabinet exhaust hood, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. E. Side-by-Side Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding, two-door refrigerator with side-by-side freezer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. F. Top-Mount Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding, two-door refrigerator with top-mounted freezer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. 2.3 FINISHES A. Porcelain-Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied porcelain-enamel finish over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. If no color is indicated, provide white. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 00* RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,,w E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. F. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: 1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to ANSI/AHAM HRF-1. G. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. 1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program. If model listed is not Energy Star rated or is no longer available, provide ENERGY STAR compliant model most closely matching model listed. H. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).", ANSI A117.1., FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards", and Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Regulations. 1. Operable Parts: Provide controls with forward reach no higher than 48 inches above the floor, horizontal front reach no more than 25 inches, horizontal side reach no more than 24 inches, and that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. AMW* 2. Range or Cooktop: Provide knee clearance for forward approach of 27 inches high, 30 inches wide, and 11 inches horizontally; toe space clearance of 9 inches high and 17 inches horizontally; with insulated underside of cooktop to prevent burns, shocks, or abrasions. Provide top surface 34 inches above the floor, with controls that do not require reaching across burners. 3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide 50 percent of freezer space within 54 inches of the floor. 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Electric Ranges and cooktops: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface- burner elements. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. loo RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment, including ranges, cooktops, and wall ovens and microwave ovens. 2. Range hoods. 3. Refrigerator/freezers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures"for kitchen sinks, and connections. 2. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. B. Appliance Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations shown on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the residential appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." D. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1 0"k Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Stainless-Steel Unit: type 304 (18-8), 7 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. Formed from a single piece of stainless steel. Holds 4 toothbrushes. Installed with '/<"-20x 1-1/2"L torx head stainless steel screws. G. Towel Holder:Provide towel holder complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide Gamco TB series in lengths as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Towel Bar: Satin finished Type 304 stainless steel, one-inch diameter, 18-gauge tube and end brackets for exposed mounting. Stainless steel set screw to keep bar from turning. H. Underlavatory Guard: Provide underlavatory guard complying with the following: 1. Products: Truebro Lav Guard. 2. Insulating Piping Coverings: White, antimicrobial, molded-vinyl covering for supply and drain piping assemblies intended for use at accessible lavatories to prevent direct contact with and bums from piping. Provide components as required for applications indicated with flip tops at valves that allow service access without removing coverings. END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AO%. A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser-Provide toilet tissue dispenser complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide the following: Bradley#5084. 2. Material: Posts fabricated of type 304 (18-8), 22 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish; escutcheons fabricated on type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish; spindle is chrome plated brass(note: no plastic spindles shall be allowed); mounting bracket to be fabricated of type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel. 3. Type: Single-roll dispenser. 4. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage into blocking. 5. Operation: Concealed spring permits spindle to telescope for servicing. Spindle turns freely for non-controlled delivery. 6. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2-or 5-inch-diameter-core tissue rolls. B. Shower Curtain Rod: Provide stainless-steel shower curtain rod with 3-inch 20-gauge stainless- steel flanges with satin finish designed for exposed fasteners (#10x2-1/2" Philips oval head stainless steel sheet metal screw), in length required for shower opening indicated, and complying with the following: , 1. Products: Provide Bradley#953 x length. 2. Heavy-Duty Rod: 1-inchOD; fabricated from 18 gauge nominal 0.04-inch-thick stainless steel with satin finish tubing. C. Soap Dish: provide stainless-steel soap dish complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide Bradley#SA-22. 2. Materials: Type 304 (18-8), 7 gauge, sating finish stainless steel with three holes for drainage. 3. Mounting: Installed with '/4"-20 x 1-1/2" L torx head stainless steel screws. D. Medicine Cabinet: Provide medicine cabinet complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide Basco 377-PW. 2. Recessed Unit: Nominal 16"x36" unit designed for recessed mounting in nominal 4-inch wall depth; with hinged, framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet; and minimum of three adjustable shelves. Door equipped with continuous hinge and spring-buffered, rod- type stop and magnetic door catch. Fabricate mirror frame, door, hinge, cabinet and shelves of 20 gauge cold rolled steel. E. Robe Hook: Provide robe hook complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide Bradley#9118. 2. Double-Prong Unit: Heavy duty forged brass with bright chrome finish; wall bracket with 3 mounting holes for exposed mounting. F. Toothbrush Holder: Provide toothbrush holder complying with the following: 1. Products: Bradley SA-26. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz &Company Architects, Inc. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products;ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges;ASTM B 30, castings. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60. E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2(moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit,tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless- steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. D. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless- steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. E. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper- resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers'written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. ''" 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,ft B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. Furnish extra materials match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly identifying contents. Furnish: (4)Toilet tissue dispensers (4)Towel Bars (4) Robe Hooks (4) Toothbrush Holders (4) Soap Dishes PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). f. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. D. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule. E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. 1. Other manufacturers' products with equal characteristics may be considered. See Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. „00% B. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer. E. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain postal specialties. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Unless otherwise indicated, finish steel surfaces exposed to view with baked-enamel or powder- coated finish. B. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning,"or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where recessed units will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and roughing-in drawings. 1. Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2. Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B. Vertical Apartment Mailboxes: Install vertical apartment mailboxes with center of master lock cylinder not more than 58 inches and not less than 30 inches above finished floor. 1. Arrange compartments in groups, with not more than seven and not less than three compartments operated by one master lock. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Directory: Surface-mounted, front-opening unit, with clear glass or plastic window. Fabricate frame from same material and finish as compartment doors and frames of vertical apartment mailboxes, unless otherwise indicated. Provide name strips made of 1/4-inch-high label tape. 1. Provide space for the number of names equal to the number of apartment units per building. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide accessories fabricated by same manufacturer as apartment mailboxes. B. Key Keepers: Consisting of single compartment with door size not less than 4-3/4 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 1-1/2 inches deep. Exposed surfaces fabricated from same material and finish as adjacent apartment mailboxes. 1. Mounting: Recessed. 2. Style: Compartment door set within face frame. 3. Mail Delivery: USPS. 4. Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 5. Key Retractor: Provide retractable reel and 20-inch-long chain. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. C. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. E. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. F. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish postal specialties after assembly. , POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers. 2.3 VERTICAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES A. USPS-Approved, Vertical Apartment Mailboxes: Consisting of 3 to 7 compartments enclosed within wall box; with inside dimensions of each compartment not less than 15 inches high by 5 inches wide by 6 inches deep. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and tilting inner compartments forward as a group. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS STD-413. 1. Products: a. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Co., A Florence Company; 1250 Series. b. Bommer Industries, Inc.; 9040 Series. C. Cutler Manufacturing Corporation; 1021 Series. d. Jensen Industries; 3500 Series. e. Salsbury Industries; 3500 Series. f. Security Manufacturing Corporation; 6000 Series. 2. Manufacturers: Manufacturers listed on USPS's"Approved Sources List." 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Mail Delivery: USPS. 5. Compartments: Provide number of compartments as shown on Drawings. 6. Compartment Doors and Frames: Fabricated from striated, extruded aluminum. Equip each compartment door with lock, slot in face of door to receive tenant identification, and concealed, full-length, flush hinge on one side. Provide one compartment with outgoing mail slot. a. Tenant Identification: Cardboard name and number tab. b. Compartment Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, cylinder cam locks capable of at least 1000 key changes; with 2 keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. 7. Frames: Manufacturer's standard ganged and nested units, with cardholder for tenant's identification behind each compartment. a. Provide cardboard identification tab with space for printing tenant name and apartment number. 8. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet. 9. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,M* 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed postal specialties with wall construction. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal specialties. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of hardware, except door locks. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Key Blanks: Furnish not less than 5 for every lock or fraction thereof, of each type of compartment door lock installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ek SECTION 10550-POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vertical apartment mailboxes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders, keyed to building keying system, for postal specialties. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include identification sequence for compartments. C. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. D. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of postal specialty manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain postal specialties through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postal specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with 0*. Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A" D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance. B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured. 2. Where panel signs are scheduled or indicated to be mounted on glass, provide matching plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 3.4 SIGN SCHEDULE A. Sign Type Insert designation: Insert type. 1. Sign Size: See schedule. 2. Material: See schedule. 3. Background Finish/Color: See schedule. 4. Character Finish/Color: See schedule. 5. Character Size: See schedule. 6. Text/Message: See schedule. 7. Room: See schedule. 8. Quantity: See schedule. END OF SECTION 10431 SIGNS 10431 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. D. Note Holders: Manufacturer's standard aluminum paper sheet holders. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker,over a satin (directionally textured) polished (buffed) mechanical finish. B. Color Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, in light bronze medium bronze dark bronze gold black with a satin (directionally textured) polished (buffed) mechanical finish. C. Clear Finish: Natural satin Polished finish with clear polyurethane protective coat. D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations Match Architect's sample As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter. SIGNS 10431 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet Photopolymer Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. I. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply. J. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Graphics Inc. 2. A.R.K. Ramos. 3. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 4. Charleston Industries, Inc. 5. Gemini Incorporated. 6. Grimco, Inc. 7. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 8. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc. 9. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. 10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc. 11. Mohawk Sign Systems. 12. Signature Sign Signs, Inc. 13. Southwell Co. (The). B. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. C. Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective reflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications. B. Mounting Methods: Use silicone adhesive fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to law sign material and mounting surface. SIGNS 10431 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses,finishes, colors, designs, shapes,sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1116 inch measured diagonally. B. Manufacturers: 1. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 2. American Graphics Inc. 3. Andco Industries Corp. 4. APCO Graphics, Inc. 5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 6. Best Manufacturing Co. 7. Grimco, Inc. 8. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 9. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc. 10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc. 11. Mohawk Sign Systems. 12. Seton Identification Products. 13. Signature Signs, Inc. 14. Supersine Company(The). C. Cast-Acrylic Sheet: Manufacturer's standard and as follows: 1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range Insert color. D. Plastic Laminate: Provide high-pressure laminate engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors in finishes and color combinations indicated as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet: Provide light-sensitive, water-wash photopolymer face layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet with overall, face-layer, and base-layer thicknesses, respectively, of 0.120 inch, 0.040 inch, and 0.080 inch 0.160 inch, 0.040 inch, and 0.120 inch; and a Type D Shore durometer hardness of 80. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into Work includes, but is not limited to, "Jet-288 Jet-388 Phenolic Interior Signage" by JetUSA. F. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to comply with the following requirements: 1. Edge Condition: Square cut Beveled Bull nose. 2. Corner Condition: Square Rounded to radius indicated. G. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated in the Sign Schedule on Drawings on artwork supplied on electronic media by Architect for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage. H. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 SIGNS 10431 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,"Ok, D. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by signage manufacturer An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 16. Insert requirements. b. Fire Doors: Insert requirements. C. Room Capacity: Insert requirements. d. Elevator Signs: Insert requirements. e. Stairway Identification: Insert requirements. f. Live Load Capacity: Insert requirements. g. Signs for Accessible Spaces: Insert requirements. ,. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs. 1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. SIGNS 10431 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10431 -SIGNS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Panel signs. 2. Dimensional characters(letters and numbers)and logos for exterior use. 3. Signage accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls"for temporary project identification signs. 2. Division 10 Section "Directories and Bulletin Boards" for building directories. 3. Division 10 Section "Post and Panel Signs"for freestanding exterior aluminum fiberglass panel signs, including accessible parking signs. 4. Division 10 Section "Pylon Signs"for freestanding exterior signs. 5. Division 14 Section "Electric Traction Elevators Hydraulic Elevators" for code-required elevator signage. 6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 7. Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification"for labels,tags,and nameplates for electrical equipment. 8. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, artwork, and braille layout. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For signs with illuminated characters. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection. SIGNS 10431 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Ao%k a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex. D. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1 E. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd. E. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and pre-primed hardboard doors. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.3V. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odorfVOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex. F. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. -400W., b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex. G. Plaster Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex. END OF SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying- paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 M. a. Prime Coat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex. B. Clay-Masonry Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.1 M. a. Prime Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex. C. CMU Substrates: OO., 1. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.2E. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. L. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. -tow C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. C. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, AO" identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. ` J. Wood Substrates: INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 5 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A0% A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143(Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4. B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Low Sheen): MPI#144(Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI#145 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. D. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.5. 2.7 ALKYD PAINTS A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. -OW B. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. C. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI#47(Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. D. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benjamin Moore&Co. 2. California Paints. 3. Duron, Inc. 4. ICI Paints. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI#4. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2.6 LATEX PAINTS INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in"MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient ,00k temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 5 gal. of each material and color applied. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09912-INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units(CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board. 7. Plaster. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 4. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List' for each product category specified in Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW* a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss). D. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1 D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.38. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). F. Aluminum Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. Aawk C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). G. Dimension Lumber and Fiber Cement Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including panel siding and railing systems. Verify that top coats are compatible with fiber cement siding manufacturer's primer. 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.2M. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer, unless preprimed. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat). END OF SECTION 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying- paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Over Al kal i-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 3.1 K. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex(semigloss). B. Clay-Masonry Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.1 A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss). C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 4.2L. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6. 2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). 2.7 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,a.,k 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. ChemRex. 4. Del Technical Coatings. 5. Duron, Inc. 6. ICI Paints. 7. Kryton Canada Corporation. 8. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 9. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). , 10. Vista Paint. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3. B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79. B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units(CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 7. Wood. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 4. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. „k C. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs." D. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Level adjoining border edges. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and ^" fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 , CARPET 09680-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Metal Edge Strips will not be permitted. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and .+� comply with requirements specified. B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions,to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Perimeter Tack Strip Installation: Comply with CRI guidelines for the installation of perimeter ** tackstrips and carpet/pad. CARPET 09680 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 10 sq. yd. for each type and color indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOVEN CARPET A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Within Units: Philadelphia (Shaw Industries) "Collaborator" with 'StaLok' integral cushion backed carpet. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Within Common Hallways: Philadelphia (Shaw Industries)"Quest" a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Assume one scheme of two colors each; one for border and one for field. Assume border to be one foot wide and run around the perimeter of all corridors. 3. Entry Carpet: Mats, Inc., "Berber" a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. CARPET 09680 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09680- CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Woven carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base, transition strips and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample. C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." CARPET 09680 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. H. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. Scrub the floor with a neutral detergent solution and a scrubbing pad(3M red or equal) or equivalent brush. For more stubborn soiling, use a 3M blue/green pad or equivalent brush. 4. Thoroughly rinse floor and allow it to dry. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Prior to Final Completion, apply no less than 5 coats of commercial protective floor polish to surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. lawb� A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq.ft. Insert emission in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 9. Tarkett Inc.; Insert product. 10. TOLI International; Insert product. C. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering With Backing: ASTM F 1303. 1. Type(Binder Content): II, minimum binder content of 34 percent. 2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1, 0.050" 3. Overall Thickness: 0.085" 4. Backing Class: Class A(fibrous). D. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Wearing Surface: Smooth. F. Sheet Width: 6 feet. G. Seaming Method: Heat welded. H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 1. Color: Match floor covering. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION K SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F Insert temperature or more than 85 deg F Insert temperature, in spaces to receive floor the during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F Insert temperature. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet Insert length for every 500 linear feet Insert length or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING A. Basis of Design: Specification is based on the following product: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Connection Corlon Inlaid Sheet Flooring. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products from the manufacturers listed below may be substituted for the Basis of Design product: 1. Altro Floors; Insert product. 2. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO; Insert product. 3. Congoleum Corporation; Insert product. 4. Forbo Industries, Inc.; Insert product. 5. Lonseal, Inc.; Insert product. 6. Mannington Mills, Inc.; Insert product. 7. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.; Insert product. 8. Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc.; Insert product. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652- 2 OOW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09652- SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings, with backings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection. C. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Insert size Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. D. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ate"' SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. _1W 1. Prior to Final Completion, apply no less than 5 coats of commercial protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09651 AM%k. Awft�. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Comers: 1. Outside Comers: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. low 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. Scrub the floor with a neutral detergent solution and a scrubbing pad (3M red or equal) or equivalent brush. For more stubborn soiling, use a 3M blue/green pad or equivalent brush. 4. Thoroughly rinse floor and allow it to dry. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction „u operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -ow b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. , 1. Lay tiles in patterns as directed by the Architect. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Description: Provide resilient molding accessories for the following applications: Carpet bar for tackless installations, Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet, Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, and Joiner for tile and carpet. 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.. 4. Roppe Corporation. 5. Stoler Industries. B. Material: Vinyl. 2.7 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation A,w,* only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .,,4 H. Outside Corners: Job formed. I. Inside Comers: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.5 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Basis of Design: Specification is based on the following products: 1. Treads and Risers: FS RR-T-650: Johnsonite Visually Impairer Safe-T-Grip with tactile warning surface. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products from the manufacturers listed below may be substituted for the Basis of Design product: 1. AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc.. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 3. Endura. 4. Estrie, American Biltrite(Canada) Ltd.. 5. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.. 6. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.. 7. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.. 8. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.. 9. Pirelli Rubber Flooring. ,,wk 10. R.C.A. Rubber Company(The). 11. Roppe Corporation. 12. Stoler Industries. C. Material: Vinyl, Composition B. D. Surface Design: 1. Type 2 Design: Raised-rib pattern with abrasive strips. 2. Abrasive Strips: In contrasting colors. E. Nosing Style: As required to adhere to existing stair nosing configuration. F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. G. Risers: Smooth,flat, toeless, height and length to cover risers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. 1. Thickness: 0.125 inch. H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.6 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Vinyl Composition Tile(VCT): ASTM F 1066. a. AB ColorPlus, American Biltrite(Canada) Ltd.. b. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. C. Congoleum Corporation. d. Mannington Mills, Inc. e. Tarkett Inc.. C. Class: 2 (through-pattern tile). D. Wearing Surface: Smooth. E. Thickness: 0.125 inch. F. Size: 12 by 12 inches. G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: Subject to the requirements of ASTM F 1861 and herein,provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.. 3. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 5. Endura. 6. Estrie, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.. 7. Johnsonite. 8. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.. 9. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.. 10. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.. 11. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.. 12. Pirelli Rubber Flooring. 13. Roppe Corporation. 14. Stoler Industries. 15. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. B. Type (Material Requirement): TV (vinyl). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) for installation at resilient flooring and straight (toeless) for installation at carpeting. E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. F. Height: 4 inches. 00W G. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW*A 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F Insert temperature, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F Insert temperature or more than 95 deg F Insert temperature. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 Insert number boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet Insert length for every 500 linear feet Insert length or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Basis of Design: Specification is based on the following product: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Imperial Texture Standard Excelon Vinyl Composition Tile. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products from the manufacturers 1000k, listed below may be substituted for the Basis of Design product: RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 2 e,,,, Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition the(VCT). 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings" for resilient sheet vinyl floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Section "Carpeting" for carpeting requiring installation with resilient accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,with e0k ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,A, 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. AO** ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Am* b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,Class Fe[Zn 5(0.005 mm)for Class SC 1 service condition. C. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts;Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M,Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire. E. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override(stepped)or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat,flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicalt:6 that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. C. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product or a comparable product. 1. Armstrong Ceiling, Cirrus Second Look, 15/16" beveled tegular, 24" x 48", scored once to create a 24"x 24" look. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for"Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance"where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Awk, 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight,surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies. G. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with manufacturer's written instructions or ASTM C 919,whichever is more stringent. END OF SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,N 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated. B. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches, in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated. C. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0341 inch thick. D. Cavity Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,ors,,, 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire- resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft- wall assembly framing. 1. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base(uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 face-layer panel. D. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. E. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while • maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645. 1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. C. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1-inch thickness and with moisture-resistant paper faces. D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Edges: Tapered. E. Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. F. Gypsum Wallboard Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and as specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies." G. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. H. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Provide powder-actuated fasteners with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 1190. 2. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where indicated, provide expansion an with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 488. I. Acoustical Sealant: As recommended by gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer for application indicated. J. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665 for Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber-blanket insulation produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL A. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for installing work related to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fasteners proposed for anchoring steel framing to building structure. 2. Wiring devices in shaft-wall assemblies. 3. Doors and other items penetrating shaft-wall assemblies. 4. Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing. 5. Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat on leveled supports off the ground to prevent sagging. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room temperatures, and ventilation specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum Co. 2. G-P Gypsum Corp. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance- rated assemblies indicated. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09265-GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Shaft enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for applying and finishing panels in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: 1. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies capable of withstanding two-thirds of the air-pressure loads indicated for maximum heights of partitions without failing and while maintaining an airtight and smoke-tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end- reaction shear causing track(runners)to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. B. Fire-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency substantiating each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly's required fire-resistance rating. 1. Include data substantiating that elevator entrances and other items that penetrate each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly do not negate fire-resistance rating. C. Acoustical-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency substantiating required STC rating for each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated Insert locations. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically(parallel to framing)or horizontally (perpendicular to framing)with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3,4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. ,Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,40*� 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion(control)joint. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Corner Tape: 2"wide self-adhering nylon mesh tape, both sides. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. PART 3- EXECUTION GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. , * A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type %% of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. C. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 5/8 or 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 or 5/8" inch as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. -look GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2 OPIK Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09250-GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for gypsum sheathing. 4. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 5. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 6. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 7. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 8. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Plaster" for gypsum plaster and for other components of gypsum-plaster finishes. 9. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Shaft-Wall Assemblies"for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 10. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of gypsum board specified, and accessories 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. low 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 09210 GYPSUM PLASTER 09210-7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aftl� 3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. General: Install according to ASTM C 841. B. Cornerbeads: Install at external corners. C. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plasterwork,except where plaster passes behind and is concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases,or frames act as casing beads. D. Control Joints: Install control joints with spacing between joints in either direction not exceeding the following and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect: 1. Partitions: 30 feet. 2. Ceilings: 30 feet. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 842. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. ,. 3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases. C. Finish Coats: 1. Provide float finish, unless otherwise indicated. D. Concealed Plaster: 1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat. 2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations,finish coat may be omitted. 3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, finish coat may be omitted. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Type N: Normal, single-hydrate lime. D. Aggregates for Float Finishes: ASTM C 35; graded per ASTM C 842. 2.7 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions for applications indicated. B. Base-Coat Mixes over Expanded-Metal Lath: Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand for scratch and brown coats of three-coat plasterwork. C. Base-Coat Mix over Unit Masonry: Gypsum ready-mixed plaster for single base coats of two- coat plasterwork. D. Finish-Coat Mix for Float Finishes: 1 part gypsum gauging plaster, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts sand. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings. B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. General: Install according to ASTM C 841. B. Expanded-Metal Lath: 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 5 Sol No Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,k 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. E. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series, SC 175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable -Latex. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+ Silicone. C. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremflex 834. d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.5 BASE-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base-Coat Plasters, General: ASTM C 28/C 28M. B. Gypsum Neat Plaster: For use with job-mixed aggregates. 1. Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Two-Way Hardwall Plaster. b. United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Plaster. C. Aggregates for Base-Coat Plasters: ASTM C 35. 2.6 FINISH-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Gypsum Gauging Plaster: ASTM C 28/C 28M. 1. Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gauging Plaster(Super-White). b. United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Gauging Gypsum Plaster. B. Gypsum Keene's Cement: ASTM C 61/C 61 M. 1. Products: a. United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Keene's Cement. C. Lime: ASTM C 206, hydrated finishing type. 1. Type S: Autoclaved, double-hydrate lime. a. Products: 1) United States Gypsum Co.; Finish Lime. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Finish: Coated with water-barrier film or electrolytically deposited zinc. 2. Paper Backing: Kraft paper factory bonded to back of lath. C. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat. 1. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. 3.4 lb/sq.yd.. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 841 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). C. Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. Phillips Manufacturing Co. f. Unimast, Inc. g. Western Metal Lath&Steel Framing Systems. 2. Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath coated with water-barrier film or with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 3. Striplath: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath coated with water-barrier film or with ASTM A 6531A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. C. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings. 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style;with expanded flanges. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 631. C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 841. D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AK*k 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,construction traffic, and other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or gypsum plaster manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: Maintain temperatures at not less than 55 deg F or greater than 80 deg F for at least 7 days before application of gypsum plaster, continuously during application, and for 7 days after plaster has set, or until plaster has dried. C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum plaster drying out too quickly. 1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal drying conditions. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EXPANDED-METAL LATH A. Manufacturers: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMIGO). 2. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). 3. Dale/Incor. 4. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Industries, Inc. 5. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 6. Unimast, Inc. 7. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. B. Expanded-Metal Lath, General: ASTM C 847. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09210-GYPSUM PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Repair of gypsum plasterwork on expanded-metal lath and solid-plaster bases. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and gypsum plaster. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that support lath and gypsum plaster. 3. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders included in gypsum plaster assemblies. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants included in gypsum plaster assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum plaster assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mockups: Before performing repair plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following applications: a. Surfaces with float finishes. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW%, b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 112-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation")vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes,or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. w 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 112-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 314 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare- steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire,or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire. H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches,wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,, , 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. E. Furring Channels(Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System. C. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -2 OOW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09111 -NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems(e.g., supports for partition walls,framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems(e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits,etc.). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section"Cold-Formed Metal Framing"for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. A"K 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-shaped furring members. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing. 4. Division 9 Section Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for non-load-bearing metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 40% A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1 )} z z z z z z % z 7 I@ S j f o o / � �j § { % an �[ n $/ { ƒ ƒ %) k 2 Non � 2§ g . , ' k \` \ a, m � tA � ƒ ) % � \ j i i / i ) g 3 p 2 0@ e k \ / p § g g § 2 ƒ / § § / § / 2 \ > \ > ® $ ) > § 7 / 2 2 > / § CL \ ° \ z \ r- ° ] c k \ k ID § � k | ; < < < < < < < < < < < < n < < » � , ! n m w < n n @ o < < < < o < < ) ) © ) \ 2 ] \ \ \ \ 2 R § § § f ) § ) f f ) f ) ) ) / \ \ « � ) - § z z z z I z z $ z z z z % z § \ \ / \ � \ ƒ ƒ $ n / } \ § ƒ G _ m \CD ; � - \ } / \ G ${ \ 2 % 4. « 2 3 / ƒ AAW, S § ] 2 § ƒ § \ \ ] 2; S e - o( 7; \ [ 2 \ Q § \\ / 7 z z ) § \ t --1 o @ o § o a K �_ @ ] / ) 7 R / / \ j , \ \ ° . � [ ( w f \ $ $ \ / % 3 [ ) � § # �. ) a w e 9 a e 2 e w ! ( � / \ ! -0 I -u -0 _0 -0 -0 -0 � � § § § ) j § z § § / ® § - 2 ] � 2 » \ ) � z z z z z \ \ / § \ ƒ ( � 2 ( \ § \ § ! § n \ \ ] \ \ \ { g ` \CD ( ) � ! \ ) \ } AAk ( \ \ \ \ / ( b Z JE > (33 a -0_, C ED �I 0 co z C? 0 Jw minro Z3 XI P C) CA CJ Gn L-41 CD r— ;rs S n 0 m Cn 0 W > =i > c m m 0 >1 o C-� z M 0 m (73 > > 3 ;D z > 0 > z < z 0 m a m CL. C') cn > V Cf) hl ti tl ca co C3 co cj 133 w C3 w w IT ce) cc < C7 < < C7 < 0 -0 z z 2 z z z z z z z z z o z Z z z z z z z z 4 Y C7 CD -zj Q- CL rD ro ro o Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09000—FINISH SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABILITY: This Section applies to all work of the Contract. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, other Division 1 Specification Sections, and Technical Specification Sections for each material apply to this Section. 1.3 SUMMARY: Finish Schedule on following pages. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION FINISH SCHEDULE 09000-1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,,k E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 08800 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal comer joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. low 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. GLAZING 08800 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. a. Annealed. b. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. a. Annealed. 5. Low-E Coating or Film: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface or low-e-coated film suspended in the interspace. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. GLAZING 08800- 8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.; distributed by Northwestern Industries Inc. C. Pilkington Sales(North America) Ltd. 2.7 MONOLITHIC PATTERNED-GLASS UNITS (provide at exterior bathroom windows) A. Patterned-Glass Units: Annealed, 3/16"thick. 1. Products: a. AFG Industries Inc.; Industrex or Flax. b. Pilkington Building Products North America; Cotswold. 2.8 LAMINATED-GLASS UNITS A. Heat-Treated Laminated-Glass Units: 1. Kind LT, consisting of two lites of fully tempered float glass. 2. Outer Lite: Class 1 clear)float glass. a. Kind FT (fully tempered). b. Thickness: 3/16". C. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface. mow, 3. Inner Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. a. Kind FT (fully tempered). b. Thickness: 3/16". 4. Plastic Interlayer: a. Thickness: not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material. b. Interlayer Color: Clear. 2.9 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units: 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated. 2. Interspace Content: Argon. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. a. Annealed. b. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. a. Annealed. B. Passive Solar Low-E Insulating-Glass Units: . 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated. 2. Interspace Content: Argon. GLAZING 08800 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -auk A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side Awk walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.6 MONOLITHIC WIRED-GLASS UNITS A. Polished Wired-Glass Units: Form 1 (wired glass, polished both sides), Quality-Q6, Mesh 2 (M2) (Square), 6.0 mm thick. 1. Manufacturers: low*, a. AsahilAMA Glass Corp.; affiliated with AFG Industries, Inc. GLAZING 08800 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C(other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat- strengthened)float glass where safety glass is indicated. C. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other requirements specified. D. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type Il (patterned and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q- 6; and of form and mesh pattern specified. E. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned); and of quality, finish, and pattern specified. F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer. 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. G. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2"Insulating-Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements Article. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating- glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS GLAZING 08800 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w* 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,condensation, or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project .w site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. GLAZING 08800-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. E. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category 11 materials are required look by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's"Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. GLAZING 08800 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,.w, Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads(where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass. 1. Each type of patterned glass. 2. Coated vision glass. 3. Wired glass. 4. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For installers. F. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Coated float glass. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing gaskets. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar- control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator GLAZING 08800-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 4. Storefront framing. B. Related Sections include the following: low 1. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts." 2. Division 8 Section"Vinyl Windows"for pre-glazed vinyl windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. GLAZING 08800 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, ,, Inc. DOORS 101A, 102A, 102B, 103A, 104A, 105A Hardware Set 8 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS BY PRE-HUNG MFR 641 STOCK 1 EA PASSAGE SET 13-31-115 OY 613 SARGENT TYPICAL AT ALL SWINGING CLOSET DOORS Hardware Set 9 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS BY PRE-HUNG MFR 641 STOCK 1 EA PRIVACY SET 13-3U65 OY 613 SARGENT TYPICAL AT ALL SWINGING BEDROOM AND BATHROOM DOORS Hardware Set 10 Each to Receive: 3 EA BIFOLD HARDWARE 2 PANEL OR 4 PANEL BY PRE-HUNG LANDQUIST MANUFACTURER TYPICAL AT ALL BIFOLD DOORS DOOR HARDWARE 087111418 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 1/2 X 4 641 STOCK 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 12-8815 ETL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB STANDARD ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR#207, 208 Hardware Set 2 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2314-10A 4 1/2 X 4 NRP 613 STOCK 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 64-12-8813 ETL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB PARALLEL ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA THRESHOLD 172A- 36" AL STOCK 1 SET HEAD &JAMB WEATHERSTRIPPING 305DR 1/36" 2/80" DUR STOCK 1 EA SILL W/S 315DN -36" DUR STOCK DOOR# 107, 108 Hardware Set 4 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 1/2 X 4 641 STOCK 1 EA LOCKSET 64-28-10G04 LL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB STANDARD ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR 006, 006A Hardware Set 5 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2314-10A 4 1/2 X 4 NRP 613 STOCK 3 EA BUTTS 1502 613 STOCK 1 EA ENTRY LOCKSET 64-8225 LNL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK 1 EA SOUND STRIP S88D-17 DUR STOCK 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 4301 DP-36" DUR STOCK 1 EA VIEWER 700 606 STOCK DOORS 1016, 103B, 104B, 105B, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206 Hardware Set 5A Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2314-10A 4 1/2 X 4 NRP 613 STOCK 3 EA BUTTS 1502 613 STOCK 1 EA ENTRY LOCKSET 64-8225 LNL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK 1 EA THRESHOLD 172A-36" AL STOCK 1 SET HEAD & JAMB WEATHERSTRIPPING 305DR 1/36" 2/80" DUR STOCK 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 4301 DP-36" DUR STOCK 1 EA VIEWER 700 606 STOCK DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 17 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, ** Inc. 1 EA ENTRY LOCKSET 64-8225 LNL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK 1 EA SOUND STRIP S88D-17 DUR STOCK 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 4301 DP-36" DUR STOCK 1 EA VIEWER 700 606 STOCK DOORS 101 A, 101 B, 102A, 1028, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 117, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205,206, 207, 208, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307 Hardware Set 6 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2314-10A 4 1/2 X 4 NRP 613 STOCK 1 EA LOCKSET 64-28-10G04 LL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK 1 EA SOUND STRIP S88D-17 DUR STOCK 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 4301 DP-36" DUR STOCK DOOR#024 Hardware Set 7 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 1/2 X 4 641 STOCK 2 EA DOOR PULL 110 X 70C 613 ROCKWOOD 2 EA PUSH PLATE 70C 613 ROCKWOOD 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB PARALLEL ARM 690 STOCK 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR#010 Hardware Set 8 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS BY PRE-HUNG MFR 641 STOCK 1 EA PASSAGE SET 13-3U15 OY 613 SARGENT TYPICAL AT ALL SWINGING CLOSET DOORS Hardware Set 9 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS BY PRE-HUNG MFR 641 STOCK 1 EA PRIVACY SET 13-3U65 OY 613 SARGENT TYPICAL AT ALL SWINGING BEDROOM AND BATHROOM DOORS Hardware Set 10 Each to Receive: 3 EA BIFOLD HARDWARE 2 PANEL OR 4 PANEL BY PRE-HUNG LANDQUIST MANUFACTURER SOUTH HOME—BUILDING 2 Hardware Set 1 DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 16 AW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 12-8815 ETL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB STANDARD ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA DOOR PULL 110 X 70C 613 ROCKWOOD 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR#009, 022, 115B, 209, 213, 309, 313 Hardware Set 2 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2314-10A 4 1/2 X 4 NRP 613 STOCK 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 64-12-8813 ETL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB PARALLEL ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA THRESHOLD 172A-36" AL STOCK 1 SET HEAD &JAMB WEATHERSTRIPPING 305DR 1/36"2/80" DUR STOCK 1 EA SILL W/S 315DN -36" DUR STOCK DOOR# 109, 115A, 116A, Hardware Set 3 Each to Receive: 6 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 1/2 X 4 641 STOCK 2 EA DOOR PULL 110 X 70C 613 ROCKWOOD 2 EA PUSH PLATE 70C 613 ROCKWOOD 2 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB PARALLEL ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 2 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR 116B Hardware Set 4 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 1/2 X 4 641 STOCK 1 EA LOCKSET 64-28-10G04 LL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB STANDARD ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR 011, 012, 013, 014, 016, 017, 020A,020B, 021, 023A, 0238, 113, 212, 312 Hardware Set 4A Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 1/2 X 4 641 STOCK 1 EA LOCKSET 76-64-28-10G04 LL 613 SARGENT 1 EA DOOR CLOSER 1431-RUO X SNB STANDARD ARM 690 VON DUPRIN 1 EA DOOR STOP 442 613 STOCK DOOR 018, 025, 026 Hardware Set 5 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2314-10A 4 1/2 X 4 NRP 613 STOCK 3 EA BUTTS 1502 613 STOCK DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 15 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1, Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 2. Replace, reinstall or readjust door hardware that Owner has indicated as faulty, including replacing items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion, 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Note: Manufacturer listed as"STOCK" shall be any product that meets all the requirements set forth in this Specification that has a proven track record and will not conflict with other requirements or the operation of other doors or hardware. NURSE'S HOME—BUILDING 1 Hardware Set 1 Each to Receive: 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-10A 4 112 X 4 641 STOCK DOOR HARDWARE 0871114 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 13 Village at Hospital Hill— Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Aw,, Inc. methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface-mounted exit devices. 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. + 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.18. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. BHMA 613: Oil Rubbed Bronze, over brass or bronze base metal. 2. BHMA 641: Oil Rubbed Bronze, over steel base metal. PART 3-EXECUTION DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 106 or NFPA 252. F. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. G. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.21. 2.13 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.14. B. Folding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 1. Interior Doors: Provide door hardware for interior bifolding doors when not furnished as part of door package. C. Bifolding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 75 lb. Provide hardware from bi-fold door manufacturer, only. 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Standard: Comply with the following: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16. B. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA Grade 1, unless otherwise indicated. 2.15 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, .01W Inc. 2.9 CLOSERS A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. B. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1 . C. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in SHMA's"Directory of Certified Door Closers." D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated,comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. 2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16. B. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1 . C. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. D. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.11 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke- control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Capacity: Able to hold keys for 150 percent of the number of locks. 3. Cross-Index System: Set up by key control manufacturer, complying with the following: a. Card Index: Furnish four sets of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. b. Computer Software: Furnish cross-index software for recording and reporting key- holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual. 2.6 STRIKES A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al 56.13. 3. Strikes for Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12. 4. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 5. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 6. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.5. B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: ate"► 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. C. Electric Strikes: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated. 2.7 OPERATING TRIM A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6. B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Push-Pull Design: As illustrated on Drawings. 2.8 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. B. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors, unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -9 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, 'Oak, Inc. 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. 2. Key Control System: BHMA A156.5. B. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1. C. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight-or clover-type cam. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner. b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. F. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: *" 1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. 2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to the same change key. a. Cylinders shall be master keyed . G. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. H. Key Control System: BHMA Grade 1 system, including key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish. 1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -8 AOW low* Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Escutcheon (Rose): Wrought, forged, or cast. 4. Dummy Trim: Match knob or lever lock trim and escutcheons. 5. Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset design designated below or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated: D. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1 2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13, Grade 1. 3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. F. Rabbeted Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. G. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 EXIT DEVICES A. Standard: BHMA A156.3. 1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1. B. Certified Products: Provide exit devices listed in BHMA's"Directory of Certified Exit Devices." C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. D. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. E. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 1. Operation: Rigid . F. Outside Trim: material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Standards: Comply with the following: DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction ball-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. F. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin 2. Interior Hinges: Steel,with steel pin 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin. G. Hinge Options: Comply with the following as indicated: 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Outswinging exterior doors. b. Outswinging corridor doors with locks. 2. Corners: Square H. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 3. Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12. 4. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5. 5. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.5. B. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's"Directory of Certified Locks & Latches." 2. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA's"Directory of Certified Electromagnetic&Delayed Egress Locks." 3. Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA's"Directory of Certified Electromagnetic& Delayed Egress Locks." C. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1. Lever: Wrought,forged, or cast. 2. Knob: Wrought, forged, or cast. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products and complying with BHMA standard referenced. 2. Provide products by manufacturer listed or architect-approved equal. Refer to specification Section 01330, Submittal Procedures,for substitution requirements. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA Al 56.7. 3. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA Al 56.17. 4. Pivots: BHMA A156.4. B. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. C. Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: Metal Thickness (inches) Maximum Door Size(inches) Hinge Height Standard Heavy (inches) Weight Weight 32 by 84 by 1-3/8 3-1/2 0.123 - 36 by 84 by 1-318 4 0.130 - 36 by 84 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 42 by 90 by 1-314 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves)into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. E. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 5 RAW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system. D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and form work requirements are specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other ,w rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Massachusetts State Architectural Access Board Regulations, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)," as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum required width. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style,function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final '"** keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Installation of folding door hardware specified in Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame. 2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors"for access door hardware. 3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door hardware, except cylinders. 4. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors"for folding door hardware C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Cylinders for locks on aluminum and glass entrance doors. 2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated. C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory. 1. Provide 7/8" insulating glass with low-E glass with swiggle spacer. 2.8 FINISHES A. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer's colors. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and sill plate is level. 1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers specifications and recommendations for installing window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the Work. B. Set window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean vinyl surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing windows 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer, that ensure window units are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08520 VINYL WINDOWS 08560 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate screens on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type. Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement,with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. 1. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped, extruded- or formed-aluminum members, with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners. Finish frames to match window units. a. Provide removable PVC spline-anchor concealing edge of screen frame. C. Weatherstripping: Provide sliding-type weatherstripping where sash rails slide horizontally or vertically along unit frame. Provide compression-type weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash where sliding type is inappropriate. Provide weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash. 2.5 DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOWS A. Provide window units with tilt-in feature permitting both sides of sash to be cleaned from interior. B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware: 1. Sash Balances: Manufacturer's standard type—block and tackle(2 per sash). 2. Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep lock and keeper on meeting rail. High pressure die cast locks. (2 per sash if window width greater than 28"). Extruded aluminum reinforcement shall OO be used in the lock and keeper rail. 3. Lift Handle: Continuous, integral, sash lift bar on bottom rail of lower sash and top rail of top sash. 4. Night Vent: Provide manufacturer's standard device to limit the sash opening from the interior of the unit. 5. Sill: Provide a fully sloped sill. 6. Tilt Mechanism: Cartridge type mounted on the inside of the extrusions for strength. 2.6 AWNING A. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware: 1. Operating Device: Crank type. 2. Hinges: Scissors or arm hinge system allowing awning to project out. All hardware to be corrosion resistant. 3. Lock: Two lever type locks, one on each side,with cam action and keepers on side of sash. 4. Obsure Glass: At all awning windows, provide translucent obsure glass. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate vinyl window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete "11 system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. "Prestige', National Vinyl Products, Inc., Springfield, MA(800)424-5300 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Extrusions: Impact-resistant, exterior grade polyvinyl chloride, fully welded construction at both frame and sash. Wall thicknesses shall be nominal .070 inches. B. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with requirements of ASTM B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Sliding-Type Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of silicon treated high density polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. 1. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fin of semirigid plastic sheet of polypropylene. E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. F. Glass-Fiber-Mesh Insect Screen: 18-by-16 or 18-by-14 mesh of plastic-coated glass-fiber threads, woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with requirements of ASTM D 3656. Tabs for removal of screens shall not pull out of assembly under normal pull force needed to remove screen. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with vinyl and of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is intended. B. Crank-Type Operator: Provide crank-type operator on each gear box shaft, with removable crank. Where necessary, extend crank shaft with universal joints and support brackets to a suitable crank-mounting location not more than 44 inches above floor, with an oil-encased miter gear box. C. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.2. 1. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed- block and tackle design of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards. VINYL WINDOWS 08560 -4 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating vinyl windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY OOW A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by vinyl window manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or seal failure. 2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Unlimited Warranty except for Glass. D. Warranty Period for Glass: 20 years after date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: Provide 2 additional upper and lower sashes for each size of double hung windows and awning windows. Provide 10 additional sash balances. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following OOW manufacturer: VINYL WINDOWS 08560- 3 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 100%k A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of window required, including the following: 1. Construction details and fabrication methods. 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. 4. Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of window required including information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following: 1. Layout and installation details, including anchors. 2. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = 1 foot scale. 3. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 4. Location of weep holes. 5. Panning details. 6. Hardware, including operators. 7. Window cleaning provisions. 8. Glazing details. 9. Accessori es. D. Samples for initial color selection on 12-inch-long sections of window members. Where finishes involve normal color variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. E. Samples for Verification: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques,workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. F. Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type, grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing of current window units within the last 5 years. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of vinyl windows similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain vinyl windows from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Mockups: Prior to installing vinyl windows, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. AAW VINYL WINDOWS 08560 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08560-VINYL WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes vinyl windows of the following window types: 1. Double-hung windows. 2. Project out awning windows. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide vinyl windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated. B. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency based on the following criteria: 1. Test Procedures: Test window units according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S. 2-97 for air infiltration,water penetration, and structural performance. C. Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in AAMA Voluntary Standards for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance for type, grade, and performance class of window units required. 1. Double hung: Shall meet AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S. 2-97 H-R60. 2. Awning: Shall meet AAMAINWWDA 101/I.S. 2-97 H-R40. D. Air-Infiltration Rate for Operating and Fixed Units: Not more than 0.37 cfm/ft.of operable sash joint for an inward test pressure of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft.. E. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 15 percent of the design pressure. F. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any member's span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 30 Ibf/sq. ft.. G. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be "thermally improved," provide units tested for thermal performance according to AAMA Voluntary Standards showing a condensation resistance factor(CRF)of 71 for the frame and 59 for the glass. H. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U-value maximum of 0.44 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F, when tested according to National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 97-100. 1.4 SUBMITTALS VINYL WINDOWS 08560 - 1 § / \ o ( \ } . $ / j � � ® \ \ IL L \ \ § / e , g CD LL \ \ E/ � \ \} \ \ @\ § EA \ <\ { \ $ % b-1 I \§ LU ( 2 ; ± ± }) o � ( / ) Lu 7 c E 2 ) \ | § a � 2 � § C) ±§ � � ) ! � � c � ) e § ƒ o o � z ( z CL » 0 0 / } \ \ } cr. } } \ \\ { \ \ \ z 2 9 < - I \ \ ) I j rq \ » ] \ Avw. ZIP 2 t N ^u C7 C7 � o lu w w z o eq CL n. W ❑ C 3 CJ W e Z z z U r LU CL N 0. W W ¢ z W W ¢ cv J W O } } ; m _Z W W } w 0 - 3 F- J Z U) Z s u U7 Q Q > Q ❑ W i v ¢ W In >L)i H co O O t o W � m O O z ¢ z Z `t p 3: @ g W p 5 m 0 (7 U' W p 0 Z O O o Vf ¢ ¢ O 2 U Z z a z Z Z J 3: t: o LU J J J U) J O U J o 4� w J J J_ X a Z d Z Z 2 c > o_ v g { V Q Z v Z tea- IA O ti W W Q ti Q Q Q W Q O { a Zi Q A C7 C7 f 7 C7 C? C3 U U Q ¢ 4 O 3 C � r ww N 2 O C7 0 0 C7 C7 (7 (� U C7 ❑ ❑ i CU f z A u ; z s zz o m o o o o o a Q i11 iN jn (� N �t to co to in in D x x x x x x x x x x x t Q p co io ip o co in in iv io o b co NWA., w V y V > > > > > > > > 7 > > r` rz Q J J J J _i J J J J J J W iL Q ¢ Q Q ¢ Q ¢ d Q ¢ 4 4, z z z Z Z z z Z z z z N z O O O O O O O O O O O by Q F F F- h- F- p I<-- Q Q Q d K Q Q Q 4 Q z z z z z Z z z z z z 17 b p m C J N Q z z ,Nib, ° a ) � ( \ \ / j / \ / § } § \ $ ® § k § cr ¥ \ « / t / I u § ± \ / } \ } \ _ ƒ $ / � m \ ) } / ( ,c 3 0 § § � � § § § LU m / LU CL = c o ? 2 § U 4 ) 2 - z = _) V7 / < 0 -Co' 5 \ I � A e ) § f u u @ / / u \ \ j U < 2 < U- { } / z { \ \ \ \ � � \ ( ( m < o < } / } \ -mookk % ( ¥ � \ ® � E \ � ) � \ ® k 6 2 \ G \ 0 / Q 0 \ \ « � ) C() % \ z 0 \ \ \ ® E _ / R $ / k \ \ \ / i \ « ° LU z \ \ U 7 § a o = « I t k k .j § \ e J LU 4 < 0 G 3 7 8 § [ \ 2 @ Q 2 & 2 J \ / � ( § \ / \ g $ \ \ / k \ / k i \q < G < k S G A < < 2 $ @ C') § \ \ J / c / z w w ¥ $ § g u G g E co § g 2 5 % E 3 Li \ e k \ C Q 0 2 I f \ } § % 0 § \ \ } 5 » ¥ G / j Cl) / o \ } \ \ )} } § ) \ \ C? ) \ I « r m = n n e Z3 a m n = n . ( § ` z z 2 a z 2 z � � z z z / > > > > s > > > > > s ƒ < / / / / < < / / < ƒ < / z z z z z z z = z u z z \ « -j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o z o < o Z e P e e P p Q w p a g P c < < < < < < < < < < < < u < f ) I z z z z z z z z z z z = z L q� � Q ƒ \ \ < c u < < 'j- took z , m Cl) , r e » z 0', ` ` ° ^ ° P,, Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08500—WINDOW SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABILITY: This Section applies to all work of the Contract. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, other Division 1 Specification Sections, and Technical Specification Sections for each material apply to this Section. 1.3 SUMMARY: Window Schedules on following pages. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION WINDOW SCHEDULES 08500-1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,, E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades,without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers'written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants"and to produce weathertight installation. I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers'written instructions. 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08411 Aaftk ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. AM 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). D. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. E. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. F. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES "MN, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads,or vibration, use self-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 2.5 DOORS A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 12 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .w►, B. Storefront Framing and Door Warranty: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided. In addition, welded door comer construction shall be supported with a limited lifetime warranty for the life of the door under normal use. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum &Glass Co., Inc. 2. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. 3. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. 4. EFCO Corporation. 5. Kawneer. 6. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 7. Tubelite Inc. 8. United States Aluminum, 9. Vistawall Architectural Products. 10. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS look A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Stri p: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded- aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal conductance. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ICC/ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards." and Massachusetts Architectural Barriers Board Regulations. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW*, B. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. A static air design load of 20 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. C. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf. D. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf as defined in AAMA 501. E. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than the following, when tested according to AAMA 1503: Glass to Exterior—70trame and 69 g,ass(low-e). Glass to Center—62f�,R18 and 68 glass (low-e). Glass to Interior—56trame and 67 glass (low-e). F. Average Thermal Conductance: When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-value)shall not be more than: Glass to Exterior—0.47(low-e) Glass to Center—0.44(low-e) Glass to Interior—0.41 (low-e) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior. 2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of systems, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery. 2, Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08411 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts. a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 2. Exterior and interior manual-swing aluminum doors. 3. Exterior and interior aluminum door frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units to function properly. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Provide watertight and air-tight joints between existing construction and the jamb and head frames of storm doors with sealants or gaskets as standard with the manufacturer. Apply sealant to comply with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations, including preparation of joint faces and priming, where required. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust inserts, screen, and hardware to provide smooth operation, positive latching, and continuous contact of perimeter weather stripping with frames. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean metal and glass surfaces of storm doors promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finishes of new and existing surfaces. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, or other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, the storm door will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08390 ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill— Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Corners: Factory assemble storm doors using corner joinery methods indicated to produce rigidly connected, mitered joints that are rackproof during normal handling, installation, and operation. Corner gussets shall be extruded aluminum with thickness of.80 inch. 1. Comer Joinery: Weld or braze corners of main frame at head, jamb, and screen insert joints. Weld or braze stiles, rails, and crossbars of doors. Mechanically join glazed insert frames. C. Combination Storm Doors: Fabricate combination storm doors in sizes and design indicated; coordinate with prime doors to provide sizes and frame configuration required for close-fitting assemblies. 1. Provide doors with self storing inserts for glazed sash and screens in the arrangement indicated on the Drawings. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. For components assembled or welded in the factory, apply the finish after fabrication is complete. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, polyester enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8, except with minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.0381 mm), medium gloss. 2. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening sizes for storm doors are correct and conform to the following: 1. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with all surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the opening. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations, and ASTM E737 for installation of storm doors. B. Hang storm doors, including jamb and head frames, plumb, level, and without distortion, securely fastened to and aligned with main doors. Fasten storm doors in a manner that allows for expansion and contraction without damage to the door frame, pullout of fasteners, or effect on storm door operation. C. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to ANSI/AAMA 101. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 4 ' Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Tempered Glass: Complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. 2. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard channel-type gaskets compatible with aluminum and resistant to weathering. 3. Glazing Compounds: Manufacturer's standard back-bedding compounds or tapes, or both, used either singly or in a combination conforming to AAMA 800 and selected according to AAMA 850. E. Insect Screen: Screen inserts with screen fabric secured to the aluminum frame with a removable spline requiring at least 40 Ibf-inches (4.52 Nm) of force to unseat screening when tested according to SMA/SMT 31. 1. Aluminum Screening: Aluminum wire fabric, 18-by-16 or 18-by-18 mesh, with a 0.011-inch-(0.28-mm-)diameter wire that complies with FS RR-W-365, Type VII. 2. Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard formed or extruded aluminum frames and removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline. Comply with requirements of ANSI/SMA 1004. a. Finish: Baked-on organic coating as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Fasteners: Provide removable vinyl inserts or heavy-duty steel knurled thumbscrews. Aluminum thumbscrews are not allowed. F. Hardware: Equip doors with the following hardware items standard with the manufacturer. 1. Latch: Equip each door with a spring-operated latch with the bolt operated by a turn knob, thumb piece, or lever handle, and lockable from the inside only. 2. Closers: Equip each door with two adjustable tubular pneumatic or hydraulic closer, top and bottom, complying with the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A 156.4 for Type C09363 or C09343 respectively. 3. Stop: Equip each door with a chain-type door stop, complying with the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A 156.16 for Type L02222. 4. Hinges: Equip each door with not less than 4 concealed hinges using oil-impregnated bearing surfaces. G. Narrow Joint Seam Sealers: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent-based, one-part, thermo-plastic sealant compound, with plus or minus 7-1/2 percent movement, complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class B, Type II, and AAMA 803.3, recommended by the manufacturer for general use as an exposed building construction sealant. H. Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound: Silicone, rubber-based, one-part low-modulus, elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use M, G, A, and as applicable to joint substrate, O; and AAMA 808.3, recommended by the sealant manufacturer for porous and nonporous joint faces; in color matching frame finish or as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate door members, including jamb and head frame, sills, door stiles, and rails, and Insert frames from solid or hollow extrusions of sizes, shapes, and wall thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as standard with the manufacturer. 1. Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.050 inch thick for the face and .78 inch on the edge of door stiles, rails, and mullions. Not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick for glass insert AV"` frames. Not less than 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick for screen insert frames. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports showing that storm doors of the type application and class indicated comply with requirements specified in ANSI/AAMA 1102.7. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide storm doors that are listed by product name and manufacturer in the AAMA Certified Products Directory under the applicable specification heading for combination storm doors. 1. Provide storm doors complying with AAMA 1102.7, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Storm Doors,"except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparing shop drawings and fabricating screen and storm doors. 1.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver to the Owner the following extra stock: 1. Two screens complete with fasteners. 2. Two storm panels complete with fasteners. 3. Five locksets. 4. Five closers. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products based on the following: 1. Gerkin, 912 self storing traditional with grills 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate and ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5, or equivalent, for aluminum extrusions. B. Reinforcing, Fasteners, and Hardware: Where metals other than aluminum are standard with the manufacturer for concealed reinforcing, fasteners, and hardware, use stainless steel or other noncorrosive materials that are compatible with aluminum. If steel is used for reinforcing members, provide steel electroplated with a zinc coating that complies with ASTM B 633, or another comparable coating. For exposed fasteners, match color and finish of the metal or hardware being fastened. C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard weather stripping material that is compatible with aluminum, resistant to weathering, and effectively reduces air leakage. 1. Pile Weather Stripping: Complying with AAMA 701. D. Glazing: Complying with ANSI Z97.1 and with the Consumer Products Safety Commission's requirements in CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 2 Village at Hospital Hill — Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08390 -ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum screen and storm doors: 1. Combination storm doors(AAMA Specification CSD). B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for glazing and sealing sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: Provide storm doors that comply with ANSI/AAMA 1102.7 "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Storm Doors," except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Testing Requirements: Test each application type of storm door by a recognized testing agency, according to ASTM E 330 for uniform load structural performance, ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E 331 for water drainage test for performance class required. 1. Performance class equals the design pressure in psf. 2. Air Infiltration Test: Not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (.00465 cu. m/s x sq. m) of rough opening at 1.57 psf(75 Pa). 3. Uniform Load Test: Test pressure equals 1.5 times the design pressure for 10 seconds. 4. Water Drainage Test: Pressure drop of 0 for 3 minutes with no water on the interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of screen and storm door specified, including details of construction relative to materials, glazing, screens, weather stripping, dimensions of individual components, hardware, operations,test performance, profiles, and finishes. C. Schedules indicating location of each type and size of screen and storm door. D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of screen and storm doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, glass and frame thickness, screens, hardware, operating details, and attachments to other units of Work. E. Samples: A corner sample including 12-inch- (300-mm-) long sections of a typical frame members, in specified finish and with specified screen. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS 08390 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"k 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08311 was, ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations:Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Lock: Cylinder. C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock. D. Fire Rated, Uninsulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, flush construction. 4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- 1-1/4-inch- wide, surface- mounted trim. 5. Hinges: Continuous piano. 6. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 7. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames. 2. UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals"Article. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591 M with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. B. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 3. Bar-Co, Inc. Div.;Alfab, Inc. 4. Cendrex Inc. 5. Dur-Red Products. 6. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 7. Jensen Industries. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc. 9. Karp Associates, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 11. MIFAB, Inc. 12. Milcor Inc. 13. Nystrom, Inc. ,", 14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -2 Ate'" Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08311 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for blocking out openings for access doors and frames in concrete. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in masonry construction. 3. Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories"for roof hatches. 4. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware"for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying. 5. Division 9 Section"Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for suspended acoustical tile ceilings. 6. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency OOW acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Awk PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire- rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 114 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Solid-Core Particle Board Bifolds a. Landquist& Son, Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Doors for Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Economy. 2. Faces for Interior Doors: Hardboard. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. B. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Three plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s)of door(s) required. 1. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Ar , C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 43 and 70 17 and 50 Insert humidity range percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84- inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial , Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, substitute products by one of the following: A. Flush Wood Door Doors specified herein are based on Masonite Safe n' Sound two panel smooth solid core, pre-hung doors. a. Boccam Inc. b. C &S Door Corporation. C. Econo Porte. d. Florida Made Door Company. e. Haley Brothers, Inc. f. Illinois Flush Door Company, Inc. g. Kent Door&Specialty, Inc. h. Ledco Inc. i. Lifetime Doors, Inc j. Lynden Door Inc. k. Manhattan Door I. Unidor Corporation. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with medium-density overlay, hardboard, and faces. 2. Shop priming flush wood doors. 3. Louvers for flush wood doors. 4. Solid-core particle board bifold doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door 000k frames. 2. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection"for lead-lined flush wood doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 'low B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. „,k 1. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 2. In stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 4. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1 G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 ,. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, l: . K. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better. L. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. M. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. For exterior applications, fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 2. For interior applications, fabricate knock-down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. 3. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. N. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. O. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. P. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces ew smooth and undamaged. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. l,,,,, 1. Level 2 steel doors, unless otherwise indicated . 2. Wood doors, unless otherwise indicated . D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch-thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge, unless square edge is indicated. H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. J. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for A► exposed screws and bolts. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -4 l w Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Drawings are based on Benchmark Commercial Doors, with Adjusta-Fit two piece adjustable frame system. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) ). C. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) D. Door Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame. 1. Sightproof Louvers: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades. E. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.053-inch-thick minimum steel sheet for: 1. Level 3 steel doors, unless otherwise indicated . C. Frames of 0.043-inch-thick minimum steel sheet for: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,ftkl C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 114- inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc. C. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Company. f. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. g. Kewanee Corporation (The). h. Mesker Door, Inc. i. Pioneer Industries Inc. j. Republic Builders Products. k. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. Awk STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low SECTION 08111 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"for wood doors installed in steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware"for door hardware and weather stripping. ew 3. Division 8 Section"Wood Doors"for fiberglass doors installed in steel frames. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glass in glazed openings in doors. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions. 6. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 } y / � \ � § � } _ $ � 6 { t / § ® _ z 2 z § | / f - ! o $ \ W. 0E , § X04 § � � \ , « _ # | } \ f L / z z z § ± § 7 § / | } / 0 / ! / 2 ƒ 2 2 ) \ ] � � § \ 0 0 0 ] z z z ) \ \ / \ QQ § u ° u \ u t \ \ { \\ \\ \0 Cc o c @ @ 0 (1) \ \ 5 $ - - \ \ \ \ } \ $ j of { / e } \ { \ \ \ \/ c u 9 g \ \ \ / bI = s = { \ � Q a v M �^ H y o L J C0 O 0 O T3 ❑ z ti o o m m m c y N N C z z Z z qy V LL 0' E ti `= E 't-I r r r r r r mj i y G ❑ C] G D ¢ < ¢ ❑ N r `o C ld r co CO td W W w 0 < Q i C'3 LL. 1 0 1) A co co LO JO r O L 47 aJ b F v 'a E uL. C7 O O O O O O O O O z z z t; _ M1 � O N L < Q ¢ ¢ < O O O O 0 Q 0 511 W W W W O O O O O LL E � c C U) fA O O W W O O O O 0 a A z z z > r z z z z z o L. L O d ❑ W a' <r � r r cD u� It cn :a ro J � _j w w ow Gw a � O J CC J It :1 IZ tt J CC IZ J CC M 00 0o 00 00 00 00 00 00 k; aE oo C) U) U CD C.) x� xv _� xU xU h W !' a L Y M f!7 C' ch M C1 C) C7 C7 C7 O Y O C cl f- L L -L _ _ - O W O7 00 co W GO W m m t O 31 cp (o (O (D (O CO tD zo zo CO •i Z C) O O 7 O 0 } zo c) Cl) L � O C _ ❑ x T od co }. p r c0 U) N v, co < m co U7 0O 0 00 ~ ru OtC 2 0 N _ ❑ 1 F Z Z }< F<— J W < J < G u) v) U U [D © U m ❑ L CJ N N C'J CJ -4 ¢ \ ) > 2 C: � \ | % 'A 0) ~ " - t- \ \ j 2 \ 0 ) §� $ ® , c2 / ® � » § }\ }) r- 3 3 I 3 I I ) / ! ) G $ E $ Co } $ q 3 \ & ^ K � ) � ( \ = 2 S @ b 2 § \ 2 \ E E ) ) ? 2 @ @ S \ $ @ E 3 G k § � = a ( t ) j \ f < 3 k G / 2 \ E \ \ \ ; ƒ (U § \ ) L. } i k i i i i k k k , L o }! 77 u u u = u § < E a \ i / § , k \ 0 0 0 0 0 [ ] 0 0 0 \ ± z z z z z » » z z z § cC ; t k % ( _ _ - - n m ( ri \L. 2 k @ u 0 u e u \ [ « E G L L E 2 L 0 0 0 0 0 c \ a \ 2 � \ Z / f / t « � f m � 9 m o ± § � ¢ _ _ \ / C?e \- % \ % z\ ) ) e & \ \ o \ Cl) e a B e a B w e } j } \ 2 co _ \ � / \ § / \ = u 2 ƒ } 2 e e 2 < z - = 2 = e » c _ < _ < m / r -000 C G ryry :i °SC U N U N 3 o N C 0 Z U 06 a y v � d o h ` o > y N b u n 67 O O O d a h b9 CL(n b C9 C Cn CL U) io X L z O N Q ¢ Q a o x U. z z Z N 0 CO E ;d n Ef N lL 0 cm U q� v f; t � IS ai aLi L .° yo 43 E •� .A s� moo` co to L d7 C a v p L d Q Q ❑ (a Q g h LL ❑ [r offo p ba H _ tip ; C u o b b o cd Z O O O O O O zt o c v o LL z z z z z z z °o ? (u ° ° — a n o E Q Q Q LL £ L~LI W o '• z. c L z o °z z o ❑ � � z v k O > ❑ W N CV It .�. n L J J a O td W cl 14 1: m 2 ME N N - c� c� ij .0 O .� cc m ao co ca co O 4) ❑ `� cD CD. CD CD (D it Qj L L O O in 4 J Q G T 41 O 2 Q p ❑ ! W W O t— F L F H ? z WX Z z Z) zz Q y C ❑ O 0 S o h O O O 0 0.7 m m co ¢ z d of Qa o oa z z z z z z z �y c i d y 0 0 0 0 0 0 o ¢ d d Q ¢ ¢ a N N N N D7 N (D z. Z Z z z z z .2 LL ❑ an U C7 C9 CS (7 C7 C7 C7 d Q Q U' C3 ¢ a c 0 Cu, S SL Q W W W W W ( U U U C7 C3 U vl u 0 —_ 1? o` Cd r r I� r = W W W W W W W C7 U V U C3 (`� U ippe o li: 6 E 'N o O O o 0 0 O a o 0 0 0 0 0i LL 0 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z `v C p p 8 i O S. L c t �- �IMw o 9^ o O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ❑ C7 z z z z z z z z z z z Z z z s L Q 1 G 0 0 ❑ W N r tD LO CO V 'Ir LO W W W W cr a: ¢ CC L O O O O J J J >1 t y C] ❑ ❑ d d d � W 00W OJW 0W 0W 0uJ 0W 9 OO A J _! J J I— }-- H J CC J¢ J CC J fL J CC J CC J � ❑ O O O O = 0 �O TO 00 =0 iO =0U d A C x 0 •u t ` 0 -C C) m CO M Ch F1 m Cl) Cl) C9 co m II ❑ I"" r r r r r r r r r +-- r r r r �l i+ Gt y L o "y co is oo io C? C? cA co co m (30 co a3 co a %o io io io io zo i0 Zo W co in 0 is L L O O ❑ P7 co n Cl) ch cI) m N l9 in CV EV C'J d' L -C O C O rl 0 m 6� a rn W J) 0 co a i ° 0 cl V)0 < U a] 0= � N cn O¢ LLi r = m co ¢r °Q o 0 0 � a wU- ° C, m m m U c O C -f in co c,i ❑ O ccr7 C17 c-. 1) m U ❑ w LL U E ^ } $ / \ y 2 2 z 2 2 2 2 z z 2 z 2 2 ( / a o = 3 3 3 & S S S » 3 a S S 3 I ! 2 ) @ @ 5 @ @ E & g E 2 q 2 @ q | f r La § } _ k \ B a | k � cG � _ § \ L E \ k 3 E E E 3 E E E ƒ 2 G w § K . _ § } \ � } 3 E § m g E I E 2 E 2 E E § \ § « 2 \ § j o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( $ z z z z z z = z z z z z z z LL 2 } \ ! } ƒ u = u = u p % 7 \ \ \ ƒ § \ \ j § § § � & i = I 3 2 § L § § / � � \ ) \ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 � v Q z z z z z z z z z z z z z z ; § ) � � O z Li u u u u u u u m u u § _ (r _ = I = = _ _ _ = f 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o u u 0 0 0 2 c @ c g o o § < < < § 0 2 \ \# / 0 0 0 / \ / o % 2 [ 0 0 § c = e U m @ = e 0) m m = \ } \ - o 2 Cl) CO o ) ) } ) ® 9 ® \ ƒ z o I b 5 5 / 5 G G b G 5 - - 5 / ) § j } ) \ ) § § % § 5 ) § -1 ) 1 n % 5 B B w � \ ' e ¥ ¥ B - - ) 07 \ o $ ) | ! [ \ Cl) \ \ { \ j \ \ \ \ j « § o G / R ) / \ ( E E t e E P £ e f \ j j j j j § j § CO \\ \ \ § \ \ � j , \ \ \ m [ \ \ , m m n m • / / / G R / : ƒ z I> v a hp bo z z z z. z z o L o 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 ¢ Q o a I N N N N N Q) Z N m Z N a La _ Z n Il ) iii C7 C3 C7 C7 Q U U 0 Q v a _ , E F LL w w w w w cm7 w w w C4 ru u� y o 0 w WO LL Q ¢ w w w w w w n a 0 t+ O O O O O O O O O O O w w O z z z z z z z z z z z > z o Iz 5 x z o p - U- .r x a i �J-• J J J J J W W J J _I Q ❑ J �? L W W ¢ Q ~ Q Q Q Q Q Q n ea LL U)i ?r S ao �f v a O O O O O w w w u O Li w O w O '" (7 z z z z z > > z > > z r z s °o d Q W d v a ° rn rn N ° m 0 v i w w w w w z z w } cl: ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ O O M O O O O O a: LL p U w 0 `y C LU❑ O ❑ ❑ ❑ Q ¢ GQ Q ¢ ❑ ❑ ❑ M J J J J J r O p w W 0 Q �' 0 E O o O O O U) z 3 CI 4 C 0 U Q <f a d d v V ¢ C[ v �. o r m cr) ch ui u.i T y L •L E 0 •CO _ _ _ _ CL CL _ !, 0 N cD [O C9 c0 O O ¢7 '= ED lD CD CD <D cD co iD CD W w (D G' Q O O O O O O O O O O Q O zo zo C7 co c7 to CD Cl) 0 CO w W L � 0 C T C) o LO `n r o N y f ^ rn ^ V - ❑ _! Z z Z G Z O ¢ w F Q 1— CO y L c, ❑ :D a ❑ ❑ co 0_ > > > O -r O -Y Q m Q m .. d• o co L" ID r rn o d � o pp _Z Z_ Z_ Z Z_ _Z _Z Z_ Z Z_ Z_ z Z_ Z_ O L O O O O O O O O O O O O O O vi E N N N N N N m N N N N N N S 4} ty a tL ❑ Vf C7 C7 C7 Q (� C7 C7 C7 U' C`3 C7 C`3 (7 Q � �. w � tV M LL Q w w w w w w w w w C7 C3 C7 iii �+ u h V d y O Q = W W W LL 's a �° c ❑ E o 0 0 o O O o O o O o 0 0 0 0 1 LLz z z z z z z z z z z z z6 °c N � J J J J J J J J J J J J J J E d Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q t s A Cu w w L L ru tL Cu (� LL o c CD o w w w w w w w O O O O O O O ❑ >• > > > } } > z z z z z z z ? i L o i � o v O ❑ W r r r r r r N N N d rt Q cf W W W W cc O O O O L v ¢ Q ¢ Q ¢ ¢ Q Q ¢ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ h N r N 41 R C o 't cJ co cn m ❑ F- r IL r r r r r r r r 4J i L L O ,b0 O 0 G� 1D tb ;o [D W CO � zo m [q to O ❑ T (p fD tD O zo fD tp CD zo (D to co f0 O :i Q ` O O O O O O O O O O O Q O Q S co co ih Cl) co m h C4 N co 0 O C) O N O O 2 W W W O W W } O s n�i a 0 0 0 m 0 O Lr O O N N u Q J O O O a O O < JU,, q z z z z (n to CO fn UJ (A J W z D 7 Z) D O Y Q co Q m Q m Q C*J Q ?1 O O r 111 O N N v O 0 O O "J 0 O Q O 0 'z ie m c pp Z Z Z_ Z_ Z_ m lC7 ¢ S n jy m Z N N N N N N C) 3G Li c i d Q C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'F c7 u, G in rjo'LOO LL o W W W LC! W W w C~7 cl V Cd f� T W u b aL LL C z LLl W W W W W (7 (ry o m v v O 'b y to u c v E O O O O O O O O O ti h t3 � ?-� � Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O L C LL L7 G L O O 3 k N N b E m 4. ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ i 41- LU a o LLB CL) Q b ao u ? L N oj a)N L"i <f- 4j ❑ } yW. }W. } } } Z Z Z * `� v O N O `w r r r r +- N N N �; L' v U v C� —Ed o a, w W W LU W r z H d r :F 3J 4 L s ip O O y W O m W W W CO I C :c (D CD CD lD ZD CD zo CD W T C t. ... a L i 6 O () n o 0 0 0 0 o a Q �y Z O C Q 1I r of ti f O Vf N O W W W W LU °o N W L O ¢ O ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ O ¢cr +, ti o o ¢ ¢ C O O O z D C v _ O J F— O 1— — — I— c r I— Z Q N z o U7 U co M U) co V] 2 ti M C cD q j Z F 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08100—DOOR SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABILITY: This Section applies to all work of the Contract. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, other Division 1 Specification Sections, and Technical Specification Sections for each material apply to this Section. 1.3 SUMMARY: Door Schedules on following pages. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION DOOR SCHEDULES 08100-1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. e. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component)and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high- performance coating, and ceramic tile. 3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Latex Sealant: At all other INTERIOR joints, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products:Available products include the following: a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. C. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. d. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. e. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. f. Tremflex 834; Tremco. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: For EXTERIOR joints, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. 790; Dow Corning. b. Silpruf; GE Silicones. C. UltraPruf SCS2300; GE Silicones. A"► d. 864; Pecora Corporation. e. 890; Pecora Corporation. f. PSI-641; Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Spectrem 1; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high- performance coating, brick, marble, ceramic tile, and wood. 7. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where INTERIOR joint sealants of this type are required at kitchens, bathrooms and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and that comply with the following: 1. Products:Available products include the following: a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. C. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. d. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. low b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A%01 surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. end of Part 3,including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade, class, and uses. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants will be immersed continuously in water, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247, including initial six-week immersion period and additional immersion periods specified below, and have not failed in adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated for Project. 1. One additional four-week immersion period. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type 0: Open-cell material. 3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. 4. Type: Any material indicated above. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. _Aft� A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the Awk JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims,joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with,joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36- month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. 3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in peel, and indentation hardness. 4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 3. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A+, B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. H. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers,for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. d. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. e. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraff ic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. C. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for pre-fabricated building expansion joints. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for acoustic sealing of perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 4. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB" for EIFS compatible joints and sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Floor-to-Wall and Wall-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. Assembly Rating: 1 hour or 2 hours, as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 3. Product: W. R. Grace Construction Products, FlameSafe FS 900+ Sealant. END OF SECTION 07842 took FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products AW%k and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire- resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. '` 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to requirements herein, include the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc., Scarborough, ON, Canada 2. W.R. Grace & Co.—Conn, Cambridge, MA 3. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK 4. Johns Manville, Denver, CO 5. Nelson Firestop Products, Tulsa, OK 6. NUCO Inc., Guelph, ON, CANADA 7. RectorSeal Corporation (The), Houston, TX 8. Specified Technologies Inc., Somerville, NJ 9. 3M Fire Protection Products Division, St. Paul, MN 10. Tremco, Sealant/Weatherproofing Division, Beachwood, OH 11. USG Corporation, Chicago, IL PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aoft* C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire- resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: Alftk a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07842- FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Floor-to-wall joints. 2. Wall-to-wall joints. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for non-fire-resistive joint sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and L-ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079. C. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire- resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. O F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. 3.3 TOUCH UP A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Division 9 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. laft� f. Pipe Ends and Tops: Covered or plugged with weather-resistant material. g. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources. In. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner. L Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings. j. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Roof Hatch Installation: 1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. 2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb. 3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.4 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single -wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Basis of Design: Bilco Company, Type S Roof Scuttle. Subject to compliance with requirements herein, products of the following manufacturers may be substituted: a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bristolite Skylights. C. Custom Curb, Inc. d. Dur-Red Products. e. Hi Pro International, Inc. f. J. L. Industries, Inc. g. Metallic Products Corporation. h. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. i. Nystrom, Inc. j. O'Keeffe's Inc. k. Precision Ladders, LLC. I. Roof Products& Systems Corporation. M. ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation. n. Wasco Products, Inc. o. Western Canwell. 2. Hardware: Spring latch with turn handles and padlock hasps inside and outside. 3. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position. 4. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard complete system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and all accessories required for a complete installation. a. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. b. Pipe or Tube: 1-1/4-inch ID galvanized pipe or 1-5/8-inch OD galvanized tube. C. Flat Bar: 2-inch-high by 3/8-inch-thick galvanized steel. d. Chain Passway Enclosure: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end. e. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A"Al 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with asphalt shingle installation and flashing interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof drainage routes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 METAL MATERIALS AW A. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished. C. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. D. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. C. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- Insert thickness thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. D. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. Insert grade. E. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. low SECTION 07720-ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof hatches. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches. 2. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for safety railing system not attached to roof hatch curbs. 3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers. 4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterf lashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07531 Ask EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. E. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations,penetrations,and perimeter of roofing. F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. J. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A roof inspection is required by manufacturer before warranty issue. Revise scope of inspection and source of report to a qualified roofing consultant or an independent testing and inspecting agency if preferred. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. D. Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck," according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and Ag%* does not restrict flow of water. E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.4 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e. Celotex Corporation. f. Firestone Building Products Company. g. GAF Materials Corp. h. GenFlex Roofing Systems. i. Hunter Panels, LLC. j. Johns Manville International, Inc. k. Koppers Industries. I. RMAX. C. Provide preformed tapers, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated with 2" minimum thickness. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type 11, Grade 2, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch thick. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 5 Section"Steel Deck." 4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed. 5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed. 7. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Awk i. Protective Coatings, Inc. j. Roofing Products International, Inc. k. Stafast Roofing Products. I. Versico Inc. 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing membrane. F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (tapered insulation): ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 aluminum foil facer on both major surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: a. AlliedSignal Inc.; Commercial Roofing Systems. b. Apache Products Company. C. Atlas Roofing Corporation. d. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Celotex Corporation. C. ERSystems. d. Firestone Building Products Company. e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. f. International Diamond Systems. g. Johns Manville International, Inc. opkl h. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"k, C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. 12-by-12-inch square of roof insulation. 3. 12-inch length of metal termination bars. 4. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. E. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. G. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing FMG approval for Aftk membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system approved by roofing membrane manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf , life. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07531 -EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Adhered membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation,for above use at small, lower roof at South Home. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 4. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for roof drains. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's"The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to Tables 2 and 3 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07460 SIDING 07460 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. 3.4 FASCIA AND MOLDING INSTALLATION A. Install flashing around all wall openings. B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must mss+. penetrate minimum '/,inch or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be required to ensure adequate security. C. Place fasteners no closer than'/<inch and no further than 2 inch from side edge of trim board and no closer than 1 inch from end. Fasten maximum 16 inch on center. D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade. E. Trim inside corner with single board. F. Install single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten trim board to trim board. G. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding. H. Seal gap with joint sealant. I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim. J. Install trim fascia over structural subfascia. 3.6 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Block framing between studs where panel siding horizontal joints occur. B. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch from panel edges and 2 inch from panel corners. C. Allow minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between roofing and bottom edge of siding. D. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. SIDING 07460 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 PANELS A. Fiber-Cement Panels: Panels made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: James Hardie Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Cemplank, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corp. C. GAF Materials Corporation. d. MaxiTile, Inc. 2. Panel Pattern: 48-inch-wide sheets with smooth texture. 3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.3 SOFFIT A. Fiber-Cement Soffit: Panels made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. ek 1. Basis-of-Design Product: James Hardie Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Cemplank, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corp. C. MaxiTile, Inc. 2. Pattern: 12-inch-, 16-inch-or 24-inch-wide sheets with smooth texture. 3. Ventilation: Provide unperforated soffit, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. B. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, compatible with siding system, complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. C. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate and through rigid insulation. 2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 114 inch or 3 screw-threads into substrate and through rigid insulation. 3. For fastening fiber-cement siding, use stainless-steel fasteners. SIDING 07460 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation with (lashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's limited product warranty against manufacturing defects in lap and vertical siding for 50 years, and trim for 10 years, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of panel, soffit and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each siding and soffit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2. Pre-Primed: All siding, soffit and trim material shall be pre-primed with manufacturer's standard primer and primer application process. SIDING 07460 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07460-SIDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiber-cement panels. 2. Fiber-cement soffit. 3. Fiber-cement trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry"for building paper and building wrap. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For panels and soffit. C. Samples for Verification: For each type required. 1. 24-inch-wide-by-36-inch-high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 2. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of trim. D. Product Certificates: For each type of panel, soffit, and trim, signed by product manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Siding and Soffit: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockup approximately 48 inches long by 60 inches high. Include outside corner on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end. SIDING 07460 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.7 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. E. Stop-Type Snow Guards: Attach snow guards to metal roof panels with adhesive, sealant, or adhesive tape, as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels. 1. Provide Three staggered rows of snow guards, at locations within 4 feet, measured horizontally, from any paving or walking surface, below bottom edge of roof, spaced 18" apart, beginning 12" up from gutter,with each snow guard centered between panel ribs. F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets,fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Provide foam fillers at any areas susceptible to insect intrusion. Set back at least 1 inch from edges that are visable. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.5 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANELS A. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof. Comply with installation requirements in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 1. Erect insulation horizontally and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 , inches o.c. Securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to roof deck with screws spaced 24 inches o.c. 3.6 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weatherproof to driving rains. 7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. Aft� METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof sheathing under metal roof panels, unless otherwise recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roof panels. Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1. Apply from eave to ridge. 2. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self- adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. C. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." D. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. 3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Install panels perpendicular to purlins. 3. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 4. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps. 5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 7. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 8. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 9. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. tow B. Fasteners: METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aoft� 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomedc sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal roof panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, pudins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION Auk METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. C. Gutters: Formed from 0.0179-inch-thick, zinc-coated(galvanized)steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels. D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; in 10-foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match metal roof panels. E. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring. 1. Surface-Mounted, Metal, Stop-Type Snow Guards: Cast-aluminum stops designed for attachment to pan surface of metal roof panel using construction adhesive, silicone or polyurethane sealant, or adhesive tape. row F. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat- """ lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon- steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer. 2. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. �. B. Corrugated-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Roof Panels: Formed with alternating curved ribs spaced at 11 1/2 inches o.c. across width of panel. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: DoubleRib panel by Berridge Manufacturing Company. 2. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized)steel sheet, 24 gauge. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Panel Coverage: 24" nominal. 4. Panel Height: '/z". 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for metal roof panel system specified is based on Berridge Manufacturing Company, Double-Rib 24-gauge system. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or approved equal. 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446-85 Grade C coating on A525-86 24 gauge core steel. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings. a. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Provide Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer applied in a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat,for a total dry film thickness of 0.25. 4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2.3 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANELS A. Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I (foil facing), Class 1, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unlaced core. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type It (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. B. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing and top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft., rosin sized. D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Ank 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal roof panels without field measurements, or allow for field-trimming of panels. Coordinate roof construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." B. Coordinate metal panel roof assemblies with rain drainage work,flashing,trim,and construction of decks, purlins and rafters, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Weathertight Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine deck substrate, purlin and rafter conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 5. Review structural loading limitations of deck, purlins and rafters during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation. E. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. C. Downspouts. d. Roof curbs. e. Snow guards. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal roof panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A*Nk A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal roof panel assemblies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for metal roof panels, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal roof panels and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative, deck, purlin and rafter Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal low* roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -2 village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07411 -METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Factory-formed and field-assembled, exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal roof panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for secondary support framing supporting metal roof panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for fasciae, copings, flashings and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels,attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system. B. Steel Sheet Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without metallic coatings or painted finishes. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, (lashings, closures, and !� accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work. 07411 1 METAL ROOF PANELS Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low 1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch Insert dimension over fascia at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses. E. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails. 2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. END OF SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -Awk not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches(914 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches (914 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. 4. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches(450 mm)on each side. 5. Hips: Extend 18 inches (450 mm)on each side. 6. Ridges: Extend 36 inches (914 mm) on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 7. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches (450 mm) and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches(100 mm)Insert dimension. 8. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches(450 mm)and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches(100 mm) . 9. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches (450 mm)on each roof slope. 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side. E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's"The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. " ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 5 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface. 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 5 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney skylight and 6 inches above the roof plane. 4. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 318-inch drip at lower edge. C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for (lashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. 3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below and on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. The greater coverage prevails. Lap sides not less than 3-112 inches(89 mm). Lap ends ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AAW 1. Products: a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; Continuous Soffit Vent and Undereave Vent as indicated on the Drawings. Provide color as selected by the Architect. 2. Minimum Net Free Area: 9 square inches per linear foot. 3. Width: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.5 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Gutters: Provide 6" (unless other wise indicated)gutters formed from continuous aluminum coil stock, minimum .040"gauge, complete with hangers, end caps, neoprene expansion joints, corners, and other fittings. B. Downspouts: Provide 3"x 4"downspouts (unless otherwise indicated)formed from continuous aluminum coil stock, minimum .040" gauge, complete with hangers and other fittings. Provide heavy-duty boots at base of downspout to connect with underground drainage system,just above grade. C. Shop Finish, Rain Drainage: Provide manufacturer's baked-on acrylic shop finish on sheet metal rain drainage units(gutters, downspouts, and similar exposed units); 1.0-mil dry film thickness. a. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors (minimum of five color choices). D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Alcoa Aluminum. b. Englert, Inc. c. Hastings 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type 11, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch-diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed,with a minimum 3/8-inch-diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSS or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter. 2.7 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Sheet Metal: Coil-coated aluminum. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. d. Globe Building Materials, Inc. e. IKO. f. Malarkey Roofing Company. g. Owens Corning. h. PABCO Roofing Products. i. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 3. Tab Arrangement: Three tab, regularly spaced. 4. Cutout Shape: Square. 5. Butt Edge: Straight cut. 6. Strip Size: 12"x 36". 7. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 8. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 4869 asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 55-mil- thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer for adjoining concrete or masonry surfaces to receive underlayment. POW 1. Products: a. ALCO-NVC Inc.; ALCO Shield. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation; StormMaster DG. C. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start"G." d. Celotex Corporation; Celo-Guard. e. CertainTeed Corporation; WinterGuard. f. GAF Materials Corporation; Weather Watch. g. Henry Company; Eaveguard. h. IKO; ArmourGuard. i. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender. j. NEI Advanced Composite Technology; AC Granular Ice and StormSeal. k. Owens Corning; WeatherLock G. 2.4 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturers standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Products: a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent 11. 2. Minimum Net Free Area: 18 square inches per linear foot. 3. Width: 12" B. SOFFIT AND UNDEREAVE VENTS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Asphalt Shingles: Provide one unopened bundle of each color of shingle. B. Ridge Vent: Provide one unopened box of each color of ridge vent. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Multitab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462,250 lb., Class A, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral- granule surfaced, and self-sealing. 1. Design is based on the following product: Certainteed Classic Horizon Shangle. 2. Products: Other products may be substituted, provide they meet the requirements herein. Acceptable products are totally at the discretion of the Architect. a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. GAF Materials Corporation. ,Rk C. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 4. Ridge vents. 5. Soffit and undereave vents. 6. Gutters and downspouts. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof deck wood structural panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings not part of this Section. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories"for roof access scuttles. 4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 5, Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's"The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. E. Install board insulation where indicated on Drawings. F. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces indicated, either by pouring or by machine blowing, to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's Special Report#3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder in location indicated Insert location of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 6. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AOW* A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick,with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Cut rigid wall insulation tight to bar joists and underside of deck, above. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. C. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. 2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer for below-slab installation. B. Polyi socyan u rate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289-02, ASTM D1621 and ASTM C165, Type II, Class I, Grade 2, reflective aluminum facer on both major surfaces. 1. Compressive Strength: 20 pounds per square inch minimum. 2. Dimensional Stability: 2 percent maximum linear change when conditioned at 158 F and 97 percent relative humidity for seven days. 3. Board size: 4 foot by 8 foot maximum board size. 4. Total Board thickness: 1 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 1.Available Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Johns Manville International, Inc. c. Hunter Panels, Inc. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A(membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim- polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 2. 5-112 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 2.4 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aak A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written ®SW instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade(Extruded-Polystyrene Board). 2. Perimeter wall insulation (Polyi socyanu rate Board). 3. Concealed building insulation. 4. Loose-fill building insulation (Cellulose). 5. Vapor retarders. 6. Sound attenuation insulation. 7. Eave ventilation troughs. 8. Tapered insulation (Polyisocyanurate on small front roof on South Home). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood framing. 2. Division 7 Sections "EPDM Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 3. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 4. Division 15 Section"Mechanical Insulation." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test' described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.4 SUBMITTALS BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils and a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils at any point. 2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.. END OF SECTION 07141 AMIN. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Single-Component, Polymer-Enhanced Asphalt Liquid Waterproofing System: a. Tuff-N-Dri waterproofing system with insulation and drainage panel system. 2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Provide waterproofing materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and able to develop bond to substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1. Produce waterproofing materials suitable for application to vertical, horizontal,and sloped substrates, as applicable. 2. Provide waterproofing materials with not less than 62 percent solids. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836, with manufacturer's written physical requirements. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate AWk temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's and Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: ,wk, COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07141 -COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Single-component, polymer enhanced waterproofing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for parging masonry walls to receive waterproofing. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide waterproofing membrane that prevents the passage of water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate,technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch square of insulation. 2. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations. F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's and Installer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06200 AW*e FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 118 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Install stairs with. no more than 3116-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 318-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 5. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. '' 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION A. Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to rough carriages. 1. Closed Stringers: House treads and risers into wall stringers, glue, and wedge into place Cope wall stringers to fit tightly over treads and risers. B. Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts and to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue. Assemble railings at goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Prefinished aluminum in color to match stain, where face fastening of material to receive stain is unavoidable. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. C. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. D. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Stop Pattern: WM877 7/16"x 1 '/4" stop. 5. Window Sills: 514-inch medium-density fiberboard, Medite II with radiused front edge. 6. Wall Caps: 1 inch nominal poplar. 2.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Non-Adjustable Closet Shelving: Provide ClosetMaid system or approved equal. Provide complete with all brackets, corner systems and accessories. 1. Provide one full width, 12" deep shelf/rod system per bedroom and entry closet. ClosetMaid "Shelf&Rod". 2. Provide five full width, 12" deep shelves per linen closet. ClosetMaid"Linen". B. Adjustable Closet Shelving: At handicapped accessible units provide ClosetMaid "ShelfTrack" mounting system or approved equal. All shelving installations shall be completely adjustable by use of hanging tracks, wall standards and shelf brackets. Provide complete with all brackets, corner systems and accessories. 1. Provide one full width, 12" deep shelf/rod system per bedroom and entry closet. ClosetMaid "SuperSlide"system with shelf and separate rod. 2. Provide five full width, 12" deep shelves per linen closet. ClosetMaid "Linen". 2.4 STAIRS AND RAILINGS A. Interior Stairs: 1. Treads: 1-1/16-inch (27-mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued, yellow pine stepping with half-round nosing. 2. Risers: 3/4-inch (19-mm) finish boards as specified above for interior lumber trim for carpet finish. 3. Finished Stringers: 3/4-inch (19-mm)finish boards as specified above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish. B. Interior Railings: Coffman C-6040 clear, kiln-dried hard maple and manufacturer's prefabricated turns,with the following accessories: 1. Rail brackets: Coffman C-3601-B heavy duty, bright brass wall bracket, mounted at 2' O.C. 2. Rail bracket and rail end rosettes: Coffman C-7317 at bracket locations and level rail ends. Coffman C-7337 at sloped rail ends. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Hot-dip galvanized steel. 3. Aluminum. opk FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A, A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber(S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades: 1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA. B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine. 2. Door Casing Pattern: WM472 FJP 9/16"x 2 '/z"fingerjoint casing. 3. Window Apron Pattern: WM877 7/16"x 1 '/4"stop. Return trim to wall at ends. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim for field-painted finish. 2. Shelving and clothes rods. 3. Stairs and railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. OOW 2. Division 9 Section"Painting"for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NHLA- National Hardwood Lumber Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and colors. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Place adhesive side down to concrete and apply pressure over entire surface. 3. Maintain installed panels traffic-free for 24048 hours before installation of plywood. 4. Install 4 foot by 4 foot maximum sheets of 3/8 inch minimum thickness plywood of suitable underlayment grade over installed panels. a. Trowel adhesive over underlayment panels in 100 percent coverage fashion. b. Apply plywood so that plywood joints do not coincide with underlayment joints. c. Nail each corner and center of plywood using concrete nails to penetrate concrete 1 inch minimum. d. Use additional nails as necessary to hold plywood flat. 5. Maintain installed plywood traffic-free for 24-48 hours before installation of finish flooring. 6. Stop underlayment at doorways to basement stairways in Nurse's Home. Install VCT directly on slab in stairways. Provide resilient transition strip at doorways to stairway. END OF SECTION 06165 AOW FIBERBOARD UNDERLAYMENT 06165-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed. B. Verify environmental conditions are, and will continue to be, maintained in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates or conditions. D. Starting work by installer is acceptance is substrate and environmental conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Follow manufacturer's instructions by separating and allowing underlayment boards to be exposed to environmental temperature and humidity conditions for not less than 24 hours before start of installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during, and after installation. (Bowing of panels away from grid side is normal before application.) B. Allow 3/16 inch space at panel joints, 3/8 inch space at walls and partitions, to allow for expansion and contraction. C. Provide 1/2 inch expansion joints at 50 feet in each direction. D. Stagger all panel joints regardless of panel size. E. Underlayment Application for Carpet and Pad (Adhesive Method): 1. Nail or glue wood nailers to concrete where tackless strips are to be used. 2. Apply continuous 3/8 inch beads of adhesive on grid surface of underlayment panels: a. Each direction at 1/3 points. b. 1/4 inch from each edge. 3. Place adhesive side down to concrete and apply pressure over entire surface. 4. Maintain installed panels traffic-free for 24-48 hours before installation of pad and carpet. F. Underlayment Application for Adhered Carpet&Vinyl Flooring (Adhesive Method): 1. Apply continuous 34/8 inch beads of adhesive on grid surface of underlayment panels: a. Each direction at 1/3 points. b. '/<inch from each edge. FIBERBOARD UNDERLAYMENT 06165- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions before, during, and after application closely approximating those, which will exist when building is occupied. B. Concrete slab must be dry before application. Do not apply where moisture is present. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Homasote Company, West Trenton, NJ. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberboard Underlayment: ConfortBase TM high-density fiberboard made from 100 percent recycled newsprint with '/4 inch deep by 4 inch by 4 inch grid on one side only. 1. Thickness: '/2'. 2. Density: 126-28 pcf. AMIN 3. Tensile Strength parallel to surface: 450-700 psi minimum. 4. Transverse M.O.R.: 750-1,000 psi. 5. Hardness (Janka Ball): 230 lbs. 6. Water Absorption by Volume a. 2 hour immersion: 5 percent maximum. b. 24 hour immersion: 15 percent maximum. 7. Expansion, 50 to 90 percent relative humidity: 0.25 percent. 8. R-value: 1.2 9. Flame Spread: Class III (or C). 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: APA approved subfloor adhesive meeting APA AFG-01 specification. B. Wood Nailers: '/2 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide. FIBERBOARD UNDERLAYMENT 06165 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. #001'` SECTION 06165—FIBERBOARD UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Underlayment for finish flooring over concrete slab in basement of Nurse's Home and as Deduct Alternate#1 for South Home. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 09651 —Sheet Vinyl Flooring. C. Section 09652—Resilient Floor Tile. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84—Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product and complete installation data for all materials in this specification. C. Installation Guide: Product manufacturer's written installation guide. D. Closeout Submittals: Warranty and Manufacturer's performance certifications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original sealed, labeled packaging. B. Store materials inside when possible, stored flat at all times before installation. For exterior storage, place in a dry, well-vented area above ground on wooden pallets and covered with waterproof tarpaulins. C. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. D. Report damaged material immediately to the delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier's freight bill of lading. E. Remove protective packaging not less than 24 ours before installation to allow material to acclimate. FIBERBOARD UNDERLAYMENT 06165- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -OW B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 3.4 FOAM-PLASTIC SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foam-Plastic Wall Sheathing: Install vapor-relief strips or equivalent for permitting escape of moisture vapor that otherwise would be trapped in stud cavity behind sheathing. 3.5 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise , indicated. B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 06160 SHEATHING 06160-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Subflooring: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 4. Underlayment: a. Nail to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch apart at edges and ends. C. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring right before installing flooring. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 114-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might mow retain moisture,to prevent wicking. SHEATHING 06160 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.6 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard RainDrop, or approved equal. B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing, at masonry. b. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-20 XLor PS-45 at windows. C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's"International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. SHEATHING 06160 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32 o.c. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. B. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32 o.c.. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. C. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch over board or uneven subfloors or over fiber board. D. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1 Underlayment with fully sanded face. E. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Underlayment. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME 818.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954. 06160 - 3 SHEATHING Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: DOC PS 1. B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32116. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. C. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1289,Type I, Class 2, aluminum- foil-faced, glass-fiber-reinforced, rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation. Foam- plastic core and facings shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested individually. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apache Products Company. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). C. Johns Manville; Berkshire Hathaway Inc. d. Rmax, Inc. 3. Thickness: As indicated. 4. See Specification Section 07210, Building Insulation, for additional information. 2.3 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. 2.4 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT SHEATHING 06160 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06160-SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring. 4. Underlayment. 5. Building wrap. 6. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 06160 - 1 SHEATHING Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal-size, minimum. 2. Stringer Material: Solid lumber. 3. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches of effective depth. 4. Stringer Spacing: At least 3 stringers for each 36-inch clear width of stair. B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. END OF SECTION 06100 .•+N, ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. G. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 114-by-1-1/4-inch metal strap anchors spaced not more than 48 inches o.c., extending over and fastening to 3 joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches beyond bend. H. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. I. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. J. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal-size lumber, double- crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal-size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. 1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. C. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. 3.7 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION w A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated,to comply with the following requirements: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal-or 2-by-4-inch nominal-size wood studs spaced 16 inches 600 mm 400 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4- inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches and do not embed more than 4 inches. C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. D. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c.with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's International Building Code. K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-112 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches 400 mm o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ark I. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches(57 mm)wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm)thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. J. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners,for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick by 36 inches(914 mm) long. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3-EXECUTION Am 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's"Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME 818.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A;with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Simpson Strong- Tie Co. products or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 4. KC Metals Products, Inc. 5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations, use with pressure treated lumber and where indicated. E. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-114-inch-(32-mm- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness and Size: As required for application. F. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. G. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25 mm) above base and with 2-inch- (50-mm-) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm)thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm)thick. H. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 31-1/4 inches(32 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Length: 24 inches(600 mm). ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) 2250 psi (15.5 MPa) Insert value for 12-inch nominal-(286-mm actual-)depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 700 MPa). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.7 WOOD ROOF DECKING A. At areas indicated on Drawings, replace existing rotted roof decking with new wood roof decking to match. See Section 01210. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. B. Partitions: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir(North); NLGA. 2. Hem-fir(North): NLGA. 10"k D. Ceiling Joists No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. E. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Finnforest USA. C. Georgia-Pacific. d. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. e. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. f. Roseburg Forest Products Co. g, Weldwood of Canada Limited; Subsidiary of International Paper Corporation. mow h. Weyerhaeuser Company. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A fth� 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for ,. moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, which meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Wood blocking,and nailers. 5. Wood furring. 6. Plywood backing panels. 7. Wood roof decking. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 12 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Am* 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed gypsum board plaster partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. C. Leave anchorage joint exposed;wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings,weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 3.5 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. 3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger mow or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,MW*A 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings: 1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 3. Interior Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer(SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with .* requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections,unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By radius bends of radius indicated. J. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 0. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 112 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase l August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections. C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) Insert VOC limit or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore&Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. C. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company(The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase l August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 2. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Atoft� C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and +► directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low SECTION 05521 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 2. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies and Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies"for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 Ibf/ ft. applied vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.ft.. b. Uniform load of 25 Ibf/sq. ft. applied horizontally. C. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 10"W. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood,or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. „ftk 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 1231A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B)and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. low* METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,Oak A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. 2.9 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. 3. Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 2. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 5. Prime interior ladders, where indicated, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 1METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS A. Provide downspout boots made from cast gray iron to 18" above grade with inlets of size and shape to suit downspouts. 1. Outlet: Horizontal, to discharge into pipe. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. 2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AM* L. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. H. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on ,,,,,W exposed surfaces. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials Without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. D. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1 2. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. G. Lag Bolts: ASME 618.2.1. H. Wood Screws: Flat head,ASME 818.6.1. I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME 818.22.1. J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME 818.21.1. K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,,k A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL Awk METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -2 ell. Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 05500- METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Elevator machine beams, hoist beams, and divider beams. 3. Support angles for elevator door sills. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Metal downspout boots. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies"for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts,and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry. 3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 4. Division 5 Section"Pipe and Tube Railings." 5. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for metal framing anchors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A'' C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400- 1 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AM% K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing,web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. 3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers or centers indicated centers indicated. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Anchor Spacing: To match stud spacing. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aftk A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing- General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation,"in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 118 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class 50. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated,self-drilling,self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint:ASTM A 780. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400- 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: As required for performance. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-114 inches. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries. C. SCAFCO Corporation d. The Steel Network, Inc. OOW D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428. 2.5 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, as shown on Contract Drawings. B. Built-up Members: Built-up members of manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel section, with stiffened flanges, nested into a U-shaped steel section joist track, with unstiffened flanges; unpunched; of web depths indicated; as shown or required by Contract Drawings. 2.6 CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, as required by Contract Drawings. 2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M,Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud &Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance Insert grade. 2. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 50, Class 1 or 2. 2. Coating: G90. 2.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: As required for performance. 3. Section Properties: Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches. C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched,with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: As required for performance. 3. Section Properties: Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment. D. Steel Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Top Flange Width: As required for performance. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements,ductility, and metallic-coating thickness. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Header Design." G. Comply with AISI's"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. Allied Studco. 2. AIISteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc. 8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel. 10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 314 inch. B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-General Provisions." 1. Headers: Design according to AISI's"Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Header Design." 2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. 3. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,bridging, ,.. splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products: 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400- 2 001b, Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 05400- COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Roof rafter framing. 5. Ceiling joist framing. B. Related Sections include the following: eol• 1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: See Plans 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 Ibf/sq.ft.. C. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 11720 Insert ratio of the wall height. d. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the horizontally projected span. e. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. . ,, A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot puddle welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches apart. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Butted. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. F. Install piercing hanger tabs at 12 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,,w, PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck,"in SDI Publication No. 30,with the minimum section properties indicated,and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33,G60 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: as indicated. 4. Span Condition: Double span. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel .. screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth. E. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. F. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. Aftk B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. STEEL DECK 05310- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 05310-STEEL DECK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Composite floor deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete fill. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 3. Division 16 Section "Underfloor Raceways" for preset inserts, activation kits, afterset inserts, service fittings, header ducts, and trench header ducts used with cellular floor- deck systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." B. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's"North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a 4""° waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. STEEL DECK 05310 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 05120 l STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. _10k G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Slip critical. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AAW A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1. All moment connections will be tested. Other welds will be tested using the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -mi , 1. SSPC-SP 2,"Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges. D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123. 1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION look STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Slip critical. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Ao%, C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends;ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1,Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. Configuration: Straight or Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead-and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint ASTM A 780. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time equal to"Five Star Grout" by U.S. Grout, Inc. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6J A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. �* 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50. B. Channels,Angles, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: as indicated on drawings. 2. Finish: Black. G. Welding Electrodes: E70xx, comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325,Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959,Type 325 compressible-washer type. a. Finish: Plain. B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490,Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type, plain. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A00%, 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has a minimum of five years experience with AM%, projects of similar size and difficulty. Submit evidence and references for three projects which provide assurance of these qualifications. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's"Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and"Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 4. AISC's"Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120- 2 AOW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to err►, structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"that support design loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction,Allowable Stress Design," Part 4. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Wash adjacent woodwork and other nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths. C. Clean masonry debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts. D. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove masonry debris. Where necessary, pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of scaffolding, as needed,to observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed. B. Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work areas at lift device or scaffold location. END OF SECTION 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 15 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. , a. Cut out mortar by hand with chisel and mallet. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry. Quality-control program shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. b. Cut out center of mortar bed joints using angle grinders with diamond-impregnated metal blades. Remove remaining mortar by hand with chisel and mallet. Strictly adhere to written quality-control program. Quality-control program shall include provisions for demonstrating ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry, supervising performance, and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. E. Point joints as follows: 1. Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If rinse water dries, dampen masonry-joint surfaces before pointing. 2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. 3. After low areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point all joints by placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have wom or , rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. F. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 hours including weekends and holidays. 1. Acceptable curing methods include covering with wet burlap and plastic sheeting, periodic hand misting, and periodic mist spraying using system of pipes, mist heads, and timers. 2. Adjust curing methods to ensure that pointing mortar is damp throughout its depth without eroding surface mortar. G. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.10 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. 1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 14 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal: 1. Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush or low-pressure spray. 3. Scrub masonry with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate fresh cleaner is used and that masonry surface remains wet. 4. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove mold, mildew, and algae remover and soil. 5. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. E. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: 1. Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply cleaner to masonry in two applications by brush or low-pressure spray. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. b. As established by mockup. C. Two to three minutes. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use steam wash. 3.9 REPOINTING MASONRY A. Rake out and repoint mortar joints to the following extent: 1. All joints in areas indicated. 2. Joints where mortar is missing or where they contain holes. 3. Cracked joints where cracks can be penetrated at least 1/4 inch by a knife blade 0.027 inch thick. 4. Cracked joints where cracks are 1/8 inch or more in width and of any depth. 5. Joints where they sound hollow when tapped by metal object. 6. Joints where they are worn back 1/4 inch or more from surface. 7. Joints where they are deteriorated to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand. 8. Joints, other than those indicated as sealant-filled joints, where they have been filled with substances other than mortar. B. Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required. C. Rake out joints as follows: 1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of 2 times joint width, but not less than 112 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. 2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry units as directed by Architect. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 13 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Apply only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting. b. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes. C. Rinse off with water using low-pressure spray. d. Repeat application if needed. F. Water Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches(150 mm) from surface of masonry and apply water in horizontal back and forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. G. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi (345 kPa). Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. H. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed. 1. Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse, if necessary, to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5. I. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 3.7 PAINT REMOVAL A. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: 1. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted masonry with natural-fiber cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush. 2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. Agitate periodically with stiff-fiber brush. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint residue. 3.8 CLEANING BRICKWORK A. Cold-Water Wash: Use cold water applied by low-pressure spray. B. Hot-Water Wash: Use hot water applied by low-pressure spray. C. Detergent Cleaning: 1. Wet masonry with hot water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that masonry surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Mask or remove surrounding mortar joints if patch will extend to edge of brick. 3. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each unit being patched. Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match. 4. Rinse surface to be patched and leave damp, but without standing water. 5. Brush-coat surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Place patching compound in layers as recommended by patching compound manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch or more than 2 inches thick. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer. 7. Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surface plane of surrounding brick. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined by testing,to best match existing brick. 8. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set. 3.6 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. 1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used. Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist chemical cleaner being used. 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. a. Equip units with pressure gages. 3. For chemical cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with cone-shaped spray tip. 4. For water spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. 5. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F (60 and 71 deg C)at flow rates indicated. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. D. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur. E. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar. 1. Carefully remove heavy accumulations of material from surface of masonry with a sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface. 2. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paint remover. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A•aw, C. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose masonry units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. D. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible. 1. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water. 2. Store brick for reuse, as indicated. 3. Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner, unless otherwise directed. E. Clean bricks surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement. F. Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. G. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction)of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min.. Use wetting methods that ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints. 1. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. 2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in .W,, repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and at same time as repointing of surrounding area. 3.4 REANCHORING VENEERS A. Install masonry repair anchors in horizontal mortar joints and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install at not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally, unless otherwise indicated. Install at locations to avoid penetrating flashing. B. Recess anchors at least 5/8 inch from surface of mortar joint and fill recess with pointing mortar. 3.5 MASONRY UNIT PATCHING A. Patch the following masonry units: 1. Units indicated to be patched. 2. Units with holes. 3. Units with chipped edges or corners. 4. Units with small areas of deep deterioration. B. Remove and replace existing patches, unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect. C. Patching Bricks: 1. Remove loose material from brick surface. Remove additional material so patch will not have feathered edges and will be at least 1/4 inch thick, but not less than recommended '"'*, by patching compound manufacturer. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings,and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. 1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners used unless chemical cleaners being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining. 2. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. 3. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 4. Neutralize and collect all wastes for disposal off Owner's property. 5. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. C. Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. 1. Cover sills, ledges, and projections to protect from mortar droppings. 2. Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering. 3. Immediately remove mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. 4. Clean mortar splatters from scaffolding at end of each day. D. Remove gutters and downspouts adjacent to masonry and dispose of properly. 1. Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building. 3.2 UNUSED ANCHOR REMOVAL A. Remove masonry anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in use unless identified as historically significant or indicated to remain. 1. Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking masonry. 2. If item cannot be removed without damaging surrounding masonry, cut off item flush with surface and core drill surrounding masonry and item as close around item as practical. 3. Patch holes where items were removed unless directed to remove and replace units. 3.3 BRICK AND PRECAST CONCRETE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. At locations indicated, remove bricks and precast concrete units that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Carefully demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units. 1. When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward outside edges. B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Alawk B. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval. 1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to- cement ratio of 1:10 by weight. D. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated. E. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1. Pointing Mortar for Brick: Adjust ratios of portland cement, lime, and sand as required to match the structural characteristics of the existing mortar as determined after testing. a. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required. Aftk 2. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Same as pointing mortar. 3. Rebuilding (Setting)Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification,Type N, unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material content limited to portland cement and lime. 2.8 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Brick: Dilute with water to produce hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from masonry restoration work. 1. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of restoration and cleaning work. B. Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and 1iw other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical cleaning CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Masonry Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured for patching masonry, is vapor-and water permeable, exhibits low shrinkage,and develops high bond strength to all types of masonry. 1. Formulate patching compound used for patching brick in colors and textures to match brick being patched. Provide number of colors needed to enable matching each brick. 2. Products: a. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.;Jahn Restoration Mortar. b. Edison Coatings, Inc.; Custom System 45. B. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal,and polished stone surfaces from damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners. 1. Products: a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; LM 130 Acid Shield. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Diedrich Acid Guard. C. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Mask. d. ProSoCo; Sure Klean Strippable Masking. C. Masonry Repair Anchors, Expansion Type: Mechanical fasteners designed for masonry veneer stabilization consisting of 114-inch-diameter, Type 304 stainless-steel rod with brass expanding shells at each end and water-shedding washer in the middle. Expanding shells shall be designed to provide positive mechanical anchorage to veneer on one end and backup masonry on the other. 1. Products: a. Dur-O-WaI, a Dayton Superior Company; Mechanical Repair Anchors. b. Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.;#521 RA Repair/Restoration Anchor. D. Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type: Type 304 stainless-steel spiral rods designed to anchor to backing and veneer. Anchors are flexible in plane of veneer but rigid perpendicular to it. 1. Provide adhesive-installed anchors complete with manufacturer's standard epoxy adhesive and injection tubes, screens, sleeves, or other devices required for installation. 2. Provide driven-in anchors designed to be installed in drilled holes and relying on screw effect rather than adhesive to secure them to backup and veneer. 3. Products: a. Dur-O-WaI, a Dayton Superior Company; Dur-O-Flex. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; #391 Spiro Remedial Tie. C. Helifix Ltd.; Helifix HRT60 or Helifix HRT80. 2.7 MORTAR MIXES A. Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. doftk C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime. D. Factory-Prepared Lime Putty: Screened, fully-slaked lime putty, prepared from pulverized lime complying with ASTM C 5. E. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Color: Provide natural sand of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. 3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands, if necessary, to achieve suitable match. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Water: Potable. 2.4 PAINT REMOVERS A. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, water-rinsable solvent-type gel formulation, containing no methanol or methylene chloride, for removing paint coatings from masonry. 1. Products: a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; 800 No Lye Grip 'N Strip, Super Bio Strip Gel or Super Bio Strip Paste. b. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 6. C. ProSoCo; Enviro Klean NMC or Enviro Strip#3. 2.5 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water for Cleaning: Potable. B. Hot Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. C. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal. of solution required. D. Job-Mixed Mold, Mildew, and Algae Remover: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal. of solution required. E. Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no hydrochloric, hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; or chlorine bleaches. 1. Products: a. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Envirorestore 100. b. Dominion Restoration, Inc.; DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner. C. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Safe n' Easy Heavy Duty Restoration Cleaner. d. ProSoCo; Sure Klean Light-Duty Restoration Cleaner. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. 3. Rake out joints that are to be repointed. 4. Point mortar joints. 5. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 6. Remove paint. 7. Clean masonry surfaces. B. Rake out joints that are to be repointed. 9. Point mortar joints. D. As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in masonry units to comply with Part 3 "Masonry Unit Patching" Article. Patch holes in mortar joints to comply with Part 3"Repointing Masonry" Article. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including specially molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. 1. Provide units with colors, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brickwork and with physical properties not less than those determined from preconstruction testing of selected existing units. a. For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors, provide brick that matches that range rather than brick that matches an individual color within that range. B. Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62,of same vertical dimension as face brick, for masonry work concealed from view. 1. Grade SW where in contact with earth. 2. Grade SW, MW, or NW for concealed backup. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or Type Il. 1. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -Ow*, B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days. E. Store lime putty covered with water in sealed containers. F. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Repoint mortar joints and repair masonry only when air temperature is between and 40 and 90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of work. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing: 1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. 2. When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 7 days after repair and pointing. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and repair materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above. D. Patch masonry only when air and surface temperatures are between and 55 and 100 deg F and are predicted to remain above 55 deg F for at least 7 days after completion of work. On days when air temperature is predicted to go above 90 deg F, schedule patching work to coincide with time that surface being patched will be in shade or during cooler morning hours. E. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order replacement materials at earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work. B. Order sand for repointing mortar immediately after approval of mockups. Take delivery of and store at Project site a sufficient quantity of sand to complete Project. C. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. Remove plant growth. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1. Restoration work must be performed by a single firm specializing in both cleaning work and for repair work. 2. Field Supervision: Restoration specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time supervisors on Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the control of restoration specialist firm. 3. Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced and specialize in restoration work of types they will be performing. When masonry units are being patched, assign at least one worker among those performing patching work who is trained and certified by manufacturer of patching compound to apply its products. B. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and assistance at no additional cost. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for masonry restoration (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to test the following. Provide test specimens and assemblies as indicated. 1. Replacement Brick: For each proposed type of replacement brick, according to sampling and testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water absorption, 5-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of absorption (suction). 2. Existing Brick: For each type of existing brick indicated for replacement, according to testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water absorption, 5-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of absorption (suction). Carefully remove existing bricks from locations designated by Architect. E. Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning as follows to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Prepare mockups on existing walls under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of the Work. 1. Repair an area approximately 36 inches high by 48 inches wide for each type of masonry material indicated to be rebuilt or replaced. 2. Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of clay masonry and surface condition. a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions unless cleaners and methods are known to have deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 3. Rake out joints in two separate areas approximately 36 inches high by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required and repoint one of the two areas. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy- ,, duty cartons. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .40%, A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples for Verification: Before erecting mockup, submit samples of the following: 1. Each type of exposed masonry unit to be used for replacing existing units. a. For each brick type, provide straps or panels containing at least four bricks. b. Wherever possible, remove & salvage bricks from new openings or areas to be concealed from view. Reuse brick in areas of similar brick requiring restoration. 2. Each type of sand used for pointing mortar. a. For blended sands, provide samples of each component and blend. b. Identify sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand. C. Match existing mortar. 3. Each type of pointing mortar in the form of sample mortar strips,6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. a. Include with each sample a list of ingredients with proportions of each. Identify sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand and brand names of cementitious materials and pigments if any. 4. Each type of masonry patching compound in the form of briquettes, at least 3 inches long by 1-1/2 inches wide. Document each sample with manufacturer and stock number or other information necessary to order additional material. C. Restoration Program: For each phase of restoration process, provide detailed description of materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of restoration work including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site. 1. Include methods for keeping pointing mortar damp during curing period. 2. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. D. Cleaning Program: Describe cleaning process in detail, including materials, methods, and equipment to be used and protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. 1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 -2 �Pk Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 04901 -CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes restoration and cleaning of brick as follows: 1. Repairing clay masonry, including replacing damaged units. 2. Reanchoring veneers. 3. Repointing mortar joints. 4. Removing plant growth. 5. Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces. B. Related Sections include the following: , + 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies"for new clay masonry construction. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing installed in or on restored clay masonry. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in restored clay masonry. C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances." 1. Perform clay masonry restoration and cleaning work included in quantity allowances only as authorized. Authorized work includes work required by specifications and Drawings, only. 2. Notify Architect weekly of extent of work performed that is attributable to quantity allowances. 3. Perform work that exceeds quantity allowances only as authorized by Change Orders. D. Unit Prices: Unit prices for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. 2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm. 1.4 SUBMITTALS CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04901 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-23 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,.M,,, 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 16 inches o.c. 4. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2"Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"Article. 3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. , 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 61TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections. 1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -22 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.11 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face. 3. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. Form 1/4-inch hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe. 4. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches;with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches. 5. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end darns. 6. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for application indicated. 7. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for application indicated. 8. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 9. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 10. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-21 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Embed tie sections connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 20 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 8 inches o.c. 2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 112 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing or concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. "k UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 19 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. "k 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile,slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section"Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. 2. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into each wythe. Space headers not over 12 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear vertically. B. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on Drawings. C. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place. D. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L- shaped units as well as masonry bonding. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 18 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external comers, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet,or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. look UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 17 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aa, 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type(fine or coarse)that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3. Provide grout with an F'c value equal to 3,000 psi. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. S. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. H. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 61TMS 602 and with the following: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 16 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar. 2. Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break Mortar Break II. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. C. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. e. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior masonry to portland cementand lime. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. D. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. E. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 15 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1) Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Firestone Building Products; FlashGuard. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60,with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane polysulfide silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC- 65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes. Use only for weeps. 2. Rectangular Plastic WeepNent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar. C. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. d. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch 1 inch Insert thickness thick and installed to full height of cavity with additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 14 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. 7-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Cop-R-Cote. 2) AFCO Products Inc.; Cop-A-Cote. 3) Hohmann&Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Coat Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products;Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Coated Copper Flashing. 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Coated Copper Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Copperseal. 3. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch 0.040 inch. a. Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier-44. 4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace&Co. -Conn.; Perm-A- Barrier Wall Flashing. 5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 6) Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.;Textroflash. 7) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. 8) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing. 9) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40. 4. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy as follows: a. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch thick. b. Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch thick, with a 0.015-inch-thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch thick, with a 0.015-inch-thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive. Where flashing extends to face of masonry, rubberized-asphalt coating is held back approximately 1-112 inches from edge. 1) Color: Gray White Tan/buff Black. d. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. e. Products: 1) Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System. 5. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethyl ene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick. AM a. Products: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 13 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. - A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing,where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from copper, with ribs at 3- inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. a. Products: 1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or Cheney 3-Way Flashing (Sawtooth). 2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterf lashing. 5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 7. Fabricate metal drip edges for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water. 8. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 9. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 10. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel copper to shapes indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. 7-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) AFCO Products Inc.; Copper Fabric. 3) Hohmann&Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper.. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing. AMIA UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall,for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 2. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 2-3/4 inches wide by 3 inches high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical leg of connector section. b. Connector Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal bent plate with down-turned leg designed to fit in anchor section slot and with integral tabs designed to engage continuous wire. Size connector to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 518-inch cover on outside face. C. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. d. Products: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; D/A 213S. 2) Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.; DW-10-X-Seismiclip. elk 3. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon- steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. a. Products: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. 2) ITW Buildex; Scots long life Teks. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A;with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns)for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 14" D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width. 2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 3. Adjustable (two-piece)type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties have two hooks that engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and resist movement perpendicular to wall. Ties extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. E. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.188-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304 316. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304 316. 7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.25-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 3. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.097-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 4. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face. D. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated bent to configuration indicated. Awwk UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. b. Colored Masonry Cement: 1) Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. 2) Essroc, Italcementi Group;Brixment-in-Color. 3) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. 4) Lafarge North America Inc.; Florida Custom Color Masonry or Magnolia Masonry Cement. 5) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement. 6) National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. C. Colored Mortar Cement: 1) Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404 with strength F'c equal to 3,000 psi. J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. C. Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix. K. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet,with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III,and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. b. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment or Velvet. C. Holcim (US) Inc.; Mortamix Masonry Cement. d. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement. e. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement Lehigh White Masonry Cement. f. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: a. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. b. Davis Colors;True Tone Mortar Colors. C. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 4. Products: a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 1) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color. 2) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry- Block. 3) Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel. C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2. Size(Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. Match size of existing brick found on building where new brick is being located. 3. Unit Compressive Strength—F'm of CMU to be greater than or equal to 2,000 psi. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at comers, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 5. Wherever possible, remove and salvage special shapes from areas of facades that will no longer be exposed to view for replacement and repair of areas exposed to view. Repair areas of removed brick as necessary to ensure long-term structural stability. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW MW or SW, Type FBX FBS FBA. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area comprehensive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 4. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. 5. Size (Actual Dimensions): Match actual size of existing brick at areas adjacent to new construction. 6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Provide face brick matching color range,texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork. 8. Products: For new construction: a. Cushwa Brick, Redland Brick, Inc., Williamsport, MD. b. Camden Blend, #170 . C. Size: Modular, or size to match adjacent masonry. " d. Type: Machine. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A.. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 61TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL Aw A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where indicated. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a. Products: 1) Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. . , E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for typical exterior wall typical interior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high. C. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view(omit masonry above half of flashing). d. Include metal studs, sheathing, veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. 3. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 4. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 5. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 6. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. G. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. C. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For surface-coated brick, include material test report for durability of surface appearance after 50-cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors,ties, and metal accessories. H. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. I. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cemertitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner from the Testing and Inspecting Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar Test(Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780. 4. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw, 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." E. Allowances: The following are included under the allowances indicated as specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances": 1. Face brick under the Face Brick Allowances. 2. Preconstruction testing under Testing and Inspecting Allowance. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with AC1315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show * , elevations of reinforced walls. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Exposed concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Special brick shapes. 4. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 5. Weep holes/vents. 6. Accessories embedded in masonry. E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. F. Qualification Data: For testing agency. ,. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units(CMUs). 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 9. Masonry-cell insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Unit Pavers" for exterior unit masonry paving. 2. Division 2 Section Segmental Retaining Walls"for dry-laid, concrete unit retaining walls. 3. Division 4 Section "Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies"for glass block. 4. Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies. 5. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for exposed sheet metal flashing. 6. Division 7 Section"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 7. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads of masonry walls. 8. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 9. Division 9 Section "Brick Flooring"for interior brick flooring. 10. Division 9 Section "Chemical-Resistant Brick Flooring" for chemical-resistant, interior brick flooring. 11. Division 9 Section "Interior Stone Facing for stone window stools. 12. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents"for wall vents (brick vents). C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division 5 Section"Structural Steel." D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a"hollow"sound when tapped. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03542 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting)through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. Insert emission in 24 hours. C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust. 1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 -3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Aftk A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. 1. Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor covering products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. b. Bonsai, W. R. Company; Self-Leveling Underlayment. C. ChemRex; MBT Mastertop 110 Plus Underlayment, Sonneborn Sonocrete Sonoflow or Thoro Underlayment, Self-Leveling. d. Conspec, a Dayton Superior Company; Conflow. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; LeveLayer I. f. Dependable Chemical Co., Inc.; Skimflow ES. g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Levelex. h. MAPEI Corporation; Ultraplan 1. i. Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right. j. US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Self-Leveling Underlayment 2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement,or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi Insert value at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. B. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. C. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION w HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 03542-HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic-cement-based underlayment for use below interior floor coverings. 1. Provide patching & leveling compounds under areas to receive resilient flooring where existing substrate is not flat or even or does not meet flooring manufacturer's recommendations for substrate. Also provide leveling & patching on substrates to receive carpeting that have irregularities that might affect wear or feel of carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certify in writing that products are compatible. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting precast architectural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. B. Install precast architectural concrete. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 2. Remove projecting hoisting devices and use sand-cement grout to fill voids within recessed hoisting devices flush with surface of concrete. C. Anchor precast architectural concrete units in position by grouting or as otherwise indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and grouting are completed. D. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4,with qualified welders. E. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material,tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117,Appendix I. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding precast architectural concrete if permitted by Architect. B. Remove and replace damaged precast architectural concrete units if repairs do not comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Wash and rinse according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes. END OF SECTION 03450 PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. K. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement. L. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement. M. Identify pickup points of precast architectural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast architectural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. N. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. O. Discard precast architectural concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are approved by Architect. 2.7 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate precast architectural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of precast architectural concrete units as follows: 1. PCI and APA's "Architectural Precast Concrete—Color and Texture Selection Guide," smooth, acid etched finish. 2. Smooth-Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs,with uniform color and texture. B. Finish unexposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units by float finish. C. Match existing precast units in color, texture, profile, finish and size at building to receive new precast units. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting concrete has attained minimum design compressive strength. law PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concreting. Coat form liner with form-release agent. B. Maintain molds to provide completed precast architectural concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified. 1. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly eased, as indicated on the Drawings. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. B. Furnish loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast architectural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast architectural concrete units to receive windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, and other similar work as indicated. D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. 2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. 3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum coverage. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces. F. Reinforce precast architectural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. G. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. H. Place face mix to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover. 1. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 1. Place backup concrete to ensure bond with face mix concrete. PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill— Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,w F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. H. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. I. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. J. High-Range,Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type G. K. Plasticizing Admixture: ASTM C 1017. L. Fly Ash Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. M. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. N. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required. 1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to not exceed, in aggregate, 25 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast architectural concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318. D. Normal-Weight Concrete Face and Backup Mixes: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project,to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. E. Water Absorption: 12 to 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117. F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117. G. When included in design mixes, add other admixtures to concrete mixes according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.5 MOLD FABRICATION A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes. PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver precast architectural concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so markings are visible. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MOLD MATERIALS A. Molds: Provide molds and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or another material that is nonreactive with concrete and dimensionally stable to produce continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances and suitable for required finishes B. Form Liners: Units of face design,texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or Type III, white, of same type, brand, and source. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. 1. Face-Mix Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of the same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant. D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other "* required admixtures. PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. m* 1. Concrete materials. 2. Reinforcing materials. 3. Admixtures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed precast architectural concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and is experienced in manufacturing precast architectural concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program and is designated a P0-certified plant for Group A, Category Al--Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units. 2. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. 3. Is registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality- control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with ,w PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of precast concrete units and are based on the specific types of units indicated. Other fabricators' precast concrete units complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." F. Sample Units: Before fabricating precast architectural concrete units, produce samples to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and texture variations. G. Mockups: Before installing precast architectural concrete units, build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting fabrication. 4. In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed face for each finish, color, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to match adjacent undamaged surfaces. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 03450-PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Precast architectural concrete units. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies"for installation of precast units and for full- size brick facing, mortar, and anchorages. 2. Division 7 Section Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing receivers and reglets. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast architectural concrete units. Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, limits of each finish, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. 1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in other construction. D. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: G. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than four compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M; cast and laboratory cure four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. Test field-cured specimen at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. *A+k CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 14 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ,w%k 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed ,low anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 1/8 inch. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber- bristle broom parallel to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. C. Rubbed Finish: All concrete exposed to view is to receive a rubbed finish. Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop-or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement, Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams,walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. K. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete subject to severe or very severe sulfate exposure. L. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch-nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch-nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch-nominal maximum aggregate size. M. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. N. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. O. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1 lb/cu. yd.. P. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide O top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,"Ik% B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of AA* cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica Fume: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water permeability. H. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist. I. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for corrosion protection of steel reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt, saltwater, brackish water, seawater, or spray from these sources. J. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete subject to moderate sulfate exposure. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. C. Forta; Forta Corporation. d. Grace Fibers;W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div. 2. Monofilament Fibers: a. Fibrasol IIP;Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Fiberstrand 100; Euclid Chemical Co. C. Fibermix Stealth; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. d. Forta Mono; Forta Corporation. e. Grace MicroFiber;W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div. f. Hi-Tech PPM Fiber; Hi-Tech Fibers, Div. of Martin Color-Fi, Inc. g. Polystrand 1000; Metalcrete Industries. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick: 1. Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils thick. 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils thick. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. '' B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound, 18 to 22 Percent Solids: a. Klear Kote WB It 20 percent; Burke Chemicals. b. Safe-Cure&Seal 20; ChemMasters. C. Conspec 21; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. e. SureCure Emulsion; Kaufman Products Inc. f. Glazecote Sealer-20; Lambert Corporation. g. Dress&Seal WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. h. Vocomp-20;W. R. Meadows, Inc. i. Metcure 0800; Metalcrete Industries. j. Cure&Seal 200E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation. k. Rich Seal 18 percent E; Richmond Screw Anchor Co. I. Kure-N-Seal W; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. m. Florseal W.B.; Sternson Group. n. Cure&Seal 18 percent E; Symons Corporation. o. Seal Cure WB STD; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals of North America, Inc. p. Hydro Seal 800; Unitex. q. Starseal 0800; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 �s Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. „m,, 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars. D. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 755M. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/il. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded crushed stone or washed gravel. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. Water-reducing agent shall be by same manufacturer as air-entraining agent. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Air-entraining agent: a. "DAREX AEA"-W.R. Grace &Co. b. "PROTEX AEA"-Protex Industries C. "MB-VR"or"MB-AE"-Master Builder's Co. d. "Air-Mix"- Euclid Chemical Co. e. Or approved equal conforming to ASTM C260. 2. Water-reducing agent: a. "WRDA" -W.R. Grace&Co. b. "PDA25" -Protex Industries, Inc. c. "Pozzolith 344H"- Master Builder's Co. d. "Eucon WR-75"-Euclid Chemical Co. e. Or approved equal conforming to ASTM C494 Type A. 2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Fibrillated Fibers: .. a. Fibrasol F; Axim Concrete Technologies. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, and as follows: 1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. D. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain-steel wire. E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. F. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 11. Epoxy joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the latest editions of the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." F. Concrete Testing Agency: Employ a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: Awk a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, installation of anchor bolts, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for fabrication of anchor bolts to be installed as work of this Section. 3. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants"for requirements for joint sealer materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Fiber reinforcement. 5. Admixtures. 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. Coat the area to be patched with a cement wash consisting of neat cement and a solution of one part "Konset", or equal approved by the Landscape Architect, to four parts water; apply patching mortar immediately. C. Patching mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts water to a consistency as dry as is possible within the requirements of handling and placing; thoroughly compact the mortar by ramming it into place. d. Screed off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than surrounding surfaces; leave undisturbed for a period of 1-2 hours to permit initial shrinkage, and then perform final finishing. e. Finish the patch to match adjacent surfaces and keep wet for at least seven days; provide and install all required protective coverings. 2. Maior Defective Areas If the defects are serious or affect the strength of the structure or if patching does not satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface, the Architect may require the concrete to be removed and replaced, completely in accordance with the provisions of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 COMPENSATION Measurement — All work relating to paving and surfacing as described in this Section and on the Contract Drawings shall be measured complete-in-place. In addition to the paving and surfacing items, related work including excavation, grading, gravel base course and compaction shall be paid for in this Section. END OF SECTION SITE CONCRETE 02990 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"k D. All curing methods employed shall be practical for the curing situation involved, and all methods shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. No curing compounds of any kind shall be permitted, unless approved by the Landscape Architect. 3.07 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Placement 1. Do not use concrete with a placing temperature that will cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. 2. Maintain a concrete temperature during placement of less than 90 deg. F. 3. Use all means necessary to avoid drying the concrete prior to finishing operations. B. Protection 1. Provide and use all required raincovers, sunshades, fog sprays, and other devices to protect the concrete. 2. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop, and all available personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering. 3. The Contractor shall have on hand at the paving site sufficient burlap, plastic, or paper to cover at least 6,000 square feet of freshly laid pavement as a protection against Awk sudden thundershowers or heavy downpours of rain. 4. Any part of the pavement damaged by pedestrian traffic or other causes occurring prior to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor, in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall protect the pavement against both public traffic and the traffic caused by his own employees and agents. The pavement shall be so protected until the beam test shows a strength of at least 550 pounds per square inch or a minimum of 7 days. 3.08 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Inspection 1. Immediately after forms have been removed, inspect all concrete surfaces and patch all pour joints, voids, rock pockets, and other imperfections before the concrete is thoroughly dry. 2. Do not patch until concrete has been inspected by the Landscape Architect. B. Patching 1. Minor Defective Areas a. Chip away to a depth of about one inch, leaving edges perpendicular to the surface. Wet the area to be patched and a space of at least 6" wide around it to prevent water being absorbed out of the mortar. SITE CONCRETE 02990- 8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Take care that the wet slab meets the screeds accurately and does not rise above or lower below them. 3. Carefully provide slab depressions as required for the finishes indicated on the Drawings. B. Finishin4 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in appearance,and where no slope is required, level within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'. 2. Score lines shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of scoring shall be 1/4 inch deep. 3. No finishing operation shall be performed while free water is present. Finishing operations shall be delayed until all bled water and water sheen has left the surface and the concrete has started to stiffen. 4. After edging and jointing operations, the surface shall be floated with a wood float. Immediately following floating, the surface shall be steel troweled. C. Exterior Finishes Where"broom finish" is indicated on the Drawings and where no other exterior slab finish is indicated on the Drawings, finish the exposed concrete surface by lightly combing with a medium stiff broom after troweling is complete. 3.06 CURING General A. During the entire period the concrete is being placed, cured and hardened, the Contractor shall provide protection to the concrete from damage by underground water, rain, frost, or sun in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. An approved curing method providing full saturation and protection of the concrete against drying shall be performed for a minimum period of three days. B. In cold weather (below 50 deg. F), concrete placing shall be done only within properly built enclosures capable of retaining heat or without such structures if the temperature is above 50 deg. F. The temperature within these enclosures must reach 65 deg. F before placement of concrete may begin. Only those openings required for the proper placing of concrete will be allowed in the enclosure. After the conclusion of concrete placement, the minimum temperature within the enclosure shall be 50 deg. F for a five day period and 65 deg. F for a three day period. The method of heating shall in no way cause a reduction in the available water content of the concrete. C. In hot and dry weather and as directed, all new concrete shall be kept shaded from the sun, sheilded from the wind, kept wet with water, or protected by other approved methods to retain moisture in the concrete throughout the curing period. Manual wetting down of a particular area shall cause the area to be continually wet and not allow periods of drying to occur. Plastic roll material or impregnated paper may be utilized during the installation of the concrete, and must be thoroughly wetted at least once each day. These materials are to be placed as soon as possible upon the completion of finishing of concrete in such a fashion that the surface will not be damaged or disturbed. SITE CONCRETE 02990 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. laft„ 4. Place concrete as dry as possible consistent with good workmanship, never exceeding the maximum specified slump. B. Rate of Placement 1. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily between bare bars. 2. When placing is started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the panel or section is complete. 3. Do not pour an area at one time that cannot be finished without checking; this is particularly important during hot or dry weather. 4. Do not, in any case, pour a slab greater than 18 feet without construction joints. 5. Exterior pavement slabs shall be placed in alternating sections not exceeding 18 feet in length. C. Compaction 1. Thoroughly consolidate all concrete by suitable means during placement, working it around all embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 2. During placement, thoroughly compact the concrete by hand tamping and by mechanical vibration. D. Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be placed at 24 foot intervals maximum or as shown on plans. E. Isolation Joints Isolation joints shall be placed against buildings, around street light footings, or as directed by the Landscape Architect. They shall be a preformed foam material with joint sealant identical to the approved expansion joints. F. Acceptablity Do not use retempered concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreigh materials. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Location Make and locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength of the structure. B. Approval Obtain the Landscape Architect's approval of location of all control joints and construction joints in the Work prior to the start of concrete placement. 3.05 LEVELING AND FINISHING A. General 1. Tamp slabs with a jitterbug to depress the rock and then pushfloat with a bulfloat as necessary. SITE CONCRETE 02990-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.06 OTHER MATERIALS All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of cast-in-place concrete shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. PART 3.00—EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all items to be embedded in concrete are in place. 3. Thoroughly wet the forms(except in freezing weather)or oil them; remove all standing water. 4. Thoroughly clean all transporting and handling equipment. B. Forms 1. Side forms and transverse forms for sidewalks shall be smooth, free from warp, of sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape, of a depth to conform to the thickness of the proposed walk, and of a type satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. 2. All mortar or dirt shall be completely removed from forms that have been previously used. The forms shall be well staked and thoroughly braced and set to the established lines with their upper edge conforming to the grade of the finished walk which shall have a sufficient pitch to the edge of the walk to provide for surface drainage, as shown on the drawings, 2% cross-slope typical. 3. All forms shall be oiled before placing concrete. C. Notification Notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours before placing the concrete. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Method 1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation and loss of materials. 2. For chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete, use only equipment of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without loss or separation of materials. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling and flowing. SITE CONCRETE 02990 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES Cement concrete shall be composed of specified proportions by weight of cement, aggregates, water and additives to form a homogeneous composition. Cement concrete shall be specified according to the classification defined in the following table. The classes of concrete to be used shall be designated on the plans or in the Specifications for the particular work. CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXES Min. Min. 28 Days Coarse Maximum Class Cement Compressive Aggregate Aggregate %Air Concrete Strength' Designation Size A 560#/CY 3000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 B 500#/CY 2500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 C 440#/CY 2000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 D 620#/CY 3000 psi C-2 3/4" 5.0 DE 680#/CY 3500 psi C-2 3/4" 6.0 E 720#/CY 3000 psi C-3 3/8" 7.0 F 610#/CY 3500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 6.0 As evaluated under ASTM C94-74. All mixes above used for the Work will conform to one or more of the above mixes. Prior to actual mixing, the Contractor shall submit design mixes for each mix to the Landscape Architect for approval, as mentioned on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. 2.03 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS Expansion and isolation joints shall be 3/8" x 4" preformed ethylene vinyl acetate or closed cell polyethylene foam material. Hold joint filler material down a sufficient distance to allow for the installation of retainer and sealant. Refer to details on drawings and the sealant manufacturer's standard instructions. 2.04 JOINT SEALANT At all construction and expansion joints,joint sealant shall be gray in color as: A. 790 Building Sealant" by Dow Corning; B. "Rubber Caulk 230 Sealant" by Products Research Chemical Corp.; C. "Perm a-Joint", two component polyditremzene sealant by Tremco, or approved equal. 2.05 SEALANT RETAINER Sealant retainer shall be closed cell polythelen foam cord by the following manufacturers: A. Progress Unlimited Inc., New York City, NY; B. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI; C. Products Research Corp., Glouster City, NJ, or approved equal. SITE CONCRETE 02990 -4 Village at Hospital Hill–Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type I, and shall be the product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 deg. F.Color shall match existing concrete. D. Aggregates 1. All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33-71, except as modified herein. 2. When used as a fine aggregate for cement concrete, sand shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, durable, and impermeable particles resistant to wear and frost, inert to cement and water, reasonably free from structurally weak grains, organic matter, loam, clay, silt, salts, mica, or other fine materials that my affect bonding of the cement paste. Sand shall be taken from a natural deposit and shall be relatively spherical in shape and shall have gritty surfaces. The sieve analysis of the sand shall show it to be well graded and conforming to the following table. Size of Percent by Weigh Passing Sieve Minimum Maximum 3/8" 100 --- #4 95 100 #16 55 80 #50 10 25 #100 2 8 #200 0 2 3. Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall consist of crushed rock or screened gravel and shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, and impermeable particles, resistant to wear and frost, and free from delterious amounts of organic matter, loam, clay, salts, mica, and soft, thin, elongated, laminated or disintegrated stone, and it shall be inert to water and cement. Where finishing of the concrete is to be done by hammering or any other method that breaks the surface of the concrete, only crushed rock shall be used for coarse aggregate. When tested by U.S. Standard laboratory sieves, coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall be blended from stone sizes to meet the gradation requirements for each designation listed of variation for general application and are minimum and maximum in each case. To insure uniformity of material used on any one job or project, the range of variation may be reduced to 1/2 of the master range upon determination of the character and source of the materials that the Contractor proposes to furnish. Designation No. C-1 No. C-2 No. C-3 Nominal Size 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/8" Sieve Size Min. Max. I Min. Max. I Min. Max. ----------- —-----–-–-------------------–-–-––------ 1 1/2 inch 90 100 1 -- – I – -- 3/4 inch 35 60 90 100 -- -- 1/2 inch -- -- -- – 90 100 318 inch 10 25 20 50 30 70 No. 4 0 5 0 10 0 15 No. 8 -- -- 0 5 0 5 E. Water All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter. SITE CONCRETE 02990- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, together with transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour. 2. Make a record available to the Landscape Architect for his inspection upon request. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips to the Landscape Architect. C. Sample Test Slab A sample test slab of the concrete walks shall be poured to determine color match with existing concrete walks. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect cast-in-place concrete materials before, during and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Contractor to make every effort to conduct concrete pours in early morning hours to allow sufficient time for hardening. Scratches and graffiti will not be approved or accepted. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2.00 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. General All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Landscape Architect, shall be transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete for flatwork shall be Class D. Concrete for wall and footings shall be Class A. Color is subject to approval by the Landscape Architect. B. Quality 1. All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and shall be proportioned within the following limits: EXTERIOR SLABS LOCATION OF CONCRETE &SITE WORK Min. psi @ 28 days 3000 Max. size of aggregate 3/4 inch Min. sacks of cement/CY 5.50 Max. slump in inches 4 2. Concrete that is subject to freezing temperatures while wet shall have a water-cement ratio not exceeding six gallons per sack and shall contain entrained air. C. Cement SITE CONCRETE 02990 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02990-SITE CONCRETE PART 1.00-GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Cast-in-place concrete required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Exterior flatwork; 2. Concrete footings for site furnishings, fences, etc. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Excavating, Filling &Grading ................................................Section 02200 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Workmen 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified, and shall direct all Work under this Section. 2. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen concrete finishers. B. Codes and Standards 1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations of"Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301- 66 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Within 15 days after award of Contract and before any concrete is poured on the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect the name and address of transit-mix concrete supplier. B. Transit-Mix Deliver Slip SITE CONCRETE 02990 - 1 OOW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. All parts necessary for the proper and complete execution of the work, whether the same may have been specifically mentioned or not, or indicated on the drawings, shall be done or furnished in a manner corresponding with the rest of the work as if the same were specifically herein described. B. The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and neat in appearance. All work shall meet the requirements of applicable federal, state and local codes,the National High School Federation,and the U.S.Tennis Court and Track Builders Association and other authorities having jurisdiction over the work. C. All excavation and backfill operations shall conform to the details shown on the drawings and the applicable provisions specified under Excavating, Filling and Grading, Section 02200. D. Special Conditions Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. E. Clean-up-Site shall be left free of all debris and in a clean, orderly manner. END OF SECTION SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02950- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: "a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances,to portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 BIKE RACKS A. Bike rack shall be Model BL 10ON as manufactured by Wabash Valley, PO Box 5, Silverlake, IN 46982, (219)352-2102. Color: black. Quantity: as shown on plans. Spacing and installation: as per manufacturer's instructions. 2.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS A. All traffic control signs shall conform to MHD Standard Specifications. B. Handicap parking signs and pavement markings shall be as per ADA and Mass Barrier Access Board latest codes and standards. 2.03 WOOD DUMPSTER SCREEN A. Wood dumpster screen shall be constructed of first grade cedar as shown on detail. 6"x 6" posts shall be cedar. All hardware to be galvanized with black painted epoxy finish,2 coats minimum. B. Corner posts and gateposts shall be 6"x 6"cedar with cedar cap. C. Shop drawings and hardware shall be submitted to landscape architect for approval. 2.04 PARKING LOT LIGHTS, POLES AND BOLLARD A. Parking lot luminaries, poles and bollard shall be as shown on plans. Parking lot luminaries shall be Holophane Granville Type III distribution catalog#GV100HPOOSB3NX, Holophane Granville Type V distribution catalog #GV100HP00SB5NX. 10' poles shall be Bradford Series poles catalog#BF10F5/20-CA/BK. Bollard shall be Hamilton Series lighted bollard catalog#BOUH46/10/LW-CA-BK/S-50. All luminaries, poles and bollards are available from Holophane Lighting, 20 Francine Road, Framingham, MA 01701. Phone 508-544- 1570. All wiring and electrical installation shall be as shown on electrical plans. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General The work related to each of the site improvement items shall be fabricated, constructed and finished in every respect in a good, workmanlike and substantial manner, to the full SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02950- 2 OOPW Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02950 SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and perform all operations necessary for completion of the work of this section as shown on the Drawings, as herein specified and as evidently required to properly complete the following items: 1. Bike Racks 2. Signage 3. Wood Dumpster Screen 4. Parking Lot Lights, Poles and Bollard 1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-place Concrete........................................................ Section 03300 B. Bituminous Concrete........................................................... Section 02600 C. Metal Fabrication................................................................. Section 05500 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Forty-five days prior to installation and before any site furnishings are delivered to the job site, submit samples, specification cuts or shop and erection drawings for all items in Section 02950 indicating materials size and weight of steel, number, location and type of connection, welding sequence and hardware. B. Product literature/specifications cuts required: 1. All items listed in 1.02 above 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards 1. A307-Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners 2. A424-Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling 3. A500-Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes 4. 8209-Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS A. Architectural Coatings SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02950- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.08 ACCEPTANCE IN PART A. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.09 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for the Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. B. Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final Acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION SEEDING 02850 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. directions with a water ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to insure that no change shall occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another. Hydro-seeding is an acceptable manner of seeding, providing the Contractor certifies in writing that the hydro-seed fertilizer mix is as herein specified and applied at the equivalent rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. C. Seed all conservation areas with specified conservation seed, sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of 2 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Spread seed when soil is moist. The seeded ground shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to insure that no change shall occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another. D. Promptly after seeding, wet the seed bed thoroughly, keeping all areas moist throughout the germination period. E. Mulch shall be placed immediately after seeding. Hay that has been thoroughly fluffed shall be spread evenly and uniformly at the rate of two to three tons per acre. Lumps and thick mulch materials shall be thinned. All mulch anchor stakes, strings and matting shall be removed before final acceptance of lawns. F. Take whatever measures are necessary to protect the seeded area while it is germinating. These measures shall include furnishing warnings signs, barriers, and other needed measures of protection. 3.06 MAINTENANCE low, A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after seeding operations and shall continue until Acceptance or for a minimum of 60 days, whichever is longer. B. Maintenance of seed areas shall consist of watering, weeding, curing, repair of all erosion, and reseeding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. Lawns shall be watered in a satisfactory manner during and immediately after planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance. All areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason shall be reseeded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots, evenly distributed and not exceeding 8"square of any lawn area will be allowed at the discretion of the Landscape Architect. At the time of the first cutting, there shall be a uniform stand between 3 and 3-1/2" high, and mower blades shall be set between 2-1/2" and 3" high. Catch shall be representative of seed specified. C. Owner will supply water. Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment such as hoses and sprinklers and shall be responsible for watering operations. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE A. The Landscape Architect shall inspect all work for Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Landscape Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Acceptance of the work. SEEDING 02850 -6 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION A. Topsoil shall not be worked in a frozen or muddy condition. B. Topsoil shall be spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than 6" in'loam and seed" lawn areas so that after natural settlement and light rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated. If excess topsoil exists,topsoil shall be spread a maximum of 8" deep on lawn areas. D. After topsoil has been spread in approved areas, it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying or harrowing, and stones over one half inch in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil. It shall be free of roots and smaller stones in excessive quantities, as determined by the Landscape Architect. E. The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller which weighs not more than 100 pounds per foot of width. During the rolling, all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional topsoil, and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish to the required grade. 3.04 SEED BED PREPARATION A. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the grades specified, spread limestone at a rate of 100 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply the 18-26-12 fertilizer at a rate of 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet within 10 days prior to seeding. Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3" by discing or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, use hand tools. Adjacent to trees and shrubs, use hand tools to avoid disturbances of the roots. C. The Seeding Contractor shall reconstitute the soil, as may be recommended by a soil testing agency, prior to use as planting soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor,as recommended, at no expense to the Owner. D. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil, the seed bed shall be fine graded to remove all ridges and depressions and the surface cleared of all debris and of all stones one half inch or more in diameter. 3.05 SEEDING A. Immediately before seeding, the ground shall be restored, as necessary, to a loose friable condition by dicing or other approved method to a depth of not less than 2". The surface shall be cleared of all roots,debris and of all stones 1/2" or more in diameter. B. Seed all grass areas with specified grass seed, sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Sow 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet in one direction and 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet at right angles to the first seeding. Spread seed when soil is moist. Cultipacker, or approved similar equipment, 4001* may be used to cover the seed and to firm the seed bed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to cultipacker, the seeded ground shall be lightly raked and rolled in two SEEDING 02850 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. site was a pine forest up until this past year. Provide lime applications as necessary to bring the soil pH to the proper level. More than one application may be required. 2.04 GRASS SEED A. General -All grass seed shall be: 1. Free from noxious weed seeds and recleaned. 2. Grade A recent crop seed. 3. Treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing. 4. Delivered to the site in sealed containers with dealers guaranteed analysis. B. Seed Mix Proportions by Weight % by Weight Seed % Purity % Germination 10% Baron Bluegrass 90% 75% 10% Flyking Bluegrass 85% 75% 40% Illahee Red Fescue* 98% 90% 5% Annual Ryegrass 98% 90% 35% Manhattan II Per Rye* 98% 90% *denotes seed mixture containing active endophytes Weed seed content shall not exceed 0.25%. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected. Aak C. Temporary Erosion Control Percent by Percent of Percent Weight Seed Purity Germination 4% Creeping Red Fescue 98% 90% 3% Perennial Ryegrass 98% 90% 3% Clover, Red 90% Winter Rye PART 3.00- EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that seeding may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. SEEDING 02850-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations. Furnish all topsoil required to complete the work. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. All topsoil, whether obtained from on site or off site shall be screened prior to use by a'/2"or smaller size screen. B. Testing The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Landscape Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. The Contractor is responsible for adding lime and/or peat to the topsoil as recommended by the testing agency. 2.02 FERTILIZER A. General All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced, 10-6-4 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Commercial Fertilizer 1. Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be derived from organic sources; phosphate shall be derived from superphosphate containing 16-20 percent phosphoric acid or bonemeal containing 25-30 percent phosphoric acid and 2-3 percent nitrogen; and potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. It shall contain the following percentages by weight. 20% Nitrogen - 27% Phosphoric Acid - 5% Potash 2. Fertilizer shall be mixed, as specified, and delivered to the site in standard, unopened containers showing weight, guaranteed analysis, and name of manufacturer. C. Special Protection If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. 2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Peat Peat shall be moist, finely shredded, consist of 90 percent organic moss peat, be brown in color, and suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles shall not exceed one half (1/2)inch in diameter. Peat shall be measured in air dry condition, containing not more than 35 percent moisture by weight. Ash content shall not exceed 10 percent. B. Limestone Ground dolomite limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone and shall contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100-mesh sieve, and 90 percent will pass a 20-mesh sieve. This SEEDING 028,70 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. At"k B. Certificates 1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Prior to installation,deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from the site all seeding materials which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect seeding materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 SEEDING SEASON A. Seeding Seeding shall normally be done between August 15th to October 10 and/or April 1st to June 15th. B. Variance If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect stating the special conditions for the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Landscape Architect. Regardless of the time of seeding, the Contractor shall be responsible for a full growth of grass. PART 2.00- PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. General Topsoil, except that existing on the site, will not be made available by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any additional topsoil needed and hauling it to the site. It shall be obtained from naturally well-drained areas. It shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be cleaned and free from clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots, or similar substances three quarter inch, (3/4")or more in SEEDING 02850-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz &Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02850 SEEDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to Division 1, General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Items required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes furnishing and placing topsoil, seeding and soil preparation for seeding throughout the Work. 1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Excavating, Filling, and Grading .......................................... Section 02200 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards 1. All seeding materials shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Within 35 days after award of Contract and before any seeding materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect a complete list of all seeding and other items proposed to be installed. 1. Include complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Landscape Architect. SEEDING 02850 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill —Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aft�' 3.08 CARE OF EXISTING TREES A. Upon completion of the work under this Section, all existing trees shall be pruned and any injuries repaired. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of construction operations. Roots greater than 2" shall be hand-cut to provide clean, concise, cutting and removal. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made at the branch collar, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4"diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed; wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water. 3.09 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. B. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final acceptance of the Project. END OF SECTION PLANTING 02800 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Schedule the final inspection sufficiently in advance and in cooperation with the Architect so that the final inspection may be conducted within 24 hours after completion of planting. D. Final inspection will be at the end of the maintenance period, provided that all previous deficiencies have been corrected. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE A. The Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. 1. Acceptance of plant material by the Architect shall be for general conformance to specified size, character, and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species. 2. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the acceptance of the work. B. Acceptance in Part 1. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.07 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS A. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance. B. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year from the date of Acceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition. C. When work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time. D. The Contractor shall replace,without cost to the Owner and as soon as possible as weather conditions permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous thriving condition, as determined by the Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification. E. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item. F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspection at no extra cost to the Owner during the guarantee period to determine what changes, if any, should be made to the Owner's maintenance program. Submit in writing to the Architect any recommended changes. PLANTING 02800 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aawk 4. Backfill plant pits with prepared planting soil. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 213 full, water thoroughly, eliminating all air pockets. After watering, install planting soil to top of pit and repeat watering. 5. Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Finish grade planting areas to conform to grades on Drawings. 7. Mulch all pits and beds with a 4"layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after planting. 8. Immediately after planting, water all plants thoroughly. C. Pruning 1. Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning to be done under supervision of the Project Architect. Pruning and trimming shall include the following: a) Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Contractor shall not cut main leader of tree. b) Use only clean sharp tools. 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until acceptance of the project by the Owner after final inspection or 60 days,whichever is longer. B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing and applying such sprays or other items as are necessary to keep the planting free of insects and disease and in thriving condition. C. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage of all kinds for the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or injured, they shall be treated or replaced as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not equipped with an irrigation system. 3.05 INSPECTION In addition to normal progress inspection, schedule and conduct the following formal inspections, giving the Architect at least 24 hours prior notice of readiness for inspection: A. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting. B. Inspection of plant locations to verify compliance with the Drawings. PLANTING 02800-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil condition that the Contractor considers detrimental to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Architect for correcting condition. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions that the Contractor considers detrimental growth of plant material. E. Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. F. If rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be considered by the Architect. Where location cannot be changed, as determined by the Architect, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6" below the required pit depth. Proceed with work after approval of the Architect. 3.03 PLANTING OPERATIONS A. Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated 1. Immediately before digging, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks,branches, twigs, and/or foliage. 2. Dig, ball and burlap ("B&B") plants with firm, natural balls of earth with diameter not less than that recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable materials and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. 4. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. B. Planting Trees and Shrubs 1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. 2. Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and roots. 3. Cut and remove ropes, strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been set. Leave balance of wrappings intact around ball. If wrapping is plastic, remove top 2/3. PLANTING 02800 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. -04%� C. Plants identified as"selection specimen"shall be approved and tagged at their place of growth. For distant material, submit photographs for pre-inspection review. 2.11 PLANT LABELS A. Plant labels shall be durable, legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather- resistant ink or embossed process lettering. 2.12 ANTI-DESICCANT A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion, which provides a protective film over plant surfaces, permeable enough to permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions("Wiltpruf'manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products Inc., Stubbings Road, Groton Falls, New York, or approved equal). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection "O 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS A. Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain approval of the Architect before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 percent of total planting must be staked before inspection will be made. B. Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings. C. Separate subgrade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever encountered during planting operations. PLANTING 02800 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6"above natural ground line for trees up to 4" in caliper and 12"above the natural ground line for trees over 4" in caliper. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch tip to tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are minimum size, acceptable after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. F. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be attached securely to all plants, bundles, and containers of plant materials delivered with care that those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth. G. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the Architect. If proof is submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest available size or similar variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price. H. Type of Protection to Roots 1. Balled and Burlapped Plants Plants designated "B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass '* the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during the process of planting, the ball may be secured to a platform. 2. Protection After Delivery The balls of"B&B" plants and container grown plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch, or other protection from drying winds and sun. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted. 2.09 INSPECTIONS A. Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with the Architect prior to acceptance of the material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at the work site. 2.10 SELECTION AND TAGGING A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at their place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work. A Contractor's representative shall be present at all inspections. B. Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to the Architect at least 10 calendar days prior to digging. Written requests shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Architect may refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants are not available for inspection. PLANTING 02800 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AW001 A. Brown; acid reaction about 4 to 5 pH; low in content of wood material and free of mineral matter harmful to plant life;water absorbing capacity, 1100 to 2000 percent; moisture content 30 percent natural, shredded or granulated. 2.05 WATER A. Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified. 2.06 PLANTING SOIL A. All fill material for excavations for plants shall conform to 2.06-Planting Soil. B. The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free from subsoil, stumps, roots, stones over one half inch (1/2)inch diameter and other extraneous materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition. C. Planting soil mix shall be mixed to consist of seven parts loam and one part peat moss by volume. It shall have pH value between pH 5.0 to pH 6.0. Amend with lime as necessary to achieve required pH. D. Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an approved method. Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in otherwise unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the Architect. 2.07 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in accordance with good horticultural practice under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for at least two years. They shall have been root-pruned within the last two years. All plants B+B or container grown. No heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage will be accepted. B. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of specimen quality; exceptionally heavy; and symmetrical, so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form, compactness and symmetry. They shall be sound; healthy; vigorous;well-branched and densely foliated when in leaf;free of disease; insects; eggs or larvae; and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that would prevent thriving growth. C. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders, unless specified,will be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over 3/4" in diameter, not completely calloused, will be rejected. D. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists, except that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. PLANTING 02800-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Immediately remove from the site all plants that are not true to name and all materials that do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Planting Season 1. Planting shall be done within the following dates: Deciduous material: March 1 - May 15 October 25- December 1 Evergreen Material: March 1 -June 1 August 15-October 15 Seeding, Sodding: April 1 -June 1 August 15-September 30 "* 2. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Project Architect stating the special conditions and the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Variances permitted will not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FERTILIZER A. Plant fertilizer packets shall be installed as per the drawings. 2.02 SOIL AMENDMENT A. All soil amendment shall be peat; a domestic product consisting of partially decomposed vegetable matter of natural occurrence. It shall be brown, clean, low in content of mineral and woody material, mildly acid and granulated or shredded, and fortified with organic nitrogen or an equal commercial soil amendment approved in advance by the Architect. 2.03 BARK MULCH A. Shredded cedar bark mulch shall consist of a standard size,free of chunks and pieces of wood thicker than 114" and approved by the Architect. The mulch must be partially decomposed and dark brown in color. 2.04 PEAT MOSS O PLANTING 02800 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low A. Qualifications of Workmen Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods of their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards 1. All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2. Quality and size shall conform with the current edition of "American Standard for Nursery Stock"for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Nursery& Landscape Association. 3. All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the name and size of the plants, in accordance with the latest standards of practice of the American Nursery& Landscape Association. In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names. 4. All Plants to be grown from stock hardy in USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 2 through 5. 1.09 SUBMITTALS AWk A. Materials List Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed: 1. Include a complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Architect. B. Certificates 1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Upon completion of the installation, deliver all certificates to the Architect. C. All submittals shall follow the Provisions of Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. 1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Architect's inspection. PLANTING 02800 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02800 PLANTING Part 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. (See Article 1 of the General and Supplementary General Conditions.) 1.04 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.05 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Planting required for the Work is indicated on the Drawings and,in general, includes planting of trees and/or shrubs and/or groundcovers throughout the Work including furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for root protection, and tree guards where applicable. 1.07 RELATED WORK A. Temporary Seeding ............................................................................Section 02150 B. Excavating, Filling &Grading..............................................................Section 02200 C. Seeding..............................................................................................Section 02850 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANTING 02800 - 1 0"k Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. END OF SECTION BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 -9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Av%' 13. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in. when tested with a 10 ft. straight edge,applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved area. At joints with existing pavement, and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 feet. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed+ 0.05 ft. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this section. 3.06 TRAFFIC STRIPING A. Traffic paint materials, equipment, methods of placement, and precautions to be observed as to weather, condition of surface, etc., shall conform to MDPW Specifications for traffic striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured for a minimum of 14 days. B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings. Transverse striping of handicap pathways shall be on 4 in. x 12 in. stripe to space ratio. C. Strip width shall be the standard 4 inches except wheelchair symbols which shall be as detailed in the 1978 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. The wheelchair symbols shall be painted in spaces shown on the drawings. 3.07 GRANITE CURB AND CONCRETE CURB AQW, A. Granite curb and concrete curb work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 35 degrees F. B. Installation shall be timed to permit placing curb during daylight hours, unless artificial light satisfactory to the Architect is provided. C. The pieces of curb shall be set on wooden blocks and leveled over an adequate length to verify true vertical alignment. The concrete shall then be poured and hand troweled to fill all voids below and in front of the curb as detailed. D. Curb shall be tapered to meet existing grade in areas adjacent to handicapped access ramps. E. Where curbing joins existing or new bituminous curbing,the bituminous curbing shall be replaced for a distance of 2 feet and shall be tapered to conform to the curb end shape. F. Portions of granite that become broken, cracked or chipped shall only be allowed for use if approved by the Architect after a thorough visual inspection. G. Joints between pieces of curbing shall be filled with an approved mortar mix in conformance with M4.02.15. 3.08 REMEDIAL MEASURES Upon direction of the Architect, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 6. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pavement surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 7. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Breakdown rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling shall be completed while the mix temperature exceeds 150 degrees F. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in compatible condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal or mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold. 8. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers shall weight at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively. 9. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Asphaltic material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work. 10. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. Any longitudinal or transverse joint which has cooled below 150 degrees F prior to placement of adjacent mix, shall be treated with a coat of tack coat prior to new mix placement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base, and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic. 11. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement(if greater than or equal seven days since binder placed), parking lot overlay areas, manholes, concrete collars and similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5-7 gal./100 s.y. after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over. 12. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1 ft. of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,.k 2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. 3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted. E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired. F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation. 3.05 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING A. Preparation Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and when the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade. Actual mix delivery temperature shall adhere to Section 460.61. Under no circumstances shall mix temperature exceed 325 degrees F upon arrival at the site. Temperature exceeding 325 degrees F will result in rejection of the entire load. B. Placement Bituminous concrete pavements shall be furnished, handled and laid in accordance with Section 460 and Section 701 of the State Specifications, except as herein modified. 1. Binder and wearing surface courses for sidewalks may each be applied individually, in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as directed by the Architect. 3. Adjacent concrete work, curb, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damage and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition. 4. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications, Section 460, Class I, Bituminous Concrete Pavement,Type-I. 5. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless artificial light, satisfactory to the Architect, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section. C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90%of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge. D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade or subbase, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as directed by the Architect as specified in Section 02200, EARTHWORK. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded. E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement. F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade. G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site. H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Architect. Subgrade shall be approved by the Architect before installation of paving base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. The gravel shall be furnished, hauled, deposited and spread in layers as specified in applicable provisions of Section 40, and 405 of the State Specifications and compacted as specified for the formation of embankments, for sub-base, shoulders etc., and as specified herein. B. The gravel shall be spread in layers from self-spreading vehicles, or with power graders of approved types, or by hand upon the prepared subgrade. Gravel shall be spread in layers no more than six (6")inches thick, compacted measure. Compaction requirements shall be to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2 in. shall be excluded from course. . The method of compaction proposed by the Contractor shall be approved by the Architect and the approved method and procedure, once established and providing the required results, shall be used throughout the entire operation. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. Trucks shall not be used for compaction purposes. C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported. D. Width of Base 1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. New granite curbs, shall conform to the requirements of Type VB granite curb, Section M9 9.04.1 of the MHD Standard Specifications. 2.06 TRAFFIC PAINT Parking space pavement striping and reflective glass beads shall conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MDPW Specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Aft. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Compacting Equipment All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of 10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Architect. B. Paving Equipment All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified, with laser grading sensors for tolerance accuracy. 3.03 GRADING A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation under Section 02200, EARTHWORK, before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section. B. Existing subgrade materials which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 -4 low Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as:"a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GRAVEL BASE COURSE Gravel base and/or sub-base courses for areas beneath new pavement as hereinbefore defined and indicated on the drawings, shall consist of gravel borrow composed of hard durable stone, and coarse sand, free of loam, clay or silt, uniformly graded and containing no stone having any dimension greater than the gradation shown on the plans. When spread and rolled on the prepared surface, it shall form a stable surface. The gradation shall conform to State Specifications, Section M1, sub-section M1.03.0, Type "b", and attention is directed to the selected gravel size limitation. Samples of gravel and results of gradation tests performed by an approved testing laboratory shall be submitted for approval of the Architect. No stone greater than 4" in any dimension. 2.02 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE Dense graded crushed stone material shall consist of crusher-runu coarse aggregates of crushed stone or gravel and fine aggregates of natural sand or stone screenings informly pre-mixed and placed on the gravel base and conforming to Section 402, Subsection M2.01.7, of the State Specification. 2.03 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I,Type 1-1, conforming to the requirements of Section 460, Subsection M3.11.00 of MDPW Specifications. 1. Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve, and bitumen content= 5 1/2% + 1/2% by weight. 2. Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1/2 in. sieve, and bitumen content= 6 1/2% + 1/2% by weight. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin. B. Bituminous tack coat shall be applied as required. Bituminous material for tack coat on the existing surface, where required or specified, shall be emulsified asphalt, grade RS-1 conforming to Subsection M3.03.0 of MDPW Specifications. 2.04 CONCRETE CURB Precast concrete curb shall be as detailed on the drawings, as specified in the Massachusetts Highway Department Specifications Material Specifications M4.02.14, as manufactured by Chase Precast, W. Brookfield, MA, or approved equal. 2.05 GRANITE CURB BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Unless otherwise specified,work and materials for construction of the asphaltic concrete paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following: 1. MDPW specifications Section 460 for pavement and Section 405 for gravel base course and Section 500 for"curb and edging". 2. MDPW specifications Section 860 for fast drying traffic paint. B. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance. All trenches for utility installation shall be completed and backfilled for a period of 30 days prior to paving over these trenches unless approved by the Architect. C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work, except as otherwise noted. D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade. E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices. 1.08 SUBMITTALS Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this Section. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS A. Architectural Coatings Amk BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02600 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous concrete pavement required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Roadway and walkway pavement 2. Bituminous concrete curbing 3. Patching 4. Line painting and striping 5. Concrete curb 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Public Works(MDPW): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges D. Comply with standards specified in accordance with Town of Amherst Department of Public Works. 1.06 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE Excavating, Filling &Grading......................................................................Section 02200 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General All drainage structures to be constructed within this contract shall be as indicated on the drawings and location shall be in strict accordance with the plans. Catch basins shall be plumb and vertical,with each section in true alignment. Materials shall be as listed herein and exceptions shall not be taken without prior approval. 1. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Drain pipe shall extend, around its entire circumference, to inside surface of wall of structure into which it is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using either a flexible manhole sleeve or nonshrink grout. For grouted joints, surface between pipe and wall shall be filled with nonshrink grout. B. Castings Casting frames shall be set on a full bed of mortar, true to grade and concentric with the masonry. All voids beneath the bottom flange shall be completely filled to make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar at least 1 inch thick shall be placed around the outside of the bottom flange extending to the outer edge of the masonry all around the frame. Mortar surface shall be smooth and shall be sloped to shed water away from the frame. 3.07 CERTIFICATES A. Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and installed under this Section, certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these Specifications. END OF SECTION STORM DRAINAGE 02300 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. AWk C. Controls The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batterboards, laser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be 1 in 1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment, and approval shall be obtained from the Architect before backfilling work commences. D. Procedure 1. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is not cracked, permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the Contracting Officer. 2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell. 3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with compacted crushed stone, graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch, to obtain a substantially unyielding bed. AW, 4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the various kinds and types of pipe, the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before laying them. 5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 6. Where a concrete cradle is used, the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so constructed as to provide lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being placed. 7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved. 8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. 3.05 PIPING Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets, Portland cement mortar, nonshrink grout, or asphalt mastic compound. A. Rubber gasketed joint: Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other accessories and methods recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe has been properly drawn up and the joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the pipe immediately before joint is made up. Jointing materials shall be inspected and defects repaired before joint is completed. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASINS STORM DRAINAGE 02300-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. formed into a stable network such that the filaments of yams retain their relative position to each other. The fabric shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications, Section M9.50.0, Table II —Type II Fabric. PART 3.00- EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 1. Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to the requirements for trenching described in Section 02200 of these Specifications. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. General 1. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and state DPW Standards. 2. Pipe installation shall conform to Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual. B. Approvals No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect. Each pipe shall be subject to inspection by the Architect immediately before it is laid, and defective pipe will be rejected. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. STORM DRAINAGE 02300 - 5 wm�iwmw Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Awk 2.03 POLYETHYLENE PIPE (HDPE) Corrugated polyethylene pipe(HDPE)shall be manufactured in accordance with the most recent AASHTO M294 Type S or SP specification.The pipe shall be constructed of high-density polyethylene. The pipe shall be seamless with corrugations on the exterior and shall have a smooth interior waterway. Corrugated plastic pipe shall not be used for flared ends or in other applications where pipe will be exposed to vandalism and ultraviolet radiation. 2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND PERFORATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE A. PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and subdrainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785 Standard Specifications for PVC plastic pipe, Type I Schedule 80. Joints shall be made in acordance with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice for Making Solvent-cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings. 2.05 CATCH BASINS A. Catch basins shall be constructed of the materials, size, form thickness and in the manner shown on the details on plans. B. Precast concrete basins shall consist of pre-cast reinforced riser sections, haunched concentric cone top section, and a base section conforming to the typical catch basin details. Where required by shallow installations or directed by the Engineer, provide a flat slab top constructed to support HS-20 wheel loading. C. Pre-cast catch basins shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Designation C 478. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete for all sections shall be 4,000 psi of a 28 day test. The circumferential steel reinforcement for riser sections and base walls shall be 0.17 square inch per linear foot. Reinforcing in the bottoms of bases shall be of the same design. D. Each section of the pre-cast manhole shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and laying. These holes shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation. E. Type II cement to be used. Sections shall be set so as to be vertical and in true alignment. Joints shall be completely mortared by buttering the groove and immediately prior to setting a section assuring a water tight sump. F. Catch basin connections to the manhole shall enter immediately above the shelf. G. Red Sewer Brick shall be used in the catch basins. Limits of Class B Rock excavation will be six (6) inches below and twelve (12) inches outside the base. H. 3/4"crushed stone foundation six (6) inches in depth is required under the pre-cast base at no additional cost. I. Traps, frames, grate and inlets shall be furnished and installed as specified under their respective items. A minimum of 12 inches red sewer brick shall be used under the frames. The grates shall fit so as to prevent rocking or unnecessary space at the joints. 2.06 DRAINAGE FILTER FABRIC A. Drainage filter fabric shall be a non-woven fabric consisting only of long chain polymeric filaments or yarn such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polymide, or polyvinylidene-chloride STORM DRAINAGE 02300 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation,these marked plans shall be supplied to the Architect, as per the requirements for record drawing submittal in Section 01770. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Delivery and Storage Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers, with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Architect. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS A. Architectuai Coatings All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federaal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: "a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Construct drainage structures in accordance with the Town of Northampton Department of Public Works standards. 2.02 CASTINGS A. Catalog listings on the plans indicated are from the Neenah Foundry Company catalogs. Substitutions may be submitted for the approval of the Project Engineer, provided they are equivalent to those indicated and conform to State Specifications. The catch basin frame and grate shall be Model R-3570 Heavy Duty or approved equal (approximate weight= 300 pounds). B. Traps shall conform to MHD requirements. OOW STORM DRAINAGE 02300 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .wk 2. American Concrete Institute(ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete-318 3. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual 4. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A615 Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C139 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units C140 Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings C425 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C443 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole C478 Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated C700 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers C789 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. 457 mm) Drop D1157 5. Commonwealth of MassachusettsHighway Department (MHD): Standard Specifications for Road, Bridges and Incidental Construction C. Codes The work shall be completed in accordance with standards and approval of the Town of Northampton and the Massachusetts Department of Public Works. D. Permits The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required. E. Inspection All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local municipality and paying all fees associated with the drainage system installation. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted. 1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Do not permit any storm drainage or sewerage component to be brought onto the job until it has been approved by the Architect. B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation. AMk. STORM DRAINAGE 02300-2 loo'' Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02300 STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Storm drainage pipe and field subdrains 2. Catch basins, storm drains and interconnecting lateral lines 3. Required fittings and bends 4. Testing B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing............................... Section 02100 Excavating, Filling &Grading............................................... Section 02200 Bituminous Concrete Pavement........................................... Section 02600 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Standards 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges STORM DRAINAGE 02300 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content,or below, to secure stability. E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which, in the opinion of the Architect become inundated or excessively moistened, shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. F. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions. 3.11 CLEANING UP Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all debris and excess earth materials from the site. END OF SECTION EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 13 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,.K I. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe, and similar item, and in other areas where wheeled equipment cannot safely be employed, shall be placed in 4-inch thick layers, to the specified compaction, using mechanical tampers. 3.09 COMPACTION METHODS The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary. Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum #passes Below Below Less Maximum Structures Less Critical Structures Critical Stone Size' and Pavement Areas & Pavement Areas GRANULAR FILL:SAND-GRAVEL FILL Hand-operated vibratory plate or light roller in confined areas 4" 6" 8" 4 4 Hand-operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000# in confined areas 6" 10" 12" 4 4 Light vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 12" 18" 4 4 weight dynamic at drum force 5000# 10,000# Medium vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 18" 24" 6 6 weight dynamic at drum force 10,000# 20,000# 'And no more than two-thirds(2/3) loose lift thickness. 3.10 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture (-1% to+3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking,windrowing, or other method approved by the Architect. 1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 12 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. bottom of footing shall be filled with compacted gravel bedding as defined in paragraph 2.028 of this section. F. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels(over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels at no additional cost to the Owner. Over-excavation in rock shall be filled with either gravel bedding as defined in paragraph 2.028 of this section or concrete having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi with compacted granular fill, if in earth. 3.08 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C. B. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following table: Fill Area %of Maximum Dry Density Pavement base course 95 Beneath pavement base course 92 Backfill for athletic field embankments 92 Beneath landscape areas 90 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item (base course,footing, or structure), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes: 1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item(base course, footing, or structure),within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply. E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill. F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. H. Grading tolerance Rough Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. Finish Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.005 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 11 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be+ 2 inches from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 8"lift maximum. 3.06 BEDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, Sand-Gravel shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding material. 1. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section. Bedding material to be Crushed Stone. 3.07 BACKFILL A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Architect or Geotechnical Consultant have inspected and approved subgrade,foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to utility lines,foundation walls and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling, the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches. 1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. 2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project; they have not been designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be+ 2 inches from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 2 inches. 2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 1 inch. E. Where rock is removed below foundations in accordance with Section 02220"Controlled ,NWA Blasting and Rock Excavation", the area above the remaining rock subgrade and the EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 10 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. L. Rock excavation is not expected on this project. If rock is encountered, rock cuts shall be excavated in accordance with MDPW Specifications Section 120.63, Presplitting Rock. Use of explosives shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section 7.12 and as specified herein,and shall be in strict accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and Sections 02221. Explosives shall be stored on-site only when blasting is in progress. When the need for explosives has passed,they shall be removed from the site. 1. Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the masonry and embankments to be built and, if required, shall be cut to rough benches or steps. 2. Before masonry is built upon rock,the rock shall be freed from all vegetation, dirt, clay, shale,excessively cracked rock, water, ice, snow and other objectionable substances. Picking, wedging, streams of water under high pressure, stream jets, ad other effective means shall be used to clean exposed rock. 3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock shall be excavated to a depth 6 inches or more below bottom of structures. M. Below-ground Demolition 1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Architect. 2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at '00W end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter,for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged. Abandoned pipes within proposed building (if exist) shall be removed or if left in place, they shall be properly grouted. 3.04 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade preparation for spread and continuous wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to minimize disturbance of the silty/clayey subgrade. Dewater as necessary to provide stable subgrade. B. Prior to any fill placement, proof roll/compact the exposed subgrade with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds(static weight). If soft and unstable material is observed, it should be over-excavated and replaced with Granular Fill, compacted as specified herein at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level,they should be re-excavated and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel Fill prior to foundation construction or fill placement. 3.05 PLACING EMBANKMENTS A. Filling shall be done any area only after the Architect or Geotechnical Consultant has reviewed subgrade. B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 feet to prevent the �Mk formation of slippage planes. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200-9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. look 3.03 EXCAVATING A. Excavate site as shown on the drawings. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of off the site. B. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions Where depressions result from, or have resulted from,the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft material as directed by the Architect. C. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete, utility lines, and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. D. Sheeting shall be installed, where required,to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging the trees. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards. E. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. „w F. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. G. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material. H. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. I. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels(over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels with compacted Granular Fill. J. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed. K. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, place, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA standards. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur, trench walls shall be supported by sheeting or trench box. 1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below normal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may direct. AOW* EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 -8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Common fill shall be bankrun sand, gravel, or mixture thereof, graded within the following limits: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 6 inches 100 No. 4 30-95 No. 200 0- 15 C. Crushed stone shall satisfy the following limits: Sieve Size % Passinq by Weight 1 3/4 inch 100 1 1/2 inch 90- 100 1 inch 20-55 3/4 inch 0- 15 3/8 inch 0-5 PART 3.00-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior Familiarization Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site conditions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section. B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Elevations shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans. C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals 1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections,tests and approvals. 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested, inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Stripping of Topsoil Any topsoil within "Limits of Work"and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading. 3.02 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, to the required tolerances. Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. , B. All excavated or filled areas that are disturbed during construction, including all loose or saturated soils,fill that cannot be compacted within 48 hours due to saturation and other areas that will not meet compaction requirements as specified herein shall be removed and replaced with compacted Granular Fill Sand-Gravel, or Crushed Stone at the Contractor's expense. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Approval Required All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. B. Notification For approval of imported fill material, notify the Architect at least four working days in advance of intention to import material; designate the proposed borrow area, and permit the Architect to sample, as necessary, from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. C. Fill material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, approved by the Architect and meeting the following requirements: 1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions. 2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities in a reasonable length of time. 3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays,from all materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal. 4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot. 2.02 FILL MATERIAL Backfill material shall be well-graded within the specified limits. Gradation of materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 136. A. Trench and structural fill shall be a gravelly sand or sand gravel graded with the following limits Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 6 inches 100 No. 4 30- 80 No. 40 5 -30 No. 200 0 -8 EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, construction debris, roots and stumps. 3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 50. 4. Material designated in the field by the Geotechnical Consultant. E. Topsoil -The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter. F. Subsoil -loose silt and fine dand layer located directly below the topsoil. G. Rock and Boulder Excavation—shall be defined as removal of sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge, or ledge of mineral matter as follows. 1. Rock excavation shall mean the removal of bedrock(ledge)which, in the opinion of the Architect, requires for its removal, drilling and blasting, wedging, sledging or barring and boulders which, in the opinion of the Architect, require blasting for removal. Rock excavation shall be made to the widths and depths directed by the Architect in the field. 2. Boulder excavation shall mean the removal of rock fragments exceeding 3 cubic yards in volume which can be removed without resorting to blasting. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Prior to start of earthwork, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Architect for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements. B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk. 1,16 ROCK AND BOULDER EXCAVATION A. Rock and /or boulder excavation is not anticipated as a part of this contract. If it is encountered,the definitions in this section shall govern, and the contractor shall perform pre and post blast surveys, and rock shall be quantified and paid for at the rate of$35 per cubic yard. Rock excavation if encountered shall conform to the MDPW Standard Specifications. 1.17 DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED OR FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade, underlying natural soils and compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods of construction shall be revised as necessary to avoid disturbance described above, including restricting construction access and types of vehicles or equipment, dewatering, or other acceptable control measures. Disturbance shall be construed to include detereoration of soils due to the contractor's operations, such as moving equipment, hauling, etc. The contractor shall cooperate with the engineer to modify operations as necessary to minimize disturbance and protect bearing soils. Aopk EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 -5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency, nor any observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. C. Compaction Control Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified,it shall be the in- place dry density divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100. D. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop, Designation D1557-78. Where all of the material passes a No. 4 sieve, Method A shall be used, and where material is retained on the No. 4 sieve, Method D shall be used. E. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D1556-82 or ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods, Designation D2922-81. 1.12 FROST PROTECTION Frozen, excessively moist or material containing snow shall not be placed as fill or backfill. Special care should be taken when placing fill material when the temperature is below 32oF. 1.13 SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required,to prevent collapse of earth at site of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety and Heath Act (OSHA). C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade-shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil, excavation, and prior to filling, or placement of roadway subbase. In proposed building area, subgrade shall be soil or rock which remains after stripping of top soil and subsoil. B. Embankment-shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and cross-section. C. Utility Trench Backfill -is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with applicable requirements for embankment,structural backfill or utility company requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed. D. Unsuitable Material-material which is classified as "unsuitable" shall be material having at least one of the following properties: 1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb. as determined by ASTM D 1557. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his cost, existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed. 3. Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 inches above grade,which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project. 1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades. B. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage(minimum 1.0% slope) shall be maintained at all times. C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through the temporary sediment basins in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, not to the surface of roads,walks, and streets, not cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation and shall conform to the requirements of Section 02150, EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL. D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills, pour concrete,or install piping and appurtenances in excavations containing free water. E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove water. F. Where, in the opinion of the Architect, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry, firm subgrade, other acceptable dewatering methods shall be employed. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on-site observation and testing during the following phases of the construction operations. The services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab areas. 2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades. 3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills. 4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required. 5. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas. 6. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated deficiencies. 7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. -Wok 1. Clearing and preparation of site. 2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 3. Protection of embankments, environmental controls. 4. Excavation: a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated. b. Excavation and backfill of utilities. C. Excavation and backfill of rock and boulders in areas of construction. 5. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required. 6. Filling and backfilling as required for walls, pile caps, and columns including furnish- ing of any extra material required. 7. Base and subbase course materials under structures, pavements, slabs and footings, including compaction. 8. Structural backfill at over-excavated areas. 9. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material. Excavation shall include removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughoutthe site. 10. Removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subsequent use in the work. 11. All rehandling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling,filling, backfilling, grading and other such operations. 12. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required. 1.07 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing............................................Section 02100 B. Bituminous Concrete Pavement........................................................Section 02600 C. Topsoil for Seeding..........................................................................Section 02850 1.08 SUBMITTALS Submit a 50 lb. sample of each type of fill (off-site and on-site)to testing laboratory in an air tight container at least seven(7)days prior to use. Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source throughout the project requires written approval by the architect or engineer. 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor leaves the site. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance or other work on the site. B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities 1. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to: streets, curbs, paving, trees, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private property, and to protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral earth movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -Gereral Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation(See Article 1 of the General and Supplementary Conditions). 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own information. 1.05 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed. B. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies may be found therein. 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating, filling and grading required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited OOW to the following: EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 02200 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstructions during construction period. 1. Cleaning: Sediment build-up at silt fencing and hay bale structures shall be removed when the sediment accumulation is 1/2 the design height. Sediment basin shall be cleaned when the sediment accumulates to one foot of depth. 2. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged erosion control devices immediately, and, in no case, more than four hours after observing such deficiencies, and as directed by the Architect. 3. The Contractor shall be prepared to implement interim drainage controls and erosion control measures as may be necessary during the course of construction, and as directed by the Architect. 4. The Contractor shall make available on-site, equipment, materials and labor necessary to effect emergency erosion control and drainage improvements within four hours of any impending emergency situation. 5. The Contractor shall comply with recommendations of the Architect to make repairs or supplement erosion control procedures during the course of construction. 6. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the sequencing of operations, condition of erosion control devices, and turbidity level of runoff are unsatisfactory,the Architect will direct the Owner to order the Contractor to cease work and order the Contractor to make corrections within 24 hours, at no expense to the Owner. 7. The Contractor shall make a final inspection, clean all cross culverts and sweep off roadways as approved by the Architect before Contract closeout. 8. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked twice each month or more frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced. Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effective condition. 9. Hay bales shall be inspected frequently and maintained or replaced as required to maintain both their effectiveness and essentially their original condition. Underside of bales shall be in close contact with the earth below at all times, as required to prevent water from washing beneath bales. 10. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner which will not cause sediment nuisance elsewhere. E. Removal of Erosion Control Devices 1. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved or vegetated, at which time they shall be removed. After removal, areas disturbed by these devices shall be regraded and seeded. 2. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored until acceptance of completed slope or entire Project, whichever is later. END OF SECTION EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Awk PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Grass seed shall be spread by mechanical spreader at a rate of 4.0 lb./1000 sq. ft. B. Following seeding, area shall be tightly raked to mingle seed with the top 1/8 to 1/4 inch of soil. Areas shall then be smoothed and rolled. C. Following rolling, entire shall be watered until equivalent of a 2-inch depth of water shall have been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate which will not dislodge seed. Water shall be repeated thereafter as frequently as required to prevent drying of surface, until grass attains an average height of 1 1/2 inches. D. At the Contractor's option, seed may be spread by the hydroseeding methods, utilizing power equipment commonly used for that purpose. Seed and mulch shall be mixed and applied to achieve application quantities specified herein for the conventional seeding method, with mulch applied at the rate of 2700 lb. dry weight of mulch per acre. A mulching machine, acceptable to the Architect, shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. Other provisions specified above for conventional seeding shall apply to hydro seeding. 1. If the results of hydroseeding application are unsatisfactory, the mixture and/or application rate and methods shall be modified to achieve the required results. 2. After the grass has appeared, all areas and parts of areas which fail to show a - uniform stand of grass, for any reason whatsoever, shall be reseeded and such areas and parts of areas seeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass. 3.02 SILT FENCE A. Silt fencing shall be placed around existing drainage channels and at the no-cut and no fill lines before commencement of any earthwork. Silt fencing shall be installed prior to all upgradient earthwork. B. Silt fence shall be installed around the stockpiled topsoil and other aggregate material. 3.03 HAY BALE DAM Bales shall be placed in a row with ends tightly abutting the adjacent bales. Each bale shall be embedded in the soil a minimum of 4 inches. Bales shall be securely anchored in place by stakes or re-bars driven through the bales. The first stake in each bale shall be angled toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES A. The Contractor shall inspect the effectiveness and condition of the erosion control devices during storm events, after each rainfall of one-inch magnitude or greater, prior to weekends, and prior to any forecasted storm events. B. Wetland areas, water courses, and drainage swales adjacent to construction activities shall be monitored twice each month for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse '"ok environmental impacts, which shall be corrected immediately upon discovery. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings, fill slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1 (horizontal: vertical), cut slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1. 1.08 EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall have on-call at all times capable, responsible representatives who, when authorized,will mobilize the necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, and otherwise provide the required action when notified of any impending emergency situation. B. The Contractor shall supply a telephone number to the Owner with which the Contractor may be contacted in the evenings and on weekends. The Contractor shall prepare a 24- hour"duty roster"for this purpose and submit it in writing to the Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt fence shall be preassembled silt fence structure to be Mirafi Envirofence, American Engineering Fabrics, Inc. Pre-assembled silt fence, or Everett J. Prescott 800-EJP-24 HR pre-assembled sit fence. 1. Overall length of each fence section shall be minimum 100 ft.;fabric width minimum ems'' of 3 ft., post length minimum of 4 ft.; and post spacing maximum of 8.3 ft. 2. Posts shall be tapered for ease of installation, and beveled at top to resist splitting. 2.02 HAY BALES Hay bales for construction of hay bale check dam and catch basin filter dam shall be new, firm wire or nylon-bound livestock feed-grade. 2.03 CRUSHED STONE Crushed stone for hay bale check dam, catch basin filter dam and sediment pond riser pipe filters shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M2.01.3 2.04 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Seed mixture for temporary cover by hydroseeding application shall conform to the following: Quantity per 1000 sg. ft coverage Material 27-1/2 lb. Wood fiber mulch 4 lb. Seed 1/2 lb. Annual Ryegrass 221b. 10-6-4 Fertilizer 69 gal. Water 1. Wood fiber mulch shall conform to MHD Specifications. 2. Seed shall conform to MHD Specifications. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,,w%' 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed methods, materials to be employed, and schedule for effecting erosion and siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall include: 1. List of proposed material including manufacturer's product data. 2. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implementing programs in each major area of work. B. The following samples shall be submitted: Sample Size Silt fence fabric 12 x 12 in. C. Seed mixture for temporary seed cover shall be submitted for approval of the Architect. 1.07 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES A. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction phases: 1. Stripping of vegetation, grading, or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner which will minimize soil erosion. 2. Whenever feasible, natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. 3. Extent of area which is exposed and free of vegetation and duration of its exposure shall be kept within practical limits. 4. Temporary seeding, mulching, or other suitable stabilization measures shall be used to protect exposed critical areas during prolonged construction or other land disturbances. 5. Drainage provisions shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements. 6. Sediment shall be retained on-site. 7. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the construction sequence prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work. B. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be greater than or equal to six months, and temporary erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months. 1. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02150 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct a complete erosion and sediment control program for minimizing erosion and sediment control provisions detailed on the Drawings and specified herein are the minimum requirements for an erosion control program. The Contractor shall provide additional erosion sediment control materials and methods as required to effect the erosion and siltation control principles specified herein. B. Erosion control and maintenance program, shall include, but not be limited to, installation and maintenance of silt fences, hay bale check dams, and installation schedules of erosion control structures. C. Related work specified elsewhere Clearing and Grubbing .....................................................................Section 02100 Excavation and Backfill.....................................................................Section 02200 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges B. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Public Works (MDPW or MHD) Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges C. Massachusetts General Laws, Wetlands Protection Act EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02150 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.05 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re-use shall be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise marr the object in any way, and then shall then be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contractor is ready for installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any other necessary installation procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed. END OF SECTION DEMOLITION, CLEARING AND GRUBBING 02100 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Disconnection of Utilities Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of tho work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved. F. Protection of Utilities Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to be disconnected. G. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the demolition work. H. Protection of Existing Trees 1. All specimen trees identified in the Tree Inventory For Hospital Hill prepared by David Hawkins, April 21, 2003 and, according to construction documents as to be preserved,shall be protected to the fullest extent possible during construction. 2. All other trees not specifically identified in the above report but as noted on construction documents as to be preserved, shall also be protected during construction. 3. Tree protection shall consist of enclosing the tree with temporary snow fencing. The diameter of the fencing shall have a minimum diameter of 5' beyond the tree's dripline. 4. All equipment and stockpiles shall be kept off of the enclosed area. 5. If any construction is required through the area of protection, all efforts shall be made to minimize disturbance to the tree trunk, branches and root system. Any roots encountered during construction shall be either trenched around or avoided if possible and/or hand pruned. 7. Trees should receive a root fertilization treatment. f. Topsoil Testing Contractor shall be responsible for testing of existing topsoil by approved testing agency. 3.03 DEMOLITION All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner. The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. 3.04 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval APW of the Landscape Architect. DEMOLITION, CLEARING AND GRUBBING 02100- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust and Mud Control Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of the work of the Section;thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent mud and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents and the neighbors. PART 2.00-PRODUCTS 2.01 OTHER MATERIALS All materials, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Landscape Architect. PART 3.00- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notification Notify the Landscape Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section. B. Site Inspection Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. C. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing the work of this Section, verify with the Landscape Architect all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Owner. Before commencing any work, submit a schedule for review to the Landscape Architect showing the commencement, the order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. 3. Prior to any work performed on the site, the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the following number, 1-800-322-4844. Notification of Dig Safe is a requirement prior to construction. DEMOLITION, CLEARING AND GRUBBING 02100 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, h.c. SECTION 02100 DEMOLITION, CLEARING & GRUBBING Part 1.00-GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to General Requirements of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work by General Contractor Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to removal and disposal, removal and delivery to the Owner, or removal and reuse of the following: 1. Bituminous pavement, curbing 2. Utilities 3. Trees, shrubs, vegetation 4. Debris and rubble within project 5. Protection of trees and items to remain 6. Concrete slabs, footings, foundations 7. Other items as noted on the drawings B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Excavating, Filling and Grading........................................................Section 02200 C. Definitions The term "demolition, clearing and grubbing," as used herein, includes the removal of all existing objects(except for those objects designated to remain)down to the existing ground level, including their underground root systems, plus such other work as is described in this Section of these Specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition operations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the applicable utility agencies. B. Codes and Standards In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations, comply with the requirements of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. DEMOLITION, CLEARING AND GRUBBING 02100- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 100% B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates,times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm fire pumps and fire-extinguishing systems. 2. Conveying systems, including elevators. 3. Heat generation, including boilers feedwater equipment pumps and water distribution piping. 4. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment and terminal equipment and devices. 5. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 6. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers switchboards panelboards uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. 7. Lighting equipment and controls. 8. Communication systems, including intercommunication voice and data and television equipment. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training manual. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. 1. Schedule training with Owner, with notice to Architect of dates and times, with at least seven days' advance notice. B. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01820-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit two complete training manual(s)for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: For instructor and photographer. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures"for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782- 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Awk A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aw B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A"*, A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. B. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: ,00k OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper;with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. low 3. Emergency procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 40k 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit two Insert number copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents, 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. + , 3. Name and address of Owner. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01782-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy Insert number copies of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AM* 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Awk Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information, at a cost of $250 per drawing, subject to the conditions described elsewhere in this Project Manual. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING"in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. low 2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A"k 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue-or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. M. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. low SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit two Insert number set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one Insert number set(s) of plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and one Insert number set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit one Insert number set(s)of marked-up Record Prints, two Insert number set(s)of Record CAD Drawing files, and one Insert number set(s) of Record CAD Drawing plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. 1) Electronic Media: CD-R. B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies Insert number copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit two copies Insert number copies of each Product Data submittal. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed „,Rk surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Preparation: Submit three Insert number copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element,including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. All other work shall commence warranty period on the date of Substantial Completion. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 Insert number days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds into two heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. Ao*. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aak 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion, including punch list described above. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 3. Reinspections beyond initial reinspection will be performed at Contractor's expense at Architect's current hourly rates. These expenses will be deducted from the Application for Payment. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. PO'" 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. „W*4 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -6 Village at Hospital Hill-Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items(If any): 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 7 Section "Asphalt Shingles"for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. A0*1 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute,hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Ask A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture,furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. As required by the Northampton Fire Department, maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during and after flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. "" SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAUELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain, if any, and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 3.3 PREPARATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Alwk B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of premises, and phasing, and Owner-occupancy requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below- grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, Insert description of other items, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. #W" SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aft., 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 5. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. *. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity,that results in reducing their capacity CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 Larger buildings and structures will be demolished incrementally on a section by section/wall by wall basis. Standing walls will act as barriers which will control air currents and blowing materials. Water sprays will be required to control dust migration during active building demolition,crushing and truck loading. • Where necessary, the site will be sprinkled with water until the surface is wet. Part icular attention will be paid to haul roads and other traffic routes as well as the interior of the buildings. Contract specifications require the periodic sweeping of off-site adjacent streets (weekly minimum)to prevent tracked dirt from accumulating. With implementation of the above mitigation, MassDevelopment finds that all feasible means and measures will be taken to avoid or minimize potential construction impacts of the project. 3.4 Section 61 Conclusion Therefore, pursuant to M.G.L. c.. 30, Section 61, MassDevelopment finds that all feasible means and measures are being utilized to avoid or minimize potential environmental impacts of the project. By: Date: IOm _ 766011FEIR13-Section61.doc 3-25 Proposed Section 61 Findings Epsilon Associates, Inc. Existing on-site stormwater inlets will be temporarily protected during construction activities in order to prevent sediment or demolition debris from entering the drainage system. Filter fabric will be inserted into the catch basins just below the grating. All trapping structures will be inspected after every rainstorm and repairs made as necessary. Demolition and Recycling Demolition procedures will be carefully planned through development of bid specifications, selection of contractor, compliance with all DEP requirements, and following a careful sequence to minimize any impacts. Environmental mitigation measures will be stringently enforced by the HHD Clerk of the Works and the engineering firm providing demolition oversight. Prior to notice to proceed to the demolition contractor, HHD will conduct a detailed investigation of asbestos and lead in the structure, and will complete the abatement of asbestos. Immobile equipment, such as the crane, will be re-fueled in place by a small fuel truck. Smaller, mobile equipment such as dump trucks will fuel at a designated location on-site. Fuel will not be stored within 100 feet of any wetland resource area. All mobile equipment (excluding the immobile crane) will be parked in a secure location during the overnight hours. As salvageable materials are removed, they will be stockpiled on-site near or within the existing building footprint, and loaded for sale and shipment offsite. The remaining demolition materials and construction debris will be contained on-site within the existing footprint of the building. Prior to their reuse on-site or removal to a suitable off-site disposal location, the rubble will be crushed and temporarily stockpiled in a designated location or Igcations proximate to the worksite. Soil disturbance on the project will be limited to excavations to cap utilities, remove steam tunnels and remove foundation walls. Where those excavation activities have the potential tq impact storm drain systems or Buffer Zones, the demolition specifications will require siltation control. Street sweeping and off-site debris removal of all materials that are not suitable for use as structural backfill will also be required. Existing on-site stormwater inlets will be temporarily protected during demolition activities in order to prevent sediment or demolition debris from entering the drainage system. Filter fabric will be inserted into the catch basins just below the grating. All trapping structures will be inspected after every rainstorm and repairs made as necessary. Best Management Practices will be implemented for dust control, to reduce surface and air movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and demolition activities: Amok 766011FEW3-5ection61-doc 3-24 Proposed Section 6T Findings Epsilon Associates, Inc. Noise and Operating_Hours Every reasonable effort will be made to minimize the noise generated by construction activities. Mitigation measures will include: • A proactive program to ensure compliance with the City of Northampton noise ordinance. Using mufflers an all construction equipment including ongoing maintenance of intake and exhaust systems. • Muffling enclosures on continuously running equipment, such as air compressors and welding generators. • ,Replacing specific construction operations and techniques t)y less noisy ones where feasible (e.g., mixing concrete (?ff-sit? Insteitd of on site). • Scheduling equipment operations to keep average levels low, to synchronize noisiest operations with Omes of highest arnhic-nt noise levels, and to maintain relatively uniform noise levpts. • Turning off idling equipment. • Locating noisy equipment as far as possible from sensitive areas. The hours of operation for demolition and construction activities are typically limited to 7:00 a.m_ to 5:00 p.m., with occasional exemptions approved on a case-by-case basis for special conditions. For example, if street closure were required for a particular activity, evening work may be required to minimize traffic impacts. This will be coordinated with the City and project site abutters in order to minimize impact on vehicular and pedestrian traffic and abutter operations. Where specific conditions warrant it, extended or truncated working hours may be utilized, recognizing that in some circumstances, neighborhood impacts may be lessened by an early start or early cessation of construction, and also that the duration of construction impacts may generally be lessened by longer working hours. ` Erosion and Sedimentation Currently, the working area is gently sloping, and comprised of many impervious surfaces, buildings and other structures. In areas where the contractor is required to work where there is the potential for sedimentation to flow over pervious areas to sensitive areas, the contractor will be required to install typical sedimentation/erosion control "Best Management Practices" (BMPs) such as trenched siltation fence and staked hay bale barriers. 76601VVR13-Section6I.doc 3-23 Proposed Section 61 Findings Epsilon Associates, Inc_ • The project proponent and/or the contractor will coordinate all construction activities to be performed within the public right-of-way with the City of Northampton Police Department and the Department of Public Works. • Secure on-site storage will be provided for tools and equipment in an effort to minimize construction related vehicle trips to the site. Full or partial street closures will be avoided to the extent possible. Any street closure or 1;1ne use reduction will be r:oordinated with the City of Northampton Police Department and will be limited to oif-peak periods. Prior to the implementation of any work within the public right-cif-way, the contractor will submit to the City of Northampton Police Department and the Department of Public works for review and approval a traffic and pedestrian management plan. Air Quality Air quality impacts associated with construction activities may generate fugitive dust, which could result in localized increases in airborne particulate levels. Fugitive dust emissions from construction activities will depend on such factors as the properties of the emitting surfaces (e.g., moisture content and area of exposed soil or debris), meteorological variables, and construction practices employed. ti To reduce emission of fugitive dust and minimize impacts on the local environment, the Aw construction contractor will adhere to a number of strictly enforced mitigation measures. These include: • Wetting agents will be used regularly to control and suppress dust for exposed areas. • Water will be applied during active building demolition operations and while trucks are being loaded with demolition debris. • All trucks transporting debris to or from the site will be fully covered. Construction practices will be monitored to ensure that unnecessary transfers and mechanical disturbances of loose materials are minimized. Surrounding streets will be cleaned throughout the demolition and foundation construction period to minimize dust accumulations. Any other off-site construction debris will be removed as soon as observed. The proponent will work with DEP Western Region to determine the feasibility of a pilot program for implementation of DEP's Clean Air Con5trucnon Inititiative. 766011FEIR13-Section6l.doc 3-22 Proposed Section 61 Findings Epsilon Associates, Inc. community where Green architecture would be regarded with special favor. On the housing side.. TCB may itself be a developer, utilizing such financing and resources as it is able to identify within the private and public sector. TCB will seek out and apply for all pertinent resources that offer support for "Green" design. HHD will work with the CAC and the City to develop a protocol for informing prospective buyers of buildings and land about the availability of MassDevelopment financing programs and for providing outreach, education and referrals intended to promote sustainable development as third party end users occupy and develop the site. 3.3.6 Construction Mitigation 3.3.6.1 Potential impacts Construction and/or demolition activities at NSH will extend throughout the potential fifteen-year build-out period of the project. Depending on location and nature of construction, work may be contracted for by HHD or by future transferees. Without careful planning, construction impacts on traffic, air quality, noise, and erosion/sedimentation could ensue. 3.3.6.2 Mitigation All work will be required to comply with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. Morevoer, in each instance the selected construction contractor(s) will be required to submit a Construction Management Plan (CMP) prior to the commencement of construction. The plan will address potential air, noise, and traffic impacts and hours of operations and will provide a plan to eliminate, minimize, or mitigate these impacts. The construction contractor(s) will be bound to the terms of the CMP. Typical controls that may be incorporated into a CHIP are listed below. Traffic In order to minimize construction related traffic impacts associated with the planned development, the project proponent will work with the City and contractors to implement the following measures: • Designated truck routes to and from the development will be established with the City of Northampton in order to reduce or eliminated project related construction truck traffic from neighborhood areas. • Construction worker parking will not be permitted on street unless so designated with the City of Northampton Police Department. Construction workers will be, encouraged to utilize public transportation and/or carpool/vanpool to the project site in order to reduce construction related traffic to the de-,elopment. 76tiU 11FE!N,13-�c_ctrcmu t.rioc — --- '-21 Proposed Section 61 Finding.; Epsilon : ,_soCi:�cc�, fn•- Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.11 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,w, A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet Insert dimension in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. owl', 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0170, - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ow E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each surrey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.5 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks,control points,and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two Insert number permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide Aawk temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property)for Project. Include on the survey an ALTA level certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.6 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. o- . A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, 'Request for Interpretation." 3.3 SPECIAL PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Compliance with the Final Environmental Impact Report EOEA #12629, the Contractor shall adhere to all requirements contained therein. Following are portions of the document related to work of this Project and requirements for contractors on this Project. The entire report is available for review from the Owner, upon request. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Aftk 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in Massachusetts and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Special project conditions. 2. Construction layout. 3. Field engineering and surveying. 4. General installation of products. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section 'Cutting and Patching' for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section Closeout Procedures for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit three copies signed by land surveyor. E. Final Property Survey: Submit three copies showing the Work performed and record survey tow data. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Continued) The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design,including A/E design,detailing,and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION ❑Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. ❑Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. ❑Substitution rejected-Use specified materials. ❑Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ❑Contractor ❑Subcontractor ❑Supplier ❑Manufacturer ❑A/E ❑ Copyright 19%,Construction Specification lnstitute, Page of September 1996 601 Madison Strttt,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Form 13.IA Advancement re nok6oi SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) Project Substitution Request Number. From: To: Date: A/E Project Number. Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer. Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer. Address: Phone: History: ❑New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑5-10 yrs old ❑More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ❑Point-by-point comparative data attached-REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑No ❑Yes;explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑No ❑Yes (Add] [Deduct] days- Supporting Data Attached: ❑Drawings ❑Product Data ❑Samples ❑Tests ❑Reports ❑ Copyright 1996,Construction Specification Institute. Page of Septar"beT 1996 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Form 13.IA Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Mk 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures"or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 Insert number days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner Aw must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish"salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 low "Comparable Products'Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 6. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. loo 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 14 Insert time days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 21 Insert time days of receipt of request, or 7 Insert time days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. ' a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order or Architect's Supplemental Instruction. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 Insert time days of receipt of request, or 7 Insert time days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 Insert number days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 Insert number copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. ,. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 Insert number copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A, facsimile of form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01600- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances"for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section "Alternates"for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 1 Section 'References for applicable industry standards for products specified. 4. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service ow performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .wk C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Covered Walkway: If required, erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. K. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side. 2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. A""' 4. Protect air-handling equipment. 5. Weather strip openings. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241, 1. Prohibit smoking in all construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. K. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 -6 to Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. Provide one DSL or T-1 line in the Contractor's primary field office and in the Owner's office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators. , •. J. Temporary Stairs: Until permarent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 -5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 104%, C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. ,. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one Insert number telephone line(s)for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. b. Provide one Insert number telephone line(s)for Owner's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 Village at Hospital Hill— Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inca 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 Insert number individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4- foot-square tack board. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to new municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections. B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails. C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 5. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 6. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. ""► D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. FDA Food and Drug Administration (888)463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800)488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202)501-1888 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202)708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (510)486-4000 www.lbi.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety& Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 //phs.os.dhhs.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202)268-2000 www.usps.com PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420- 3 oil Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ICC International Code Council (703) 931- 4533 (Formerly: CABO- Council of American Building Officials) 4 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800)423- 6587 www.icc-es.org (562)699- 0543 C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-6816 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.eren.doe.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 www.faa.gov REFERENCES 01420-2 0'` Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01420-REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules,conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. A"k REFERENCES 01420- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 00% E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architectand Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architectand Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 Insert number days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Arch itect,testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-6 ., Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Notify Architectseven Insert number days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Arch itect'sa pproval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven Insert number days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 Insert number hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. , D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed.for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1, Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -4 l'" Village at Hospital Hill— Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in"Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address,and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. B. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill,factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, *P, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced"means having successfully completed a minimum of five Insert number previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. A1011., 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and-control services required by Architect, Owner,or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances"for testing and inspecting allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 Advancement of Construct"i 'f8ehrfOtOgy SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Project•. Dom: A/E Project Number. TRANSMITTAL To(Contractor): Date: Submittal No. AFrom(Subcontractor): By: ❑Resubmission Qty. Reference/ Title/Description/ Spec.Section Title and Paragraph/ Number Manufacturer Drawing Detail Reference ❑Submitted for review and approval ❑Substitution involved-Substitution request attached ❑Resubmitted for review and approval ❑If substitution involved,submission includes point-by-point ❑Complies with contract requirements comparative data or preliminary details ❑Will be available to meet construction schedule ❑Items included in submission will be ordered ❑A/E review time included in construction schedule immediately upon receipt of approval Other remarks on above submission: ❑One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To(A/E): Attn: Date Recd by Contractor BFrom(Contractor): By: Date Tmsmfd by Contractor. ❑Approved ❑Revise/Resubmit ❑Approved as noted ❑Rejected/Resubmit Other remarks on above submission: ❑One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To(Contractor): Attn: Date Rec'd by A/E: C From(A/E): ❑Other By: Date Tmsmed by A/E: ❑Approved ❑Provide file copy with corrections identified ❑Approved as noted ❑Sepia copies only returned ❑Not subject to review ❑No action required ❑Point-by-point comparative data required ❑Revise/Resubmit to complete approval process ❑Rejected/Resubmit ❑Approved as noted/Resubmit ❑Submission Incomplete/Resubmit Other remarks on above submission: ❑One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To(Subcontractor): Attn: Date Recd by Contractor. DFrom(Contractor): By: Date Tmsmfd by Contractor. Copies: ❑Owner ❑Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑One copy retained by sender Copyright 1996,Construction Specifications Institute, Page of September 1996 106 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Forth 12.1A Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit six Insert number copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, 00W and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S/ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 9 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AN%, installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data." Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized , service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect, except as required in "Action Submittals"Article. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide Aw products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-8 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 0. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Number of Samples: Submit two Insert number sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Insert number Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least two Insert number sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three Insert number copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two Insert number copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two Insert number copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. M. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit six Insert number copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two Insert number copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain two returned copies as Project Record Drawings. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one Insert number full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 00"A PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. ate, j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. M. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit six Insert number copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return three Insert number copies. Mark up and retain two returned copies as Project Record Documents. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved" or"Approved As Noted." I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Insert approval notation from Architect's action stamp"taken by Architect. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. In accepting or utilizing any form of electronic media generated and provided by the Architect or its consultants, the Contractor covenants and agrees that ail such drawings and data are instruments of service of the Architect, who shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data and shall retail all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights. The Contractor further agrees not to use these drawings and data, in whole or in part, for any purpose or project other than this Project. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Architect resulting in any way from any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any other project by anyone other than the Architect. The Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Architect harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorney's fees and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than the Architect or from any reuse of the drawings or data without the prior written consent of the Architect. Software compatibility issues, if any, shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 Insert number days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 Insert number days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 Insert number days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. Amok D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches Insert size on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination"for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 9. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. CAD Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals, at the cost of $250 per drawing sheet. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery,other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. C. Delivery of Construction Schedule: Failure to delivery an updated and accurate construction schedule on a monthly basis will be grounds for non-payment of Applications for Payment. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-7 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. , 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one Insert number day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at „W*k Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly Insert time intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week Insert time before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 1. Microsoft Project or Primavera, for Windows XP operating system. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven Insert number days of date established for the Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 Insert number days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 Insert number days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 Insert number percent increments within time bar. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aft D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. C. Use of premises restrictions. d. Provisions for future construction. e. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. 'A C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. L Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion., and the following interim milestones: 1. Completion of Phase IA. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6,2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 Insert number days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than fifteen days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. D. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. E. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three Insert number copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three Insert number opaque copies. 1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three Insert number opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at weekly intervals. E. Material Location Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at weekly intervals. F. Field Condition Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. G. Special Reports: Submit three Insert number copies at time of unusual event. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. .W CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01320 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination"for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 2. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. C. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1 AE-.4 v OW ❑ N C u O Q. N ti s Ir �C 0 � z o � w Q 8 0 0 Uggh� 'J N u � Q ❑ a a AO 0 W u N a � s 3 0 ' •� e o � ❑ Z¢ b Q V� o chi E•- c U J Fo- .� �nZ ❑ � U O � Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Amh, a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 Aomk y PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -6 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) Requests for interpretations (RFIs). 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who ^ should have been present. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w� h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. I. Use of the premises and existing buildings. M. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. S. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. U. Security. V. Progress cleaning. W. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. , 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related requests for interpretations (RFIs). d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 Insert number days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three Insert number days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 Insert number days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for requests for interpretations(RFIs). g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. „"k B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. C. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit three Insert number opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy Insert number copies. a. Submit five Insert number copies where Coordination Drawings are required for Aw operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two Insert number PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01310-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. 5. Infrastructure work may be in process in the public right-of-way, streets or adjacent properties. Contractor shall coordinate access to roads and rights-of-way with Infrastructure Contractor, whose work is being performed under separate contract with another agency. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,", 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. J. Delivery of Construction Schedule: Failure to delivery an updated and accurate construction schedule on a monthly basis will be grounds for non-payment of Applications for Payment. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment,Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Draft Applications for Payment shall be submitted for review by the Project Team one week prior to the end of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. The final Application for Payment shall be submitted on the last day of the month. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 6 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,wei, B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value. d. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials,for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. One: Unit Masonry: 1. Description: Removal & re-building of exterior brick according to Division 04810 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies". 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot. 3. Height: Assume masonry to be rebuilt will require scaffolding, but assume scaffolding will already be required for other uses in that area. B. Unit Price No. Two: Removal and repair of damaged sheathing: 1. Description: Remove & repair damaged or rotted roof sheathing according to Division 06100, Section "Rough Carpentry".* * Note that unit price is for work beyond allowance given in Section 01210. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot. C. Unit Price No. Three: Removal & repair of damaged wood flooring in South Home: 1. Description: Remove & repair damaged wood flooring as noted in "Allowance No. Two", Section 01210, "Allowances". * * Note that unit price is for work beyond allowance given in Section 01210. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot. END OF SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES 01270- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01270-UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Aalk finish times,and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Contractor Change Order Proposal Form: Use forms provided herein. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 Insert number days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form provided by Architect. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices"for administrative requirements for using unit prices. 3. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, Architect's Supplemental Instruction. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary,the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. oow%,, PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. One: DEDUCT ALTERNATE: In South Home, in lieu of removing entire basement slab & 2" of earth below and replacement with new slab, 2" of rigid insulation and vapor barrier as specified, provide trenching as necessary to allow for utilities as shown and fill with concrete and cover with vapor barrier and homasote, as note on wall section. B. Alternate No. Two: ADD ALTERNATE: In Nurse's Home, remove and replace basement slab in lieu of trenching slab for utilities and installing fiberboard underlayment. Match specifications & requirements for basement slab replacement in South Home, under base bid. C. Alternate No. Three: ADD ALTERNATE: In South Home, provide floor drains with trap primers at floor of every washer/dryer closet in building (eleven, total). Provide all piping, drain lines, feeder lines and fittings to meet all applicable codes. D. Alternate No. Four: DEDUCT ALTERNATE: Provide VCT in all common corridors in lieu of carpet specified. Provide VCT accent border in lieu of carpet border. END OF SECTION 03300 A ALTERNATES 01230 -2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 2. Contractor shall hold all alternate prices for a period of three months following the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Allowance No. Two: Wood flooring Patching in South Home: Include 300 S.F. of tongue & groove wood flooring removal &replacement with plywood sub-flooring,with top flush to level of original wood flooring. All flooring shall be covered with 3/8" inch plywood underlayment under base. C. Allowance No. Three: Sub-floor Patching in South Home: Include 300 S.F. of removal of 1/4" wood sub-floor and replacement with 3/e" plywood sub-floor, as specified in Division 06100, "Rough Carpentry". D. Allowance No. Four: Wood Joist Replacement in South Home: Include the removal of a total of 16 2x10 floor joists from under bathrooms in the South Home and replacement with engineered wood joists shimmed to the correct depth and engineered for the existing span, as specified in Division 06100, "Rough Carpentry. END OF SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES 01210 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.6 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.7 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not , economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. One: Wood Roof Decking Patching: Include 200 S.F. of Roof sheathing removal & replacement as specified in Division 06100 Section "Rough Carpentry" . ALLOWANCES 01210- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01210-ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Quantity allowances. ek C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices"for procedures for using unit prices. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. 'O"u,. ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words"shall," "shall be,"or"shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:)is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) .4"k END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100-4 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public after Phase IA is substantially complete. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. D. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific building to be occupied before total Owner occupancy of the Project. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Obtain certificates from lead inspection agency certifying to compliance with 100% lead- free apartment units. 4. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 5. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. 1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing buildings during normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, as otherwise agreed to,in writing, by Owner. 1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSIICSC's"MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. SUMMARY 01100 - 3 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,n.A,, 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK PHASES A. A Notice to Proceed is scheduled to be issued within 120 days of the receipt of bids. B. The Work shall be conducted in two phases in the following order,with each phase substantially complete before beginning the next phase: 1. Phase IA: Shall consist of the former South Home and associated parking areas and access roads. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within 240 days after the Notice to Proceed. 2. Phase IB: The remaining Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within 300 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. C. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. 1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried ,•w out smoothly,without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Preceding Work: MassDevelopment will award a separate contract for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be constructed concurrently substantially complete before work under this Contract is completed. 1. Infrastructure Contract: A separate contract will be awarded for the construction of new roads and utilities to serve the Project, outside of the Scope of Work limit lines shown on the site drawings. 2. Other Utilities Installations: Separate contracts are being performed by telephone, gas and cable companies to provide main service to the campus. 1.7 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. C. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated on the Drawings. A SUMMARY 01100- 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01100-SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Work under other contracts. 5. Use of premises. 6. Owner's occupancy requirements. mow, 7. Work restrictions, 8. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Village at Hospital Hill, Phase I. 1. Project Location: On the campus of the former Northampton State Hospital grounds, Northampton, MA. B. Owner: Hospital Hill LLC, c/o The Community Builders, Inc., 322 Main Street, Springfield, MA. 1. Owner's Representative: Thomas Kegelman. C. Architect: Dietz& Company Architects, Inc., 17 Hampden Street, Springfield, MA. D. The Work consists of the following: 1. The Work includes the complete renovation of two existing masonry buildings into new apartment units; the former Nurses' Home for 22 units and the former South Home for 11 units. Scheduled work includes asbestos, lead and hazardous materials remediation, selective demolition, new entry additions, interior partitioning for new apartment units, re- roofing, window and door replacement, new heating, plumbing, electrical and sprinkler systems, new elevator, and new interior finishes. SUMMARY 01100 - 1 N d O p- O C ro N O j S C O C 0 ~ � O N 0 = 6! A ° N C t3. N >•N OL u C C �7 d! d0 Ol LL O C O = -L. O 7 O! >� y N L O. E f✓ d N -c L G.E oCi c�a acdi !1 O 40 4-J 41 41 cu t c c c_ A u a c �_ b c -U c O .0 p O O- c L ca L ;� y c �.. ` C p 7 N to > u O Q L d to L CL a1 _ y� •- '+_+ ,1 E oc ao N U. N L o t, O. DO M f0 N C N b .P- p CL a u o. a h a i u � •E j w c> p E v = c t�v O. N c _c a d icy .� � � _ `° 5 L ° = o o �-� � C u luo ° 1 ;; �. V = y G > Z' N 'E y d °- y °? Q .L .c °' ' y C H O U 'v c ..0 L OL L d d d >� 7 L 3 W L .� C d C t O. O u L O c N p N c to .� u y p v t d u A w 0. N Q a 0 �; w tw 3 d c v O N `•�. t V_ N _ >� fE L G. lV ill -Q a� 4 o a E e >. L a.� � �° � d � 1d �°+ � d o co a, � U „ c �o N 'n N N a' fNV C O W '� V N 30 9 cam No to > v 3ry N d N co .61c u = o ,e ° c •5 s, E °' y ��- ° w cu •c d E w L- d s ... _;. •L > W _L d co °'" •C O '' C ` ° N p� .0 L yatl a+ c t 0 V1 c d L. U O W T O C N 'E fq y O `p 7 w d L 'C A {-1 N = a 00 N >. ro ai « at N N N c >. p y L a �' �. l0 �. �° c v O d tW a ►. .0 h L N O t L_ .}? v ?• a O a �3 0 c c w oa. aci `t d j. ar a o. �' y 'v7 d a a to Q! b0 0Cl cLV '� bd0� Q .G O.� E"' '_.+ W O b0 d Vl .� 6Ci vii 'O tR N c"C.+ Tf. fA :a K. S3 W Li LO c L o o C H F o = = u m o ° t, o o_ = L. p o- E c p of 0 ar ar E s t c$ ar r E N X d c v W. L �-+ y cV 'L7 �• ty C E C d fCd .0 01 4.1 :''_a..,i<:>:c.?!ht;�s�:'`.f� ;;:3 _ C z = d C 'd 'L — a E E ` >`w M':Z"'y.'•�<>:::!<::::;;:;°"'`:y:�s,.''!;:`<:::::><::::::> X.f 47 O. C td s yd E N = — C 3 O O 41 N 0 (u o CU L- ,N fd L `►� t;.;•.•:::•:::;:Y:::,.::C�.�;,<, r;::': r:. ... d "..c.::f:•:z. - V t — 4r ; L C O O to O > d Cl N O .L1 C ;;.ti..:.,.�y;:c'.:„•.:.•:•l;: `• C 0 .V •'^ O E .c N 'ro W •L O ,� d L �• a In 41 b0 p ; E m L t1 N N 6f C N L n .}ifi i A,' 4) N C E N •V d N = O N Q! '� ° 2 �• ;:•>:t>:.'J•%s:D�: a>�,ra td N a ar eo o = o o °�' " ta0 _ b4 ba °' c ^w '' .`` :T!fr.•• W ._ - - d 'N -0 d O N H v ro 0 d '� to dJ v `L—' L- L C ?` cLa OL C cCd O _ ►�- `� to a c ro 3 c '� n N p aJ v u ro d v to ar '" o =_ E " o o la = � E CL Q H z U 3 E X w E c i c d N m t a E b° E - N C ro u y .0 bo b f 0 >,d w "0- d E Y c L o 13 ? a• ° � a '- f to 0 m - � � a aroi n u CL d m o o E .� fin i o d d 2 b p c $ c a� u Q ro c S. v Yf -o 1° ro ' v n E (>O L „ a L o " y oo at a 41 " gy m m 0, E " Q 3 E � L .ai m h b >, y ,� � ro E � .0 c � � yt a s 6 = L .S 9 " .,; s „ 0 u o Z co •v_ a v u - ° Z O v 'Lm CL tl 75 Q = 0 m C 0 m a� 0 0 > p D L 0 p O 0 0 L i+ a� u 0 " O- a c p v v d Z y c 0 A 'c a y c0 lI " u N -5 E p 40, A v O u ro d A "o o Q L ? m L ro � 0 E Se t- �O y 'E . ! rd = _ v a s € r bo O 5 E E ra o b4 -> u E N bd N v 3 0 L � E° c v v " a aroi E o a ._ s o v " > a 0 u ° 6 g ro ro u c u `0 r u 'c p L v c T y ° a v .0 _c Z o ^ �, 0 2 ro " � p u = 0 � o f E E > Z c o 5 E •N td E e r a CL C o „ v o n d c N ° _� •a u � E o m o a :P v m 3 > �° L c v ba E " 0 o „ ° s v N u E N c > ° 0 � v C ? E 5�j L '47 y 0 y .a 0 r! ” EEP y di ^ E v v o o v a s Z 3 S o u 60 > a " T 7 52 -7-7 �i c f9 c n m " �+ c v 'c c a 6o d v °J o m U L 0 E c C n , A n n � .{ ♦\uhf s,• ftk•s a: 0. llf•Y )i) i..fit.r?....... 2 ;•% °� to a o Go 40 Yom: iF �gpy)Y .� fMM� � �\•Y r)• v•C.7Yc3. c : 5aM6�� } �+1�;\•s;;: "ifs, Q k f s� :rr:•: w�ooi m C o co o CL vi trri Wr {\ ....... 1 3....I�T+)2P.`H•k.,�:)ki..•.....J.,.Yh v<�. .r. +J�Lv.'•'; 0 y N 7 w O t L. u r Dl C u > > �+ f+ O d Q O IC 3 O C 41 4� O C O. N 7 p O.Je Q C = ++ O w O 7 O ►� O O is '1 r tray +M. .. y V O. 61 V O 3 C T p !— O ar FE U w ai cZ � ca�'� H � � 3c32 = � �ac Q X67 y y C O O O VI ,� y y 3 —>' i d Q. C a_ CL afC u = � Ed T� �E°° E = te O d O t/ O N O a 41 y L .� 3• N E ,y' rte,, Y R O ^'' <..• ww `� O N C y vi E N O N 41 t O d = C tu~ {0 O� � C L C 7 3 d Q ycu w •r+ N >+ O 7 +_" a QI oo � oEo4E ° tea = C° ct1 � '� fl > ?` 0c41 ..... ' ° c, o > o c o ° E � v m 'v� '3 a h T,E z g G` x Y. 1 :. - ppd' 6R •�'tL .y.. 3a va.. :.^.a S '. ti'. 7 W.. n•' ro k �"t •YqM .. .� �,t . � ,{'�,: � � _♦ �i. R x 'L < tr` ..� < a �` .y.S; � Ye•; L", �'` .�)._•, ��. +.� � �. .fit � V. '�,. qy � N � � � t\ ''�' _u n o�'.. � •♦ �L r:�. `�.. <.t..:I �ht.. C3 e•. �♦ n •'Lry, sY.c '1w,°)t� �: - �$ : VV•• b .•$:' r'� r1 �'� M `w ,v ,�: ) :s tr3• 'i Y � )' Z♦. fw:' �..L •+�. ..t .. 3 y. Qf u a 7 §10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change,including changes of time,to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,purchase order and other obligations. §11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or put of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the[late(1)on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Section 4,1 or Section 43.3,or(2)on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract,whichever of(1)or(2)first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph arc void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shalt be applicable. . §12 Notice tit.the Surety,the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page'.'ActuaLreceipL of notice by Surety,the Owner or the Contractor;however accomplished,shall be stifFcient compliance"as of,the date received at the address shown on the signature page. §13 When this Bond has been.furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the constructio¢'was to be Performed,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed'de]eted'herefr'am and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal regturetnent sball be deemed incorporated herein.:The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. :... §1.4.Upon retauesi by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of.Ns Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. §15 DEFINITIONS §15.1 Claimunu:A indtvidti tl or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor cr with a subcontractor of the "" Contractor to ftiinish labor,materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond Aall be to include;:without limitation in the terms"labor,materials or equipment"that part of water,gas, power,'light,heat oat..gasoline,telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract :architectural and engineering services requited for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's sitbcontrictors,and u11 othcritems for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, mate'riuls or equipmenrwere furnished !" §15.2 Construciioo Contract:The aetcement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. §15.3 Owner Default:Failure of he Owner,which has neither been remedied nor waived,to pay the Contractor as required try the Construction Contrict or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. §16M ODIFICATIONS TO,THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: (Space is pro videdbetow for additional signatures of added parries, other than those appearing Oft the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Sea[) Company: (Corporate Sent) Signature: Signature: Name and Tide: Name and TiLIe: Address: Address: AIA Document A3121°—1984.Copyright 0 1934 hp The Arnencan Irstitute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document s protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproducilon or distribution of this AIA` Occurrent,or any portion of 11, 7 may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the mazlmum extent possible under the law. ,^,>documery was p-odcced I AtA schware at i 5.47:42 on 03;0612004 under order No.1 000 126357_[which expi es on 5/29!05.and is not for resale. (J'.i 1 pc049t t User notes: §1 The Contractor and the Surety,jointly and severally bind themselves,their heirs,executors,administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor.materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,which is incorporated herein by reference. §2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: §2.1 Promptly makes payment.directly or indirectly,for all sums due Claimants,and §2.2 Defends.indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims,demands,liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim,demand,lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described.in Section 12)of any claims,demands,liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands,liens or suits to die Contractor and the Surety,and provided there is no Owner Default. §3-With respect,to Claimants,this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly;for:all:sums due. §4 The Surety shall.}ave no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: §4.1 Claunants avh:a.are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address.dcs6iibed in-Section 12)and sent a copy,or notice thereof,to the Owner,stating that a claim is being made.under this Bond and,:ivith substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. §'4.2 Cl imants who do'not have'a direct contract with the Contractor: 1 Have furnished'wiitten notice to the Contractor and sent a copy,or notice thereof,to the Owner, within 90`daysafter having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claiin:9tating,with substantial accuracy,the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed;and 2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor,or not received within 30 , days off irtiishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated:the claim will be paid directly or indirectly;and ,3 Not having'been paid within the above 30 days,have sent a written notice to the Surety(at the address-described in Section 12)and sent a copy,or notice thereof,to the Owner,stating that a claim i§being`madeunder this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor.` §5 If a notice requited.by Section 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety,that is sufficient compliance. §6 Whendie Claimant has Satisfied the conditions of Section 4,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the'foltowing actions: §'6A Send an answer to the Claimant,with a copy to the Owner,within 45 days after receipt of the claim,stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. §6.2 Pay or arrange For payment.of any undisputed amounts. §7 The Surety's total:obligation shalt not exceed the amount of this Bond,and the amount of this Bond shall be credited forany payments made in good faith by the Surety. §8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims,if any,under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond,they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety Linder this Bond,subject to the Owners priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. §9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner;Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor That are un-ciated to the Construction Contract. "[he Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs orexpc-nses of any Claimant under this Budd.and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to.give notices on behalf ol,or odicm ise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. AIA Document A312i°—1984.Copyright 'O 1984 by The Americar Inshlute of Arch leers. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA`Occument Is protected by U.S.Copyright law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced 6 by AIA sofrvare al 15:47:42 on 0810612004 under Order No t OCOt 26387 1 which expir?s on 6l29i05.anal is not for resale. User Niles: (371t09049:I tom' Payment Bond CONTRACTOR(Mante and Address): SURETY(Narrte and Principal Place of OWNER(Name and Address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Description(Ncime arld'Locaiion.): t)ate.(Nnt,earliei rhaii Cartslrtictlon Contract Date): Amount Modreetlons to tblc kond 1 I None See Last Page CONTRACTOR AS:PRINCIPAL '. SURETY Cnmpapy (Corp -rti Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Sign tture Signature: Name and Tidet Name and Tide: appear on the last page) (FOR;LVF0WA7I0N.0NLY-Marne,Address and Telephone) AGENT'or BROKER OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE(r1 rchirecr, Engineer or-otherparty): AIA Document A312r"—1984.Copyright ®1984 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. 'WARNING:This AIA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright taw and international Treaties.Unauthorized reproductlon or dlStribUtlon of this AJA'Document,or any por)c n of lt. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This ao±ume^I,vas pro.0-zed by AIA soliware at 15:47:42 on=0642004 under Order No.!000126387_1 which expires on 6/29105,and Is not for resale. User Notes: (37,;C'249•.) All §13 MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND AREAS FOLLOWS: (S(>dcil is{rravided helrnv for additinlral sigrtnrurec njadded parties, other than those appearing ort the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY -Comparly: (Corporate Seat) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Si-nalure: Name and Title:, Name LLnd Title: Address Address: AIA Document A31 2T-—1984.Copyright 31 1984 by The American!rstrtule of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and Inlernallonal Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it. 4 may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Tnis document was produced by AIA software at 15!47:42 on 0&'0612004 under Order No.1000 1 253a7_1 which expires on 6129:05,ands not for resale. Jser Notes' (3711090691) �"" §6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of Lhc Construction Cuntract; §6.2 Additional legal,design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default,and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 4;and - §6.3 Liquidated damages,or if no liquidated damages arc specified in the Construction Contract,actual dama?cs caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. §7 The Surety shall nocbe liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract,.and.the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations::!Nci right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs,executors,administrators or successors. §B:The Surely hereby waives!notice of any change,including changes of time,to the Construction Contract or to related subcontract`i purchase:orders and other obligations. §9 Any,proceedutg legal?or equitable,under this Bond may be instituted in any court oEcompetent jurisdiction in the location tn.which thc.:work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Defdittto I r within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to.perf6rm lts:oblig ttaons:,Undcr,tbis Bond,whichever occurs First. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited bylaw;the:miitimuit—period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdicLion of the suit shall be:applicable §t0a�`.otace to the Surety;fthe Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown to the aignaLure page. . §11 When this:Bond h is:been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where < the construdion was to-be performed,any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall:bd deemed'del etcd fiere from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorpprated.herein The intent is that this Bond sbrill be construed as a statutory bond and not as a corrunon law bond §12 DEFINMONS §12.1 Balance of the Contract Price—'The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Con tractafter all proper adjustments have been made,including allowance to the Contractor of any - aimounts:reccived onto be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or ocher claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled,reduced by a11 valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contracu §12.2 Construction Contract_,The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents.and changes thereto. §12.3 Contractor Default Failure of the Contractor,which has neither been remedied nor waived,to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. §12.4 Owncr-DeEau1L Failure of the Owner,which has neither been remedied nor waived,to pay the Contractor w required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. look AIA Document A312—-19a4.copyright a 1984 by The American Insume of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'Occurrent Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties-Unacthorized reproduction or dlslrlbullon of this AIA'Oecument,or any portion of it, 3 may result In savers civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was procucsd by AIA software at 15:47:42 on 08i06l2004 under Order No.1 000 1 26-187_1 which expires on 6,29105.and is not for r=_sale. 137 1 1 050491) User Notes: §1 The Contractor and the Surety,jointly and severally,bind themselves.their heirs,executors,administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract,which is incorporated herein by reference. §2 I the Contractor performs the Construction Contract.the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond,except to participate in conferences as provided in Section 3.1. §3 If there is no Owner Default.the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: §3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Section 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contactor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and thc'Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner,the Contractor and the Surety agree,the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time.to perform the Construction Contract,but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right,if any,subsequently to declare a Contractor Default,and §3.2 The.Owner has declared ai Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract;Siich Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety - have received notice as provided in Section 3.1;and §3.3 The O,,tncrhas agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Conirrictor tai a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. §4 When the Owner hati satisfied the conditions of Section 3,the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense _. . . take-one of the follo.wing,actions: - §4,1 Arninge for the Cohtractor,with consent of the Owner,to perform and complete the Construction Contract;or §4.2 Undertake to perform and`complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contracwrs;.or §4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performarimand completion of the Construction Contract,arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected witb'the Owner's concurrence,to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety egtuivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract,and pay to the Owne the':iim6unt of daimages ds described in Section 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default:or §4.4 Wuive its right to perform and complete,arrange for completion,or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness undenha e:circumstances: .1 After investigation,determine the amount for which it may,be liable to the Owner and,as soon as pacticable after the amount is determined,tender payment therefor to the Owner;or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. §5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 4 with reasonable promptness,the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding;that the Stfrety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. if the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability,in whole or in part,without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. §6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract,and if the Surety elects to act under Section 4.1,4 2,or 4.3 above,then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract,and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be e.rcater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond,but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract•_the Surety is obligated without duplication for: V Al Document AJt2 r"-1984.Copyright 19)1984 by me American!nstilute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA`Oocument Is protected by U.S.Copyright taw and Inlernatlonal Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA°Document,or any ponlon of it, z may result In severe civil and criminal oenaltles,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 5.47:42 on Oa/06i2004 under Order No.1000125387_;wnich ex,res on 6!29105.and,s rot for resa.e. User Notes: 137 t 109049 1 I AOW Document ,A312"m -- 1984 - Performance Bond CONTRACTOR(Nante'nnd Address): SURETY(Name and Principal Place of uszness): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: OWNER(Ma iii arrdAdc(ress):, The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also have revised the text of the CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT:" original AIA standard form.An Date Additions and Deletions Report Amoun€; that notes added information as Dcacription{tVriinc Lard Ln�ar(on): well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the 80N0 qp o. author and should be reviewed. Datc(Not ear(ret alrart Cniutrucrinn Contract Date): A vertical tine in the Left margin of Amount: this document indicates where the author has added necessary " Modifications to this Sond: X None See Last Page information and where the author .. has added to or deleted from the CONTRACTOR A5'PRINCIPAL` SURETY original AIA text. Company: (Corpoite Seal) Company: (Corporate Seat) This document has important 5lgrratuie: Signature: legal consequences. lVsmc and Name and Consultation with an attorney Title: Title: is encouraged with respect to (r1ny'ac(c(ltiana(si,nnirrres app�ar,i�n the fast page) its completion or modification. Any singular reference to . (FOR INFORMAT'lON ONLY-.Maine,Address and Telephone) Contract,Surety,Owner or other AGENT:&BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE party shall be considered plural (Architect.Engineer or other parry): where applicable. AIA Document A312t°-1984.Copyright V 1984 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:Thls AIA" Dorumew Is protected by U.S.Copyright law and Intemationaf Treaties.Unauthorized reprodurtlon or distribution of this AIA"Document,or any portion of it. I may result In severe civil and rrlminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This do�:ment was produced by AIA somware al 15:47:42 on 02/062D04 under Order No.1 000 1 2 538 7_1 which expires on 6'23/05.and is not for resale. User Notes: (371, ', Afthk 16.5.6 Section 102 of the Department of Housing and Urban Development Reform Act of 1989, as implemented at 24 C.F.R. part 12, which contains provisions designed to ensure greater accountability and integrity in the provision of certain types of assistance administered by HUD; 16.5.7 Section 13 of the Department of Housing and Urban Development Act of 1974, as amended by section 112 of the HUD Reform Act of 1989, and as implemented at 24 C.F.R. part 86; 16.5.8 24 C.F.R part 24,which applies to the employment, engagement of services, awarding of contracts, subgrants, or funding of any recipients, or contractors or subcontractors, during any period of debarment, suspension, or placement in ineligibility status; 16.5.9 The Uniform Relocation Assistance and Real Property Acquisition Policies Act of 1970 and government-wide implementing regulations at 49 C.F.R. part 24(note: TCB has no responsibility for relocation pursuant to this Agreement). END OF SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS AWW (J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;I VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. 4 5188 Page 20 Awk 16.1.1 Contractor will prepare the necessary storm water pollution prevention plan and obtain the necessary NPDES permit. 16.2 No officer or employee of Owner shall have any interest, direct or indirect, in this Agreement or in any subcontract, and the Contractor shall incorporate,or cause to be incorporated, this provision in all subcontracts under this Agreement. 16.3 In connection with all contracts and subcontracts,the Contractor shall comply with the Copeland"Anti-Kickback" Act(18 U.S.C. 874 and 40 U.S.C. 276c)as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations(29 CFR part 3, "Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Building Or Public Work Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants from the United States )and shall require any contracts or subcontracts to contain language requiring such compliance. The Act provides that each contractor or subrecipient shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public work, to give up any part of the compensation to which he is otherwise entitled. The recipient shall report all suspected or reported violations to the Federal awarding agency. 16.4 The Contractor shall not make any contract with a party listed on the General Services Administration's List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement or Nonprocurement Programs in accordance with Executive Orders 12549 and 12689, "Department and Suspension." This list contains the names of parties debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded by agencies, and contractors declared ineligible under statutory or regulatory authority other than Executive Order 12549. The Contractor and all subcontractors with awards that exceed the small purchase threshold shall provide the required certification regarding its exclusion status and that of its principal employees. 16.5 The Contractor and each of its subcontractors shall comply with all applicable requirements of the following, as the same may be amended from time to time: 16.5.1 The Fair Housing Act(42 U.S.C. 3601-19) and regulations pursuant thereto(24 C.F.R. part 100);Executive Order 11063 (Equal Opportunity in Housing)and regulations pursuant thereto(24 C.F.R. part 107); the fair housing poster regulations (24 C.F.R. part 110) and advertising guidelines(24 C.F.R. part 109); 16.5.2 Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964(42 U.S.C. 2000d) and regulations pursuant thereto(24 C.F.R. part 1) relating to non-discrimination in housing; 16.5.3 The prohibitions against discrimination on the basis of age under the Age Discrimination Act of 1975 (42 U.S.C. 6101-07) and regulations issued pursuant thereto (24 C.F.R. part 146); 16.5.4 The prohibitions against discrimination against disabled individuals under Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 794)and regulations issued pursuant thereto(24 C.F.R. part 8); the Americans with Disabilities Act(Public Law 101-336) and its implementing regulation at 28 C.F.R. part 36; and the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, as amended(42 U.S.C. 415 1) and regulations issued pursuant thereto(24 C.F.R. part 40); 16.5.5 The Fair Housing Act and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, relating to disabilities; {J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;I VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. #5 188 Pagc 19 ineligible for further federally assisted construction projects pursuant to procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor,or as otherwise provided by law. 15.3.7 The Contractor will include the text of this Section 15.3 in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations,or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965,so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as may be directed by the Secretary of Labor as a means of enforcing such provisions,including sanctions for noncompliance, provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction,the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. 15.4 Without limiting the generality of this Article 15, the Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable governmental reporting requirements related to Equal Opportunity, Affirmative Action and Section 3 hiring. ARTICLE 16: OTHER GOVERNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 16.1 To the extent that this Agreement is a nonexempt transaction pursuant to the requirements of the Clean Air Act, as amended(42 USC 1857, et seq.), the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended(33 USC 1251 et seq.), and the Regulations of the -low Environmental Protection Agency("EPA")with respect thereto, at 40 CFR Part 15, as amended from time to time, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable standards,orders or regulations issued pursuant to such Acts and cause or require to be inserted in full in all contracts or subcontracts with respect to any nonexempt transaction, the following requirements: That it will enter into a stipulation with any contractor that any facility to be utilized in the performance of any nonexempt contract or subcontract is not listed on the list of Violating Facilities issued by the EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 15.20; That it will comply with all of the requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act,as amended(42 USC 1857 c-8), and Section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended(33 USC 1318),relating to inspection, monitoring, entry, reports and information, as well as other requirements specified in said Section 114 and Section 308, and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder; That it will provide prompt notice to be given to Owner of any notification received from the Director, Office of Federal Activities, EPA, indicating that a facility utilized or to be utilized for the Agreement is under consideration to be listed on the EPA list of Violating Facilities; That it will include, or cause to be included, the criteria and requirements of this Section 16.1 in every nonexempt subcontract, and require that any contractor will take such action as the government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions; and That no amount of the payments under this Agreement shall be utilized with respect to a facility which has given rise to a conviction under Section 113(cl) of the Clean Air Act or Section 309(c)of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act. (J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1} VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 18 require employment opportunities to be directed, were not filled to circumvent the Contractor's obligations under 24 CFR Part 135. 15.2.6 Noncompliance with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR Part 135 may result in sanctions, termination of this Agreement for default, and debarment or suspension from future HUD assisted contracts. 15.2.7 The Contractor acknowledges that specific elements of its agreement relating to Section 3 are set out in Section 14 and Exhibit K to the Owner-Contractor Agreement and, without limiting its obligations under Section 3 or Section 15.2 of this Agreement, specifically agrees to comply with the"Section 3 Plan"referenced therein. 15.3 Pursuant to Executive Order 11246, during the performance of this Agreement, the Contractor agrees as follows: 15.3.1 The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment on the basis of race, color, sex, sexual preference,religion, national origin,disability or marital or familial status. Further, the Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during the construction period without regard to their race,color, sex, sexual preference,religion or national origin, disability or marital or familial status. Such actions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer,recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment,notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. 15.3.2 The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor,state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race,color, sex, sexual preference,religion or national origin, disability or marital or familial status. 15.3.3 The Contractor will send each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement, or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the contract compliance officer advising such labor union or representative of workers of the Contractor's commitment under this Article, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. 15.3.4 The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules,regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. 15.3.5 The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor, issued pursuant thereto, and will permit access to all books, records and accounts by the Owner,the Northampton Housing Authority, the City of Northampton,The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders. 15.3.6 In the event of the Contractor's non-compliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this Agreement, or with any of such rules,regulations, or orders, this Agreement may be cancelled, terminated or suspended, in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared (J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1) VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc.# 5188 Page 17 Awlk 14.2.3 Delete the final period and replace with the following: and after issuance of a notice of termination by the Owner the Contractor shall not access the site for any purpose without the express written consent of the Owner. 14.2.4 Insert the following after "thereby"in the 1st sentence: "plus Owner's direct and consequential damages as a result of Contractor's default". Insert the following at the end: The Owner may terminate the Contract,at its option, in the case of a casualty, condemnation or other event not within the Owner's reasonable control,without prior notice. In the event of such termination,the Contractor shall be entitled to payment in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 14 of these General Conditions. ARTICLE 15: EQUAL OPPORTUNITY/AFFIRMATIVE ACTION The work to be performed by the Contractor under this Agreement is for a project in which financial assistance is being provided, in part, by public authorities. The Contractor, therefore, agrees to comply with all applicable federal,state or municipal requirements, including, but not limited to, those concerning equal employment opportunities, minority and women's business utilization, and local job preferences, in accordance with applicable law. Owner shall provide Contractor with a copy of any federal,state or municipal requirements and may require Contractor to participate in meetings with public authorities and to document, to the satisfaction of such authorities, Contractor's efforts to comply with any such requirements. The Contractor shall incorporate into all subcontracts any specific requirements of which Contractor has been made aware by Owner. Aftlk 15.2.1 The work to be performed under this Agreement is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u ("Section 3"). The purpose of Section 3 is to ensure that employment and other economic opportunities generated by HUD assistance or HUD-assisted projects covered by Section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed to low-and very low-income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of HUD assistance for housing and that contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to businesses located in,or owned in substantial part by persons residing in, the project area. The Contractor agrees to make a good faith effort to fulfill these requirements, to document this effort, and to provide copies of such documentation with each request for payment. 15.2.2 The parties to this Agreement agree to comply with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, which implement Section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this Agreement, the parties to this Agreement certify that they are under no contractual or other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the Part 135 regulations. 15.2.3 The Contractor agrees to include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, and agrees to take appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in this Section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. The Contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the Contractor has notice or knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. 15.2.5 The Contractor will certify that any vacant employment positions, including training positions, that are filled(1)after the Contractor is selected but before the Agreement is , executed, and(2) with persons other than those to whom the regulations of 24 CFR Part 135 1J:\CLIE.NTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1) VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. #5 188 Page 16 F rather shall be deemed to refer to all other items or matters that could reasonably fall within the broadest possible scope of such general statement, term or matter. 13.7.2 Whenever possible, each provision of this Contract shall be interpreted in a manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law. If,however, any provision of this Contract,or portion thereof,is prohibited by law or found invalid under any law, only such provision or portion thereof shall be ineffective without, in any manner, invalidating or affecting the remaining provisions of this Contract or valid portions of such provisions which are hereby deemed severable. 13.7.3 Each party hereto agrees to do all acts and things and to make, execute and deliver such written instruments as shall, from time to time,be reasonably required to carry out the terms and provisions of the Contract Documents. 13.7.4 Any specific requirement in this Contract that the responsibilities or obligations of the Contractor also apply to a subcontractor is added for emphasis and deemed to include a subcontractor of any tier. The omission of a reference to a subcontractor in connection with any of the Contractor's responsibilities or obligations shall not be construed to diminish, abrogate or limit any responsibilities or obligations of a subcontractor of any tier under the Contract Documents or the applicable subcontract. 13.7.5 Contractor hereby consents to the collateral assignment of the Agreement by the Owner to the Owner's construction Lender as security for the financing of the Project and agrees to perform its obligations hereunder for such Lender provided that such assignment shall not OOW relieve the Owner of any of the covenants, duties, or obligations contained in the Agreement, nor alter or impair any of the Contractor's rights contained therein. The Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier shall execute and deliver any instruments reasonably required by the Owner, or such Lender, in connection with the financing of the Project. Contractor shall provide all documents, certificates and reports and other information reasonably requested by the Lender and shall cooperate with the Lender to the fullest extent possible." ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 14.2.1 Add the word"or"at the end of subparagraph 14.2.1.4, and add the following new subparagraph 14.2.1.5: .5 files a petition, or consents to the filing of a petition against the Contractor,under any federal or state law concerning bankruptcy, reorganization insolvency or relief from creditors, or if such petition is filed against the Contractor without its consent and is not dismissed within thirty(30)days, or if the Contractor is generally not paying its debts as they become due, or if the Contractor becomes insolvent, or if a receiver, trustee, liquidator, custodian or the like is appointed with respect to Contractor or takes possession of all or a substantial portion of its assets, or if Contractor consents to such an appointment, or if Contractor makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors. 00 IJ:\CLIE`TS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;II VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 15 Awk 13.1.2 Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein. Upon the application of either party the contract shall be physically amended to make any such insertion. 13.2.3 If,after making Final Payment, the Owner conveys to a third party the Project or any portion thereof under the Contract, any rights which the Owner may have against the Contractor for maintenance service and for claims which,under the terms of subparagraph 9.9.4, are reserved to the Owner after the making and acceptance of Final Payment, shall automatically transfer to such third party. 13.3.1 Add as follows: Notices shall be addressed as follows: (a) If to the Owner- With a copy to- (b) If to the Contractor (c) If to the Architect 13.5.7 Certificates of occupancy(as applicable)and certificates of inspection testing and approval, including operating permits for any mechanical apparatus, such as boilers and air compressors which may be required to permit full use and occupancy of the premises by the Owner and tenants or which may be required by the Contract Documents shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. This shall be a condition precedent to Substantial Completion of the Work. Architect's or any engineer's services required to obtain such certificates,permits, or approvals shall be paid for by the Contractor. 13.6.1 Insert a period after the word "writing"and delete the balance. 13.7 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: GENERAL PROVISIONS 13.7.1 All personal pronouns used in this Contract, whether used in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, shall include all other genders; and the singular shall include the plural and vice versa. Titles of articles, paragraphs and subparagraphs are for convenience only and neither limit nor amplify the provisions of this Contract. The use herein of the word`including', when following any general statement, term or matter shall not be construed to limit such statement, term or matter to the specific items or matters set forth immediately following such word or to similar items or matters, whether or not non-limiting language(such words as `without timitation' or `but not limited to' or words of similar import) is used with reference thereto,but IJ:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;I VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5 188 Page 14 11.4.6 Delete and substitute the following: The Owner shall provide to the Contractor evidence of all insurance required to be provided by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.4. 11.4.7 Delete in its entirety. 11.4.9 Delete in its entirety. 11.4.11 Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as calling for the name of any Subcontractor or sub-subcontractor as loss payee on Owner's insurance and no draft or other instrument in payment of any loss shall name any Subcontractor or sub-subcontractor as joint payees thereof. In the event the insurance proceeds are paid to the Owner's Lenders on behalf of Owner and are not made available for reconstruction,the Owner shall promptly notify the Contractor of such fact, and such notification shall be treated as a termination in accordance with the provisions of Article 14. 11.4.12 The Contractor shall require each of its Subcontractors to procure and maintain during the life of its subcontract all the insurance reasonably required by the Owner or Owner's Lender and shall not allow its Subcontractors to begin work until the insurance has been so obtained and certificates of insurance approved. Owner's failure to object to the form or substance of such certificates of insurance witlun ten(10)business days following receipt shall be deemed approval for purposes of beginning work,but shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements set forth in this Agreement. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to provide a 30 day written notice to the Contractor of cancellation of any of the insurance coverages. 11.5.2 Add at the end the following: Each bond required under the Owner-Contractor Agreement shall be in dual or triple obligee form, as requested by Owner, and shall be for the Contract Sum from the commencement of the Work until one year after Final Completion. The performance bond shall survive acceptance of the Work by Owner to the extent of guaranteeing Contractor's performance under paragraphs 3.5 and 12.2. ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1.1 Delete the final period and add at the end: "and any cost, loss or damages to the Owner resulting from such defect or failure. This obligation shall survive termination of the Contract under Article 14." 12.2.2.1 Replace the word"Substantial"with the word"Final"wherever it appears. Delete the third sentence. In the fourth sentence, delete the words"during that period." Add the following at the end: "Final Payment or an Architect's Certificate for Final Payment shall not be deemed acceptance of unsatisfactory conditions. Upon completion of any Work under or pursuant to this subparagraph 12.2.2.1,the correction period in connection with the Work requiring correction shall be renewed and recommence." 12.3.1 Delete the period at the end of the final sentence and add at the end: ", and if the payments due to the Contractor are insufficient to cover the adjustment, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner." ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Aovk (J:\CLIE`'TS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1) VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc.# 5188 Page 13 A%Mk, 11.3 Delete in its entirety. 11.4.1 Delete and substitute the following: The Owner shall purchase and maintain so- called"builder's risk" insurance upon the entire Work at the site in the amount it deems reasonably necessary, which builder's risk insurance shall name the Contractor as a named insured. This insurance shall cover the Work as installed and materials intended for installation which have been delivered to,unloaded, and stored securely(and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions, if any) on the site. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance upon materials not yet installed and not stored securely on the site. The insurance referred to in this subparagraph 11.4.1 shall be subject to the following limitations: 11.4.1.1 Excepted from coverage shall be owned,rented or leased construction tools and equipment to be used to perform Work by the Contractor and its Subcontractors. 11.4.1.2 The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall be solely responsible for all loss or damage to construction tools or equipment used to perform the Work. Any insurance protecting such equipment shall include an endorsement waiving the insurer's right of subrogation against the Owner, Architect and their consultants. 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deductibles, in the event of a paid claim the Contractor shall be responsible for the deductible amount up to a sum not to exceed$5,000 per claim. If the Owner or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts,the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. 11.4.1.4 Any loss insured under subparagraph 11.4.1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and shall be made payable to the Owner or Owner's Lenders(or any other person or institution chosen by the Owner)as trustee and agent for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable lender clause and of subparagraph 11.4.10. 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with this Agreement shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 In the first sentence, replace the phrase"shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall"with the following: ", at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance (unless required by law, in which event Owner shall purchase such insurance), which insurance, if purchased, shall". 11.4.3 Delete the last sentence. 11.4.4 Delete in its entirety. 11.4.5 Delete in its entirety. [J:\CLIEVTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1) VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc.#5188 Page 12 11.1.2.1 Workers'compensation insurance providing statutory coverage and employers liability insurance with minimum limits of One Hundred Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($100,000.00)per accident for bodily injury by accident;One Hundred Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($100,000.00)per employee for bodily injury by disease;with a Five Hundred Thousand and 00/100 Dollars($500,000.00)policy limit for bodily injury by disease. 11.1.2.2 General liability insurance on an occurrence form including premises/operations liability,protective liability, contractual liability and products/completed operation liability coverages,with minimum limits of liability of One Million and 00/100 Dollars ($1,000,000.00) for each occurrence,One Million and 00/100 Dollars($1,000,000.00) for personal and advertising injury, including bodily injury, sickness,disease or death,with a One Million and 00/100 Dollars($1,000,000.00)products and/or completed operations aggregate, and a Two Million and 00/100 Dollars($2,000,000.00)general policy aggregate. A per location general aggregate limit endorsement is required if the insured has operations in more than one location. 11.1.2.3 Completed Operations and Products Liability as well as Contractor's Liability coverage insuring the indemnity agreement in this Contract shall be maintained for two (2)years after Final Payment. Certificates of insurance evidencing this coverage may be submitted on an annual basis. 11.1.2.4 Contractor's professional liability insurance in an amount of not less than One Million and 00/100 Dollars ($1,000,000.00) in the aggregate. 11.1.2.5 Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards: X(excavation), C (collapse),U(underground). In addition the policy shall be endorsed to insure against liability for damage resulting from blasting or pile driving operations, undermining and for damage to underground pipes and utilities caused by digging with mechanical equipment. 11.1.2.6 Automobile liability insurance for all owned, leased, non-owned and hired vehicles. The minimum limit of liability shall be One Million and 00/100 Dollars ($1,000,000.00)for each accident, combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage. The policy shall include auto contractual liability coverage. 11.1.2.7 Renewal certificates shall be addressed to and filed with both the Contractor and the Owner at least thirty(30) days prior to the expiration date of required policies. 11.1.2.8 Unless, in particular cases, the Owner and Contractor shall agree otherwise in writing, the Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to maintain insurance conforming to the provisions of this Paragraph 11.l and shall not allow its Subcontractors to begin work until the insurance has been so obtained and certificates of insurance approved. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to provide a 30-day written notice to the Contractor of cancellation to any of the insurance coverages the Contractor shall maintain on file all such required Certificates of Insurance, which file shall be available for inspection by the Owner upon request. 11.1.2.9 Umbrella liability insurance with a minimum occurrence and aggregate limit of Five Million and 00/100 Dollars($5,000,000.00),providing following form coverage over the underlying general liability,automobile liability and employers liability insurance policies described above. 1J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\do600447646.DOC;1) VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PRO.IEC"C Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1991, Ed.) Doc. #5188 Page 1 I 9.8.1 Delete the period at the end of the first sentence and add the following: in accordance with all applicable permit and certificate requirements for occupancy. 9.8.5 In the fourth line, after "portion thereof', insert: (subject, however, to a list of minor uncompleted or uncorrected items which do not interfere with Owner's use and enjoyment of the Project(the"Punch List"), and with respect to which Owner shall withhold 200% of the reasonable cost of fully completing same as determined by Architect). 9.9.4 In the event of partial occupancy before Substantial Completion as provided above, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in making available for the Owner's use and benefit(at Owner's proportional expense)such building services as heating,ventilating, cooling, water, lighting, telephone,elevators and security for the portion or portions to be occupied,and if the Work required to furnish such services is not entirely completed at the time the Owner desires to occupy the aforesaid portion or portions, the Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to complete such Work and/or make temporary provisions for such Work as soon as possible so that the aforementioned building services may be put into operation and use. 9.11 Neither the issuance of a Certificate for Payment nor any payment(including final payment) nor any partial or total acceptance or occupancy of the Project by the Owner (either in writing or de facto)shall constitute approval of any costs included in any Application for Payment, or an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall any inspection or test by the Owner or the Architect be an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.3.3 Delete in its entirety. 10.4 Insert the following: Contractor warrants that it shall not bring, or cause or allow to be released, any hazardous materials or substances on the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from a breach of the warranty in the preceding sentence if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death, provided that such claim,damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (including the Work itself)and except to the extent that such damages, loss or expense is due to the negligence or other fault of a party seeking indemnity. ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE 11.1.1 In the first sentence,following the word"maintain"insert the words"in an admitted carrier rated A VIII or better and to which the Owner has no reasonable objection, and with Owner, its agents,servants,employees,partners,officers,directors,and Lender named as additional insureds." 11.1.2 Delete entirely and substitute the following: The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 with respect to the Contractor shall include the following: {J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\004447646.DOC;I VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 10 9.2.1 Delete and replace with the following: Attached to the Agreement as Exhibit is a Schedule of Values. At the time of each Application for Payment, the Contractor shall indicate(a)by percentage and dollar amount, the extent to which each such portion of the Work has been completed, and(b)the dollar amount of each payment which is allocated to(i) labor and materials incorporated into the Work,and(ii)materials not incorporated into the Work. The Schedule of Values shall be used as a basis for the Contractor's Application for Payment,but for no other purpose. 9.3.1 Delete the clause in the first sentence before the comma, and insert the following: "At the time and in the manner set forth in the Agreement,". Add the following at the end: Each Application for Payment shall be on forms such as AIA Document No. G702 and G703 or such other forms as Owner's Lenders require and shall be accompanied by(a) a certificate from the Contractor stating the amount of all unpaid bills owed by it to Subcontractors, to suppliers of materials, and to laborers for work and materials, or either, furnished for the purpose of performance of the Work, and(b) a certificate addressed to the Owner's Lenders in such form as such Lender(s)may require. Contractor agrees further to deliver within ten days of request by Owner, from each such Subcontractor, supplier or laborer a writing which acknowledges receipt of all prior payments due and acknowledges that such payments are payment in full(less any stated retainage)of all Work previously performed or supplied by each such person which writing shall, if requested,be in form sufficient for recording. 9.3.4 In the event a lien is filed or claimed against the Work by any Subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, laborer or supplier of materials,the Contractor agrees immediately to bond such lien or to cause such lien to be discharged. If the Contractor shall fail to do so,the Owner may, at its option and at the expense of Contractor,bond such lien or cause it to be discharged. 9.3.5 The Contractor warrants and guarantees(and agrees to provide certificates to this effect with each Application for Payment)that title to all Work,materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have passed to the Owner when incorporated in the Project. The Contractor further agrees that the submission of any Application for Payment and the Contractor's receipt of payment thereof shall conclusively be deemed to waive all liens with respect to said Work, materials and labor to which the Contractor then may be entitled. 9.3.6 The date of Final Completion is as specified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 9.3.7 Unless the Contractor asserts in writing in the Application for Payment that an unpaid claim of a Subcontractor, laborer or materialman is in dispute as to the amount owed, the Owner shall have the right to pay any such unpaid claim by check payable to the Contractor and the claiming party, and any such payment shall be a discharge of an equal amount of the Owner's obligation to pay Contractor hereunder. 9.7.2 If the Owner is entitled to reimbursement or payment from the Contractor under or pursuant to the Contract Documents,such payment shall be made promptly upon demand by the Owner. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract Documents to the contrary, if the Contractor fails to promptly make any payment due the Owner or the Owner incurs any costs or expenses to cure any default of the Contractor or correct defective Work, the Owner shall have an absolute right to offset such amount against the Contract Sum and may, in the Owner's sole discretion, elect either to(a) deduct an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor from the Owner,or(b) issue a written notice to the Contractor reducing the Contract Sum by an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled. PACLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1} VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc.#5188 Page 9 AMW 5.4.3 Each subcontract shall specifically provide that the Owner shall only be responsible to the subcontractor for those obligations that accrue subsequent to the Owner's exercise of any rights under this conditional assignment. ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1.3 Add the following language at the end of this subparagraph: "Except as permitted in paragraph 7.3 and subparagraph 9.7.2,a change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time shall be accomplished only by Change Order. Accordingly,no course of conduct or dealings between the parties,nor expressed or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work, and no claim that the Owner has been unjustly enriched by any alteration or addition to the Work whether or not there is, in fact, any unjust enrichment to the Work, shall be the basis of any Claim to an increase in any amounts due under the Contract Documents or a change in any time period provided for in the Contract Documents." ARTICLE 8: TIME 8.1.1 Add at the end: The parties agree that the Contract Time as hereinabove defined shall be the date of completion and time for performance for the purpose of Chapter 254 of the Massachusetts General Laws, unless an earlier date for completion has been specified in the contract of the person asserting any rights under Chapter 254. Ank 8.3.1 Delete and replace with the following: If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by any act,omission or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by an employee of either, or by a separate Contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, unavoidable casualties, or by labor disputes not directed specifically at Contractor or its Subcontractors, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time not exceeding the length of such delay as the Architect may determine. No extension of time shall be granted because of weather conditions except in the event of hurricane, earthquake, or other similar,unanticipated catastrophic condition. Such conditions shall be wholly at the risk of the Contractor. Any additional cost of operations or conditions shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall use its best efforts to avoid all labor conflicts, especially those between union and nonunion employees. All direct and consequential losses due to labor disputes except those of a national, state, or city wide nature and not directed at Contractor or its Subcontractors shall be borne by the Contractor. 8.3.4 The Contractor hereby agrees that it shall have no claim for damages of any kind on account of any delay in the commencement of the Work and/or any delay or suspension of any portion of the Work,whether such delay is caused by the Owner, the Architect,or otherwise. The Contractor acknowledges that its sole remedy for any such delay and/or suspension will be an extension of time as provided in this Article and an adjustment of the Contract Sum, solely if necessary to reflect an increase in prevailing wages between the schedule of prevailing wages attached to the Agreement and the prevailing wages in effect on the date of commencement of the Work. ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION AWk 9.1.1 In the first line, change the word "total" to "maximum". IJ:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1} VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc.# 5188 Page 8 AVW life or property. No claim for extra cost or time on account of such instructions or orders shall be valid unless the Contractor has so notified the Architect and Owner,before proceeding and has received the further written order to proceed signed by the Architect and Owner. 4.3.10 Delete in its entirety. 4.5.1 Delete the words "Any Claim,"at the beginning and substitute: "Any Claims) which, in the aggregate, involves a sum which is less than$100,000..." 4.6.1 Delete the words "Any Claim,"at the beginning and substitute: "Any Claim(s) which,in the aggregate, involves a sum which is less than$100,000..." 4.6.4 Delete and replace with the following: Any arbitration, dispute resolution or litigation arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents may include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect, its agents,employees and subcontractors, and any of Contractor's agents, employees or subcontractors. 4.6.7 Notwithstanding the provision of Paragraph 4.5.1 or 4.6.1, in the event of any dispute(s) or Claims) involving alleged monetary damages in excess of$100,000, in the aggregate, such dispute or claim shall be resolved by mediation in accordance with Section 4.5.1 or by arbitration in accordance with Section 4.6.1 only if the parties agree in writing to submit the matter to mediation and/or arbitration. If the parties do not agree to submit such matter(s)to mediation and/or arbitration or if the matter or claim, in the aggregate, involves alleged monetary damages in excess of$100,000, either party shall be entitled to commence and prosecute litigation with respect to such matter in a court of competent jurisdiction. 4.6.8 The Contractor shall include the provisions of this paragraph 4.5 and 4.6 in all subcontracts into which it may enter for labor to be performed on, or materials or supplies to be delivered to,used in, or incorporated into the Work, and if any dispute subject to arbitration under this Paragraph 4.5 involves labor,materials or supplies furnished under any such subcontract, the rights and liabilities of the Owner, Contractor and all Subcontractors who are or may be involved shall be determined in a single proceeding. 4.6.9 Any Claim which is not subject to arbitration or mediation hereunder may be resolved by an action at law or in equity. In connection with the foregoing,the Owner and Contractor hereby consent to the exclusive jurisdiction of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and waive any challenge to the venue or personal jurisdiction of such courts. ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3.2 The Contractor shall require in its written contract with each Subcontractor that, in the event of any default by the Contractor under the Subcontract which would permit the Subcontractor to terminate such Subcontract, or in the event of the termination of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right,but not the obligation, prior to termination of the Subcontract and after notice by the Subcontractor to the Owner of such default or, in the case of termination of this Contract, after notice by Owner to Subcontractor of the termination,to assume the Contractor's rights and obligations under the Subcontract arising after such notice. Owner shall �Owk have the right to review each subcontract to ensure compliance with this subparagraph. (J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0(06\doc\00447646.DOC;II VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 7 Aaft�. circumstances, this provision shall not apply except as to loss, damage, liability or expenses incurred prior to such recording; and further provided that this indemnification shall not apply to liens or legal proceedings which are the result of the Owner's non-payment in violation of the Contract or default under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.2 Add at the end: The Architect shall visit the site at least once per week throughout the Construction Phase and at such other times as is necessary to resolve issues impacting on the construction or progress of the Project or to meet with governmental inspectors. The Architect's consultants shall visit the site at appropriate intervals during the installation of mechanical and electrical work, and as otherwise required during the Construction Phase of the Project. 4.2.3 Insert at the end of the last sentence: Nothing in this subparagraph shall relieve the Architect from liability under any other provision of the Contract Documents. 4.2.6 Delete the phrase"in good faith"and replace it with"in the exercise of due professional diligence." 4.2.13 Delete in its entirety. 4.2.14 The Architect,upon completion of the Work, shall obtain two(2)sets (plus additional copies required by the government agencies) of original as-built drawings from the Contractor,and/or Computer Assisted Drawing("CAD")versions of same if requested, and shall review such drawings for completeness. The Contractor shall be required to maintain current as- built drawings for the Work during construction and they shall be furnished to the Architect in good condition for this purpose. The Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, upon completion of the Work, all Operations and Maintenance Manuals,warrantees and reviewed testing reports. These shall be reproduced and furnished by the Contractor(upon which the Architect may rely) and should indicate all deviations from the Contract Drawings, the exact locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,permanent surface improvements and the final selection of approved alternate products. 4.3.4 In the first sentence, delete the phrase"or(2)-unknown ... Contract Documents", and insert the following in its place: "and were not discoverable upon the inspection by Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 3.1.2 or 3.2.1 or otherwise pursuant to this Agreement". Also, add at the end: The Contractor will make no claim for additional payments,extra work, allowances or damages,because of minor variances from conditions encountered during construction which should reasonably have been anticipated and which require additional labor or materials or cause damage. A Change Order may be issued pursuant to Article 7 only for major unforeseeable or concealed conditions which require additional labor or materials or cause damage. 4.3.6 Add the following at the end: If the Contractor claims that any such instructions or orders whether oral or written, by drawings, or otherwise, involve extra cost or time, and such instructions or orders are not accompanied by a written acknowledgment by the Owner or Architect that extra payment will be made or time extended, Contractor shall promptly so notify the Architect and Owner in writing with reasonably complete supporting documentation and shall not proceed with the Work until it has received from the Owner and Architect a further written ,,Mw order to proceed, except as provided in Paragraph 10.3, in the case of any emergency affecting J:\CLIEtiTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;II VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 6 3.13.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary easements or permits for construction operations and for any use of public sidewalks or streets as necessary, and for all safety protection measures in connection with same. The Contractor shall arrange for access to the site by utility companies and shall coordinate such access and related activities with performance of the Work. 3.13.3 The Contractor shall confine its apparatus and storage of materials as required by the Architect or the Owner, and as required by standards of good care,and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with its materials. The Contractor shall keep the corridors and exits clear of debris and materials at all times, to provide for normal and fire egress from all buildings. The site shall be maintained in a safe and orderly condition at all times. 3.13.4 Contractor shall take all reasonably necessary steps to prevent unauthorized access to the Work areas, including but not limited to,posting appropriate danger signs and other warning against hazards, and erecting and maintaining adequate barriers and lights in all locations where materials are stored or the Work is in progress. The Contractor shall take all actions reasonably necessary to inform occupants and visitors to the site of any potentially hazardous conditions or other matters potentially affecting their safety. Without limiting the foregoing, the Contractor shall at a minimum comply with all applicable OSHA requirements. 3.13.5 Without prior approval of the Owner,the Contractor shall not permit any workers to use any existing facilities at the Project site including,without limitation, lavatories, toilets, entrances and parking areas,other than those designated by the Owner. Without limitation of any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall use its best efforts to comply with all riles and regulations promulgated by the Owner in connection with the use and occupancy of the Project site, as amended from time to time. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner in writing if, during the performance of the Work, the Contractor finds compliance with any portion of such rules and regulations to be impracticable, setting forth the problems of such compliance and suggesting alternatives through which the same results intended by such portions of the rules and regulations can be achieved. The Owner may, in the Owner's sole discretion, adopt such suggestions, develop new alternatives or require compliance with existing requirements of the rules and regulations." 3.15.1 Delete period at end of first sentence and add the following: and shall cause the site to be cleaned on a daily basis. Delete period at end, and add the following: ,and shall completely clean the site of the Work, removing and disposing of all construction-related debris and rubbish, and cleaning all Work-related stains, spots,marks, dirt, mortar smears,plaster smears, paint smears, caulking smears, and other foreign materials from exposed surfaces inside and outside the buildings and within the contract line limits, so that all such surfaces, including all glass and metals, are clean and in"as good as new"condition. 3.18.3 The Contractor shall hold the Owner harmless and indemnified from and against any and all loss, damage, liability or expense by reason of the filing of any notices of contract or liens by the Contractor's subcontractor or suppliers or the commencement of any legal proceedings against the Owner or the Project site seeking enforcement of any of said notices of contract or liens including,without implied limitation, the Owner's attorneys' fees and expenses for removing or defending against any of the foregoing, and for enforcing this indemnification and for bond premiums or other expenses for removing such liens or notices of contract; provided, however,that, if the Contractor causes to be issued and recorded with the appropriate Registry of Deeds in any instance a lien bond pursuant to the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 254 and if the effect thereof is to nullify any such lien,under such {J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;II VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 5 3.5.2 The warranty provided in this paragraph 3.5 shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty set forth in the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law. 3.5.3 The Contractor shall procure and deliver to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner,no later than the date claimed by the Contractor as the date of Substantial Completion, bound together with a Table of Contents thereto, one set of all warranties required by the Contract Documents or applicable to the Work, endorsed by the Contractor. Delivery of the same by the Contractor shall constitute the Contractor's guarantee to the Owner that the warranty(s)conform to the Contract Documents and that the Contractor has performed the Work in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7.2—In the second line after the word"orders", insert"and all other requirements". Add at the end of this subparagraph: "The Contractor shall procure and obtain all bonds required of the Owner or the Contractor by the municipality in which the Project is located, or by any other public or private body with jurisdiction over the Project. In connection with such bonds, the Contractor shall prepare all applications,supply all necessary backup material and furnish the surety with any required personal undertakings." 3.10.1 In the second sentence, after the words "appropriate intervals, " insert: (but at least monthly) 3.11.2 Failure of Contractor to maintain full and complete record drawings at the site shall be a default for which Architect shall be entitled to withhold approval of requisitions for progress payments. 3.12.1 Delete and insert the following: Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,performance charts, and other data which are prepared by the Contractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor, and which illustrate some portion of the work. Printed brochures will not be accepted as a substitute for shop drawings, although they may be required separately or in addition to shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be submitted by Contractor to the Architect in form of one reproducible sepia transparency and three blackline prints per drawing and one printed brochure in packets of 6 copies each. In each case submittal shall be accompanied by a transmittal form describing the submittal. The Architect's criticisms and comments shall be made on the sepia copy which shall be returned to the Contractor. If resubmission is required by the Architect, the Contractor shall then promptly(but in no event after more than five working days)make the necessary corrections on the original drawing and resubmit a sepia transparency copy of the corrected drawing. Approval of shop drawings by the Architect and/or engineer is for general conformance to the Contract Documents and does not represent approval of dimensions,quantities,or methods of installation. The Contract Documents remain the controlling factor in case of disputes over installed items or work and the Contractor shall replace any item or work which does not conform to the Contract Documents at its own expense. 3.12.3 Add the following at the end. Samples shall be submitted in duplicate unless otherwise specified or directed by the Architect. Each sample shall be clearly labeled as to its material, type or make, manufacturer, size or gauge,and other pertinent data as approved or directed by Architect. {J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;II VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. # 5188 Page 4 2.5.1 The rights stated in this Article 2 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents are cumulative and not in limitation of any rights of the Owner granted in the Contract Documents or at law or in equity. 2.5.2 In no event shall the Owner have control over, charge of or any responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,notwithstanding any of the rights and authority granted the Owner in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Delete and insert the following: The Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully inspected the Site and all existing improvements constituting the Project, has ascertained for itself the conditions which are likely to be encountered during the performance of the Work, including the likely existence and extent of concealed conditions, and has carefully studied and compared the Agreement, General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and Specifications, and all other Contract Documents and agrees that such documents appear, to the best of its knowledge as an experienced contractor,to contain all items necessary for the construction of the Project, in accordance with good and generally accepted construction practices as well as with current, applicable building and similar codes. Contractor shall promptly notify Architect and Owner in writing of all errors,omissions, inconsistencies or other problems it may discover immediately upon discovery and before beginning the Work. Contractor further represents that the Contract Sum includes all suns necessary to complete the Work other than costs attributable to concealed conditions not reasonably ascertainable through careful and diligent investigation of the Site. Upon the receipt of any Change Order, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Drawings and Specifications as they relate to the work requested, and shall report to Architect and Owner any conflicts with current building and similar codes,or inconsistencies with other Contract Documents. 3.2.4 The Contractor shall not proceed with any Work not clearly and consistently defined in detail in the Contract Documents, but shall request additional drawings or instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor proceeds with such Work without obtaining further drawings or instructions, it shall correct Work incorrectly done at its own expense and shall be liable to the Owner for the other damages resulting from incorrectly proceeding with the Work. 3.3.4 The Contractor shall attend weekly job meetings (and such other meetings as may be requested from time to time)with the Architect and such other persons as the Architect or Owner may from time to time wish to have present. The Contractor shall be represented by a principal, project manager, general superintendent or other authorized main office representative if requested by the Owner or Architect, as well as by its own superintendent. An authorized representative of any Subcontractor or sub-subcontractor shall attend such meetings if the presence of such representative is requested by the Architect or Owner. Such representatives shall be empowered to make binding commitments on all matters to be discussed at such meetings, including costs, payments, change orders,time schedules, and manpower. Any notices required under the Contract may be served on such representatives. 3.4.3 Add at the end: and, subject to applicable contractual or collective bargaining restrictions, at the reasonable request of Owner the Contractor shall remove such persons from employment in connection with the Work. ,JACLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;Ii VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. #5188 Pace 3 ..f, 1.1.8 The Drawings are diagrammatic only, and are not intended to show the exact physical locations or configurations of work. Such work shall be installed to clear all obstructions,permit proper clearances for the work of other trades, and present an orderly appearance where exposed. 1.1.9 The terms `directed', `required', `permitted', `ordered', `designated', `prescribed' and words of like import shall imply the direction, requirements,permission,designation or order of the Owner through the Architect; the terms `approved', `acceptable', `satisfactory' and words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Architect; and the terms `necessary', `reasonable', `proper', `correct' and words of like import shall mean necessary, reasonable, proper or correct in the judgment of the Architect. 1.1.10 Provide. When the word `provide', including derivatives thereof, is used, it shall mean to fabricate properly, complete,transport, deliver, install,erect, construct, test and furnish all labor,materials,equipment, apparatus or appurtenances and all items and expenses necessary to complete properly, in place,ready for operation or use under the terms of the Specifications. 1.1.11 Knowledge. The terms `knowledge', `recognize' and`discover',and their respective derivatives, and similar terms in the Contract Documents as used in reference to the Contractor, shall be interpreted to mean that which the Contractor knows,recognizes and discovers in exercising the care,skill and diligence required by the Contract Documents. The expression `reasonably inferable', and similar terms in the Contract Documents, shall be interpreted to mean reasonably inferable by a contractor familiar with the Project and exercising the care, skill and diligence required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents. 1.1.12 Persistently. The phrase `persistently fails', and other similar expressions as used in reference to the Contractor,shall be interpreted to mean any combination of acts and omissions which causes the Owner or the Architect reasonably to conclude that the Contractor will not complete the Work within the Contract Time for the Contract Sum or in substantial compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents." 1.1.13 Lender. The Lender shall be such institutional lender, if any, designated by Owner by written notice to Contractor from time to time." 1.5.2 After the phrase "visited the site,"insert:had an opportunity prior to bidding to submit requests for information, and 2.2.1 Delete in its entirety 2.2.3 Delete the words "and utility locations for the site of the Project,". 2.2.5 Insert at the end. The Contractor's cost of reproducing, for use by the Subcontractors, all copies of the Contract Documents reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work shall be included in the Contract Sum. 2.4.2 The Owner through the Architect shall have the right to reject the Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents as determined by the Architect. Add the following Paragraph 2.5 at the end: "2.5 Extent of Owner Rights Aw 1J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447646.DOC;1) VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc. #5 188 Page 2 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS MODIFYING GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AIA DOCUMENT A201 (1997 EDITION) Regarding NORTHAMPTON STATE HOSPITAL VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT The following supplements modify,delete and/or add to the"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,"AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition(the"General Conditions"). Section numbers below not currently in the General Conditions are to be inserted in the appropriate order. Any capitalized terms used and not otherwise defined herein shall have the meaning given in the General Conditions or in the Owner-Contractor Agreement between Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 1: CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 Add the following at the end: In the event of a conflict among the Contract Documents, except as otherwise explicitly set forth in the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall be construed according to the following priorities: First Priority: Modifications (with later date having greater priority) Second Priority: Owner-Contractor Agreement, with Exhibits Third Priority: Supplemental General Conditions Fourth Priority: General Conditions Fifth Priority: Addenda to Specifications or Drawings(with later date having greater priority) Sixth Priority: Specifications Seventh Priority: Drawings (sometimes called Plans) In drawings, large scale details shall govern small scale drawings. All indications or notations which apply to one of a number of similar situations,materials or processes shall be deemed to apply to all such situations,materials or processes wherever they appear in the Work, except where a contrary result is clearly indicated by the Contract Documents. In case of conflicts between drawings and specifications, or within either of the documents themselves, the work shall be done by the method of highest quality and greatest expense,unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect upon request for information by the Contractor. (JACL1E`TS\rea\071246\0106\dac\00447646.D0C;I} VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PROJECT Supplemental Conditions to A201 (1997 Ed.) Doc.#5188 Page 1 low §14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any lime,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §'14 4 2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; ...... .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; .......... . . and :... .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the ::.... .. ::.:.. ...... •'.`...: - . .notice,:terminate till existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further su contracts and purchak orders. 4:14:.4,31n,c tse;df such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work exccutecl,turd costsjricun-ed by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on iht Wot(t.poCexectited Pow AIA Document A201 i°—1997.Copyright rit 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1952,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1927 and 1997 by 7'e American institute of Archilccls. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA`Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International T,iiaties. 39 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and grill be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 1537.12 on 08/0612004;nder Order No.1000126387_t which expires on 6129105,and is not for rasale. User Notes: ?612ej; 93) Alli by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period.whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of die reasonsclescribed in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon-,,even days' wti n notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery, •inchiding reasonable overhead,profit and damages. ..§.14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Stibcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work tinder contract With the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations tinder the Contract Documents k4ith rcspecf'fb matters important to the progress of die Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional ;d ys'writtc notice mtht:Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided da Section 14.1.3. 14.2 TERMINATIM BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 'r -ni 'rate the Contract if the Contractor. §14.2.1.:T.Se Owric,,may J persistendy or:r6peatcdly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper ra teiial, 2 I s to.make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective M.1 . a g 1i(irl .b etweerf the Contractor and the Subcontractors; ree, ts .3 ."Pc6istdntlyr disregards laws, ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of apublic authority having A -or juriMiL ion 4 - odierwise LS guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Document,,,. . : - :14.2.2 W,he n arfy�bf.the aboydxmsons exist,Lhe Owner,upon certifi cation by the Architect that sufficient cause V if * 'h n;:rii without prejudice to any other right,;or remedies of the Owner and after giving the A4fti I .... St YMAC. action Contractor and the Contractor surety,if any,seven clays'written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor 6 'or rights of the surety: 1:` lake postetision of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and attiercon owned by the Contractor; iie66tit!asiiinirient of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and ..3 ."ff6ish fhe Work by Aihat6v6r reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor,the QW66fshall.furnish to the Contractor a clet,filed accounting of the costs incurred by dieOwRer in finishing'the Work. §14:2.3 When the Owner terminates'the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor sbaLl not be entitled to receive further pa.y mdtt'unti.1 the Work is finished. 2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for thc.Akhitect's servic6s:aridexpenscs made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,sfh ,(d excess;shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,its the case may be,shall be certified by the Archhecl.,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract, §14.3 SUSPENSION'BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14-3.1 The Owner may.without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14,12 Tbc'CohLract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspcn%!ort,c1d lay or interruption as clescri brd in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No d6justinem shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is. was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 dial,an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the ConLract. AIA Document A201 T4_1997.Copyright &1911,1915,1918,1925 1937.1951,1958.1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1975,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAb Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or disiribullon of this AIA" Document,or any portion of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to ahe maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AiA sohware at 15:37:12 on 0 810 6/2 00 4 under Order No.1000126387-I which expires on 6/29105,aid is nor for resale. User Notes: Q812457193) §13.5.3 If such procedures for tesdrig,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary 6 Klfh d - ��u: ilure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services an expenses khUbc-at die Contractor's expense. 13.5.4:,12equired certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract 1:17o 'ents.be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. cur n §:1'3.5.5 If the Architect.1s.to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the :Architect wiltdo so proffiody and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. p: 15,6 Tests to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid conducted pursuant iunrcascnabl&d6lay rn Jbt.W ork. 3..6 INT.MIST -Jdue��hditi paid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is dtic at §13.6,1:Pa'�riicb ts unpaid in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to Mime at fhe place where die Project such rate.as: ic.pkirties:m2.!Ly:a9rce upon is located. §13 7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 0 Conti-actor: �.13.71A:s*wderi'the' Wit 1 'Before..'Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Subst11nfial.Q6tiiplcLiOo,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged caul c,of.4.ctidn shall be deemed to have acm tied in any and all events noL later than such date of S -:CopleLion: ubstaotfii.l. ffi Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act Completion and prior to issuance Of the final 6 15 It to the relevant date of Substantial emyrring su s!�qucrf 6! Certafic ale,for Payment,any applicable statute of limitation.,shall carrimence to run and any alleged cause U-4clidri shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later tha n the date of rjf:the final Certificate for Payment;and 00. -3 After Fan for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of : ;ihdo SWIJ tbc na I Ccrtilicate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to 6�: i ..........i'd bd any alleged:6-ads.4i'araction shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act:&ilaiture to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under ...... ..... �S&Cio-63.5,the date-otany correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor tinder - 'ti 10,2,o r the date of actual commis commission o f any other act a r failure to perform any duty or t d : . : - .ci I b;i iiiation by. whichever occurs toast. Lhetaritractor or Owner, a ws. ARTICLt'i4:;,..TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14A TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR §.14 A.11-The.Contractor ma..Jterminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days nactor or their agents or employees or any -subco T through no ad'or-6ult iif�66�C �tractor or a Subcontractor,Sub otlier,persons or cnitLicti perfcirrnln 9 portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any cir the lollbvVing reason' .......... lssrt<ince of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to bC:ko d; _PT9, L.such a declaration of national emergency.2 an act of'governmen . ,cncy which requires all Work to be stopped; 3 ' . .because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Puyment and has not notificcl die Contractor of .. ! it reason for witbholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not In d act Documents;or a e payment on a CeitiEicatc for Payment within the tirrie stated in the Contract 4 promptly,upon die ConI.I.11CIL01"s request,reasonable e Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor p, evidence its required by Section 2a.1. §14-1.2 The Connctor may terminate the Contract if.through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor cc their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work tinder direct or indirect contract vnth the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions oF die c^tire Work 1%1.1963.1966,1967.1970,1976.19,37and i997 by Tl'e AIA Document A201 1997.Copyright C 1911.1915,1913.1925,1937,1951,1958, 37 American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International TrcX1 as. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA': Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and mi.ne prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sohware at 08/06'2004 jnda_rder No.1000.26387_1 which ex ores on i F129/05 ands not for resale User Notes: Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12 3.ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK § 19,311 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract ...Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contrzul Sum wil)'.lie reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been i-nade. -ARTICLE 13 .MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §.13.1 GOVERNING LAW §'13.1.1 The Canttact'sballbe governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. §13.2 SUCCESSORS ANR,ASSIGNS §.13.2.1'r tic:Owit er a 6&,,Coarac. for respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to the oiher.party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other party, n respect locoven tnts',lgreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section:13.2 hcither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other:.Tt etithet party atteanptsfo make such an assignment without such consent.that party shall uevertheIcss remain legally respoinsible for,'all obligations under the Contract. :11312.2 The 0wnez may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing ciinsEr�eton;finaac`ineor the '.toject.In such event,the Lender shalt assume the Owner's rights and obligations antler die Contract;Documents;The Contactor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such .issignment. :. §13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE §13A 1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the.f or!entty or to as officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by regttiIered 9c cert�tediriail[o the last business address known to the party giving notice. §J14♦'TIGHTS ANO:REMEDIES §13:41 Duties and obligations ilnpo�ed:by the Contact Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder sliiill Vie;n.addrtron to and not a'turil ataon of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §:13.4 2.N..o.acbodo.r failure to:aialby;thp Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a light or duty afforded Ehern under the COritrtct norshill such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a VP .breach thcrenrider,except as may be specif tally agreed in writing. §13.57ESTS AND INSPECTIONS §13.5.1 Tests,inspection)and;cpprovais of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances,rules,regulations or:drders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless ottiei w;5e prolzdcd,the Contactor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an irldependerit:testirlg laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority;and shad) bear all related costs:gE tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shadI bear costs of tests,inspections or approvals which do not become requirement~until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. §13.5,2 If the Architect.Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work regUil additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.'_,the Architect will,upon written autliorization from the Owner,instruct the Contactor to snake arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may he present for such procedures.Such cosh,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ?J 1911,1915.1918,1925,1937 1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976:1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAg Document is protected by U.S.Copyright taw and International Treaties. „o Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`Document,or any portion of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 1537:12 on 08I0Ft2004 unter Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6129105.ands not lot resale. User Notes: (3812457193) §11.5.2 Upon the request of any person Oren Lity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish it copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12,1:1 If it portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination'and be.replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §.12.1.2 If a portion of the'Work has been covered which[hc Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered_the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If Mich Wort.is io�accotdatce with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, cot•i'ectidn Half be:ut.ihe Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor.ad::which event the:Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12 2 CORRECTION OF WORK: §12 21 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12 21 j'fhe Conir tclor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requtrcmenLs of the Cotitrlict Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not 6brimAt d,:in0t11]t&bt completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections 1111d"C(t c'nsation ar the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractors expense §12 2 2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL QQMPLETION 122.11'Itt edditlon to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of SubtitarlGal Completion oEthe Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties "established ihder Section:9.9:1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Document~, my of th:e Work,is fodM Fo be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor sh 111 coiiect itpromptly lifter;receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously .0yea the Cortt[4alor t written acceptaricapf such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of theieondrtion During':the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and.give rite Contr actor,an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights Lo require I.correction b} the Cont�eclor edit i.0 iii ikc a claim for breach of warranty.u the Conti aclur fails to correct nnncontortrti W etk:w-ithin a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,:the Owner may cocrec:it in accordance with Section 2.4. §12 22'2 The.one-year.pen'd for"correction of Work shall be extended with respect,to portions of Work first perfonned after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the;Woric §1222,3 The one-year pericid for:correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuarit to this Section 12.2, §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requiremenls'of did:Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The.Contractor, shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of W OL which is not-in-accordance with the reyuiremenLti of the Contract Documents. §12.2:5 Is?otiing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of Omitation with respect to other obligations which die Contractor might have under the Conuruct Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation ul'the Contractor to correct the Work:and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract AV AIA Document A2D1 T} —1997.copyright Z)1911,1915,1918.1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963.1966.1967.1970.1975.1987 and 1 9S7 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Tnis document was produced by AIA soltware at 15:37:12 on OB/orV2004 ender Order No.1000126387_1 which exp;res on 6129105,and is rol for resale. x312457193) User Notes: §11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special,causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such ins rAltice,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. §1145 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both.at or adjacent __. ..._ ,to site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property i nsurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuri it the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section _. ....:.......... 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate policies shall provide thiswaiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.4.6 Before fan exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that in?tildes insurance c0...?ages required by this Section 11.4.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions,;defimtlons,6kblusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its Limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' prior written ood6c has beed given to the Contractor. §11,47 Wliivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their tiubcontraciorti rib=sub6p.pt.r. tors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect,Arcbitect's consultants separate contactors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontructors, i agents ancl:etnpiDye s;:ifor;dama ges caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtaiined pilis6ant t5 Lb is Sectiozi:11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the.Architect;Architects consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcoitttactors tub-subcant actors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally.ccquired for'V lidity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall provide such w<uverti of subrog�ition by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a Amok person or.end yf Gwen thtiugt that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise'did not pay`th e rnsiirmce premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not die person or entity had an insir iblc interest m:the:p�operty damaged. §114.8 A'losstnsured:under Ownerti_property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to:lie Qwnertrs fiduciary forfh&.insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any apPlic ible:mortgagce clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shallpay Subcontractors theirjust shares of insurance proceeds'received by�the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for viilili.t�,shall rcquire`$ubcgiitractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.441f required in wnturg:b�a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond forpropecperfonTiancii of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the Owner shalt distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with an arbi[ration',award in whrch:&,use.the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If after such loss no other special.agreement is diaide`aqd unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged propertysi be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article §11.4.10 The Owncras fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle it loss with insurers unless one of die par-ties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to die Owner's exercise of this power;if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall,in the.case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution of insurance:proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. §11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of die Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on Lhc date of execution of die Contract. AIA Document AM ru—1997.Copyright V 1911,1915.1918,1925,1937,1951.195x,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The Amencan Ins!lute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. j14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08106/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6129i0S.and is no!for resale. User Notes. (38 12457193) §11.3.2:To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner, E Corit6t!f6r and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the ioceedsof such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.3.3.7he Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or otber persons or entities as :;.::additional insureds on the Contractor:,Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1. §11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE §14.4.1 Lrnlets otheravttit.provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the juriscliction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's iask"all-risk' or equtval6re:policy form in the amount or the initial Contract Sum,plus value of subsequent Contract _aiodificati&is iacl cost bl.'materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a rd0.hicementcostbasis without optional deductibles.Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless gtherwtse.pCOVtdedin:lhC'Coiitract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are t enefct lies of Stich rnsuranz until .final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or e;iuty other than tfie Owner h s'.an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, .whicltever;is Iater::TIus msuruice shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractors errtd Sub- _`subconrrictory to the Ptajee r:'.': §11. itl Property ittstuance tih*I be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy Form and shall include,without limitation, ilatiurancegatttst the perils of rice(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without dupltcattcjn of coverage theft etindalism malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm,falsework, fesbng and'tartup;'tempot&a :Vuildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any tipplreable legril`requtrt tncgis;'and shall.cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services Mind expanse~required ati a result of such insured loss. §11 4,12.Tf the Owner does trot intend[o purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages m the arTtoutit:described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to ;comincticement.'.of tha .........ork.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the CantricEor,Subcantraecorsr ind Sub subcontrtctors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof sh JJ be charged to t{re Qwier.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or inai�tain insttrarice as described above without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attrtba lifble thereto. §11 41�:II Lhe pr�pe ify itiaurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductible~ ..... §11 41 4 This', insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of tats Work . ,..:...his',. in tiansat. §11.4.1.5 Pak al ozCupdncy or iitie in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company wi or companies proltdrngproper(r insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or .. otherwise 1'he,Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and.khaitt,.without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that avquld cause ettncellaiion,lapse or reduction of insurance. §11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance requited by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during 'I! intitalli tips acid!until Final acceptance by the Owner,this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractor in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. §11 4:3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property clue to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however cawed. AIA Document A201 rM—1997.Copyright rg 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976.1967 and 1997 by The American Institute of Archilects. All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and international Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08.106/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6129/05,and is not for resale. 4 User Notes: §10.5 If, without negligence on die part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owneit Shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §106'EMERGENCIES _ _... ... § 0.6,11.In an emergency affecting safely of persons or property,the Contractor shall act. it the Contractor's diticretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by - M the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7. _ :.. , ARTICLE 11 :INSURANCE:AND BONDS §11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §111.1 The Contractar=shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in'the junsiliaion in which the Project is located.uch insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims i;et forth below which n ay arise out of or result from the Contractors operations under the Contract and for which the Con tract&inay,lie iegallydiable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Snbcontraclor or by anyone directty or iddi ectly_einployed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts;any of them may be liable: 1 cl ttm0UndIt workers'compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable.to the Work to be performed; 2 .claims fir&.... ges because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of dhe ContriuctRr%einployees; 3 cl aims:Pprd6nages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any penon other than the Contiiictor's employees; 4 cl mti ford attages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; 5 claihis ford images,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property;anelirdi.ng loss of use resulting therefrom; fi. ctarinti roc ddmages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; " T -b.Wrnslor.bOdily� injury or property damage arising out of completed o er bons;and 8 . cl<ums;utvbKV g contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractors obligations under Sectlori3;18. §11 12 The irisurmcefzeq,utrod by Sec tioFU.11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in die Contract Dociiinettts dr tiajuired:by Jaw whichever coverage is greater.Coverages,whether written on an occur�ence,or:cl,armti-iiiade basis,,41,tll be maintainer)without interruption from date of commencement of the Work unlrl d ttc.of final p ryrncnl and tertnimation of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. §1111,3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the"Work,.Thesc certific ttes aiid the ins irance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afYorded tinder the:pohcles'will not be canceled or allowed to expire until a least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner.If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after finsthpayment and are.reas6ri tbly available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with EhC finW:Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.In.fonnation concerning reduction of coverage on account ofrcvised:'limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Conlractor,:with reaso'n'able promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. :411.2 OWNER'S IIABILITY INSURANCE §11.2.1 The Owner sball be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. §11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE §11,3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's.Contractors and Amhitcct's.vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract.UnLcss otherwise required by the Contract DocuinenLs,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any odzer liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The lninin:um limits of liability purchased with such coveraee shall be equal to the aggregate of the lirnits required for Contractors Liability insurance under Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. AIA Document A201 W—1997.Copyright p 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright law and International Treaties. SL Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 0810612004 i nder Orcer No.1000125337_1 which expires on 5'29/05,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3312457193) 10.2.3 The Contractor shall.erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection.including posting danger signs and other warnings against ha7ards. p rQlrib gating Safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 1 g..a t A When use or sto rage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are : necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under .111p Civ ion of property qualified personnel. 11" 10.2,5 The Contractor.shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insit r-ance required by.tb.6.Cc n Lract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.12 and 10.2.1.3 caused in wholc or in par'.tq by thm—CUntractor,it Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed or by- by'any of t - hdt�1 A c acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under 11 '!pyb.oe for whose omissions of the Owner or Architect or Sections 10�11.2 and;-10.2;1.3.except damage or loss attributable to acts or at 'an one dit.�;dtl�.:or indirectly. i;mployed by either of tlierrL or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, Y. ftd:not g:tffi&jj: e'IoAht'Lbt mult or'f negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in .:addi.tion1o.tb.c.Corttr.a6tbrN-ibbiigzition,,under Section 3.18. a re sponsible member of the Contractoll organization at the site whose duty shall b the prd on.:-o f:I'r q idents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise design titw by by lh o d-C ntr act6 r in writing to the Owner and Architect. -§I 10 1 1..7 The Contractor aiiall not:load or permit any part of the con as to endanger its construction or site to be loaded so siatery J.103 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .4. i, .autiql will k inadequate to pre �3'11;1f:r.cas�orl Liz 10 ab, vent foreseeable bodily injury or death to pers; resulting:.. - -or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), . r.,ub%'tancc,including but not limited to asbestos from lr.,iroateddl o �s' 7:;. ......... encountered. 1 6 site *C tar,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,:6 . -by:Qid* ontrac immediately stop : Is: !'Work in Jfie'-fffected*;'bY6-u a hd report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. i sop: absence of material p -1P.32:The Owner sh&-ll!obt;iiri the services of,I licensed laboratory to verify the presence or abs the : ' found to be present,to verify 6 $0bstartce#p.Qrt.e.d..-hy,the.ContractQr And,in the event such material or substance is f that:it has;IJ66n'j6ri ed.ii-,irmlei�;:':U,nl'6s':otherwi,,erequired by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in or persons or entities Who tire to perform test,,; trting�tO.iThe,Contr actor-,indArchitect. e names and qualifications. ..... ' the'pre~ n c e...-or absence of siu:c i material or substance or who are o perform the task of removal or safe vcnfyin 7:.containment:bf:s.iidti.miiLeriiiI or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in wriitirtg,�(Hting Whether or not.:cithc robas reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If cutlet the: -x*�toct;hiil bJ entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall ntractor or Ai 6 jecLion to a person or c dt�h6t.:tb w1jorn the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or tivbstance bas proposc..zn... been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner n sc tractor.The.C 6 ntrict:Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be i crea.-dinthc and amount of the Co'n'tc'wir_'C*dr"s.Yt'.is'6'6,lble additional costs of shut-clown,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be id d.i accomplished as prov-t e,. n-,Article 7. - §10.3.3 To the ftil1&s,t:cxtcntperrniLtcd by taw,the Owner shall indemnif y and hold harmless the Contractor, :-!.SLIbC0rItracE0rS,: rcliiiect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of diem from and against claims,dainagds,-)osscs and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expell is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible pr p r y the h�r .W a r tn'Lhcork itscio and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not clue to the sole negligence of a irty-sce-kiniaJodemnity. 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the Site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201T' -1997.Copyright V 1911,1915,1918.1925 1937 1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967.1970,1976,1987 and 1997 4y The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:Thl�AIA''Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Trpatii--s. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Aljni` Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be, prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08/06,12004 uriocr c-!er No.!OGO 125387_1 which expires on 6r29105.and is not for resale. User Notes: AMW the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor:ti being entitled to final payment have bed'fulfilled. 49A019cither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits p the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected .with.the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts 'withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Document,;to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed W cxpue tint ,at ICZISLMdays'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statement that the -Contractor knows of 66'.,:Wbstantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by 'Ihe Contract Documeh.ts::(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner,other data ii rig -a erit oi sit ceipL teases and waivers of liens,claims,security !_Miblisl: -p�yt of obligations,such as rc s,relew :interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such.form as may be designated by the cfo refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a er. a Subcon� r us bdrJdsati]sfactory:t6 ibibw.ne'tto indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after p -nca��4renilvdc;;the Contractor s the Owner may be compelled to pay in ay I :� :. t I hall refund to the Owner all money that d .'dischitt kirig su&Ud,'incldd9 ih all costs and reasonable attorneys'Fees. §9.1031f,after,Substaii ti-.K Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of taxe tonti .46(6?or by iskiance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall I by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the .4pon 'application ion Contract:-M& C pay,k 'dient af the Balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the 7�rema ining.-bdince'for Wokk:not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Docurnents,:and if b&dg hve been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion:(?fthe Workfbllic6mpletcd and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to ...xcrtifi6afii 6 ofstich -Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, AIW4. :cxcept'that'itshall not,constitute a waiver of claims. . .4�1.101'4, The making of Final payment shall constitute it waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising Cram: liens.Claims;security interests or encumbrances arising out of die Contract and unsettled; f : 'a I �d e e j.11 )f:0i Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or s require -act Documents. .3 :ter. d by the Conti 9.10.5 Acceptance:of Final, ayrnen tby Ibe Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a Wa vec6ftlw;-LT:19"b'Y'L'�a'tpilydCCXCCpLLhosepreviou,%Iy made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at ymept- ... ........ ARTICLE AG:PROTECTION-OFPERSONS AND PROPERTY 10A SAFETY PR ECAUTION S A NO PROGRAMS §10,1.1.!The Contractor:shall.be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and progr-ams I n:connecti'o*n::with th6.-perfannance of the Contract.. .... ..... 10.2 SAFETTOF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §110.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of.and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage injtlry:or loss to: .1 dffio oyccs on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby-, .2 the W6ik and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein.whether in storage on or off the site,tinder care,custody or control OF the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors:and .,oaicr properly at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees;shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements. roadways.StrLICtUrCS and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course Of construction. §10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders Of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from daMZ19C,injury or loss. AIA Document A20ITM—1997.Copyright Qigii,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963.1966.1967,1970,1976,1987 and Igg7 try The Arnelcan Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AI,8�:'Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 30 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Th,s document was produced by AIA sohware at 15:37:12 on W06/2004 under Order No.1000126387—I which expires an 6129105.and s not for resale. User Notes: (3812457193) §9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §,9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof .:I:V'stlfliciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work'Pdr:its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept septiraicly,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of — itemis to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §:9:8.3 L'port receipt of Ehe:Contractor5 list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or ::::designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item;whether or not iiCludctl on'tlie:Corltr<tctor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so tfiat the Owner.ean occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shaitl,beiote Issuance a[ilhe Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correctsuch item upon not liy the Arclutect..In tiuch c5ac 4he Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine;Stibst�pu tl f.ocnp lion. §SIVAA When the Work oe'deti gnated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Cerhfic<ite oFSutstanttal:Cotripletion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish re`ponsibthtteti;of the Owner and.Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work arid intitirance an#shaill Cx lire trme`Wi[hin which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certific<iEr Warrantles'rcqulreriby[hc Contract Documents shall,commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work ordesignaedportion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate;of Substantial Completion. §.9 8,5,The Ce.rlifi te'of Bubstantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written 1. !� acceptance of retie -n i6 litres assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if ..arty the:;Owner shi m4tke payinent of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shalleadJustcd fot Workabatis incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §99 PARTIAL OC,CUPARQY:OR USE The Owner miry occupy or utie any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portott rs;'dctitgnated by sepuratc agi cement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer:.a regiitred under S' ri 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.:Sueh pardk1"oecupancy or'ust may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner end''. onCr<iecor hii've accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, ret<tul<igc tf rny;security,m untenance hear,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in wrrhng:gricerumg the pe.nod fori orrcction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Docuineutti::When the Contracto:r`cons'iders aportion substantiailly complete,the Contractor shall prepau a and submit ti list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial,occupancy or use shall:nat be unreasonatily,;wi hhekl.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between thc`O.Wncr and, 'Ontrac[Or or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to rich partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work Shull not constitute:acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10:FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT §9.10.1 upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and he Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a#final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge.information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Doatments and than the entire balance found to be due the Contactor and noted in AIA Document A201 T°—1997.Copyright m 191 i.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1956.1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treatms. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the lour. This document was produced try AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08/06/2004 under Order Ne.1000126387_1 which expires on 6,29:05,and is not for resale. (;,i3 12457!1,3) : User Notes: .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor, <3 failure of the Contractor to make payrrien L4 properly to S ubcon tractors or for labor,materials or d equipment; reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract:Sum. .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor-, .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .;: ai .7 a�.pers-isfdhffai lure to carry Out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1:9.5.2 WhLri-the abo,&'r6dsons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made ror amount.,; :Pfe, 5.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS'' .. ............ --f ,f he sued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and 9.6.1 m �rc&i�c't -ci notify the Architect. Within th, L:'the Contract Docurnent:s,and shalls P:, it prq- :A 9 11.2;T� -Cor'itiftctoc„iih.a.liprorriptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the amount�aid-lld-thd ontfactiOr on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said C i'eflecffng percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of s;uthSub&6hfract& P6 '§' rtioup-1he Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, .... .. require 6 hSub&&ntr*actor :01nak e payments to Sub subcontracto rs in a similar manner. 1:9.6.3The Furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of pied 'amounts app .!�Com on Of - Licq:for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on 4c:qourq q. dons do ns.of Ifie.W.6&-done by such Subcontractor. §-9 6,4 Neither the..Qwi r:hoi Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a otherwise be required by law. shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and §9.6.6 or partial.or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner hall:not ----'6tC;!'i6CCDtancc of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. .r-........ s §9.6.T Unlc�!N-the Contractor j�yi d 6 t h67 Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments:received by the.Cciritrihotbifdr Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by :.-�thc Contractor for thosc.Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under with:the Carittactor;for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in<r ount and not.commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any l; ar r,,:acc fiduc i4ry I i ab i I ity or f 6#11 i�hil li.ty..oh the part o f the Co n Lrac for for breach o f trtw o r s h al I c n tii I le an y p ersD n or en L i Ly :...to an award of punitive diihiages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. :§9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the'AicUwct*d6es not issue a Certificate for Payment.through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Comractors Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days,after.rhe date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitratioiii,�Lhcff the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the W 0 rkuh6l'payffient of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and die Contract,SUm shall be increased by Lhe ZIMOLIrIL Of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up plus ihtcrcst as provided for in the Conti-act Documents. AOMk AIA Document A201 Ty_1997.Copyright @1911.1915.1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967.1970,1976,1987 and!997byThe Amencan Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA” Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of 11,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be z8 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sollware at 15:37:12 on 68I0612004 under Order No.1 000126387_1 which expires on 6129105.and is not for resale. User Notes: (3312457193) AOW payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material Suppliers,and reflecting reLainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. - provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the-Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations or the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orden. ........... 19.11.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay.to.a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others :Whom the Contractor intends to pay. §,9.3.2 UnlesN*.6Lherwjs6:0Tovided in the Contract Documents.payments shall be made on account of materials and i:— e.qd a .ipmed I e.I vered*.and 1. S-uitably Stored at Use site for Subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by.the ON06r":,payment-M I similarly be made for mate stored off the site at a location materials and equipment suitably s d n Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon AgroC Ll]P0ft;'ift-wnt1.venting p the Confractor.With procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such ... .. ...... matcrjaI§-9b,d:cqlf1: W fit 6j:dth6rwise protect the Owner's interest..and shall include the costs of applicable Sur" 'd transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. :T.he C that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner Contractor war.ran s time�p : ayi Th Contractor further warr�uits that upon submiLtdof an Application for no I,&6ti:jjj�rf.lji6 f nignt. C. p f4yn7c L,&.W'0 r0 r:which Certificates for Payi nenL have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shil. to thi^-b-6,4fof�ihelC6nLr-dctor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, . , ... ..1. .1. ' . * material suppliers,or other persons or security interests�br.enc.11"iadces in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,mater b fitieff I c1 i ,yteason of having provided labor.materials and equipment relating to the Work. ............. PAYMENT elk Architect,will :within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue; to:the:Ow,ner a Certi:&abefdr Payment,with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines i5 prgpe>-ly- Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in!part as provided in Section 9.5.1. p: §:9.4.2 The'iq*%Uancr,,dfi.CertiCcai6*far:Nyment wilt constitute arepresentation by the Arc hitect to the Owner, (sassed Application for Payment,that the Work ed on the Architect's evaluation Q(:t k the data comprising th he`York and h d that.to the best of the Architect's knowledge,*Information and belief,the 'w;progr c h : ess o: oint indicUed:iirl :qtiaay 6.f.the.. W accordance c:ordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are Subject to an .......... evaluati6n.of the;Work for conforinartce with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results Or and inspections L0:cbrrdction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and t0:SpCC1 G:Qualificati ons e)T d I the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further , . !-.esSc )y constitute a represerlmdon that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for.Payment.w..i..I. I not b c a representation that the Arcd tee t hats(1)made exha u s t ve or co n ti t 10 LS on- site Ln%pections a t check.Vdt'.quAULY or quantity of the Work, (2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, . ...... from Subcontractors and material suppliers sequences or procedures- :..(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received C and odier,data:requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to i.ascertain how oh:fo what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §q.5 DECISIONS-TO W if HHOLD CERTIFICATION : §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in pairs;to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the.Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be madc.-Tf the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify G',(- Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect can not agree on a revised Payment F amount,�the Architcct will promptly issue a Certificate for P, or the amount for which the ArchiLccs is ab�c 1,0 maka Such.h 1.r.ep.rus I criLations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate For Payment previously issucd,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Conti actor is responsible,including loss xsullirig from acts and omissions clesciibcd in Section 3.3.2,b(X2L1Se Of: .1 defective Work not remedied: ALA Document A201 -1997.Copyright T)1911,1915,1916,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967.1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by -e American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and ln(e,r.a Or,:]1 T c3t.'!S. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penaltle;,,3nd will oe prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 151712 on owo6/200,1 under No 1000126387_1 which expires on 6129105,and is not for resale. User Notes: ARTICLE 8 TIME §9:1 6EIFINITIONS §Sa: §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based orl one of the following methods: :1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; `.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon: .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Section 7.3.6. §'73A Uponseceipt of a,Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in .Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided irl t}ie Construction Change Directive far determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time §7 3 5 AComtt=66.n Cfiangc;Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor. ttierewlth< ncludiiig-adinstmcnt in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.Such agreemennl",ehail bc'efecttve iiriinecliately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. :§7 3 IB I ttie C ontractor dE cs':not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, chc method and the adjushhent shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and wttvtngs:`of those'petformng IhIti:Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum;:a reiisonablesafiowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and pYetieRt m such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporimg d ate.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this ecuon 1.3 6 stall be Lmited fo the following: 1 casts of,labor,,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits regiltred by agreemcnt or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; low :2 costs of m aerials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed [3 reatai cofs'of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or,others 4 cots of pici UIns for all:-bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the.Work -find 5 addtttooal costs of siipervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. I :11.3-7 The aunount of&cdilao be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease to the Contract Sum~ha -win ll be actual net cost its con by the Architect.When both additions and crechts.covertng related W ork or ti' bt d.tiitions are involved in it change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis.o f net increase.i any,with respect to that change. §7.,3.8 Pending Final detefiriniation of the total cost of it Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such clutngec,%p the:York shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change order indicating the partiirs',4grcement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in disputc;.the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs.That deteimmation of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either panty to,disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. ........... ... §7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the udjustancnts,in,the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such greeme ant tihallbe effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate ch 1n�c order. :' § T4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7A.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written order~promptly. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright 0 1911,1915,1918. 1925,19371 1951, 1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997t-/Tta American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright law and Internallonal TrcaCsrs. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA`'Document,or any portion or it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wilt ce prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:!2 on 06/0612004 under Cyder No 1000125387_1 which expires on 5,29105.ands not for resale. User Notes: t t 2457 j §6.2,2.If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by llie O:wh�r or a separate contractor,the Contractor shalt,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly r,00ft'.to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for ti=h'proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that . ........ ..... the Owner's or separate contractors completed or partially completed construction is fat and proper to receive the .- Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. §.6.2.3 The Owner shal{;be reimbursed by the Contractor for costa incurred by the Owner which are payable to a 5e.,[rate contractor becaoise of delays,improperly timed activities or detective construction of the Contractor.The _Pt _ Y . Owner shalt.be.msporisibl,e to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly tuned activities damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. §6:2.4 The Contractor shall?romptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially 6 iapteted:camtruCUori'.or to'property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. §.6.2.5.TE Owner atid:erleh tieparale contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are dcscrib6d:iftir the Contractor'd Section 3.14. §,6.3 O.W NER RIGHT:TO CLEAN UP §6 3;i If a d sprite arises timongale Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under theu`tespechve contracfti far•iriaihtaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owne'Mlly ere lr°hip and;the:Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE.7 CHANGES:IN THEWORK .§7,1;GENERAL §7.1A'Chrtn'geti an the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Catati2ctliby Chaiage Order wonstruction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the (iaiii:tataolitistated in?tliis iArticle 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §,71.2 A Change Order shtall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction Change Direc¢ve regplres agreement:by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;uli order:fora minor char g&iri the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. §7.1.3 Changes Ia the;Yi!ork shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Ccintraclorshall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive of:oidcrfor a minor'change in fE6,work. §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS §,7.2.1 A Change Order is a wriften instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating,theit agreement upon all of the following: .1 ch tngean tlhe Woi'k; .2 the arriddEt of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;kind 3.:.,ahe;extenl of the adjustment,if any, in the Contract Time. §7.-2.2 Methods ukd in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3. §7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by die Architect and signed by the Owner and Au'clittec .dirccting a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any;in the Contract Sum or Contract t Time.or.both;The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invaliclaung the Contract.order changes in doe Work:w.ithin the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions.the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of it Change Order. AIA Document A201 r"—1997.Copyright C 1311.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,19B7 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA''Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37-12 on 08/0612004 under Order No.10CC:26387_1 which exrxres on 6129105.ands not for resale. User Notes: (3612457193) §5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS §5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally.required for validity,the Contractor shawl require each Suliconti�tctor;to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by tenet of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor till the obligations and responsibilities, :including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to die Work to be performed by the Subcontractor - so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor;unless spcciFically .:Provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the ContSaictor,by the Contract Document,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shah requi e each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements wide Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall t d.avai.d. ble to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to die execution of the subcontract agreement; copies of die Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the I.- :.Sdbcontra�tor ideniify.t&thc Subcontractor term~and conditions of the proposed subcontract agrcetnent whicb may be at variance witttilie.COntraet Documents.Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of -such docui-Tents available toaheir respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §:5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS §5.4.11Etteh suk.fihtra6t ag eeinent for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided dial 1: assigpment is effective only after terminationo f the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Sec io:n 1*4.2 and:only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by noti Eying the wr Subcontractor aria Contractor in writing,and 2', asstgnmentli subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract §5 4 2 Upon such assignment tf the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor s AOW cunlpcn5ation 'haill be egn:itabty adjusted for increases in cost resulting Eroin the suspension. AI3TICLEti' CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §61 OWNERS RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION ANDTO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS §6.1.1 Tt1e Qwnet`cewerves`the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own force~ Ind tc 1vard'�separate;6dritracts in connection with.other portions of the Projector other construction or Qpeiatioii;on ll�e.tilie iSnder COndttlf)n -Of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions,;iel tied to,instiirance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contnictor claims that delay or additionati cost is _revolved becatik OT titieh fiction by the Owner,the Contractor shtdl make such Claim as provided in Section 4. §61 2 1?Vherr separate contracts are;aws.trded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations ion the sift the;term:`Contractor iri the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes . eficti scpuate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner sh tll ptiivhdeifor coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each sep wale contractor with the Woik ofthe Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other sepaaatc.contractors'and'the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when d'u-ected to do so.The .'..Contractor shat-rhake.any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual grcement:The constructor schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contrac(On'and'the:Qwiier until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to dieP.roject with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations aridto'have the tiame rights which apply to the Contractor under die Conditions of the Contract,including,without excluding others,`those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles W. 1 I and 12. §62 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owncr and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performaucc of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate die C'ontractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the ConitacL Documents. !� At Document A-201'-—1997.Copyright O 1911.1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967.1970.1976,1997 and 1997 by The American Institute at Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIRS Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Trealirs. 23 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and VIII be prosecuted to the maximum extent possl'ole under the law. This document was procured by A',A software at 15:37:12 on OW06/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 whict•expires on 6129i05,and is not for resale. ( 2457/931 User Notes: §4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants,except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect,Owner.Contractor ..abd any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any - - athcrmanner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other peronx,substantially involved in a common question of Fact or law whose presence is required if complete relic!'is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as des&ibed in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial_Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to&bitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described :therein.The:foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented+o by-parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforccabte under applicable law in any court having Jurisdiction thereof. §.4.6.5 C}9irns:and Tiriiely A:esertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all.Clatmti then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §:4.6,6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be Final,and judgment tnaybe:i 6tered.6p6n it an accordance with applicable law in any court havingjurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5:,SUBCON4TRACTOR$:. 45A DEFINITIONS §5:1:1 A Sdb6ontrii6tor as iuperson or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the .Work at thdsitc The term"Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in ntlmber-4nclrti eahs a&ibco'rjtractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" does;not iclude a sepdr,Ate'contnactor or subcontractor of a separate contractor. §5J.2 A Sub-subcontractor is.a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perfonh a 06 rt ioa ofaSYe Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documc nts as if contour in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- titibcontractnr. §52 AWARD'.OF SUBCONTRACTS ANDOTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK §5.2.1.,Unicm.otherwise staled is the.Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as practicable lifter awaid:of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons ort66Lies(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) prbposcd for mich'pri.ncipal pordoh`of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing 1. studi i whether or not the QWtier or the;Architect,after due investigation,hits reasonable objection to any such proposed pe:n(diu-or entity.i~ailEre of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §5.2.2 The Contract4 r.;tihall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timcly'.objecfion The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has:made re<'tsmia ble objection. §5.2.3 If die:Owner of Architect hats reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect bas no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased ur decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order }harp be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractors Work.However, no increase in the Contract Slim or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. AIA Document A201 r"—1997.Copyright m 191 1,1915.1918,1925,1937,1951,1952,1961,1953,1956,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 try The Amencan Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and Inlernationat Trealies. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 0810612004 uncer Order No 1000126387_1 which expires on 6129/05,ands not for resale. User Notes: (3212457193) §4.4,5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the reasons therefor and ..which:Shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. §4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 clays after the`date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days'period shall result io the Architects decision becoming:final and binding upon the Owner and :Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may be entered as evidence,litie shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concemcd. §4A.7 Upon 1 eccipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect or the Owner miry,but i 'not ofili algid to totify tht s rety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a ..:passlbilityiof i Coritraic[or 'default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety 5 staiiee=in resolving the controversy. § 4A.8 tf'i:CIiitttt relate,to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim tray proceed in accordance with:<tpphc<lbie?Law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the.AreHitect by medialia Ito r.:byarbitrati.on. 145 MEDIATION §45.1 Any Clarm atiung out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those w•iived'as provided for iri'$eetions 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days <tfler tiultnission of the m,t6 the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution:of legal.,or egmtabie'proceedings by either party. §4 5 2 1 h6 parties,chuli etidnvor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree o[ht iwise,Shell tic in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently.m:e£fect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract i and Wilh'tric Ar. edgart A€bi ration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand -for iisbitration brit;in such event,!riiediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which:tih ill be stayed pending 1?ted.i�ation fora period of 60 clays from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by tgree,rhept of;the par[iesrir•court order. §..C5 3 The par ties Shell.share tho-iriediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place whcre.t]te:Project is located unletti anothcr location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enfarccable.av seEdemeht agreemenfs in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §-4.6 ARBITRATION §4 6.1 Any Maim tubing oLil of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided fof,in;Se6Eions 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 clays• ter .. parties s endeavor to submission of 01A Claim to the Architect,be subject to itrbitratlon.Prior to arbitration,the p resolve disput6s!by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5. §:4.6.2 Claims riot resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mulutilly agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Constriction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Coau=act and'with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. §4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,end in other cases within it reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it he made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of tiinitalions as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright tJ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1 937,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute o(Archilects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAt`Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 unauthorized reproduction or distrlbutlon of this AIA"Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sohware at 15:37:12 on 06/0612004 under order No.1000126387_1 wrich exp,-res on 629105,and'.s not for resale. ;'612457193) User Notes: §4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time § 4,17.1.11f the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herei'n',shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. §4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for it Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of Lime,could not,have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. §4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an'.iicl or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible written 6'oti e'of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reason tbleVine not ekceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other Harty to irtvcst gate th~'mttter. §4;3.9.11 nnrtpnces are'statediin the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantitiez originally contemplated are m ileri fly"changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that applicators bf suchiinit pnccs to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor;the applicable uiii.t.prices shall be equitably adjusted. §4 3:9b Claims for Consegitcgtial Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consecjucntial damages artsingbbt of or relating to this Contract_This mutual.waiver includes: .1 d tmE ges incurred!by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, bu-iness and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such,peisbrtti;..and 2... dart><tge,6ncurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of persdnirel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit ,, K except anttcrpated profit arising directly born the Work. This mutu,d wancr k5-appli.cable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in acoorditoce,with Artic la:l4.Atothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of tigtiidafcd direct d un�tges,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §;'44 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS ANQ QISPUTES §4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims;including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those.arising'iindGCSections 10.3 through 10.5,shall be referred initially to[tic Architect for decision.An initial do vision by the Aichitea shall.:be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claiimti betwcen.(he Contraegsr atnd Owner arising prior to the date final payment is clue,unless 30 days have passed after the Ckiiiu h is ulcer referizd tai the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the ArchiLect.The Architect will not decide disputes'beLween the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §4.4.2 The ArchttecL':will revtew!:Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1).requ6st;a0 dihonal supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other.patriy,(2):rcject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim.(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) advise the parties that:the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the'merttti oC the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Clailm. §4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect tray,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from ci ttcr pitrty or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision:The Architect may request the Owner Lo authorize retcnLion of such persons at the Owner's expense. §4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide it response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt Of such request,and shall either provide a response on the rcqut:stcd supporting data,advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. AIA Document A20114—1997.Copyright 0 1911.1915,1918,1925.193;1951,1958.1961.1963,1966.1967,1970, 1976.1987 and 1997 by The American institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Gt) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 0 810 612 00 4 under Order No.1000126387_I whicri expres on 6129105,and is not for resa'e User Notes: (3812457193) §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests witf 1).e.made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If no agreeific*.t is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in coirip5unce with this Section 4 2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such.interpretattions until 15 days after written request is made for them. §42.12 Interpretations and decisions or the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings,When making such interpretations and initial decisions,lhe`Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not he liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rcndercd in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be Gina if consistent with the intent cxpresscd:in the•Coittr�ictDocumenLs. 443 CLAIMS AND DISPUTOS. . A4.11:0 fl.hrtron,.A Claurr is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or e :.:Cnterpr Liion of c6latractterms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to th term s of the -Contra6L The includes other disputes and mattes in question between the Owner and Contractor ansing ont of or i•elanng tOt the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to siibstantiate ClruiTis;shall.rest Nukh the party making the Claim. §4 3 2 1 uiie I nm� 9 dri Claimti'Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise;to tiitch:Claim or within 21 days after the claimant First recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is:later.Clatmti,iniist be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. §4.13 3 Coritrnuing Contrtct!Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or,rs_prgvicled In, cclagn 9:.11.'and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the ConlracE:andahe.Owncr titiil continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §4,2l 4 Chums for.Coneealedior Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are(L) subtiur(ace of olherwr`e co coaled physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Doatiments oh(2)unkntiwn phytiicahcoriditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found 1o.extat xtnd.generally recggn zed as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the ContracEDocuineiirs ;Shen noDCe by the observing party shall be given to the other patty promptly before conditions 4. :. ,;: '::fare dttiturbed ancl:in n©event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will Promptly im etiligate tiuich`:condrtions andi ff.fficydiffer materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost p1 or tune re aired for perfbrrnanceo any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the _. Contract Sum.or Conrad Ttme,oraoth.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different.froin those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Ai hitect shall do notify the Owncr and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in opposition to such dctertiination:must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision.If the conditions encountered arc: different,the Contract Sum and Contract Ti.me shalt be equitably adjusted, but if the:Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum orContract imc,the adjustment shall.be'referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Section 4'4' §4.3.5 Clammy for Additional Cost. if the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required tic Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 1(}.6. §4,3.6:U I I hC Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(l)a written interpretation&6M tie Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.(4)failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)otter reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Section 4.3. AIA Document A201TM-1997.Copyright rJ 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1952.1961, 1963,1966,1967, 1970,1976,1987 and 1997 1-/The Ame6car Institute of ArchilecLs. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`'Document,or any portion of it,may result In sever and criminal penalties,and wit!be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. T bas document was produced by AIA software at 15.37:12 on 08,10612604 under Order No.1000126367_1 which expires on 6129'05.and Is not for resale. (-81 7,53) User Notes: deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will . . ....... ...... iiot Gd:*ui.red to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of,nor be responsible for,the construction means,methmis, twhniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in . ... .... ... ........ . . . Sect.ioti 3.3.1. §4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible far the Contractors failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requiremems:of the Co.Tract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be retipomtble for acts o(ornissions of the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other ,persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4:2.4 Communications Elcilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract pocuments or when direct c6iiimunications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor sha1L endeavor lb•:communicate With each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract Cnttlmttntcaton4by'end with the Architect's consultants shill be through the Architect.Communications by aril with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with Separate coatritetorti shaltb"through the Owner. §4:2:518 sCd,an the Architects evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amotintc due Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such wriounts. §4.2.6 fhe.Archrtcct willhave authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever 1. the Architectcaligiderti:tt necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in.accordaitcC with Sections 13.5 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or comj?Iued Howevi r,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not-{o exetctsc shell aut.hgdt;y:>shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing porfions oflthe Work: §A21 27 The Archite4t will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such its Shop Drawing 'Praliicf Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with idfonmation:given and'the deli c6 n4dpt expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken with sachreasonable;promp[nes'ti v;f6 cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,Contractor or yeparllte contrletora finale.allowing sufficient trine in the Architects professional judgment to permit adequate review Review of such submitta s is:not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other detalls'such a dimentiions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or perfortmance of cquiFmcnt or all of whuch.reinain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations undcr'Scctioris 3 3 3s5'and 3 1.2.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless olhcrwne specific dt state.d 6?:Ihe Architect,of any constriction means,methods,techuiques,sequences or procedures.The Architccts.approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which die item ...... Is a companenL . .. §4.2.8 The.Archrtcct:will prepare Change Orders and Constriction Change Directives,and may authorize minor changes in the Work'as#ovided in Section 7.=4. §.4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and -elated documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §4.2.10 If Lhe Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying DUE the Architects responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shit]]be as set forth in an exhibit to be incurpurated in line Contract Documents, AIA Document A201 TM-1997,Copyright©1911, 1915,1918,1925, 1937,1951,1959. 1961.1953,1966,1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The American fnslitule of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 a Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by A'A software at 1537:12 or 0870672004 under Oster No.1000126387-1 which expires on 6129/05,and Is not for resale, User Notes: (382457193) §3,16 ACCESS TO WORK §116.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and .Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress whcreyer:located. ............ §3.1:7`ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS §3.1,7.1.The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for in:fci'ngement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account ffi6rcof,but shall not be responsiblc for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufactuter:or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are.contained in Urawi:ngs,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if the Contractor hiy reason td:believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a Patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly:furnished to the Architect..:'. §318 INDEMNIFICATION 5:3,181 To the fullest cxtentperrrdtted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or expenses are not covered by 1'r0jccl M mageiYietlt 11'n&6ctive Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3; the Coaliacfor,shalllndefnnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect, Architects consultants,and agents and '.employee of any fsf them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees wising out o.f or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or ezpcnse is.ittribiitable to,.bodily,:njury,sickness, disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible properly :(other thatii the W.oik itself),but:only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor an'yone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or notstich claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indenutiFied hereunder. Such.ob.ligad.on:sball not:be:construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would plherwt5e cxl,t as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §318 2 fn.claims:agattnt any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, aSubcontiactor,an�rone elirecd or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the ndemnzf c ttrory olingatt..... er Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, eotnpentiiidon or benefits,p�iyable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker;'compensation acts, dtLabilit;j<'bcneitacts or other employ acts. ARTICLE,4 ADM%ISTAATION OF THE CONTRACT §41 ARCHITECT; §4.11 The Architect t5:thc person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture.identiffed as such tdthe',Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents its if singular - in nliinlier;The term"Architect'rn6i6s1he Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 412 "I�uhe�,respan1s hues and Lmitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents Shall not be restticted;:modii-ied or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be Unm.iLsoni bly withheld. §41.3 if the eihploymenl of the Architect is terminated, dic Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractorhas:ao reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former 'Architect §4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §421 Tlie Architect will provide administration of the CDnU"aCt as described in the Contract Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment.is clue and(3)with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.The - Architect'wilt have autbority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contruct Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. §4.2.2 The Architect.as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervads appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owncrinformed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against.defects and AIA Document A201 T'"-1997.Copyright C 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA`Document is protected by US.Copyright Law and International T-ealies. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be preseculed to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 02JM2004 under O,cer No.1000`26387_1 which ex-fires on 6129iO3.and is not for resale. (33-24571 93:. User Notes: §3.12.8 he Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of ci p nsib City for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings;Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect to wriiiig of such deviation at the time of submittal.and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific ......deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall nut be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submitals by the Architect's approval.thereof. §;3:12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or cimil tr su.iinli: is,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the 1Jscnce of sttcliwniten notice the Architect's approval,of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §3.12.10 The Contractnr'shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architectttre tit:englneer [g unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of theWork or.uniess the Contrictor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's resporS[brlites for eotiStfttcttotl means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be requrded to pro tae pro idtistonal services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or p certificauons.by d esign rofessional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor byalie Cgnfi icON currents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria [fiat such services iriu5t atitify,The Contractor shall cause such services or cer tifications to be provided by it properly 1[ceitscd design professionatl,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations, specifrcahons,cEttirindons SE op Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings and other submit[titi related Co the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such,professid ial s written Ooroval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adegti�tcy ac cu>acy and completeness of the services,certifications or approvals performed by such deslgri proCEssionals:provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design cnleria LbaCSticli secvicc mtktit soli fy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action`on 56bmitlals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information gtvet and the dies[gn concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adegiiacy:of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. §3.13 USE OF SITE §313.1 The Contractor Shall coatiae operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances,permits and the Contract Docuients,and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §314 CUTTINGAND PATCH ING: §3 14.1 The Contractor shall be'retipontiible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts Fit together properly §31.4.2 The.ContractUi.sh-Una damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed constntction'of the Owner or,separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such constriction,or by o.excavation.The Contcrictorsliall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor "except with:written.con rot'of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably withhc1d.'TI1&Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's C'o.nsent to Cutting oc'oi:herwise altering the Work. §3.15 CLEANING UP §3.15,1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall.remove from and about tbo.Project.waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to die Contractor. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright C 1911,19'5.1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1 967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA° Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Documenl,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08/0(42004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 629/05.and is not for resale User Nctes: (3812457193) communications shall be confirmed in waling.Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. §3 i0 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits cut re t'under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the - Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious,and practicable execution of the Work. §-3.10,2 The Contractor Shill prepare and.keep current.far the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is eoordinalydlii th thu.Cdutractors construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.... §310 3 The Contractor Shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owiier.and Architect. `. §311 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 31i,i The Cbdt rctoY 4i"al n aintirin at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications, Addettda;ChFtngeOrders'and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selectidris made`during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and 4 F1 suntl€u requ�rerJ subm>tt�ifs.Tbetie shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for : '.submittal to the Owner'upon boll letion of the Work. '§312 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES §312.1 Shop Drawrng�are driNings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contr tctar or a Silbt.ontractor Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of ..., §.312 2product.pdt t areallustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and other.tiifocmaLion.furaishecI by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. qw- §3.12 3 S unples,,,are physical exaiiipleti which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish .at tnda d$by which the Work will;bcltid' I §312 4 Shop Driwtrzg8,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Document~.The purpose of their sub mittal is`lo demomtrata for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Dacurrients;tkie.way by wEuch t(>elCorttjdc[orpropases to conform to the information given and the design concept exprcSacd un lhe;CoriLact Docntrsdh&Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. -Inforuuatlonal submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents: which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without tct7on;:: §3,12-5 fhd:Conlractor~hall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents wi h [etisonable pro:mptnc8 find in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contriialors,Submittals which are not market(as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. §'2.1 2i613y<ippravin,and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Conu•actorhas determined and verified materials,Field measurements and field construction criteria relatiLd thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information curtained within such submittals withthc requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until Lhe respective submittal has been approved by dir Architect. AIA Document A201 Tu—1997.Copyright 0 191 J,1915.1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1956,1967.1970,1976,1967 and 1997 by American Institute of Archilects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. S Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penallles,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was procuced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 0&106:2004 urd-:,0 do No.1000126387_1 which expires an 6129105,and is not for resale. User Notes: §3.5 WARRANTY §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the Work4ill be free from defects not inherent in the quality required orpermitted,and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and authorized,may be considered defective. The Contractors warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal.usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish.satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 16 TAXES - §3.6.1 The Contractor's hall;pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally ca..ted- hen bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. §37 PERMITS;FEESAND NOTICES §3.7.1 Unless:otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other pe ibits and'governmental fees,licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and cottipletion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally regt(ired.when bids ar xajdeived or negotiations concluded. §3.7.2 The Crzntractor sh ill cpmply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders of public auchorihcs applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7:3 It is not the Contrabfbrs responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with dppl,cabJc,laws,stahttcs 0rdirxiinces,building codes,and rules and regulations.However,if the Contractor observes (hau porti iiis of the Cobtracrpocuments are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect Aaftk arid:Owner in writing„and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. § VA!f the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to taws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules.and':`iegill ations.withotitsuch notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility!Cor�uch:Work.and shall:btw—the costs attributable to correction. §-3.8 ALLOWANCES §3.8.1 Th6 Contr2c(or+hall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances:shalt:bc sup amounts for such mounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but:Jhe Conlriictor'shall not be regIttired.to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection §3:8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: 1 allowaitcc�shiiJl cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required=t1-s less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractors cos Ls.for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and other,expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but nog iii the allowances; .3 whenever costs arc more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances tinder Section 3.32.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. §3:8.3 Materials<111d equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. §3.9 SUPERINTENDENT §3.91 The Contractor shall employ it competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the project sire during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor.and cornmunicsuions given to the superintendent shall be its binding as if given to the Contractor. lmport,tnt �► AIA Document A201 T'+-1997.Copyright C 1911.1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American ins:lute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA''Document,or any portion al it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and wlll be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 1537:12 on 02J0512004 under Order No.1000125387 1 wh&expires on 6/29105.and is not for resa'e. User Notes: (3812457193) Work.as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of : drsco�rcring errors,omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,any errors,inconsistencies or ::omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such farm as the Architect may require. §3:2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the _. _.... Architect.but it is recoepized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractors capacity as a contractor and notus a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The ..,Contractor ta;not requited to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws.statutes, :•otdinances building codes and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor 6.atf..be reported promptly to the Architect. §:12.3 2.3 If:the-Cohtrnetor:_beheves that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions is ued.by the Archile�i:in tespbnse to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.i and 3 2':?;t#ue Contractor shall.make Claims its provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the Contractor fails to perfarri :the obliga€lons:erf:Sdc6ons 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as wouldawc be eii`.avotded'.A the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Atchiti ct for diirages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences bictwe ri field measuremcnts or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error inromtstency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. §3 3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES §13 C6hirltctor shrill supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Conttackor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences n and[irocedures'rind for coordiii iting all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents gave other tipecilic 1ntitFuc:Euons concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction iinciins, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the lobs[e`afety thekcgf a id 'except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such :.means;Imi lhods,.taehniques sequences or procedures.If- r the Contractor detemines that such means,methods, techn q ies sequence`yr procedures may:aot be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner inil Architect zind shaii iot proceed 4 tRhfhat portion of the Work without further written instructions from the ::.A{chitect-If thc,Contractor n theri:!unsEutted to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or proccdu eti wil.hout:accepLance of cbkiiiges proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any rt Ulting 10sr cif datna�e. §3 3 2;The.Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subconkractor,thud th6r agent~and employees;and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or or behzilf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.33 The Contractor shrill be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to detertminc that such portions tire in prosier condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS §3.4.1 Unlars gther,dise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay fur labor, materials eqiiipmerit,tools,construction equipment and machinery, water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner.after evaluation by the Architect and in-,ccordance with a Change Order. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor:s employees and other persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to therm. AIA Document A201--1997.Copyright ®191).1915.1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963.1966.1967,1970,1975.1987 and 1997 c/T'--w American Institute of Archilects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is projected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08'06/2004 urder Oder No 1000126387_1 which expres on 6,29/05.and is rot for resale. User Notes continuation of the Work.After such evidence has been furnished,the Owner shall not materially vary such Financial arrangcments without prior notice to the Contractor. §'.2.2:2)except for permits and fees,including those required under Section 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall.secure and pay for necessary approvals,casements, .._...assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. _§2.2.3 The Owner shall hirnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall,be entitled to rely on the accuracy of itiformation'furratshed.by;tlic Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of die Work. §2.2.4 Information orseivices required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with rcasottalblc proms pesti Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under thi.Owners cofatrol shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for Bitch tnttirm`aaon ot._services. §2.2,5 I7iitcss:'othetwis ptoyided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such copie of Dniwtng5 and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. § 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHY TO STOP.THE WORK §23.1 If the:IContrac[gr fats`,.to!correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract DocumentsasircgtTired:by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Doctifeas,:the Owner may;issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the partof the:Ownerto exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, exce.pe to the extent'required;by Section 6.1.3. § 1.4.:dWNER'SRIGHI'TO'CARRY OUT THE WORK §2.41'1 Ifthe Contractor defaiflts or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fail~:within a.Kven day period afterrece:ipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such dcfaiiiltor neglect with drhgenc_.;nd promptness,the Owner may after such seven day period give the Co.ntr<aclor.a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within it dhree-day period.If the Contractor within such tJ>ree.day perrodafter receipt of`such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, tlic;Owner rnaj Without pt judice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies.In such case an appropriate Change Order shall:be'issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost,of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's addition tf nervtces made necesti vy by such default,neglect or failure.Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter clue the Contractor are.not suffie-Itta to.cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 GENERAL ::.... §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as iE singular in number.The term"Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §313 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Conudct.or by tests, inspections or.approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. §3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR §3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before slitting each portion of the Work.the Contractor shilll carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright C 1911,1915,1919,1925,1937,1951,1958.1951,1953,1956,1967,1970,1976.!987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 12 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wllf be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sohware at 15:37:12 on 08/06/2004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 529!05.and is not for resale. User Notes: (3912457133] §1.3 CAPITALIZATION §1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of 1111 1 lidred articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American institute of Architects. 1°.4 INTERPRETATION §1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all" and"any" tiid'articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 41.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §:1ZA The Cgn.tract 1)6tttents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the Owner or Contractor or 1.:both do not sigh all Lh6:Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request, §;1.5.2 Execution of Lhe Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, bicome,generally:f<aitiU r with Local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal oiJticrvatianti vvitfi regtniemctik9 of the Contract Documents. § 1.13 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE §1.8:t:Tlic Drawig� Spa t 1Czcations and other documents,including those in electronic form,prepared by the Arclzi.tect and:tlte'Arahiiecf t consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contrdc(or ts;ilescnbed ,Tic Cotitrtctor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcoatn<ictoF or rniitenal 6f.equipment supplier shall,own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,Specifications and other document~prcPare'd b' the Architect or the Architects consultants,and unless otherwise indicated the :. Architect<andalic Architect's.consuitants shat!he deemed the authom of them and will retain all common law, at<itutory.and other reserie,d,rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractors record sc t,shall be:returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of 100o* the Work The D awrnks,.Specifl.cations and other document,prepared by the Architect and the Architect's i consullanii'and tttercpf furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by,the Conttaator or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material.or equipment supplier on other hro3ects='or for alidtlrons lo''Lhis Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the O .0 Arcbitect and.the.-Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or eqf i.Pi- e.scipph.e ace authcri7�d to:use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,Specifications and other documents:preparisd'by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the ,::execuCion,of their Work under tb Contriict Documents.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the tit itulory copyright h 9gc.e,if any shown on ft Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Arch itect anal the,art fiitect:4 consultants.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other natrpos6s in ebnnection calif 11As:Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Argil'.fe&x' consultants',cbpycght~i or'bther retierved rights. :.:ARTICLE 2 OWNER §21 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the.pertio6 or entity identired as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Document~asfif singtilarin number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to.bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. !Except as otheivathe fxrovided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner" means tht Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner Shall furnish to the Conlz-actor within Fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information - necessary:and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Sucb information sh,,dl'.include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usaially referred to as the site,and the Owners interest therein. § 22 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER §2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Wank and LhcreaRcr, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that Financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under Lne Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or AIA Document A201 TO—1997.Copyright®1911,1915.'.918,1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1963.1966,1957.1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA`'Document is protected by U.S.copyright taw and International Treaurs' 11 Unauthorized reproducllon or distribution o1 this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This documenl was produced by AIA so`tware at 15:37:12 on M0512004 under Order No,1 000126337_1 which expires on 6/29.'05.and is nol for resale. User Notes: 1;3i ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS §1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1 1.11HE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The`Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement), - Cooditioris of the Contract(General.Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued.prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, ihe!Contr ctor's.bid oc:por ions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). §1.1.2 THE CONTRACT::.` Thd Con Cract,Documm&form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated a'gieement bciween thep<utiev hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral fhe Contr act may be aitended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to'creatr li contaaciusil relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Contractor;(2)between the Owner and a Surbcootractor or:Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and Architect or(4)between any persons or entitte9:6 ther than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcentent'ofiabligalions under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.0 THE WORK The term.'Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or partially completed'and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by -Am Contractor;to f ilEII.the.Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Projcct. §1:1.4 THE PROJECT fhe.Prolcct is'thc total Construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or'd:part and wluch tray include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. §1.1;5 THE DRAWINGS:: The Drawing ;ue the gtaQb e and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of'the Work;generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams. §1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS -flic_SpeciFica[ions aresthat:portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirement,;for materials, equipment,systems;standardsaind"«orkmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §'1,1.7 THE PROJECT.-MANUAL The.Pr cct Manual is a volume�assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample form~,Conditions of the Contract and Speci(ications. §1:2 CORRELATION'ANp INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.2.1 The intent.gf.the Contrict Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion.of.the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Document~are complementary,and what is required by one shall be ins binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable From them aL5 being necessary to produce the indicaled results. §12.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles..and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. *e1,, AIA 0acumenI A201'"—1997.Copyright (9)1911,1915,1918.1925,1937,1951,1956,1961,1963.1966.1967,1970.1976,1987 and 1997 by The Amencan Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Al A" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 l7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Thrs document was produced by AIA software al 15:37:12 on 0 6/0612004 Linder OrCer No 1000126387_1 which expires on 6!29;05,and s not for r=sale. User Notes: (3212457193) �irw 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8. 3.14.2.4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 23,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, ,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1.8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3,11.4.6, Wn teii;I>tecpretatians 12.2.2, 12.2.4r 13.3,14 4,2.11;:4:2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders Wrft i Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9.12.1, 12 2, 3.52, 14.3.1 as ............................ ....... .. ... .. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright Q 1911.1915,1919,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1363,1956.1967,1970,1976,1997 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected'oy U.S.copyright taw and international Trealles. 9 Unautharized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wili be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:37:12 on 08/05/X04 under Order No.t00C 126387_1 which expires on 6129105,and is not for resale. user Notes:3;12e;793) TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Subcontractor\,Work by CONTRACT :T.2 2,':3:: 2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.12, 14 Tests and Inspections Subcoiifractual Relations 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.21 4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.83,9.9.2, 5-3,5.4,91-3.1.2,91.6,9.10 10.2.1,1.1.4.7,11.4.8,14,1, 9.10.1,10.3.2, 11.4.1.1,123.1,13.5 14:2:1,14.3.2 TIME Submittals 8 .::1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4;2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,92, Time,Delays and Extensions of 9.8,9.9.19 103;9:10.3,11.1.3 3.2.3,4.3.17 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.45,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, Subrogatiou;:Waivers oC;; 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.32 6:1.1, 11.4.5:':114 7 Time LimiLti Substanhnl GompleHQn:`, 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 3 1 1 8 1 3 &23:,-9-.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 42,4.3,4.47 4.5,4.6,52,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, Stilistantzal C.omplenod Deftnition of 9.10,.11.1.3, .11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10,12 2,13.5, g•$•1:': 13.7, 14 'Substitutioa'of Suhcontrtolorti Time Limits on Claims 523;5 4 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4-5,4.6 Suli titiitton:of Archrtect Title to Work 9.3.2,9.3.3 Suistitutionti.of Mdtctiuls UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF 3'12;351;7.37 WORK $0_5ubcoi7Lract6,r'Det.ini4on!bf 12 5:1.21 Uncovering of Work Subtiurfa(ce 00171 14ons - 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions Successors and Assigns 4.3.4,8-3.1,10.3 1.3 2 Unit Prices Supecuitendeut 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 3.9,;10:2'& ....... . . . _ Use of Documents Supervtston:and Construction Procedures f.1.I, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 1 2:2,33;3.4 31 ':1:6;4:2?,4.1 7,4:3`3;'6.13, Use of Site 6 2'4,:7:13;73 6,8.1 8.3.1,9;4? 10 a'2, 14 3.13,0.1.1,6.2:1 Surety ;>, •: Values,Schedule of 4 4.7;5 4'1.2;9 3 5 9;'10 2Y .10.3,143.2 9.2,9,3.1 Su�cry Consentof Waiver of Claims by the Architect :9.102 9:16:3;: 13.4.2 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Contractor .... 2:2:3 4.3.10,9.10.5,11.4.7, 13.4.2 Suspension.by tlle.Owuer for.Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Owner 14.4 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4,11.4.3, 11.4.5,11.4.7, Suspension of the Work 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 143.4 5.4.2; 14.3 Waiver of Consequential Damages Suspension orTertnination of the Contract 43.10,14.2.4 4.3:6,5 4 1:1;I 1 4.9,'14 Waiver of Liens Taffies 9.10.2,9.10.4 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation Termination by.the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 43.10,.14.1 ' Warranty Tai. ation by the Owner for Cause 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.5.3,93.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4,12.2.2, 4.3.10,5.4.1:..1 .14.2 13.7.1.3 Tcrminatioli of the Architect Weather Delays 4.1.3 4.3.7.2 Termination of the Contractor Work. Definition of 14.2.2 1.1.3 Written Conscot AIA Document A20111-1997.Copyright QJ 1911,1915,1919,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1956,1957,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved, WARNING:This AIA£ Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treacles. 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion alit,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent passible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sotlware at 15:37:12 on 08/06/2004 under Order No.1000126°,87_1 which expires on G/29105,and s not for resale. User Notes: (29 12457193) Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Contractors Submittal~by Owner and 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5 Architect 1. ! Perniits'Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.102,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,92,9.8.2 2 2,37 3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and PERSONS AND PROPF,RTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor -..OF ... .. 3.12 10 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.152,4.2.6,4.34,4.5,4.6,5.3, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 10:3.L 1222. 12.2.4,13.4,14• PCOduct Data.`:.Definiioh of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 112.2 2 3.17 Product Data 11x1 Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration 311 3.121:4:7`J: 4.62 Progress hi>d imlj. Safety of Persons and Property 4.2.2,43:.3;52 98;991 T41.4 10.2,10.6 Progress Paymettts Safety Precautions and Programs 3;:13..6; 14 2.3 3.3.1,43.2,42.7,5.3.1,10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Project a 'cLimtsottdf the Samples,Definition of 112.3 Project IVI:ut tgement Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Lsurance: 3.11,'3.12,42.7 1 113 Sampl es at the Site,Documents and PrbJectmatinua Defin>tton..... e 3.11 1:1.7 Schedule of Values PrglccL: anu tis 9.2,9.3.1 Schedules, Prolccl RtipresenGthveS 1.4.1.2,3.LO,3.Constniction12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 �F a 10 Pcopet t}')nsuraiice Separate Contracts and Contractors 1025:.1;1:.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, PXt.-MCTION O'F P RSONS AND PROPERTX 11.4.7, 12.12, 12 2.5 Shop Drawings, cflnitton of D � ' ' Regulations and Laws 3.12.1 A2:10,3.1-3 4'1:.l 4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples qp 9.64,9.9.1 10 12 IL.1, 1:1::4, 13.1; 13.41 13.5.1, 3.11,3:12,42.7 13.5-2,A16,14`- Site,Use of Relecti6o of Work 3:13,6:1.1,6.2,1 Site Inspections !Releases and VJaivetti of Lienti 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1.4.2,4.3.4,9.422,9.10.1, 13.5 9 IO Site Visits,Architect's RepresentaEtoils 422,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2.9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 3 12.6 6 ?,;8 2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1. Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Represent,tltve5 Specifications,Definition of the 2.1.•1,3.1 2 3 9,4 1 1 4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6 _ i3.2.1 Specifications,The Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1, 1.1.61 11.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.1 L,3.12.10,3.17 4.4 4;5,4.6 Statute of Limitations LRetipnsibiltty.for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3; 12.2.6, 13.7 .1.3.2. 3. 4 2.3 4.3.81 5.3.1,6.1.3.62,6.3,9.5.1. Stopping the Work l0 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.. 14.1 Rr t i nage Stored Materials 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5.9.9.E 9.10.2:9.10.3 6.2.1.9.3.2. 102.12, 10?.4, 11.4.1.el Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor.Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 1.5.2.3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS AIA Document A2D1 rM-1997.Copyright ®1911,1915.1913.1925.1937.1951,1958,1961,19113,1966.1967.1970,1976,1967 and 1997 try Tne American Institute of Architects. Ail rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and Internalionai Treaties. 7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA soiiware a 15:37:12 on 08105!2004 under Order No;OM25387_1 wrdch expires on 5!29105,and is not or resale. l3;,,f 2:571931 User Notes: Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.6,2.1..1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2.3.8.1,3.12.10,3,14.2.4.1.2, 1.1.3,1...1.6.1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.213.8.23,3.1273.13, 4.1.3:4.2A,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4,5.4.1, 3.15J.412.6,4.2.7t 5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1.8.2 2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.33,9.5..1, 10.2.1.. 10.2.4, 14.2.12 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2,11.1.3, 11.3.1,11.4-3, 11.4.10, cans.-Methods,Techniques,.Sequences and 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 132 2,14.3, 14.4 Procedures of Construction Owners Financial Capability 13:T�1.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 jv-1 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 'M6chanicsLien Owner's Liability Insurance _4:.4.8 11.2 Nlediation Use In. Owner's Loss of sunince 44:1,445,:4':46,4.4:8;4:5,4.6.1.4.6.2,3.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3 'Khior Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors -1 6;�:7.1,7.4 1:.,1;1,3.12-8 4 2.8 4r. , , 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2,14.2.2 :M1SCEL1LA'N* EOUSJP.ROV1S1ONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work ... 2.4,12.2.4.14.2.2.2 M.odifid�idohs ID i of Owner's Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to (6:thd:Cobtradk.-,: Award Separate Contracts '10 32,,11� 6 .4 V 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Nonconforming Work,Atcepumce of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 9:616,9A3:12 3: 14.3 Nonconforming Worlr,MIniecdonand Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract . 20,'2.4;:3;5,1;426x6.25:95;£,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2 12.2;;1, 13 -1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications AMA NoLt6c:. and Other Instruments of Service rij 14 3 2-314:1�j;.3:7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2A,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 ? -5 - :9 9.10, 10.2.2: 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 4. -5 8 4. -'6 '' 1 .7 .. 1 ..,....... 14.16 12.2.2,i: 12.2.4.13,3,13.5.1,13.5,2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6,9.9,11.4.1.5 Notice, ntien . ....... Patching,Cutting and 0-4: -4 4.8, .:2.3,,2.4,3.3.;I::3 9.�3,.12,:.9;3.12.1 3�. 4.6.5, 3.14,6.2-5 511,9.2t2i 10.2.2, 10:t�: 11.4-6, Patent~ 12-2.2,12.2,4_133-1.:-14 ........ 3.17 :.:Notice of T&sL1,ng:and'Ihsij6cfions Payment,Applications fur 13.5:1 13.5.2 a- 4.2.5, 7.3.8,9.2,9.3:9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8-5, :.Notice'toProceed 9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, L4.4.3 8.2.2 Payment,Certificates for :.Notices'Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.17 9.10.1, e I -2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7 9,10.3, L 3.7, 14.1.1.3,143.4 Observations,Con Lm.p.tor s: Payment,Failure of 1.5.2,:3-2,3J.3,4.3.4:: 4.3.6,9.5-1.3,9.7,9.103, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Occupancy l.l. Payment.,Final 9.6:6,.9:.-8,:ti*i.5 4.2.1 4.2.9.4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1. Orders,Wiiifen 11.4.5,12.3.1. 13.7,14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.1.'1,2.3,3.9:,43-6,17-,8.2.2.11.4.9 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 13.5.2. 14.3.1 7.3.6.41 9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 OWNER Payments,Progress -2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5:9.10.3,13.6, 14.2.3 Dclinition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Owner.-Inforrmition and Services Required of the P,1y1T1cnt!S to Subcontractors 2.1.2,2.2.3.2.1:3.12.4,3.12.10,42.7,4.3.3;6.t.3. 5.4.2,9.5.1.3.9.6.2.9.6.31 9.6.4.9.6.7;11.4.8: 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.21 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.92.9.10.3, 10.3.3: 14.2.1.2 11.2, 11.4. 13.5.1, L 3.5.2: 1,11.1.4;14.1,4 PCB Owner's Authority 10-3.1 AIA Document A201 1997.Copyright (0 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,195',1958,1961,1963.1966,1967,1970,1975.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 6 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sohwale a[15:37.12 on O8)0612004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which extores on 6129105.and is not for resale. User Notes: (3812457193) 1.1.3:1.2.1, 12.2,22.37 2.2.5.3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Insurance,Project Mauagement Protective 3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,622,7.1.3,7.3.41 Liability 8,2 9 5;.x.9.1, 10.2,10.3, 12 2,14.2,14.3 11.3 Extensions of Time Insurance,Property 311,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.11 10.2.5,11.4 9..5.1.,.9.7.1, 10.3.2,10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials FA Are of Payment 9.32,11.4.1.4 4.3.6;9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2,13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS Faulty Work 11 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Final Comph tion and 'tiial Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 11.1.2, 11.1.3,11.4.1, Insurance Companies,Settlement with 11:4.5, .12.3 1'13.7, 14?: ; 14.4.3 11.4.10 :Finncialltt`vtigernentti owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 12'.1,13 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 F ire and Extended.Cover t reinsurance Interest 13.6 GENEfa AL PROVISIOI�IS Interpretation .A 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 I.Governrig Law j` Interpretations,Written I3 L 4.2.11,4 2.12,4.3.6 C ivarantee�(Sec W uTanGy) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Req>ured Ca7ardois Materials 4.6.4 1011.4,10 3 1Q.S Judgment on Final Award Identification bf Contract D666mcnts 4.6.6 1 5 1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Identlfre ""'of Siibcofitractor%`.and Suppliers 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 42.G,4.2.7,5.2.1,62.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 521 Indemnification;; 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4,14.2.1.2 3:,17,3.j ,9 10.7;-1. 0 .5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 Labor Disputes Information and.Selces Required of the Owner 8.3.1 w 3� 1 312 4,3 10,4 2 7,4,3.3,6.1.3, Laws and Regulations 6:25 93..2;961,9.64 95:2:910.3:10.3.3, 1.6,32.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.3,4.6, 11 �, 1;1::4,13.5,1,13:5.2, 14 1 1l 4:14 1"4 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4,13.5.1; LrJury.or Damage to:Person or Property 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 438,10.2,106 ` Liens Intipectionti 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 3.1.3,33 3,3.7.,1,4.2.2,4 �.6,4 3:9 9 4:2,9.8.2, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 983 9:92 9 4.6.4 Instniclions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of , 111 4.6.3, 12'2.6, 13.7 in titructionsia'the Contractor Limitations of Liability 3.2.3.:3.3.1 3.8.1 48,521..7,1'2,82.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4, Insurance 3:18.1,61 7316,82.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10 2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12 2.5, 13.42 1 9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1 2,2.2,2.4,32.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 114.2 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, .Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2..9.3.1 7 9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8;9-9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 1.1.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, lnsurxoce EElei[ivc Datc of 13.7, 14 8.2.2; 11.1 2 Loss of Use Insurance Insurance,Loss of Use 11.4.3 11.4.3 Maleriatl SupplierS Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1.4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.115 11.2 Materials,Hazardous 102.4. 10.3, 10.5 AIA Document A201'"—1997.Ccoyrlght O 1911.19'5.19tH,1925,1937 1951,1958,1961,1933,1966.1967,1970,1975,1987 and 1997 by The Ame can Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. IN AR This AIA`r Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treat les. 5 Unaulhorl7--d reproductlon or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This dccument was produced by AIA software at 15'37:12 on 08'0512004 under Order No 1000126387_1 which expires on 6129105..and is no:for resale. (3,3124671931) User Notes: Aawk 3-3.2.3.4-3,3.8.1,3-9:3-18.2;4.2.3,4.2.6, 102, 10.3, 6.2.5..3.14 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1,14.2.1.1, Damage to Co ns 11 LicLio n of Owner or Separate Co0tractor's Liability Insurance Contractors 3.142,6.2.4,9.2.1.5,10.2).1.2,10.2.5. 10.6: 11.1, Contractor s Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.4, 12.2.4 and,Owner's Forces Damage to the Work 3.14.2,41.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2, 10.2.5,10.6,11.4,12.2.4 "Conthctor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages,Claims for J.2.2,31-3.2,118.1, 1.18.2t 5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1:9.63, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7,14.1.3, 14.2.4 Contractor ti E2gl tionshft)with the Architect Damages for Delay 1 1.2, 1 ,11:3:3.2.1-'-3.;.2,3.2.3,33.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 '3.71 3,3.IQ,3,1 C* 3.12; 16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3.4.2, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 4.4;114.. 7,5-2::6�2.2,7,8.11:9.2,9.3,9.4, 8.1.2 9:5;:9,7 i 9.-S .9 :10 a--6,:10.3 11.3, 11.4.7? 12, Date of Substantial.Completion,Definition of - .13.4-2, 13.5 8.1.3 Contrae.It oJ r"SA* U tatf. 8 Day,Definition of qn. 8.1.4 :CoaLca6e6r.s IR ' ib ty'f6r Those Performing the Decisions of the Architect -spo& Ui 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4-4.1,4.4.5, 3 _2:3.18,4.13 4:5;8::5�3:11:.61.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1. 4.4.6.4.57 6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,9.4, 9.5-1,9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 of Contra6t-Documerits DCr-iSi()11S to Withhold Certification ..... .......... 1;5,2,3.2,3.T3::.:�'*'. ...... 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 Conlract :Right Defective or Nonconforming Work�Acceptance, .93 Rejection and Correction of enninale-the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5,1,4.2.6,6.2-5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2, ..... ........... 4.3 10, 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 ContiacCOr's'SubtTutlals Defective Work,Definition of 3.10.111 1:2.:417.'5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1 9.82.-9.83,9.971-,9.10.2i:9..,10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions 2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3,12.3,4.1.1, 39;!102.6 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,9.1, 9.1,9.8.1 dtitr2ict rs:Sufaervis16n and Construction Delays find Extensions of Time Pi occilurcs :::�:':':--':-�::::: —* 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.42 4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.7.3.1, 4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2, 10.6.1 14.3.2 6:2 :7-1.3, �7.3.6,8.1 10;:11:14. Disputes .4j: 73.4 Coliitiad6ad-Liability Insurah. 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.9 Documents and Samples at the Site Coordination kind Correlation 3.11 1.-'-):::1::5..2.3.3.1.3.10;!3 12:6;:6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of Copies FUrnished of'Or"wing*s:4pd Specifications 1.1.5 1.6,2.2.5,3.11 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of :.Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3,23-51 3.11,5.3 Effective Date of Insurance :..Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2 21,2.4,3.7.4 4 2 1 9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3:9.9.1.12.1.2, Emergencies 12.2: 13.7.1.3 4.3.5,10.6: 14.1.1.2 Correlation.. and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees, Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1.3.9,3.18.21 4.2.3,42.6! 102, 10.3, Cost,-Defroitidn.of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1,142.1.1. 7.3.6 Equipment,Labor,Materials and Costs 1.1.3. 1.1.6,3.47 3.5.1:3.8.2,3.8.3.3.12, 3.13.3.15.1, 2.4,3.2.3.3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.31 5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 4.2.6.4.2.77 5.2.12 6.2.1,7.3.61 9.3.2.9.3.3,9.5.1.3. 7.3.3.3,7.3.6.7.3.7,7.3.8-.9.10.2. 10.1-110-5. 1 13, 9.102, 10.111 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 11.4, 12.11, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progre". of die Work Cutting and Patching A IA Document A201TM-1997.Copyright(D 1911,1915, 191&1925,193�,1951,1958,1951,1963,'966,1967,1970, 1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Inslime of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING;This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. a 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15;37:12 on 0&0-512004 under Order No.1000126387_1 which expires on 6i29105,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3812457193) 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.9,4.6.4, Cet ttfigates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4;10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4,13.1, 134, 13.5.1, - _..4?5;"x;-19,9.3.3,9.4.9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1. 13.5.2,13.6,14.1.1,14.2.1.3 14.1.1.3,14 2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions Celt cites of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1,10.3 13.5.4 .. Conditions of the Contract Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1,1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 9:10:2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written Change Orders _, 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8;3.14.2.4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 11'1,2.4.1,3.4.2 3 8 2.3;:3.11.1,3.12.3:4.2.8,4.3.4, 9.3.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3; 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 4.3.9, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 114.1.2 11:44. 114 9'w 12.12 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Cliiinge Oa derti;Defintttonof 1.1.4,6 723 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CF[ANG�S IN T>iIL�WbILK. 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives Ctami;1�efiutiottflf 1.1.1,3.L2.8,4.2.8.4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractors Clhhms':aud Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.72,6.1.3 4.4 4 6'-!6,1 1;:6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 10 33; 5.4,14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertaoti:of Claims Continuing Contract Performance 4.6.5 4.3.3 Claims.for Adctittonll Cost Contract, Definition of 3'3;'434 43:5 436, ..1!1,7.3.8, I0.3.2 1.1.2 Clalmsfor Adilitaonal')Mme CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 6 11 8 3 0 10.32 SUSPENSION OF THE Cl terns for Conce sled ut Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1,11.4.9,14 Contract Administration Claintis.'forbamageti 3.t.3,4,9.4,9.5 3 3 31 M 4.3-10 6 1 1.;:8.3:3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating 11 1 i ;:114 5, :1 4 7, L4.i'.3; 14.2.4, to Clams Snh.ect.(o.... lion 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3,11.4.6, 11.5.1 4 41 Contract Documents,The 3? ::h 3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Commencement:of StatutoiyL iwtation Period 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 13 9 Contntct Documents,Definition of Comtmencetneiit 6f dieVdrk Conditions Relating to '.2J,3.2.1,3,4.1, 3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1. Contract Sum 5''.3;6.2.2,8.1.E 8 2�;8 3:l: l.l, l 1.4.1,11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5;4.4.5,5.2.31 7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2, 1 1.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7,10.32, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 Commencement of fhe Wotk Delh16tion of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1,? 9.1 Communtcntiohs Facilitating Contract Contract Timc Ailminrstratlpti 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.i,82, 3.9-.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7,10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of 3.15.4.227 4.2.9,8.2,9.4 2,9.8. 8.1.1 4.9.1;s!):10 12:2,[13.7,14.1,2 CONTRACTOR COMPT,ETIOIV,PAYMENTS AND 3 „ 9 Contractor, Definition of Completion;Substantial 3.l,6.1.2 4.2.9:8.1.1,8.1.3:8.2.3.9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1:9.10,3. Contractor's Construction Schedules 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2:3.10,3.12.1,3.122.4.3.72,6.1.3 Compliance with Laws Conu•actor's Employees i AIA Document A201'"-1997.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925.1937.1951,1958.1961.1963,1956,1967, 1970, 1976.1987 and 1997 by American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international cat 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penallies'and v;:1 1D, prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA sahware at 15:37:12 on 09/06/20C4 0-- I Ce No.1000126387_1 wh rh exp res on 6129105.and is not Ior resale. User Notes: INDEX 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 (Nu> .e s and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Approvals 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 Accept.ince of Nonconforming Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work ,.: .._. 9.6.6.,9.9.3,12.3 3.5.1,42.6,12.1 2, 12.2.1 Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright - -9;6.6,9.8.2.9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,12.3 1.6 -.. . ... Access to Work Architect's Decisions 3:16,6.2.1,12,1 42.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13;4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, Accident Prevention ` 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4, .23110 9.5.11 9.8.4;9.9.1, 13.5'3,14.2.2, 14.2.4 Acts and Omissions : Architect's Inspections 3;2,:33 21 3.'12 8 318.:42.3,.4.3.8,4.4.1.8.3.1, 4.2'2 4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 10:2-5!: 34:4 3;1 .1; 7 L4.1 Architect's Instructions ,Addenda 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations Addi Tonal Costs .C15 rns for .7 4.2.11,4 2.12,4.3.6 4 3 4:4 3.5,43 6 6.1.1 10 3 ' Architect's Project Representative Addi nodal[nspections<tnd Testing 42.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 4A3d"Ft;4o3am.3e�.C..air.: 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.22,32.3,3.3.1,3.42,3.5.1,d 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, AAMINISTRATIOIV.OP TILE CONTRACT 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,63.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 3:1.3;.4 9 4i 9.5 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3,11.3, 11.4.7, 12, AdvertjXS Msnl or Invitation to-Bid 13.4.2, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Aesliepc Effect: 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7 4 13 4 5 1: Architect's Representations 1. Alhitiyances .:.. 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Architect's Site Visits All-risk Ynsuragce... 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 11.4A.1 13.5 Applicfitions for Payment Asbestos 4:2.51738,92 93904,95.1;963;9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1 9.£0,11 '14'1 4;j4.4.3:..* Attorneys'Fees 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 2.4;:3.1 3x3:5,°3.10.2,3 l� 4 '7 9.37,:.13.42, 13.5 Award of Separate Contracts Arbitrafioai'. 6.1.1,6.1.2 4.3;3:,4 4 4.-5.1,4.5.2;4.6.8.11,9.7.1,11.4.9, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 11.410 Portions of the Work Architect 5.2 4.1 ! Basic Definitions _. Architect,:Definition of 1.1 4:1.1 Bidding Requirements Architect,Extent of.Aiuhority 1.1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.5.1 2.4,3.12.7,4.2 43 i 6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2.7.3.6,7.4, Boiler and Machinery Insurance 9.2;9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3. 12.1, 122.1, 11.4.2 13.5.1, 13;5.2, 1423, 14.2.4 Bonds,Lien Ascliitect,Litirliltitions of Authority and 9.10.2 Rcsponsibility ': Bonds,Performance,and Payment 2.1.1,3.3.3.3.12.4,3.12.8.3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2,1. 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9. 11.5 4 2.2. 4 2.3;4-2.151 4.2.7,4.2.10.4.2.12.4.2-13,4.4; Building Permit 5.2.1.7.4,9.42,9.6.4,9.6.6 3.7.1 Achitect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization 2.4. 11.4.1.1. 12.2.1, 13.5.2. 13.5.3, 14.2.4 1.3 Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substam_ial Completio:i AIA Document A201 r"-1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961.1963.1966,1957,1970,1976.1987 and 1997 by The American Instilule of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA''Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and Internal ion alTrea ties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA%'Document,or any portion of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Tans document was produced oy AIA software a:15:37:7 2 on 011I06/2004 under Order No.1000126327_1 which expires on 523105.and is not for resale. User Notes: (36124571 93) Document A201"' - 1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for..fhe following PROJECT: fNpme and locadnn.o).rciddress): `Village THE OWNER ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS. (Narne and The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also have revised the text of the THE ARCHITECT original AIA standard form.An .'(Nan[e arirt acfr/rcrs.tiJ Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard 7. form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. TABLE OF-ARTICLES A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where .1 GENERAL,PROVISIONS the author has added necessary information and where the author 2 OWNER has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. 3 ':.CONTRACTOR This document has important legal consequences. ..... 4 ADMINISTRATION:OF THE CONTRACT Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to 5 .:::SUBCONTRACTORS its completion or modification. 6 `CONSTRUCTION-BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors 7 CHANGES IN THEiWORK of America _ . 8 ,TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND'.C.OMPLETION 11) ..PROTECTION Or PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA Document A201Tu–1997.Copyright (.,D Ig't,i915,1919.1925,1937,1951,1958.1961,1953,1966.1967,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 ny Tnc — American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U-S.Copyright Law and International Treat!,!,,. 1 unauthorized reoroductfon or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software a1 15:37:12;n W06/2004 ,n;er i;rr,r Nc.1 000125337_1 which expires on 5/23'05,and is not for resale. User Notes. Y312 �'�4Ji [SIGNATURE PAGE TO OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT] IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the hereto have executed or caused to be executed by their duly authorized officials this Agreement, under seal, as of the date first above written. CONTRACTOR: By: Name: Title: OWNER: VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL, LLC By: TCB Village at Hospital Hill,Inc., its manager By: Name: Title: List of Exhibits/Attachments which are incorporated in this Agreement: Exhibit A: Exhibit B: Exhibit C: Exhibit D: [list others] J:\CLIE:N'r5\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447633.DOC;II Village at Hospital Hill Doc. #5227 Owner-Contractor Agreement Page 6 12. APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL. Contractor's on-site supervisory personnel must be approved by Owner, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. In addition Contractor agrees to assign the same on-site supervisory personnel to the Project throughout the term of the Work described herein unless otherwise agreed by Owner or unless such person(s) is/are no longer employed by Contractor. 13. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY. The Contractor shall comply with the standards pertaining to equal opportunity and affirmative action set forth below and in the Contract Documents. The Contractor agrees in connection with the Work that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment on the basis of race, color, sex, sexual preference, religion or national origin. Further, the Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during the construction period without regard to their race, color, sex, sexual preference, religion or national origin. The Contractor shall employ workers with the following goals for worker hours: at least 10%persons who are a minority. The Contractor shall incorporate such worker hour goals in all subcontracts and impose upon all subcontractors the obligation to pursue such efforts. In addition to the foregoing, the Contractor shall have a goal of meeting the following standards for contracting with Minority Business Enterprises in the Work, including in the procurement of goods and services: at least 10% of the total Contract Sum shall be expended on Minority Business Enterprises ("MBE"). The work to be performed under this Agreement is subject to the requirements of the Land Disposition Agreement between The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, acting by and through its Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance, and The Community Builders, Inc., Section 8. Developer's Surviving Covenants, Subsection A2. Perpetual Surviving Covenants, Paragraph 2: "The Developer shall use reasonable efforts to make fifteen percent (15%) of the employment opportunities generated as a result of the Project available to clients of the Department of Mental Health who reside in said Department's Region One." The Contractor agrees to make a good faith effort to fulfill these requirements, to document this effort, and to provide copies of such documentation with each request for payment. The Contractor agrees to include this requirement and all subcontracts pertaining to this project. The Contractor agrees to notify a representative of the Department of Mental Health, to be identified by the Owner, of any vacant employment positions on this Project at least thirty(30) days in advance. The Contractor shall incorporate such worker hour goals in all subcontracts and impose upon all subcontractors the obligation to pursue such efforts. The Contractor shall further comply with all Section 3 standards as described more fully in Article 15 of the Supplemental Conditions to this Agreement. 14. DELETED [End of page. Signature page follows.] {J:\CLIEVTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447633.DOC;I} Village at Hospital Hill Doc.#5227 Owner-Contractor Agreement Page 5 8. FINAL PAYMENT. Final Payment shall be due forty-five (45) days after Final Completion of the Work, provided(i) all Contractor's obligations hereunder have been fully performed, (ii) the Architect has issued a Final Certificate for Payment, (iii) there have been delivered releases from or acceptable assurances of payment to all subcontractors and materialmen, which releases and assurances shall cover all work, labor and materials, including equipment and fixtures of all kinds, done, performed or furnished for the Work, and(iv) Owner's Lenders have approved such payment. No payment under this Agreement shall be construed to be an acceptance of defective work or improper materials. 9. COMPLETION OF THE WORK. Contractor acknowledges that Substantial Completion of the Work for the entire Project by the Completion Date is of critical importance to Owner. Contractor agrees that at any time during the term of this Agreement, in the event that the progress of the Work, in Owner's sole but reasonable discretion, but after consultation with the Architect, is less than what is required to accomplish Substantial Completion by the Completion Date, then such delay shall be deemed a default hereunder. If such default is not cured to the reasonable satisfaction of the Owner within seven(7) days after receipt by Contractor of written notice from the Owner, Owner may, in addition to any other remedy available under this Agreement or the Contract Documents, (i) then or at any time thereafter, without the necessity of giving any other written notice which may be required by this Agreement or any other Contract Document, at its sole option, by written notice to Contractor, delete such portion of the Work as in Owner's reasonable judgment will enable the Contractor to complete the Work by the Completion Date, and undertake such Work separately by its own forces or by others, in which event the Contract Sum shall be adjusted by an amount reflecting the cost of undertaking such deleted Work including third party fees and additional development expenses to Owner; or(ii) terminate this Agreement upon written notice and thereafter neither party shall have any further right against the other except with respect to obligations incurred by virtue of Work performed pursuant to the Contract Documents prior to the date of such notice of termination. Such remedies shall not be mutually exclusive. 10. WARRANTY INSPECTION. Nine months after the date of Final Completion, Contractor shall inspect the Work with Owner and Architect in order to identify defects in or failures to complete the Work and Architect shall prescribe corrective action by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents. Contractor shall perform all such corrective work without delay in accordance with Architect's instructions. 11. AGREEMENT BINDING; ASSIGNMENT. This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective administrators, successors, and assigns. Neither party may assign its interest under this Agreement to another, except in the case of the Owner to an affiliate of the Owner, without prior written consent of the other. Notwithstanding the foregoing sentence, the Contractor hereby consents to the Owner's assignment of its interest in the Agreement to the lenders or investors providing financing for this Work. In addition, the Contractor agrees to facilitate any such assignment by Ago%, providing the assignees with any documents or information they reasonably request. ,J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0[06\doc\00447633.DOC;I} Village at Hospital Hill Doc. #5227 Owner-Contractor Agreement Page 4 [INSERT FULL LISTING OF SPECIFICATIONS HERE, INCLUDING ALL PAGE NUMBERS AND REVISION DATES]; (h) [IF APPLICABLE, add any additional plans and specs (e.g. environmental abatement) here]; (i) Construction Schedule, which may be amended by agreement of both parties (Exhibit___); 0) Schedule of Values (Exhibit_J; (k) [IF APPLICABLE: Schedule of Federal Wage Requirements including Prevailing Wage Requirements (Exhibit___)]; and (1) [LIST ANY OTHER MODIFICATIONS, ADDENDA, OR SUPPLEMENTS HERE.] 6. CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGMENT; ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS. Contractor acknowledges that it has visited and carefully inspected the Project and fully familiarized itself with all the existing conditions, and that it has received and reviewed copies of the following reports and other documents supplied by the Owner with respect to the condition of the Project: [LIST ALL SURVEYS, and ENVIRONMENTAL, GEOTECHNICAL, AND OTHER REPORTS HERE]. 7. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. Progress payments shall be made based upon Applications for Payment which shall be submitted by Contractor to Architect for each calendar month(with copies provided directly and simultaneously to Owner) on forms approved by the Owner and Owner's lender(s) and/or investor(s), and upon the Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect. An Application for Payment shall be submitted on or before the last day of each month for all work in place as of the last day of the month. Within thirty(30)business days of receipt of the fully completed Application for Payment by Architect and Owner and (a) upon written approval of the Architect after consultation with the Owner's Lenders' consultants, if any, and(b) after approval by Owner's Lenders, if necessary, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum as follows: ninety percent (90%) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable (as determined by the Architect) to labor, materials, and equipment incorporated into the Work(and also including Contractor's overhead and profit allocable thereto) and, ninety percent (90%) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment suitably and securely stored at the Project site or at some other location agreed upon in writing, to the extent agreed to by Owner and Owner's Lenders, for the period covered by the Application for Payment,less all previous payments made by the Owner. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all amounts payable on account of stored materials not yet incorporated in the Work, but insured and stored securely, shall be limited to Contractor's actual out-of-pocket costs for such materials. Village at Hospital Hill ,J:\CLIEN"rS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447633.DOC;1) Owner-Contractor Agreement Doc.#5227 Pace 3 Aftk days after the date of Contractor's receipt of the Notice to Proceed from the Owner, and will achieve Substantial Completion of the building known as the"South Employees Home", including any site work necessary to receive a Certificate of Occupancy, within 270 days and the remaining Work 300 days after the Commencement Date(the "Completion Date"). Contractor shall submit all requisitions under this Agreement covering work completed to the Completion Date to Owner on or before the Completion Date. Contractor shall achieve Final Completion on or before 30 days after the Completion Date. Time is of the essence in this Agreement. 4. CONTRACT SUM. In consideration of all of the Work described in or arising pursuant to the Contract Documents, Owner shall pay the Contractor the sum of (the"Contract Sum"), subject to addition, reduction, or adjustment only as specifically set forth in the Contract Documents, including the allowances and unit prices set forth in any addendum hereto. 4A. Change Orders. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, there shall be no change orders except (i) upon Owner's specific request, (ii) when due to subsurface conditions on the site [concealed conditions in the existing buildings] not ascertainable by diligent inspection of the site [and buildings] by Contractor prior to execution of this Agreement, or(iii) if required by order of public or regulatory authorities, utilities, or Owner's lender(s) or investor(s) pursuant to requirements not ascertainable by the Contractor prior to execution of this Agreement. 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The term"Contract Documents" means the following: (a) This Agreement; (b) General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition(attached hereto); (c) Supplemental General Conditions for AIA Document A201, (attached hereto); (d) Payment Bond and Performance Bond [and, FOR MASSACHUSETTS ONLY, Lien Bond] (all issued after execution of this Agreement); (e) Notice to Proceed (issued after the execution of this Agreement); (f) Plans prepared by , ("Architect") dated and numbered as follows: [INSERT FULL LISTING OF PLANS HERE, INCLUDING ALL PAGE NUMBERS AND REVISION DATES]; (g) Specifications prepared by Architect dated and numbered as follows: , ;J:\CLIENTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447633.DOC;l} Village at Hospital Hill Doc. #5227 Owner-Contractor Agreement Page 2 Jow OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT for use in connection with the General Conditions of the Contract of Construction (AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition) and the Supplemental General Conditions Regarding NORTHAMPTON STATE HOSPITAL VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL This Owner-Contractor Agreement (this "Agreement") is made this day of , by and between Village at Hospital Hill, LLC, a Massachusetts limited liability company, with an address 95 Berkeley Street, Suite 500, Boston, Massachusetts 02116 ("Owner") and , a , with an address of (the"Contractor"). FOR AND IN CONSIDERATION OF the promises, payments and agreements AW*- hereinafter set forth, Contractor and Owner agree as follows: 1. WORK REQUIRED. The Contractor will commence and complete all work (the"Work") required by the documents listed in Section 4 below (the "Contract Documents") for the rehabilitation of the residential complex known as Village at Hospital Hill, Phase 1, consisting of 33 residential units and common areas in two buildings (the `Buildings"), located on the former Northampton State Hospital property in Northampton, Massachusetts (the"Project"). The Contractor will furnish all of the material, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and other services necessary for the construction and completion of the Work described herein and in the Contract Documents. [INSERT HERE ANY FURTHER DESCRIPTION NEEDED TO GENERALLY DEFINE THE WORK.] 2. CERTAIN PARTIES. As used herein, the term Architect means Dietz and Co., Architects, Inc. or such other as Owner shall appoint and Owner shall give written notice to Contractor of such other appointment; and the term Owner's Lender(s) means , or such other lender(s) or investor(s) as may be substituted by Owner with written notice to Contractor. The Contractor agrees to provide all necessary assistance to Owner in fulfilling Owner's obligations to provide information to Owner's Lenders under Owner's loan documents and partnership documents. 3. NOTICE TO PROCEED; COMPLETION. Owner shall give Contractor a >� notice to proceed (the"Notice to Proceed") on or before January 31, 2005 ("Commencement Date"). The Contractor will commence the Work within seven(7) ,J:\CLIEVTS\rea\071246\0106\doc\00447633.DOC;l} Village at Hospital Hill Doc.#5227 Owner-Contractor Agreement Pave I Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AM* deductive change order reflecting such reductions may be proposed to the Low-Bidder for concurrent execution with the construction contract. 5. Attached to this Form of Bid is a detailed narrative describing the Bidder's plan for meeting the requirements of Section 13 of the Owner—Contractor Agreement. Specifically,this plan shall include the steps to be taken and resources to be provided to make 15% of employment opportunities generated as a result of the Project available to clients of the Department of Mental Health. 6. The undersigned certifies that he/she is duly authorized to bind the Bidder to the terms and conditions of this bid proposal. Date 20 (Name of bidder) By Title Official address: (SIGN ORIGINAL ONLY) FORM OF BID Page 2 of 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. FORM OF BID TO: Hospital Hill LLC c/o The Community Builders, Inc. 322 Main Street Springfield, MA 01105 BID FOR: Village at Hospital Hill -Phase 1 Northampton, MA BIDDER: Name of Bidder Address City, State and Zip Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of work, and with the bid package(including Invitation for Bids, Instruction to Bidders,this Bid Form, Form of Contract,General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Technical Specifications and Drawings) and Addenda thereto, as prepared by Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. and on file at the Office of Dietz & Company Architects, Inc., hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required to construct and complete the project, as described in the Invitation for Bids(including the contents of all documents on file), all in accordance therewith for the Base Bid price of: ($ ) (Dollars in words) 2. For the Alternates, ADD OR DEDUCT the following amounts from the Base Bid: ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION ADD OR DOLLARS IN WORDS DOLLARS NO. DEDUCT One Trench Basement Slab in DEDUCT $ South Home in lieu of new slab. Two Remove and Replace ADD $ basement slab in Nurse's Home. Three Provide floor drains with ADD $ trap primers at every washer/dryer closet in South Home. Four Provide VCT with accent DEDUCT $ border color in all common corridors, in lieu of carpet. 3. This Bid includes Addenda numbers: 4. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by Hospital Hill LLC to reject any and all bids; and in the event the lowest responsible bid is too high to permit the award of a construction contract, and if a reduction in cost less than one half (1/2) percent of the low bid and less than one half (1/2) the difference between the low and next lowest bid would result in an acceptable award, and acceptable reductions in the work can be identified and monetized by Owner and Low-Bidder, a FORM OF BID Page 1 of 2 Village at Hospital Hill—Phase I August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SUPPLEMENT TO AIA DOCUMENT A701, INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. This supplement sets forth modifications to AIA Document A701, Instructions to Bidders. The paragraph designations listed below refer to the A701 paragraphs modified. Article 2: Add the following new paragraph: 2.1.5 The Base Bid shall be held by the Bidder for 120 days after Bid Opening. Alternate prices shall be held by the Bidder until 90 days after Substantial Completion. No changes in the Base Bid or Alternate prices will be accepted prior to the dates noted. 3.1.1 Delete paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 and substitute the following: "The Bidder shall obtain Bidding Documents from the source indicated in the Invitation to Bid." 3.3.2 Delete the first sentence and insert in its place, "No substitution will be considered unless: (1) Written request for approval has been submitted by the Bidder and has been received by the Architect at least 10 days prior to the date for receipt of bids, or(2)Written request for approval has been submitted by the successful Bidder and approved in writing by the Architect on AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions, prior to the installation of such substitutions. 3.3.3 Delete first sentence and insert, "If the Architect approves any proposed substitutions during the bidding period, such approval will be set forth in an addendum." 4.1.8 Add the following new paragraph: "The Bidder shall submit with his/her Bid an evidence letter from the Bidder's Bonding Company indicating the Bidder's bonding capacity relative to current work and 00*- the Bidder's ability to obtain bonding for this project. 4.2 Delete this section in its entirety. 7.1.1 Delete the first sentence and substitute the following: "The Bidder shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds in the amount of 100% of the total Contract Amount to secure the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder." Article 9: Add the following new paragraph: 9.1 This project is NOT exempt from the payment of sales tax on materials, products and supplies; any and all use taxes apply. SUPPLEMENT TO AIA DOCUMENT A701, INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 1 Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at Elie Bidders option, (1)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate.Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution.The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder.In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification,bid security will not be Forfeited. 6.3:4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - §7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS §'7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the f<dthful performance of the Contract trod paymentbf all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual source~ §7.1.2 If the furntshtng`of tiuch!bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the cost shall be included in the Bid. It the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract,the cost of such bonds shall be added to'the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. §7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder~usual sources,changes in cost will be adjusted as provided um the Contract Documents. §i 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS §7.2.1 The Bidder sh:ill'deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract.If the:Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall,prior to commencement of the Work,submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in ac'cordanee with this Section 7.2.1. §7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided,the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312,Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. §7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. §7,2.4 The B idler sh'ult require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a'ccrtificd arid current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR I ntess olherwi e required inahe`Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document 1.101,Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. AIA Document A701 r4_1997.Copyright 0 1970, 1974.1978, 1927 and 1997 dy The American Instdu!e of Architects. All r!ghts reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document Is prolected by U.S.Copyright law and International Trealles.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any porl!on of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the max!mum extent possible under the 6 law, This document was produced by AIA soltware at 15:44:0 on 08i0612004 under Order No.1000126327 1 which er.pires on 5, Use,Notes: 29105.and is not for resale.. (25659975201 signature of the Bidder.Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received,and date-and titnc- stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.A change shall be so worded its not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. §4.4.3:.Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of B ids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. §4.4.4 Bid security,if required.shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS §5.1 OPENING OF BIDS . At the discretion of the:Owner,if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,the properly identified Bids received on time will'bc'pitbticty opened and will be read aloud.An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. §5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shalt have'thc right to reject any or all Bids.A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents,or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to -. rejection., §5.3"ACCEPTANCE OF.B)D.(AWARD) §5,3;1 It is,thr-intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the Lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of chic Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall:have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which,in the'Owner's judginent, is in the Owner's own best interests. §5.3.2 The Owncel shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination,unless otherwise specifically provided in:the Bidding:Document5,and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted.:.. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION §:6.1.CONTRACTOR'S:QUALIFICATiON STATEMENT - Bidders to who7at award of a Contract is tinder consideration shall submit to the Architect,upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A3U5,COnICSCCUC'5 Qualification Statement,unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. §6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The-Owner shall,at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days pr oeto the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids,furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.UnJess such reasonable evidence is furnished,tbc:Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. §6.3 SUBMITTALS §6.3.1 The Bidder shalt, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents,after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers,product~,and Lbe suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work;and .3 names of persons or entities(including those who acre to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for the principal portions of the Work. §6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding DOCUmcnts. §6.3.3 PhUr to the execution of the Contract,the Architect will notify the Bidder in wriring if either the Owner or Architect,after due investieation.has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the AIA Oocument A7011-—1997.Copyright '7 797,3.1974,1973.7987 and 1997 by The Arnencan 7n57Aute of Arc�ilccis. Alt rights reserved. WARNING This AIA` Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` 5 Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum exnenl possible under the law, This document"eras produced by AIA solm;re at 15:44:30 on 08,'OE/2M-a under Order No.1 000 1231,87_1 writ&expires on°,123105.and is cot lot resale. User Notes: i;:5559975e07 Adftk §4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. §4.T3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures.In case of discrepancy,the amount written in words shall govm-n. §4.1.4 InLerlineations,alterations and erasures must be initiated by the signer of the Bid. §4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid.If no change in the Base Bid is required,enter"No Change." §.4.1,6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may,without forfeiture of the bid security,state the Bidders refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder*.The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner! §4:1.7 tiacb copy of the Bud shall-state the legal name of the Bidder turd the nature of legal form of the Bidder.The :Biddershttll provide;evrdence:of legal authority to perform within thejurisdiction of the Work.Each copy shall be signed by the persorior persOns legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.A Bid submitted by an agenL shall have a current power.dfattorriey attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. §4.2.BID SECURITY : §'42:1 Etich Bid ihall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidden,TheBidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner an the terms stated in the Bid and wilL,if required,,furnisli'.bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder.Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contractor fail to furnish such bonds if required,the amount'cit.L ie bidti6cunty 5 half'be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages.not as a penalty.The amount of Auk - the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. §42:2 If a urety bond is required,it shall be written on AIA Document A310,Bid Bond,unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents;and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bonder certified and current copy of the power of attorney. §:4.2.3 The Owner will have thcright to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either(a)-the Contract has been'executed and bonds,if required,have been furnished.or(b)the specified time huts:elapsed so:that.Bids may be withdrawn or(c)all Bids have been rejected. §4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS §4.3.1 Allcopies`of the Bid,the bidsecurity,if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a•sealed opaque envelope.The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shalt be identified with the Project name,the Bidder's name and address and,if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which:the Bid is submitted.If the Bid is sent by mail,the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing cnvelope:withlhe notation"SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof. §4.3.2 Bids shall be'deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and.daw for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. §4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. §4.3.4 Oral,telephonic,telegraphic,facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. §4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID §4.4,1 A Bid may not be modified.withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time:ind date designated for the receipt of Bids,and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. §4.4.2 Prior to:he timc and date designated for receipt of Bids.a Bid submittal may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place desienated for receipt of Bids.Such notice shall be in writing over the AIA Cocument A701 r-1997.Copyright rJ 1970. 1974, 1970,1987 and 2997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA- Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' 4 Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Th,s docun+en,•.vas produced by AIA software al 15*44:�,0 on 03!06/2004 under Order No.I000126.'.87_'which expires on 529105,and is not Ior resale. User Notes: (7.565997520) §3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids;neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. §3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the .:....purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work.No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. §3.21NTERPRETATIONOR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS §3.2.1 The Bidder shall:care fully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other,and with other work being bid concuiren[[y.oi presendy under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,tihail:exarnip 'the site and local conditions,and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. §3.2.2 Bidden and Sub:bidd6rs requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shaIII reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.2.3 interpretations corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretation,co.crecttons and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders,shall not rely upon:them. §3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS §:3.3.1 The materials;products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish it standard of required function,.dlmeiision appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. §3 3 2 No tiubstttiitton will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been rec.etved•by the Architectk:least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.Such requests shall include the name of the material orequlpmentfor which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings performunce and test data,and other information necessary For an evaluation. statement setuag forth changes in other materials,equipment or other portions of the Work,including changes in the work of other coneracts that incorporation of.the proposed substitution would require,shall be included.The burden of proof ?.of the meritof f c'proposed substitution is upon the proposer.The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of ...:a proposed substitutio*h shall be L*r;a §3.3.3.If the Architect approve~a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids,such,pproval will be set forth in an Addendum.Bidders shall nottcfy-upon approvals made in any other manner. §3.3.4 No tiubstautious:will be considered after the Contract award unless speciFically provided for in the Contract Documents. §3.4 ADDENDA §3.4.1 Addenda wiLCbc transmifted to all who arc known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. _§3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. §3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. §3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued,and talc Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES §4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS §4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Document~. AIA Document A701--1997.Copyright T)1970.1974.1973.1937 and 1997 by The American Institute of Archilects. All rights reserved. YlAaNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or dlstribulion of this AIA- 3 Document,or any portlon of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15A4:30 on 0ZG6,'2G04 under Order F1o.1 000 1 2638 7_1 Nhicn expires on 6:29!05,and is net Ior-c,es'e. 2H—,,,5i 171 User Notes: ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS §1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents.The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,Instructions to Bidders,Supplementary Instructions to Bidders,the bid form.and other sample bidding and contract forms.The proposed Contract Documents consist of die:form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and Other Conditions), Drawings,Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Constructiun,AIA Document A201,Orin other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. §1.3 Addenda are writ' en or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which niadify or interpret the.Bidding Documents by additions,deletions,clarifications or corrections. §1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,submitted in accordance widi'the B;dding Documents. §1.5 The Ba4e Bltl n the sum`stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Docue mnts as the base,to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids §1.6 An Alternate Brd:(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents,is accepted. §1.7 A Unit Price is an at'nount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials,equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. §1.8 A:Bidder is.a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. .....: w §1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE.2 B100ERS•REPRESENTATIONS §2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: §2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents,to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted.and for other portions of the Project,if any,being bid concurrently or presently under construction. §2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. §'2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site,become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has,correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. §2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials,equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception: ARTICLE3 BIDDING'DOCUMENTS §3.1 COPIES §3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum,if any,stated herein.The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids.The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit.A Bidder receiving it Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be rcfunded. y §3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly 10 Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation,to Bid.or in supplementary instructions to bidders. AIA Document A701-"-1997.Copyright (C)1970,1974,1976,t 9a7 and 1997 by The American institute ref ArchltEcis. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reoroduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of It,.may result In severe clvli and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the 2 law. T,-s document was-rod�,ced by AIA software at 15:44:30 on 0 8,062004 under Order No.1 000 1 26367_t vrhicn expires on 6.29105,and is not`.or resa:e. User Note,: (25659975201 ; e Allk Document A701Th' — 1997 . . . . ............ ..... . . .. .. . .....: ...... :.. Instructions to Bidders `foe the following PROJECT: (fYame and location or address): V llagc THE OWNER ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: (Name and addr•esr) The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also have revised the teat of the THE ARCHITECT original AIA standard form.An (tVaitle.and adrL es,t) Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. TABLE OR:ARTICLES A vertical line in the left margin of .-:.. this document indicates where 1 DEFINITIONS the author has added necessary information and where the author 2 :BID DEWS•REPRES5UTAT10NS has added to a deleted from the original AIA text. 3 BIDDING.D000MENTS This document has important legal consequences. 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS'., its completion or modification. 6 ' POST BIO:INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE,BOND AN6PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR look AfA Document A70'.T°—1997.Copyright r�1970,1974.1978. 1987 and;997 by The American Institute o!Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA"occument Is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized re?roductlon or d!stribulion of this AIA° Document,or any portion of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the mzIximLrn extent possible under the law. T`,is dccumenl was produced by AIA sofrware at 15:44:30 on D6I06i2004 under Cider No.!000;2638% which evp:res on 6129'05.and s not!or resa;e. ;25359975201 User Notes•. Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. INVITATION TO BID Hospital Hill LLC, as developer of Village at Hospital Hill — Phase 1, invites sealed bids from general contractors for the renovation of two existing buildings on the campus of the former Northampton State Hospital in Northampton, Massachusetts, in accordance with the documents prepared by Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.. The work is estimated to cost$5,100,000.00 Bids are NOT subject to M.G.L. c.149 §44A-J and are NOT subject to minimum wage rates as required by M.G.L. c.149 §§26 to 27H inclusive. There will be a MANDATORY pre-bid conference and site walkthrough on Tuesday, August 24, 2004 at 9:00 a.m. at the site. Contractors shall meet in the parking lot in front of the Nurse's Home. General bids will be received until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, September 9, 2004 and will be privately opened. Mailed or delivered bids should be sent to the offices of Dietz & Company Architects, 17 Hampden Street, MA 01103 and received no later than the date and time specified above. Faxed bids will not be accepted. Bid Forms and Contract Documents will be available from www.ProiectDoa.com only, after Tuesday, August 17, 2004. Invited bidders will need to register on the site and will then be given access to the Bidding Documents. Charges for documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Bidders and are as follows: No charge for CD included with all orders $.09 per square foot for plans $.04 per image 8.5"by 11" All orders shipped next day, billed per weight+ $5.00 handling $5.00/fax for addendums under 10 pages All addenda will be posted on the www.ProiectDog.com website. Bidders are solely responsible for monitoring the status of addenda and for ensuring that their subcontractors are also current. Addenda can be faxed to bidders as per the above charges. For more information on Bidding Document availability, please contact: ProjectDog.com 18 Graf Road, Suite 8 Newburyport, MA 01950 Email Info @ProjectDog.com Tel 978-499-9014 Fax 978-499-9016 The Contract Documents may be seen, but not removed at: Construction Market Data F.W. Dodge—McGraw Hill 75 Second Avenue-Suite 320 181 Park Ave. Needham, MA 02194 W. Springfield, MA 01089 ProjectDog.com 18 Graf Road, Suite 8 Newburyport, MA 01950 low Page 1 of 1 INVITATION TO BID Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 09000........FINISH SCHEDULES................................................................. ..............................4 09111 ........NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING................................... ..............................6 09210........GYPSUM PLASTER................................................................... .............................. 7 09250........GYPSUM BOARD....................................................................... .............................. 6 09265........GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES........................ .............................. 5 09511 ........ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS............................................... .............................. 6 09651 ........RESILIENT FLOOR TILE............................................................ .............................. 8 09652........SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS......................................... .............................. 5 09680........CARPET..................................................................................... .............................. 4 09911 ........EXTERIOR PAINTING................................................................ .............................. 6 09912........INTERIOR PAINTING................................................................. .............................. 8 DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10431 ........SIGNS........................................................................................ .............................. 6 10550........POSTAL SPECIALTIES.............................................................. .............................. 6 10801 ........TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES.......................................... .............................. 5 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 11452........RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES..................................................... .............................. 5 DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS 12356........KITCHEN CASEWORK.............................................................. .............................. 6 12491 ........HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS................................................ .............................. 9 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13281 ........ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.......................................................... .............................. 16 13282........LEAD PAINT MANAGEMENT..................................................... .............................. 14 13283........HAZARDOUS WASTE AND MATERIALS ABATEMENT............ .............................. 2 DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240........HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS......................................................... .............................. 9 DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15300—.....FIRE PROTECTION................................................................... .............................. 21 15400........PLUMBING................................................................................. .............................. 37 15600........HVAC ......................................................................................... ....I......................... 35 DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16100........ELECTRICAL.............................................................................. .............................. 24 * TABLE OF CONTENTS 00001 - 3 Awk Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 02990........SITE CONCRETE....................................................................... .............................. 9 DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03300 ........CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.................................................... .............................. 16 03450........PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ................... .............................. 7 03542........HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT.................... .............................. 4 DIVISION 4-MASONRY 04810........UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES................................................. .............................. 22 04901 ........CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING.................. .............................. 14 DIVISION 5-METALS 05120........STRUCTURAL STEEL................................................................ .............................. 8 05310........STEEL DECK............................................................................. .............................. 4 05400 ........COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING........................................... .............................. 11 05500........METAL FABRICATIONS............................................................. .............................. 8 05521 ........PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS....................................................... .............................. 8 DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100........ROUGH CARPENTRY................................................................ .............................. 10 06160........SHEATHING............................................................................... .............................. 6 06165........FIBERBOARD UNDERLAYMENT............................................... .............................. 4 06200 ........FINISH CARPENTRY................................................................. .............................. 5 DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07141 ........COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING.............................. .............................. 4 07210........BUILDING INSULATION............................................................. .............................. 6 07311 ........ASPHALT SHINGLES................................................................. .............................. 7 07411 ........METAL ROOF PANELS.............................................................. .............................. 11 07460........SIDING....................................................................................... .............................. 5 07531 ........EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING .................................................. .............................. 8 07720........ROOF ACCESSORIES............................................................... .............................. 5 07842........FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS........................................... .............................. 4 07920........JOINT SEALANTS...................................................................... .............................. 9 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100........DOOR SCHEDULES .................................................................. .............................. 10 08111 ........STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.............................. .............................. 6 08211 ........FLUSH WOOD DOORS ............................................................. .............................. 4 08311 ........ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES............................................... .............................. 4 08390........ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS............................. .............................. 5 08411 ........ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ...... .............................. 8 08500........WINDOW SCHEDULES............................................................. .............................. 5 08560........VINYL WINDOWS...................................................................... .............................. 6 08710........DOOR HARDWARE................................................................... .............................. 18 08800........GLAZING.................................................................................... .............................. 9 DIVISION 9—FINISHES TABLE OF CONTENTS 00001 - 2 Aaw- Village at Hospital Hill—Phase 1 August 6, 2004 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS Division.....Section Title................................................................................ ..............................Pa e SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00001 ........TITLE PAGE............................................................................... .............................. 1 00002........TABLE OF CONTENTS.............................................................. .............................. 3 BID............INVITATION TO BID................................................................... .............................. 1 BID............INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS(AIA DOCUMENT A701)........... .............................. 6 BID............SUPPLEMENT TO AIA DOCUMENT A701................................. .............................. 1 BID............FORM OF BID............................................................................ ....................I......... 2 CON..........OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREMENT....................................... .............................. 6 CON..........GENERAL CONDITIONS (AIA DOUMENT A201 — 1997 EDITION)........................... 39 CON..........SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS............................... .............................. 20 CON..........PERFORMANCE/PAYMENT BOND—(AIA DOCUMENT A312). .............................. 7 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100........SUMMARY .............................. 4 01210........ALLOWANCES........................................................................... .............................. 3 01230........ALTERNATES............................................................................ .............................. 2 01250........CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES............................ .............................. 3 low 01270........UNIT PRICES............................................................................. .............................. 2 01290........PAYMENT PROCEDURES......................................................... .............................. 4 01310........PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION.................... .............................. 6 01320........CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.................. .............................. 6 01330........SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES...................................................... .............................. 9 01400........QUALITY REQUIREMENTS....................................................... .............................. 7 01420........REFERENCES........................................................................... .............................. 3 01500........TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ............................ .............................. 8 01600........PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS..................................................... .............................. 6 01700........EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS.................................................. .............................. 7 01731 ........CUTTING AND PATCHING........................................................ .............................. 3 01732........SELECTIVE DEMOLITION......................................................... .............................. 6 01770........CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ...................................................... .............................. 4 01781 ........PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS........................................... .............................. 4 01782........OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA................................. .............................. 7 01820........DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING .......................................... .............................. 2 DIVISION 2 -SITE CONSTRUCTION 02100........DEMOLITION, CLEARING AND GRUBBING ............................. .............................. 4 02150........EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ..................................... .............................. 5 02200........EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING.................................... .............................. 13 02300........STORM DRAINAGE................................................................... .............................. 7 02600........BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING........... .............................. 9 02800........PLANTING.................................................................................. .............................. 10 02850........SEEDING ................................................................................... .............................. 7 02950........SITE IMPROVEMENTS.............................................................. .............................. 3 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT MANUAL VILLAGE AT HOSPITAL HILL PHASE NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS Owner Hospital Hill LLC c/o The Community Builders 95 Berkeley Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 Architect Landscape Architect Mechanical &Electrical Engineers Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Berkshire Design Group Lindgren n&Sharpies, Drive P.C. C 17 Hampden Street 4 Allen Place Industry Springfield, MA 01103 Northampton, MA 01060 Springfield, MA 01104-3241 Phone No: 413-733-6798 Phone No: 413-582-7000 Phone No: 413-732-4336 Fax No: 413-732-4385 Fax No: 413-582-7005 Fax No: 413-731-0786 Structural Engineer Environmental Engineers Barry Engineers Tighe&Bond 176 Churchill Street Westfield Executive Park Pittsfield, MA 01201 53 Southampton Road Phone No: 413-443-6591 Westfield, MA 01085-5308 Fax No:413-443-4392 Phone No: 413-572-3208 Fax No: 413-562-5317 August 6, 2004 ,AM., " '�, l z a `�, Is Y $ c t / ry 4a. ,AhF^:Yae$kz^s* "� rs� '� v ro'g i�& 'r3*�t� '+ " ,�^y e§ �`,�2 A�,t' ,�� -9*��`�k 5R4�m �� '�q��i 6 �$` �, � fi� akC, mss• {'-' � e �_ l.: �-�a�:;-a`� ,� �°�.:a�� '�"*'' �° .�""• ,.�°r °fie ��`�� .�� ea '�" z � � .� `�,.� r r: 1 tr,�� f_,..� ��. '-. x � .„,r� �`",�.,;:� t r,;,,s a-:r Y�w��,.; ��,� t,.'^..,�-` �` 1s s` 9�*�€`F ��s•.s-'" v�`a� L,s�. � � s �,'�`ro` ��.,�a�� ZIP a F s`§Pay :.. zi- sit A �,, ✓' as "" a,� -'n`3*S" a,* L AIap �• Y€ fi w it x$ a mot+ T, �7�,t��, _ .mss Fvz' x ';, ire` 6 - " �•r,°' '`§°Y T�^�` $&� £ x f h issf a rte°'�. st �, <x tV�� x>-�', '��,�s"r✓�`� �,�, �� _ 5 x�� s an , � n . c . e r f} F. : y �